TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR TASK ORDER 1 JP MORGAN … · 2017-04-25 · technical specifications...

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

FOR

TASK ORDER 1 JP MORGAN CHASE BLDG HVAC UPGRADE AT WASHINGTON DULLES INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT

WASHINGTON DULLES INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT

Prepared for:

RDM INTERNATIONAL, INC. 14310 SULLYFIELD CIRCLE, SUITE 600

CHANTILLY, VA 20151

Prepared by:

ASHE Consultants 950 Herndon Parkway, Suite 320

Herndon, VA 20194

Mimarch Architects & Engineers, Inc. 7000 Security Blvd. Suite 320

Baltimore, MD 21244

April 11, 2016

WASHINGTON DULLES INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT IF1503 TASK 1 JP MORGAN CHASE BLDG HVAC UPGRADE 100% SUBMISSION APRIL 11, 2016

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK


PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS


Table of Contents

DIVISION 00 – PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

00 00 10 Table of Contents

00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions

DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 10 00 Summary

01 21 00 Allowances

01 22 00 Unit Prices

01 22 10 Measurement and Payment

01 23 00 Alternates

01 29 00 Application for Payment

01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination

01 32 00 Construction Progress Documentation

01 33 00 Submittals

01 40 00 Quality Requirements

01 42 00 References

01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls

01 60 00 Product Requirements

01 71 13 Mobilization/Demobilization

01 73 00 Execution

01 73 29 Cutting and Patching

01 77 00 Project Closeout

01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data

01 78 39 Project Record Documents

01 79 00 Demonstration and Training

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS

02 41 19 Selective Demolition

ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete

05 50 00 Metal Fabrications

07 11 13 Bituminous Dampproofing


07 92 00 Joint Sealants

08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames

08 71 00 Door Hardware

08 91 19 Fixed Louvers

09 22 16 Non-Structural Metal Framing

09 29 00 Gypsum Board

09 65 13 Resilient Base and Accessories

09 91 23 Interior Painting

MEP SPECIFICATIONS

22 05 17 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping

22 05 18 Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping

22 05 19 Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping

22 05 23.12 Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping

22 05 23.14 Check Valves for Plumbing Piping

22 05 29 Hangars and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment

22 05 53 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment

22 07 19 Plumbing Piping Insulation

22 11 16 Domestic Water Piping

22 11 19 Domestic Water Piping Specialties

22 11 23 Domestic Water Pumps

23 05 17 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping

23 05 18 Escutcheons for HVAC Piping

23 05 19 Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping

23 05 23.12 Ball Valves for HVAC Piping

23 05 23.14 Check Valves for HVAC Piping

23 05 23.15 Gate Valves for HVAC Piping

23 05 29 Hangars and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment

23 05 53 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment

23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC

23 07 13 Duct Insulation

23 07 19 HVAC Piping Insulation

23 08 00 Commissioning of HVAC

23 09 23 Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC

23 09 23.11 Control Valves

23 09 23.12 Control Dampers


23 11 23 Facility Natural-Gas Piping

23 21 13 Hydronic Piping

23 21 16 Hydronic Piping Specialties

23 21 23 Hydronic Pumps

23 25 00 HVAC Water Treatment

23 31 13 Metal Ducts

23 33 00 Air Duct Accessories

23 34 16 Centrifugal HVAC Fans

23 34 23 HVAC Power Ventilators

23 36 00 Air Terminal Units

23 37 13 Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles

23 51 23 Gas Vents

23 52 16 Condensing Boilers

23 57 00 Heat Exchangers for HVAC

23 64 26 Rotary-Screw Water Chillers

23 82 16.11 Hydronic Air Coils

26 05 19 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables

26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems

26 05 29 Hangars and Supports for Electrical Systems

26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems

26 05 44 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling

26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems

26 27 26 Wiring Devices

26 28 16 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers

26 29 23 Variable-Frequency Motor Controllers

26 51 16 Fluorescent Interior Lighting

SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 007300 - 1


SECTION 007300 — SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings, Contract Provisions, Special Provisions, and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. The articles and paragraphs of this Section represent supplements or additions to the Contract Provisions or the Special Provisions.

1.3 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS

A. During the period of this Project, the Authority anticipates that other construction contracts may be underway at or near the site of work of this Contract. A list of adjacent construction activities follows:

Replacement of Boiler Plant Addition of Chiller Plant Refurbishment of the Central Air-Handling Unit Addition of VAV Boxes Addition of new Direct Digital Control (DDC) System Addition of Shut-Off Valves at Existing Risers Modification to Existing Storage Room to accommodate installation of chillers Modification to the Sprinkler System within the storage room Improvement to Existing Electrical Panelboards and Lighting Upgrades

1.4 PERMITTING

A. Comply with all requirements set forth in the Authority's “Building Codes Manual”. This manual describes Building Codes organization, Building Code inspection process, and Certificate of Occupancy requirements. The Authority will file for and provide the construction permit.

1.5 MAINTENANCE OF PEDESTRIAN AND VEHICULAR TRAFFIC

A. Maintain adequate pedestrian and vehicular traffic flow and safety along the service roads, sidewalks, parking lots and other roadways on Airport property. In addition, this requirement applies to crossroads, approaches, and entrances affected by or made necessary by the Work. Coordinate activities throughout the project in a manner that allows emergency access, without delays to emergency response vehicles, to all areas of the Project that are occupied by employees.

B. Prior to starting construction operations affecting pedestrian, vehicular, or aircraft traffic movement, submit and obtain the COTR's written approval of a Traffic Maintenance Plan. Develop plan in accordance with the safety requirements of the FAA, Airport Operations, and the Commonwealth of Virginia Department of Transportation’s “Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices”. Utilize the form indicated in the latest edition of the Virginia Department of Transportation’s “Virginia Work Area Protection Manual – Standards and Guidelines”.



C. Provide and maintain temporary signage, "Jersey barriers," and such other traffic control devices or personnel as required complying with approved Traffic Maintenance Plan.

D. Maintain the construction operations affecting pedestrian, vehicular, or aircraft traffic movement from the beginning of construction operations until final acceptance of the project. The maintenance shall constitute continuous and effective work prosecuted day by day with adequate equipment and forces to the end of project to ensure that roadways and structures are maintained in satisfactory condition at all times, including barricades and warning signs as necessary for performance of the work.

E. Keep the portions of the project being used by public, pedestrian, aircraft, [mobile lounges] and vehicular traffic, whether it is through or local traffic, in such condition that traffic will be adequately accommodated. Remove snow and control all ice within the project boundaries. Removal of snow and ice for the benefit of the traveling public will be performed by the Authority. Bear all cost of maintenance work during construction and before the project receives a Certificate of Occupancy for constructing and maintaining approaches, crossings, intersections and other features as may be necessary.

F. Keep the portions of the road and aircraft pavement surfaces being used by the public free from irregularities, obstructions, mud, dirt, snow, ice, and any characteristic that might present a hazard or annoyance to traffic in such condition that traffic will be adequately accommodated. Maintain a vacuum/sweeper and flusher truck at the site at all times to clean roadway and aircraft surfaces affected by construction traffic at the request of Airport Operations or the COTR.

1.6 AIRFIELD AND TERMINAL BUILDING OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED)

1.7 TENANT OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A. The Work of this Project will be performed in close proximity to tenant-occupied areas. Coordinate and conduct work activities in such fashion that public circulation, tenant operations, and access to the tenant spaces will not be impaired in any manner except as detailed on Contractor's Work Plans. COTR will review and approve in writing all Work Plans.

1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

A. Comply with all Federal, state and local laws and regulations controlling pollution of the environment. Take necessary precautions to prevent pollution of streams, rivers, lakes, ponds, and reservoirs with fuels, oils, bitumens, chemicals, or other harmful materials and to prevent pollution of the atmosphere from particulate and gaseous matter.

B. Notify COTR immediately in the event that abnormalities, discolorations, odors, oil, or other signs of potential contamination by hazardous materials are encountered during excavation or other construction activities. Follow with written notice within 24 hours, indicating date, time, and location of potential contaminants encountered. The COTR will provide further direction to Contractor regarding disposition of materials encountered.

C. All painted surfaces are assumed to contain lead-based paint. The Contractor shall maintain the necessary health and safety requirements for all personnel in accordance with OSHA regulations to work in these conditions. The removal and disposal of lead-based paint is part of this contract.

D. Petroleum contaminated soils and water may be encountered during the construction of this



project. Petroleum impacted soils range from saturated to 1.0 ppm. Petroleum impacted water ranges from free product to “non - detect.” Maintain the necessary health and safety requirements for all personnel in accordance with OSHA regulations.

1. Do not use petroleum-contaminated soils as backfill around new piping or utilities. Transport petroleum contaminated soils to a location identified by the COTR. Place the contaminated soils on two layers of reinforced 6 mil plastic sheeting, install and maintain sediment and erosion controls, and adequately cover the stockpile to prevent water infiltration.

1.9 ARCHAEOLOGICAL AND HISTORICAL FINDINGS

A. Notify immediately, through the COTR if subsurface structural features, concentrations of artifacts, rubble, bone/shell, or burnt material are uncovered or otherwise discovered. Prompt reporting will avoid potentially severe problems resulting from the destruction of significant resources and may limit the impact on construction operations and schedules.

1.10 DAMAGES AND PRE-EXISTING CONDITIONS

A. Contractor is responsible for all damages caused by Contractor’s construction activities. Provide all labor, materials, etc. to return any damaged areas, systems or equipment to their original condition at no additional cost to the Authority.

B. Perform a survey of pre-existing conditions in the vicinity of Contractor’s construction activities, utilizing photographs and other means as necessary to document existing damage or conditions. Submit two copies of this survey to the Contracting Officer within 21 calendar days after Notice-to-Proceed. This survey will assist in resolving any damage claims against the Contractor during and after construction.

C. Preserve all roadways, pedestrian and directional signage. Deliver all signs removed and not required for reinstallation to the Authority as directed by the COTR.

D. Replace or repair lost or damaged signs at no cost to the Authority.

1.11 SECURITY DURING CONSTRUCTION

A. Establish and maintain the security of Contractor’s staging areas, equipment and materials.

1.12 MATERIAL HAULING

A. Access and egress to and from the site for hauling operations shall be through the entrances indicated. Conduct hauling operations during regular work hours (8am to 5pm) unless approved otherwise by the COTR.

B. Bear all costs associated with establishing, maintaining, signing, lighting, marking haul routes and roadway markings. These costs are considered incidental to the pay items of this Contract.

C. Use load covers on all dump trucks. Load dump trucks so that no spillage occurs during transit on the State, municipal, or Airport roadways. Clean wheels of trucks leaving the Project construction site of all soil and rocks. Provide a truck washing rack on the Project site to minimize the tracking of soil onto paved surfaces.

D. Be responsible for the cost of the immediate cleaning of earth tracking and spills on paved



surfaces resulting from the Contractor's operations. Maintain a water truck on site at all times in order to effectively control dust rising from construction activities.

A. Provide a commercial grade sweeper/vacuum equipment. Maintain the equipment in good working order throughout the project and replace the brooms and or spray systems, as necessary, to ensure proper sweeping and vacuuming of construction areas.

1.13 PORTABLE LIGHTING

A. Portable lighting: If used for Contractor operations, aim and shield portable lighting at all times to eliminate glare that could impair g r o u n d r o a dwa y operations.

1.14 RADIO COMMUNICATIONS

A. Cellular telephones are an acceptable alternative for this project. For information purposes the Authority currently uses the Nextel system.

1.15 SPECIAL AUTHORITY CONSULTANT (NOT USED)

1.16 SAFETY

A. Comply with all requirements set forth in the most current edition of the Authority Construction Safety Manual”. Offerors are provided with the most recent addition when obtaining contract documents prior to proposal. Requirements included in this Section are in addition to the Authority’s Construction Safety Manual. Comply with all local, State and Federal requirements. Where conflicts or discrepancies exist between requirements, the more stringent requirement shall govern. For additional information see Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements”.

B. Contractor Safety Organization:

1. Herein Construction Project Superintendent shall take on the responsibility of the Safety Engineer. a. Duties: Outlined in The Authority Construction Safety Manual. b. Qualifications: Outlined in The Authority Construction Safety Manual.

C. Provide safe and healthful working conditions on each operation at all times during execution the work of this Contract. Conduct the various operations connected with the Work so that they will not be injurious to safety or health. Comply with all provisions, regulations and recommendations issued pursuant to the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 and the Construction Safety Act of 1969, as well as amendments to these laws. Comply with laws, rules and regulations of other authorities having jurisdiction, with regard to all matters relating to the safety and health of workers and the general public. Compliance with government requirements is mandated by law and considered only a minimum level of safety performance. Perform all work in accordance with best safe work practices recognized by the construction industry. Stop work whenever a work procedure or a condition at a work site is deemed unsafe by the either the COTR or the Contractor’s Project Superintendent.

D. Project Superintendent shall be responsible for all safety and health requirements as included

herein and as required by the Authority’s Construction Safety Manual.

E. Comply with all requirements set forth in the Authority's "Construction Safety Manual." Provide during the Work the services of Safety Engineer as outlined in the Authority’s



“Construction Safety Manual” and in Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements”. The Safety Engineer shall undertake the duties and responsibilities as stated in the Authority's "Construction Safety Manual".

F. Fire Safety: Conform to the following requirements:

1. Obtain a permit to perform any welding, cutting, or hot work from the Office of the Authority Fire Marshal.

2. Ensure adequate access to all construction areas for emergency response. 3. Obtain a permit from the Office of the Authority Fire Marshal to store, handle, or use any

hazardous material, including but not limited to fuels for equipment. Complete an application prior to issuance.

4. Remove combustible debris from the site daily. 5. Provide at least seven (7) days notice for any request for inspections, tests, permits, etc.,

required of personnel from the Office of the Authority Fire Marshal.

G. Submit Site-Specific Safety and Health Plans to COTR within 15 calendar days of Notice to Proceed and prior to the start of any construction activities. Prepare this plan using the Authority’s Guidelines as defined in the Authority’s “Construction Safety Manual” and as supplemented by these specifications for each and every work zone as shown on the drawings or as anticipated by the Contractor. COTR must approve the Site-Specific Safety Plan prior to the start of any work.

H. Be responsible for the safe operation of all job site motor vehicles. Provide a “spotter” or flagman for all backing operations of construction vehicles with restricted rear vision.

I. All motorized equipment and vehicles working on or entering MWAA construction project work areas shall be equipped with functional audible backup alarms.

J. Crane Operators. On Airports Authority projects, Crane Operators shall be certified to operate the equipment by an approved independent certifying agency.

K. Comply with sample safety plan as designated in the MWAA Construction Safety Manual.

1.17 HEIGHT LIMITATION (NOT USED)

1.18 NOISE CONTROL

D. The Authority recognizes and can tolerate a normal level of noise created by a majority of construction activity. However, in the interest of the Authority's neighbors, the maximum acceptable noise level between the hours of 5:00 pm and 7:00 am the following morning is limited to 55 decibels. During daytime hours of 7:00 am through 5:00 pm, the maximum acceptable noise level for sustained or repetitive noises is 72 decibels. Measure the noise level using an "A" scale at a point 4'-0" above ground at property line nearest noise source.

E. Secure advance written approval from the COTR prior to scheduling any activity that is anticipated to produce a sustained or repetitive noise level higher than the decibel limits indicated above.

F. In and around terminal facilities and buildings whose normal occupancy is from 7 a.m. to 7

p.m., perform work that causes noise that is disruptive to the airport’s tenants or the traveling public between the hours of 11:00 pm and 7:00 am. Measure noise for this situation using an “A” scale at a point 4’-0” above ground at the closest point to airport tenants or the traveling public.



1.19 EXAMINATION OF PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS AND SITE OF WORK

D. The offeror is expected to examine carefully the site of the proposed work, the proposal, plans, specifications, solicitation provisions, contract provisions, special provisions and contract forms before submitting a proposal. The submission of a proposal will be considered conclusive evidence that the offeror has made such examination and is satisfied as to the conditions to be encountered in performing the work as to the requirements of the Contract.

1.20 AIRPORT SECURITY/VEHICLE INSPECTION PROCEDURE (NOT USED)

1.21 WORK ADJACENT TO METRO

D. Perform all work in accordance with the Washington Metropolitan Area Transit Authority (WMATA) "Adjacent Construction Design Manual," Revision NO. 1.

E. Be responsible for obtaining any necessary permits from WMATA. Comply with WMATA regulations in connection with construction over, around, or within WMATA right-of-way.

F. A WMATA inspector will be required while the Contractor is working over, around, or within WMATA right-of-way.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 007300

SUMMARY 011000 - 1


SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings, Contract Provisions, Special Provisions, Supplementary Conditions, and other Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Work covered by the Contract Documents. 2. Type of the Contract. 3. Work phases. 4. Products ordered in advance. 5. Authority-furnished products. 6. Use of premises. 7. The Authority's occupancy requirements. 8. Work restrictions. 9. Specification formats and conventions.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of the Authority's facilities.

1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. Project Identification: Project consists of the JP Morgan Chase Building at 45025 Aviation Drive is a four-story office building with a gross building area of approximately 137,000 square feet. This project upgrades HVAC systems in the J.P. Morgan Chase Building to improve functionality and energy efficiency. This includes replacement of the boiler plant, addition of a chiller plant, refurbishment of the central air-handling unit, and addition of VAV boxes throughout the building.

1. Project Location: Washington Dulles International Airport at 45025 Aviation

Drive

B. Architect/Engineer Identification: The Contract Documents, dated January 2016 were prepared for Project by RDM International, Inc., Ashe Consultants and Mimarch.

C. Construction Manager: Construction Management Team for this Project has ye t to be

de termined to serve as an advisor to the Authority and to provide assistance in administering the Contract for Construction between the Authority and Contractor, according to a separate contract between the Authority and Construction Manager.

D. 1. For additional functions of Construction Management see "Supplementary Conditions."

E. The Work consists of the following items.

SUMMARY 011000 - 2


1. The Work includes upgrades to HVAC systems in the J.P. Morgan Chase Building to

improve functionality and energy efficiency. This includes replacement of the boiler plant, addition of a chiller plant, refurbishment of the central air-handling unit, and addition of VAV boxes throughout the building.

2. For additional requirements for the examination of plans, specifications, and Project site see Section "Supplementary Conditions."

1.4 TYPE OF CONTRACT

A. Project will be constructed under a general construction contract.

1.5 WORK PHASES

A. Conduct the Work to accommodate the potential phasing of this project, the design will identify the chiller plant and air-handler work as base bid and the boiler plants and VAV work as separate alternates. Each of these projects can be performed stand-alone based on the Authority’s directive.

B. Work phasing is not intended to restrict Contractor. Contractor may submit their own phasing

schedule to COTR for review and written approval.

C. Schedule the execution of the Work according to the phasing sequence indicated and to avoid interference with normal functions of the tenants.

D. Before commencing Work of each phase, submit a schedule to COTR showing the sequence,

the commencement and completion dates, and the move-out and move-in dates of personnel for the various phases of the Work.

E. If applicable – on completion, each phase of the Work shall be fully operational.

1.6 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS (NOT USED)

1.7 PRODUCTS ORDERED IN ADVANCE (NOT USED)

1.8 AUTHORITY FURNISHED PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

1.9 USE OF PREMISES

A. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of site

beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.

1. Limits: Confine constructions operations to the limits of the J.P. Morgan Chase building. 2. Authority Occupancy: Allow for Authority occupancy of site and day-to-day use by

tenants. 3. Contractor shall have full use of premises for construction operations within the Contract

Limit Lines indicated during construction period, during the hours indicated, and as directed by COTR. Contractor's use of premises is limited only by the Authority's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project.

4. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and available to the Authority, the Authority's employees, tenants, air carriers, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use driveways and entrances for parking or storage of materials.

SUMMARY 011000 - 3


a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances. b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of

materials and equipment on-site.

B. Utilize areas designated for Contractor staging, storage, and parking, as indicated. For additional requirements, see Section "Supplementary Conditions."

C. Use of Existing Buildings: Maintain existing buildings in a weather tight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. Protect buildings and their occupants during construction period.

1. For additional requirements for airfield and terminal buildings, see Section

"Supplementary Conditions."

1.10 OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED)

1.11 CONTRACTOR HOURS OF OPERATION

A. Contractor Working Hours: The Authority anticipates that the Contractor may be required to work multiple shifts to accomplish the work of this Contract within the established schedule. Contractor will be allowed and may be required by the nature of the Project to work 24 hours a day, seven days a week in the performance of the Work. Work is subject to restrictions of the tenant requirements. Notify the COTR 24-hours in advance of any change to the work schedule.

1.12 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Format: With the exception of Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) standard specifications and Virginia Department of Transportation standard specifications the Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 33-Division format using the CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat 2004" numbering system.

1. Section Identification: The Specifications use Section titles to help with cross-

referencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete as all available Sections and Section numbers are not used and the CSI numbering system is not sequentially complete. Consult the table of contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to determine numbers and names of sections in the Contract Documents.

B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and

the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows:

1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract

Documents is abbreviated. Interpret words and meanings as appropriate. Infer words implied, but not stated, as the sense requires. Interpret singular words as plural, and plural words as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates.

2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are used in these Specifications. This imperative language is directed to the Contractor, unless specifically noted otherwise. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor.

SUMMARY 011000 - 4


Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted.

a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context,

are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

1.13 MARKING UTILITY SERVICES

A. Employ building utilities location subcontractor to locate and mark the horizontal location of all utility lines that might be impacted by construction activities, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Electric power lines. 2. Water supply piping. 3. Telephone lines. 4. Data lines.

B. The information in the Contract Documents concerning the type and location of underground

utilities is neither guaranteed nor inclusive. The Contractor is responsible for determining the type and location of underground utilities, regardless of whether such utilities are indicated or not, so as to avoid damage thereto.

C. Check and verify the horizontal and vertical location (coordinates and elevation) of all utility

lines that may exist within the limits of new work, regardless of whether such utilities are indicated or not, by use of a Subsurface Utility Engineering company. Reconfirm such locations and verification of utilities discovered, regardless of whether such utilities are indicated or not, and submit to the COTR a dimensional survey with such notations.

D. Dig test pits by hand shovel in the vicinity of the discovered utilities. Excavate test holes

utilizing a vacuum excavator.

E. Repair any damage to discovered utility lines due to construction operations at no expense to the Authority. The Authority will assist the Contractor by making available any known information.

F. Submit to the COTR, for written approval, the name of the independent subsurface utility

engineering company to be used.

G. The individual who performs the utility detection and location work shall have as a minimum five (5) years of similar experience in the area of subsurface utility detection and location engineering.

H. Submit to COTR the following:

1. List of utility detection equipment along with product information and data sheets that

will be used specifically for this contract. 2. List of employee qualifications and résumés of those individuals who will be assigned

specifically to this contract. 3. Within 60 calendar days of Notice to Proceed, a survey of all subsurface utility

engineering results indicating the horizontal and vertical location, coordinates and elevation of all utilities.

SUMMARY 011000 - 5


1.14 UTILITY OUTAGES

A. Prior to any utility outage/interruption, prepare a schedule of such outage. Include in outage schedule duration, identification of the service affected, temporary utility service to be provided, identification of available service alternative, and the action to be taken in any emergency. Apply for all outages of utility systems in writing. Fully coordinate outage requests with COTR. Obtain approval in writing by COTR. Schedule all outages at least three (3) weeks in advance with a 96-hour notification provided by the Contractor confirming date, time, and duration. Outages will normally be scheduled to occur between the hours of 11:00 pm and 5:30 am, Tuesday through Thursday.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SCHEDULE OF PRODUCTS ORDERED IN ADVANCE (NOT USED)


SUMMARY 011000 - 6



ALLOWANCES 012100 - 1


SECTION 012100 - ALLOWANCES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances.

1. Certain materials and equipment are specified in the Contract Documents by allowances. In some cases, these allowances include installation. Allowances have been established in lieu of additional requirements and to defer selection of actual materials and equipment to a later date when additional information is available for evaluation. If necessary, additional requirements will be issued by Contract Modification.

B. Types of allowances include the following:

1. Lump-sum allowances. 2. Unit-cost allowances. 3. Contingency allowances. 4. Quantity allowances.

C. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 01 Section "Unit Prices" for procedures for using unit prices.

2. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for items of Work covered by allowances.

1.3 SELECTION AND PURCHASE

A. At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise COTR of the date when final selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed to avoid delaying the Work.

B. At COTR's request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final selections. Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work.

C. Purchase products and systems selected by COTR from the designated supplier.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the form specified for Contract Modifications.

B. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for use in fulfillment of each allowance.

ALLOWANCES 012100 - 2


C. Coordinate and process submittals for allowance items in same manner as for other portions of the Work.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate allowance items with other portions of the Work. Furnish templates as required to coordinate installation.

1.6 LUMP-SUM ALLOWANCES

A. Allowance shall include cost to Contractor of specific products and materials ordered by Owner under allowance and shall include taxes, freight, and delivery to Project site.

B. Contractor's costs for receiving and handling at Project site, labor, installation, overhead and profit, and similar costs related to products and materials ordered by Owner under allowance shall be included as part of the Contract Sum and not part of the allowance.

1.7 CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCES (NOT USED)

1.8 UNUSED MATERIALS

A. Return unused materials purchased under an allowance to manufacturer or supplier for credit to the Authority, after installation has been completed and accepted.

1. If requested by COTR, prepare unused material for storage by the Authority when it is not economically practical to return the material for credit. If directed by COTR, deliver unused material to the Authority's storage space. Otherwise, disposal of unused material is Contractor's responsibility.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects. Return damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with related work.

3.3 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES

A. NOT USED


UNIT PRICES 012200 - 1


SECTION 012200 - UNIT PRICES

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. The Price Proposal Form can be found in Section III, "Schedule”.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices.


1. Division 01 Section "Allowances" for procedures for using unit prices to adjust quantity allowances.

2. Division 01 Section "Measurement and Payment" for procedures for measurement and payment for unit-price items.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Unit price is an amount proposed by offerors, stated on the Schedule as a price per unit of measurement for materials or services added to or deducted from the Contract Price by appropriate modification according to the Contract Provision Payments. Construction Contracts, Paragraph H, "Variation in Estimated Quantities," if estimated quantities of work required by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased.

1.4 PROCEDURES

A. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance, applicable taxes, overhead, and profit. The sum of all extended unit prices in the Section III, "Schedule," shall be deemed to include all work described in the Contract Documents including Drawings and Specifications.

B. Measurement and Payment: Refer to individual Specification Sections for work that requires establishment of` unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices are specified in those Sections and in Division 01 Section "Measurement and Payment."

C. The Authority reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that involves use of established unit prices and to have this work measured, at the Authority's expense, by an independent surveyor acceptable to Contractor.

D. List of Unit Prices: A list of unit prices is included in Section III “Schedule” of the Contract Documents. Specification Sections referenced in the Schedule contain requirements for materials described under each unit price.

UNIT PRICES 012200 - 2


1. The Price Proposal Form can be found in Section III, "Schedule," of the Contract Documents. If applicable, Specification Sections referenced in the Schedule contain requirements for materials and methods described under each unit price.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 LIST OF UNIT PRICES (Not Used)


MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 012210 - 1


SECTION 012210 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing methods of measurement and computations to be used in determination of quantities of material furnished and unit amount of Work performed under the Contract in order for Contractor to receive payment according to pre-established unit prices.

B. At the discretion of the COTR, payment may be reduced for any Work which is not in full compliance with the Contract Documents or which has been damaged or repaired by Contractor. Such action may be used when the end product may have a reduced service life or less than desirable aesthetic characteristics.

C. Descriptions of unit-price items are specified in Section III, "Schedule," of the Contract Provisions.

1.3 MEASUREMENT OF QUANITITES

A. All volumes or quantities used to determine unit-price payment will be measured by COTR, or by COTR’s authorized representatives, using methods generally recognized as conforming to good engineering practice. Unless otherwise indicated, measurement shall be in U.S. Customary Units of Measurement.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, longitudinal measurements for area computations will be made horizontally, and no deductions will be made for individual fixtures (or leave-outs) having an area of 9 sq. ft. or less. Unless otherwise indicated, transverse measurements for area computations will be the neat dimensions shown on Drawings.

1. Structures will be measured according to neat lines shown on the plans or as altered to fit field conditions.

2. Measure all Contract items measured by the linear foot, such as electrical ducts, conduits, pipe culverts, under drains, and similar items, parallel to the base of foundation on which such items are placed, unless otherwise indicated.

3. In computing volumes of excavation, use the average end area method or other acceptable method.

C. The thickness of plates and galvanized sheet used in the manufacture of corrugated metal pipe, metal plate pipe culverts and arches, and metal cribbing will be specified and measured in decimal fraction of inches.

D. Haul materials, to be measured by volume in the hauling vehicle, in approved vehicles and measured therein at the point of delivery. Vehicles for this purpose may be of any size or type



acceptable to and approved in advance by COTR, provided that the body is of such shape that the actual contents may be readily and accurately determined. Load all vehicles to at least their water-level capacity. Level loads when the vehicles arrive at the point of delivery.

1. When requested by Contractor and approved by COTR in writing, material specified to be measured by the cubic yard may be weighed, and such weights will be converted to cubic yards for payment purposes. Factors for conversion from weight measurement to volume measurement will be determined by COTR and agreed to by Contractor before such method of measurement of pay quantities is used.

2. The term "ton" will mean the short ton consisting of 2000-lb avoirdupois. Weigh all materials, which are measured or proportioned by weights, on accurate, approved scales by competent, qualified personnel at locations designated by COTR.

a. If material is shipped by rail, the car weight may be accepted, provided that only the actual weight of material will be paid for. However, car weights will not be acceptable for material to be passed through mixing plants.

b. Weigh trucks used to haul material being paid for by weight empty daily at such times as COTR directs. Each truck shall bear a plainly legible identification mark.

E. Measure bituminous materials by the gallon or ton. When measured by volume, measure such volumes at 60 deg F or measure corrected to the volume at 60 deg F, using ASTM D 1250 for asphalts or ASTM D 633 for tars.

1. Net certified scale weights or weights based on certified volumes in the case of rail shipments will be used as a basis of measurement, subject to correction when bituminous material has been lost from the car or the distributor, wasted, or otherwise not incorporated into the Work.

2. When bituminous materials are shipped by truck or transport, net certified weights by volume, subject to correction for loss or foaming, may be used for computing quantities.

F. Concrete will be measured by the cubic yard in place, unless otherwise indicated.

G. The term "each" when used as an item of payment shall mean complete payment for the work described in the Contract.

1. When a complete structure or structural unit is to be provided, and "each" is specified, as

the unit of measurement, the unit will be construed to include all necessary fitting, accessories, and work incidental to the work item.

H. Rental of equipment will be measured by time in hours of actual working time and necessary traveling time of the equipment within the limits of the Work. Special equipment ordered by COTR in connection with "force account work" will be measured as agreed in Contract Modification authorizing such force account work as provided in the Contract Documents.

I. When standard manufactured items are specified such as fence, wire, plates, rolled shapes, pipe conduit, etc., and these items are identified by gage, unit weight, section dimensions, etc., such identification will be considered to be nominal weights or dimensions. Unless more stringently controlled by tolerances in cited Specifications, manufacturing tolerances established by the industries involved will be accepted.

J. When estimated quantities for a specific portion of the Work are designated as the pay quantities in the Contract, they shall be the final quantities for which payment for such specific portion of the Work will be made, unless the dimensions of said portions of the Work shown on



Drawings are revised by Contract Modification signed by the Contracting Officer.

1. If revised dimensions result in an increase or decrease in quantities of such Work, final quantities for payment will be revised in the amount represented by the authorized changes in the dimensions.

1.4 SCALES

A. Scales for weighing materials, which are required to be proportioned or measured and paid for by weight, shall be furnished, erected, and maintained by Contractor or be certified permanently installed commercial scales.

B. Scales shall be accurate within one-half percent of the current weight throughout the range of use. Contractor shall have scales checked under the observation of the inspector before beginning Work and at such other times as requested. The intervals shall be uniform in spacing throughout the graduated or marked length of the beam or dial and shall not exceed one-tenth of 1 percent of the nominal rated capacity of the scale, but not less than 1 lb. The use of spring balances will not be permitted.

1. Beams, dials, platforms, and other scale equipment shall be so arranged that the operator and the inspector can safely and conveniently view them.

2. Scale installations shall have available 10 standard 50-lb weights for testing the weighing equipment or suitable weights and devices for other approved equipment.

3. Scales must be tested for accuracy and serviced before use at a new site. Platform scales shall be installed and maintained with the platform level and rigid bulkheads at each end.

4. Scales "overweighing" (indicating more than correct weight) will not be permitted to operate, and all materials received subsequent to the last previous correct weighing accuracy test will be reduced by the percentage of error in excess of one-half of 1 percent.

5. In the event inspection reveals the scales have been "under-weighing" (indicating less than correct weight), they shall be adjusted, and no additional payment to Contractor will be allowed for materials previously weighted and recorded.

C. All costs in connection with furnishing, installing, certifying, testing, and maintaining scales; for furnishing check weights and scale house; and for all other items specified in this Section for the weighing of materials for proportioning or payment shall be included in the unit Contract prices for the various items of Project.

1.5 PAYMENT FOR MATERIALS ON HAND

A. Partial payments may be made to the extent of the delivered cost of materials to be incorporated into the Work, provided that such materials meet the requirements of the Contract, Drawings, and Specifications and are delivered to acceptable sites on the Airport property or at other sites in the vicinity that are acceptable to COTR. Such delivered costs of stored or stockpiled materials may be included in the next partial payment application after the following conditions are met:

1. COTR accepts the manner in which the material has been stored at or on an approved site.

2. Contractor provides COTR with acceptable evidence of quantity and quality of the materials.



3. Contractor provides COTR with acceptable evidence that the material and transportation costs have been paid.

4. Contractor provides the Authority legal title, free of liens or encumbrances of any kind, to the material so stored and stockpiled.

5. Contractor provides the Authority evidence that the material so stored or stockpiled is insured against loss by damage to or disappearance of such materials at any time before use in the Work.

6. Contractor provides the Authority with manufacturer’s installation and maintenance information.

B. It is understood and agreed that the transfer of title and the Authority's payment for such stored or stockpiled materials shall in no way relieve Contractor of responsibilities for furnishing and placing such materials according to the requirements of the Contract Documents.

C. In no case will the amount of partial payments of materials on hand exceed the Contract price for the materials or the Contract price for the Contract item in which the material is intended to be used.

D. No partial payment will be made for living or perishable plant materials.

E. Contractor bears all costs associated with the partial payment of stored or stockpiled materials according to the provisions of this Section.




ALTERNATES 012300 - 1


SECTION 012300 - ALTERNATES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Alternate: An amount proposed by offerors and stated on the Proposal Form for certain work defined in the Proposal Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Proposal amount if the Authority decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents.

1. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Price to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Price.

1.4 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project.

1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate.

B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, The Authority will notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates.

C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.

D. Schedule: A Schedule of Alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate.


ALTERNATES 012300 - 2


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES

A. Alternate No. 1: Eliminate VAV box installation, rebalance and controls work throughout entire building.

B. Alternate No. 2: Eliminate VAV box installation, rebalance and controls work throughout the entire building. Eliminate boiler plant work.

C. Alternate No. 3: Add EMCS connectivity to existing mechanical equipment.

D. Alternate No. 4: Eliminate connectivity to Authority’s system wide EMCS. Controls must be capable of future connectivity.

E. Alternate No. 5: Provide stand-alone HVAC controls for each system and VAV box. Controls must be capable of future connectivity.

3.2 PHASED WORK – ALTERNATES

A. Phase 1 – the chiller and AHU work

B. Phase 2 – the boiler work

C. Phase 3 – the VAV boxes

D. Note: The pricing for all three phases performed in that order (base), pricing for just 1&2 (alternate #1), and pricing for just 1 (alternate #2).

E. For controls, there is one add alternate, and two deduct alternates.

F. Add connectivity to existing mechanical equipment (alternate #3)

G. Remove connectivity to Authority’s system-wide EMCS (alternate #4)

H. Provide stand-alone HVAC controls for each system and VAV box (alternate #5)


APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT 012900 - 1


SECTION 012900 – APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment.

1. Coordinate the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment with Contract CPM Schedule, List of Subcontracts, and Submittal Log.


1. Division 01 Section "Allowances" for procedural requirements governing handling and processing of allowances.

2. Division 01 Section "Unit Prices" for administrative requirements governing use of unit prices.

3. Division 01 Section "Measurement and Payment" for administrative requirements governing methods of measurement and determination of quantities of materials for use with unit prices.

4. Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements governing preparation and submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule and Submittals Schedule.

5. Division 01 Section “Project Closeout” for submittal of items required before final payment.

6. Division 01 Section “Project Record Documents” for procedural requirements governing the submission of Project Record Documents.

7. Division 01 Section “Operation and Maintenance Data” for submittal of items required before final payment.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Price to various portions of the Work and once accepted, to be used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment.

1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule.

1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms



and schedules, including the following:

a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets. b. Submittals Schedule. c. Contract CPM Schedule. d. List of products. e. List of principal suppliers and fabricators.

2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Contracting Officer at earliest possible date, but no later

than 21 calendar days after the date of the Notice to Proceed.

a. On projects requiring cost-loaded CPM Schedules, the accepted cost loading will satisfy the requirements for the Schedule of Values.

3. Sub schedules: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring separately phased payments, provide sub schedules showing values correlated with each phase of payment.

B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.

1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values:

a. Project name and location. b. Name of COTR. c. Name of Architect/Engineer. d. The Authority’s Project number. e. Contractor's name and address. f. Date of submittal.

2. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed:

a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. c. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Contract Modifications (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value.

1) Percentage of the Contract Price to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent.

3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Price in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate. Include separate line items under required principal subcontracts for the following items. The value assigned to the total of these line items shall be 5 percent of the Contract Price:

a. Testing and commissioning activities. b. Operation and Maintenance manuals. c. Punch list activities. d. Project Record Documents.



e. Bonds and warranties. f. Demonstration and training.

4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar. Total shall equal the Contract Price. 5. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where

Application for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.

a. Differentiate between potential items stored on-site and items stored off-site. Include evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing if required.

6. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.

7. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each allowance. Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities.

8. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Application for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.

a. At COTR’s option, temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense.

9. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values with the next Applications for Payment when Contract Modifications result in a change in the Contract Price.

1.5 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT

A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Contracting Officer and paid for by the Authority.

1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.

B. Payment Application Times: Application for Payment shall coincide with CPM schedule monthly update, or as otherwise indicated in the Agreement between the Authority and Contractor. The period covered by each Application for Payment starts on the day following the end of the preceding period and shall not exceed one calendar month, unless otherwise approved by COTR.

C. Payment Application Forms: Use forms provided by the Contracting Officer, but supplied by COTR, for Application for Payment.

D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. The Authority will return incomplete applications without action.

1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.

2. Include amounts of Contract Modifications issued before last day of construction period covered by application.



E. Transmittal: Submit one original and four copies of Application for Payment to the address indicated in the Section VII - Contract Provision, paragraph 04.B, each one signed and notarized. Include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required.

1. Transmit Applications for Payment with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application in a manner acceptable to Contracting Officer.

F. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With Final Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's liens from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers.

1. The Authority reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers.

2. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to the Authority.

G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that shall precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:

1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of Values. 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Schedule of unit prices. 5. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final). 6. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 7. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 8. Copies of building permits. 9. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance

of the Work. 10. Initial progress report. 11. Report of pre-construction conference. 12. Performance and payment bonds. 13. Initial settlement survey and damage report if required. 14. Submittal and approval of Contractor Safety Plan. 15. Subcontractor Payment Form: (Form J, "Contract Conditions," Section IX, "LDBE").

H. Monthly Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that shall accompany

the submittal of Contractor's monthly Application for Payment include the following:

1. Subcontractor Payment Form.

2. Monthly Progress Report, prepared according to requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation."

3. Evidence of payment for material on-site if reimbursement for such material is being requested.

4. Update of Contract Record Documents.

I. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.

1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Price.

2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued



previously for Authority occupancy of designated portions of the Work, if applicable. 3. Advise COTR of change-over in security provisions.

J. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:

1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof

that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Price. 4. Evidence that claims have been settled. 5. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of

date of Substantial Completion or when the Authority took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.

6. Final, liquidated damages settlement statement. 7. Return of all Airport identification badges and keys.




PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 1


SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following:

1. General project coordination procedures. 2. Conservation. 3. Coordination drawings. 4. Administrative and supervisory personnel. 5. Project meetings.

a. Pre-construction conference. b. Pre-installation conference. c. Progress meetings. d. Project close out meeting.


1. Division 01 Section: "Execution" for the coordination of general installation and field- engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.

2. Division 01 Section "Project Closeout" for coordinating Contract closeout.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair of all components, mechanical, electrical, and otherwise. Contractor is cautioned that, where specific dimensions are not indicated or where Drawings are schematic in nature, as with most Electrical and Mechanical Drawings, Contractor shall have sole



responsibility to coordinate the work to meet this requirement. Prepare and submit Coordination Drawings to COTR for review and approval as provided in "Coordination Drawings" Paragraph in "Submittals" Article of this Section.

4. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.

1. Prepare similar memoranda for COTR and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required.

C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work and completion within the specified Contract duration. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Pre-installation conferences. 7. Start-up, check-out, and final acceptance of systems. 8. Project closeout activities. 9. Protection of existing and new work.

D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials.

1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work. Refer to other sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as the Authority's property.

E. Temporary Utility Outages: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Summary."

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Coordination Drawings: Before start of the Work, prepare Coordination Drawings for areas with limited space availability that necessitate maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components, and areas requiring coordination for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities.

1. Indicate relationship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings. 2. Indicate all dimensions provided on Contract Drawings and make specific note of

dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment, minimum clearance requirements, amounts of equipment and material to be installed, or other requirements. Provide alternate sketches for resolution of such conflicts to COTR for review. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations shall not be considered changes to the Contract.

3. Indicate required installation sequences. 4. Comply with requirements contained in Division 01 Section "Submittals." 5. Prepare coordination drawings of involved trades in a scale of not less than 1/4 inch = 1



foot or larger for integration of different construction elements. Show sequences and relationships of separate components to avoid conflicts in use of space. Any Work installed prior to review of coordination drawings will be at the Contractor’s risk and subsequent relocation require to avoid interference shall be made at no additional cost to the Authority.

B. Key Personnel Names: At the pre-construction meeting, submit a list of Contractor's key personnel assignments. Key personnel shall include but not necessarily be limited to Project Manager, Project Superintendent (will also assume the role of Safety Engineer), Quality Control Manager, Project Scheduler, and other personnel in attendance at Project site along with alternates. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home and office telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.

1. Post copies of list in Project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each temporary telephone. Keep the list current at all times.

1.5 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)

A. Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract Documents, prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.

1. RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than Contractor will be returned with no response.

2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and the following: 1. Contract Name 2. Contract Number 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Resident Engineer 6. Name of Task Manager 7. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 11. Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the Contract Time

or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 12. Contractor's signature. 13. Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, color photos, Product Data,

Shop Drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. a. Supplementary drawings prepared by Contractor shall include dimensions,

thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments.

14. Both hard-copy and software-generated RFIs are acceptable.

C. Hard-Copy RFIs: 1. Identify each page of attachments with the RFI number and sequential page number.



D. Software-Generated RFIs: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above. 1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format. 2. RFI must be signed and scanned for electronic transmission. 3. Hard-Copy RFI shall follow Software-Generated RFI for the record.

E. COTR’s Action: COTR will review each RFI, determine action required, and return it. Allow maximum 7 calendar days for COTR's response for each RFI. RFIs received after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. 1. The following RFIs will be returned without action:

a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract

Documents. d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. f. Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors.

2. COTR's action may include a request for additional information, in which case COTR's time for response will start again.

3. COTR's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal. a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or

the Contract Sum, notify COTR in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response.

F. On receipt of COTR’s action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify COTR within 7 days if Contractor disagrees with response.

G. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly prior to progress meeting for inclusion in progress meeting minutes. Include the following: Software log with not less than the following: 1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name of COTR. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date COTR’s response was received. 8. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as

appropriate.

1.6 ADMINISTRATIVE AND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL

A. General: In addition to Project Superintendent, provide other administrative and supervisory personnel as required for proper performance of the Work.

1.7 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. Pre-award Conference:



1. General: At the request of the Contracting Officer, a pre-award conference with

Contractor may be held before actual award of the Contract. The meeting will review Contractor's understanding of the Contract Documents, cost and pricing data, contractual requirements, and Contractor's capabilities, financial standing, and past experience prior to award.

a. Minutes: COTR will record and distribute meeting minutes to all attendees and all relevant parties.

2. Attendees: Contract Off icer , COTR, Authori ty Design Project Manager , Architect/Engineer, Contractor and its key personnel nominated for assignment to the Contract, and major subcontractors if so requested by the Contracting Officer. Concerned parties shall each be represented by persons thoroughly familiar with and authorized to conclude matters relating to the work described in the Contract Documents. The Contracting Officer will chair the pre-award meeting.

3. Agenda: Significant discussion items that could affect award include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Provision and acceptability of payment and performance bonds. b. LDBE/MBE/WBE/DBE participation. c. Qualifications of key individuals. d. Quality-control experience. e. Percentage of work performed by own forces. f. Contractor's experience with similar work, including previous Authority contracts. g. Scheduling capabilities of Contractor. h. Financial standing of Contractor. i. Mobilization plan. j. Understanding of work described in the Contract Documents and the physical

constraints associated with work at the Airport. k. Equipment and manpower availability. l. Cost and pricing data.

4. Representations and commitments made by Contractor or its subcontractors shall be construed as binding to the Contract.

B. Pre-construction Conference:

1. General: COTR will schedule pre-construction conference and organizational meeting with Contractor after the Contracting Officer issues a notice of intent to award, or actually awards the Contract. The meeting will review the parties' responsibilities and personnel assignments.

a. Minutes: COTR will record and distribute meeting minutes to all attendees and relevant parties.

2. Attendees: Contracting Officer, COTR, Architect/Engineer, and their sub-consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; manufacturers; suppliers; and other concerned parties. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:

a. Safety and security.



b. LBDE/MBE/WBE/DBE participation and certifications. c. Authority-controlled wrap-up insurance program. d. Airport Operations coordination. e. Preliminary construction schedule. f. Phasing. g. Critical work sequencing. h. Designation of key personnel. i. Procedures for processing field decisions and Contract Modifications. j. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. k. Distribution of the Contract Documents. l. Authority Construction guidelines. m. Submittal procedures. n. Preparation of Record Documents. o. Use of the premises. p. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. q. Parking availability. r. Office, work, and storage areas. s. Equipment deliveries and priorities. t. Safety procedures. u. Quality-control requirements. v. First aid. w. Progress cleaning. x. Working hours. y. Authority Building Code requirements/permits.

4. Refer to Contract Provision "Pre-construction Requirements" for required submittals due at the pre-construction conference.

C. Pre-installation Conferences:

1. General: COTR will conduct a pre-installation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.

a. Minutes: COTR will record and distribute meeting minutes.

2. Attendees: Contractor, Installer, and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have proceeded, or will follow.

3. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:

a. Contract Documents. b. Options. c. Related Contract Modifications. d. Purchases. e. Deliveries. f. Submittals. g. Review of mockups. h. Possible conflicts. i. Compatibility problems. j. Time schedules. k. Weather limitations.

l. Manufacturer's written recommendations.



m. Warranty requirements. n. Compatibility of materials. o. Acceptability of substrates. p. Temporary facilities and controls. q. Space and access limitations. r. Governing regulations and permits. s. Safety. t. Testing and inspecting requirements. u. Required performance results. v. Recording requirements. w. Protection of construction and personnel. x. Review material selection. y. Fabrication and installation procedures. z. Coordination of involved trades.

4. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.

D. Project Closeout Conference: COTR will schedule and conduct a Project Closeout Conference no later than 30 days prior to the scheduled date of Substantial Completion.

1. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project closeout.

2. Attendees: Contracting Officer, COTR, Authority Design Project Manager, Architect/Engineer, Contractor and its key personnel shall attend the meeting. Participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout, including the following:

a. Preparation of record documents. b. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final

inspection for acceptance. c. Submittal of written warranties. d. Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data. e. Requirements for demonstration and training. f. Preparation of Contractor's punch list.

g. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and for final payment.

h. Submittal procedures. i. Coordination of separate contracts. j. Owner's partial occupancy requirements. k. Installation of Owner's furniture, fixtures, and equipment. l. Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls.

4. Minutes: Entity conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.

E. Weekly Progress Meetings:

1. General: COTR will conduct progress meetings weekly at regularly scheduled times convenient for all parties involved. Progress meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as coordination and special pre-installation



meetings. Additionally, discussions will address administrative and technical issues of concern, determining resolutions, and development of deadlines for resolution within allowable time frames.

a. Minutes: COTR will record and distribute meeting minutes.

2. Attendees: As may be required by COTR, in addition to representatives of the Authority and Contractor, each subcontractor, supplier, Contractor’s Project Scheduler, and other entities concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review

other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.

a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the

c. following:

1) Safety and Security. 2) Interface requirements. 3) Time. 4) Sequence of operations. 5) Status of submittals. 6) Deliveries. 7) Off-site fabrication. 8) Storage Areas 9) Access. 10) Site utilization. 11) Requests for information. 12) Submittals. 13) Noncompliance notices. 14) Temporary facilities and controls. 15) Work hours. 16) Resource allocation. 17) Progress cleaning. 18) Quality and work standards. 19) Contract Modifications. 20) Documentation of information for payment requests. 21) Preparation of Record Documents.

4. Submit at the weekly progress meeting, a two-week look-ahead schedule. This schedule shall include a three-week period, one week showing actual progress from the previous week and two weeks showing planned work for the two weeks after the meeting date. Include in the schedule all activities in sufficient detail as approved by COTR. A two- week look-ahead schedule form will be distributed at the pre-construction conference.



Submit a list of subcontractors identifying dates of when subcontractors will be on-site or off-site. A form for this information will be provided by COTR.

5. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.

F. Schedule Update Meetings:

1. Conduct schedule update meetings before submittal of Contractor's Application for Payment. Determine where each activity is, in relation to Contractor's CPM Schedule. Ensure the incorporation of all changes made to the sequence of work and all change notices issued by the Contracting Officer. Submit the narrative and information specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" if applicable.

2. Attendees: COTR, Contractor's Project manager or superintendent, the Contractor’s Project Scheduler, and the Authority's representative.

3. Submit the updated schedule, as bilaterally agreed on, along with the Application for Payment.

4. Present delay claims for discussion and, when possible, resolution.




CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 1


SECTION 013200A - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for various CPM schedules and reports required for proper performance of the Work.

B. All costs incurred by Contractor to correctly implement and update the schedule shall be borne

by Contractor and are part of this Contract.

C. Schedules required include the following:

1. Contract Construction Progress Schedule in CPM format and related narrative. 2. Submittals Schedule. 3. Schedule of Tests and Inspections. 4. Record, As-Built CPM Schedule.

D. Reports required include the following:

1. Daily Construction Reports. 2. Material Location Reports. 3. Field Correction Reports. 4. Special Reports. 5. Monthly Progress Reports. 6. Contractor Quality Control Reports.

E. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 01 Section "Application for Payment" for Schedule of Values. 2. Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for Project meeting

minutes. 3. Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for test and inspection reports. 4. Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" for Product List.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Activity: The fundamental unit of work in a Project plan and schedule. Each activity has defined geographical boundaries and a detailed estimate of resources required to construct the task. Each activity is assigned a unique description, activity number, activity codes, and dollar value.

B. CPM Network: The structure of the schedule. The network is the representation that defines the construction logic in terms of all the activities with their logical dependencies.



C. Contract CPM Schedule: A cost-loaded CPM schedule covering the entire Contract Duration from the Notice to Proceed through Final Acceptance of the Work.

D. Contract Duration/Time: The total time, in calendar days identified in Section III, "Schedule," representing the duration necessary for completion of all physical and administrative requirements under this Contract and any authorized extension thereof.

E. Critical Path: The critical path is the longest connected chain of interdependent activities in a CPM network that impacts the completion of the Project.

F. Excusable Delay: An unforeseeable delay, beyond the control of Contractor, experienced due to no fault or negligence by Contractor, its subcontractors, or suppliers.

G. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network.

H. Cost Loading: The allocation of the Schedule of Values for the completion of an activity as scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities shall equal the total Contract Price, unless otherwise approved by COTR.

I. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.

J. Total Float: The amount of time an activity can be delayed from its earliest start date without delaying the end of Project.

1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either the Authority or Contractor, but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date.

2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the successor activity.

1.4 PLANNING

A. The total Contract Duration and intermediate milestones if applicable, as indicated in Section III, "Schedule," are the Contract requirements.

B. Contractor shall prepare a practical work plan to complete the Work within the Contract Duration, and complete those portions of work relating to each intermediate milestone date and other Contract requirements. Contractor shall generate a computerized cost-loaded CPM schedule in Precedence Diagram Method (PDM) format for the Work.

C. Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract shall not excuse Contractor from completing all work within applicable completion dates, regardless of COTR approval of the Schedule.

D. Failure of Contractor to comply with requirements of this Section may be considered cause for withholding progress payments or termination for default.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Contractor shall provide all schedule submittals on computer disk media as well as tabular printouts, resource curves and histograms, and 24-by-36-inch time-scaled logic diagrams. The latest version of Primavera P3 or SureTrak scheduling software shall be used.



All costs incurred by Contractor to correctly implement, computerize and update the CPM Schedule shall be borne by Contractor and are included in the Contract Price. The number of copies of each submittal shall be as described in this Section or as may be requested by COTR.

B. Contract CPM Schedule: The Contract CPM Schedule and its related narrative as described in this Section shall be submitted along with the projected cash-flow curve as early as practicable after the Notice to Proceed, but in no event later than 30 calendar days after the Notice to Proceed. Within 15 calendar days, COTR will respond with approval or direction to change and Contractor shall resubmit within 10 calendar days, if required.

C. Daily Progress Report: Submit duplicate copies to COTR by noon on the day following the date of actual progress.

D. Monthly Progress Report: All components of the Monthly Progress Report described in this Section shall be submitted as attachments to Contractor's monthly Application for Payment.

E. Record As-Built CPM Schedule: A Record CPM Schedule accurately reflecting actual progress of Work shall be submitted, as part of this Contract's Record Documents. All activities shall have actual dates that are true and accurate.

F. Qualification Data: For Project Scheduler.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Project Scheduler Qualifications: Minimum of two years experience and not less than one project of similar size and scope, with capability to produce CPM reports and diagrams within 24 hours of COTR's request. Project Scheduler is classified as one of Contractor's key personnel.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PROJECT SCHEDULER

A. Engage a project scheduler, either as Contractor's employee or as Contractor's consultant, to provide planning, evaluation, and reporting using CPM scheduling, and to prepare required schedules.

1. Project Scheduler shall be an active participant at all meetings related to Project progress, alleged delays, and time impact.

3.2 CONTRACT CPM SCHEDULE

A. Scheduling Requirements: The Contract CPM Schedule shall be a computerized cost-loaded, time-scaled CPM Schedule in PDM format that includes the following:

1. The order, sequence, and interdependence of all significant work items including mobilization, demobilization, testing and commissioning, construction, procurement,



fabrication, and delivery of critical or special materials and equipment; utility interruption coordination; submittals and approvals of critical Samples, Shop Drawings, procedures, or other reasonable requirements that may be requested by COTR.

2. Work by the Authority, or utility agencies, and other third parties that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities.

3. Adequate referencing of all work items to identify subcontractors or other performing parties.

4. Activity Coding may be provided by the COTR to establish minimum requirements for structure and values for the first 5 code fields.

5. Activity durations not in excess of 14 calendar days, except nonconstruction activities such as procurement and fabrication. Activities shall be broken down in the level of detail prescribed by COTR.

6. Activities that are cost loaded to show the direct costs required to perform the Work, including work by subcontractors.

7. A narrative that explains the basis for Contractor's determination of construction logic, estimated durations, cost allocations, estimated quantities and production rates, hours per shift, workdays per week, and types, numbers, and capacities of major construction equipment to be used. A listing of nonworking days and holidays incorporated into the schedule shall be provided.

B. Critical Path Activities: The Contract CPM Schedule shall be prepared to include the data for the total Contract and the critical path activities shall be identified, including critical paths for interim completion dates. Scheduled start or completion dates imposed on the schedule by Contractor shall be consistent with Contract milestone dates. Milestone dates shall be the scheduled dates specified in Section III, "Schedule," if applicable, and shall be prominently identified. The Contract CPM Schedule shall accurately show all as-built activities completed from the issuance of the Notice to Proceed up to the submittal of this schedule.

C. Assignment of Costs to Activities for Progress Payments:

1. Contractor shall assign cost to construction activities on the Contract CPM Schedule. Costs shall not be assigned to submittal activities unless specified otherwise but may, with COTR's approval, be assigned to fabrication and delivery activities. Costs shall be assigned to testing and commissioning activities, O&M manuals, punchlist activities, and Project Record Documents.

2. Each activity cost shall reflect an accurate value subject to approval by COTR. 3. The total cost assigned to activities shall equal the total Contract Price. 4. Activities shall be cost coded as directed by COTR.

D. Required Submittals: On a monthly basis, Contractor shall submit five copies of each of the following components of the Contract CPM Schedule:

1. A time-scaled plot of the schedule network in PDM format showing logic ties for all activities including submittals and procurement activities.

2. Computer-generated CPM Schedule Reports that contain the following data for each work item: activity identification number, description, resource loading, duration, early start and early finish calendar dates, late start and late finish calendar dates, and total float in calendar days. The reports shall also show the logic ties of successor and predecessor work items. The reports shall be sorted as follows, or other sorts as required by COTR:

a. By activity identification. b. By total float x early start. c. By early start x early finish x total float.



3. The narrative described in Subparagraph 3.2-A-6 above. 4. A cash-flow report showing monthly expenditures projected over the life of the Contract.

A cumulative cash-flow curve based on early and late schedule events shall also be submitted. These reports shall be derived from the Contract CPM Schedule.

3.3 DAILY CONSTRUCTION REPORTS

A. Prepare a daily construction report, recording the following information concerning events at the site, coordinate with requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements," and submit duplicate copies to COTR by noon of the day following day of actual progress:

1. List of subcontractors (by trade group) at the site. 2. List of separate contractors at the site. 3. Approximate count of personnel (by trade group) at the site. 4. Equipment (by trade group) at the site. 5. High and low temperatures, general weather conditions. 6. Accidents (refer to accident reports). 7. Meetings and significant decisions. 8. Unusual events (refer to special reports). 9. Stoppages, delays, shortages, losses. 10. Meter readings and similar recordings. 11. Emergency procedures. 12. Orders and requests of governing authorities. 13. Change Notices/Directives and Contract Modifications received, implemented. 14. Services connected, disconnected. 15. Equipment or system tests and startups. 16. Partial Completions, occupancies. 17. Substantial Completions authorized. 18. Material deliveries.

3.4 MATERIAL LOCATION REPORTS

A. At weekly intervals, prepare a comprehensive list of materials delivered to and stored at the site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on and delivery dates for all materials or items of equipment being fabricated or stored away from the building site. Submit copies of list to COTR at weekly intervals.

3.5 FIELD CORRECTION REPORT

A. When the need to take corrective action that requires a departure from the Contract Documents arises, prepare a detailed report including a statement describing the problem and recommended changes. Indicate reasons the Contract Documents cannot be followed. Submit a copy to COTR immediately.

3.6 SPECIAL REPORTS (Not Used)



3.7 MONTHLY PROGRESS REPORTING

A. General: Approval of Contractor's monthly Application for Payment shall be contingent, among other factors, on the submittal of a satisfactory monthly schedule update.

B. Monthly Schedule Update Meetings: Monthly schedule updates shall be the product of joint review meetings between Contractor, COTR, and major active subcontractors. The joint review shall focus on actual progress for the preceding month, planned progress for the upcoming month supported by a Contractor-prepared Four-Week Look-Ahead Schedule, impact to schedule if any due to change notices issued, adverse weather, and any effected changes to the Construction CPM Schedule. The agreed on progress, and changes, if any, shall be incorporated into the schedule update to be submitted. The update shall always represent the actual history of accomplishment of all activities, and will form the basis for Contractor's Application for Payment. Contractor's delay claims shall be presented for discussion and, when possible, resolution.

C. Required Submittals: On a monthly basis, Contractor shall submit two copies in electronic format of the updated CPM schedule and five copies of each of the following components of the Monthly Progress Report:

1. A monthly progress narrative, the content of which shall be prescribed by COTR, but shall include as a minimum a description of overall progress for the preceding month, a critical path analysis, a discussion of problems encountered and proposed solution thereof, delays experienced and proposed recovery measures, a monthly reconciliation of weather impact, the status and impact of contract modifications, documentation of any logic changes, and any other changes made to the schedule since the previous monthly update.

2. CPM schedule reports listing completed activities, activities in progress, and remaining activities in the format requested by COTR. For each activity, Contractor shall provide those details identified in Subparagraph 3.2-D-2.

3. Monthly and cumulative cash-flow curves that show actual vs. planned cash-flow status. 4. Documentation of delivered material in the form of paid invoices or other evidence that

Contractor has clear title for the material delivered.

D. If critical activities of the schedule are delayed and such delay is not excusable as defined in this Section, the remaining sequence of activities and/or duration thereof shall be adjusted by Contractor through such measures as additional manpower, additional shifts, or the implementation of concurrent operations until the schedule produced indicates Work will be completed on schedule. Except as provided elsewhere in the Contract, all costs incurred by Contractor to recover from inexcusable delays shall be borne by Contractor.

E. The monthly schedule update shall form the basis for Contractor's Application for Payment. The progress payment for an activity shall be based on its agreed on percentage of completion. On unit-priced contracts, the approval of Contractor's monthly requisition is contingent on the submittal of a satisfactory monthly schedule update; however, the basis of payment will be the actual measurement of COTR-accepted, in-place units of work.

3.8 DELAYS AND REQUESTS FOR EXTENSION OF TIME

A. The determination for an extension of the Contract Time will be made by the Contracting Officer according to the Contract Provision "Default."



B. Contractor acknowledges and agrees that delays in activities, irrespective of the party causing the delay, which according to the computer mathematical analysis do not affect any critical activity or milestone dates on the CPM network at the time of the delay, shall not become the basis for an extension of the Contract Time. The only basis for any extension of time will be the demonstrated impact of an excusable delay on the critical path. In demonstrating such impact, Contractor shall provide adequate detail as required by the Contract, and Contractor shall prove that:

1. An event occurred. 2. Contractor was not responsible for the event in that the event was beyond the control of

Contractor, and was without fault or negligence of Contractor, subcontractor, or supplier, and the event was unforeseeable.

3. The event was the type for which an excuse is granted according to the "Default" provision of this Contract.

4. Activities on the critical path of the Work were delayed. 5. The event in fact caused the delay of the Work. 6. The requested additional time is an appropriate and reasonable extension of the Contract

Time, given the actual delay encountered.

C. Time Extensions for Unusually Severe Weather:

1. If unusually severe weather conditions are the basis for a request for an extension of the Contract Time, such request shall be documented by data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time and could not have been reasonably anticipated, and that weather conditions had an adverse effect on the critical activities of the scheduled construction.

2. The schedule of anticipated adverse weather below will constitute the base line for monthly (or a prorated portion thereof) weather/time evaluation by the Contracting Officer. On issuance of the Notice to Proceed and continuing throughout the Contract on a monthly basis, actual adverse weather days will be recorded by Contractor on a calendar day basis (include weekends and holidays) and compared to the monthly anticipated adverse weather days set forth below.

a. For purposes of this clause, the term "actual adverse weather days" shall include days that can be demonstrated to have been impacted by adverse weather.

b. Monthly Anticipated Adverse Weather Calendar Days:

1) January - 7. 2) February - 5. 3) March - 6. 4) April - 6. 5) May - 8. 6) June - 6. 7) July - 6. 8) August - 7. 9) September - 5.



10) October - 5. 11) November - 5. 12) December - 6.

c. The number of actual adverse weather days shall be calculated chronologically

from the first to the last day in each month. Contractor shall not be entitled to any claim for time extension based on adverse weather unless the number of actual adverse weather days exceeds the number of anticipated adverse weather days, and unless such adverse weather days prevent work for 50 percent or more of Contractor's workday. In preparing the Contract Schedule, Contractor shall reflect the above anticipated adverse weather days on all weather-dependent activities. Weather-caused delays shall not result in any additional compensation to Contractor.

3. On days where adverse weather is encountered, Contractor shall list all critical activities under progress and shall indicate the impact adverse weather had, if any, on the progress of such activities. This information shall be presented at the end of the adverse weather day to COTR or its authorized representative for its review and approval.

4. If Contractor is found eligible for an extension of the Contract Time, the Contracting Officer will issue a modification extending the time for Contract completion. The extension of time will be made on a calendar day basis.

D. Required Submittals:

1. Provide time-impact analysis that illustrates impact during update period in which event occurred, that event has been mitigated to greatest possible extent, and that event still impacts overall completion of Project.

2. Include with request, two copies of submittal of impacted schedule, in electronic format, and photocopies of all relevant documents that support the claim.

3. Submit all required items within the following time periods:

a. 10 calendar days of event occurrence. b. 10 calendar days of Contractor's knowledge of impact. c. 14 calendar days of written request by COTR.

4. Expiration of time periods without submittal shall constitute forfeiture of rights for these specific impacts.

3.9 RECORD SCHEDULE

A. After all Contract work items are complete, and as a condition of final payment, Contractor shall submit three copies of a Record, As-Built CPM Schedule showing actual start and finish dates for all work activities and milestones, based on the accepted monthly updates. These schedule submittals shall be in tabular and in time-scaled PDM plot formats.


SUBMITTALS 013300 - 1


SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTALS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other miscellaneous submittals.


1. Division 01 Section "Project Closeout" for submitting warranties. 2. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings,

Record Specifications, and Record Product Data. 3. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific requirements for submittals in those

Sections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires COTR's responsive action.

B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require COTR's approval. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.

1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. General: COTR will provide electronic copies of CADD electronic files of the drawings for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.

B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that requires sequential activity.

2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.

a. Without change to the Contract Duration, COTR reserves the right to withhold

action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.



C. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related construction activities.

D. Contractor's Responsibilities: Contractor is responsible for the scheduling and submission of all submittals. Submit to COTR all required Submittals. The COTR will forward submittals to the appropriate parties for review.

E. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for re-submittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on COTR’s receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including re-submittals.

1. Initial Review: Allow 15 calendar days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. COTR will advise Contractor when a submittal processed must be delayed for coordination. Allow an additional 45 calendar days for submittals related to fire-protection systems.

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.

3. Re-submittal Review: Allow 15 calendar days for review of each re-submittal. 4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by COTR, or other parties is

indicated, allow 21 calendar days for initial review of each submittal. 5. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit

submittals to COTR enough in advance of the Work to permit processing. Processing of incomplete or unacceptable submissions by COTR shall not reduce the number of calendar days specified above for COTR's review. Resubmissions shall be treated the same as initial submissions relative to review time.

6. Notations on submittals that increase the Contract cost or time of completion shall be brought to COTR's attention before proceeding with the Work. a. All structural, mechanical, plumbing and electrical components require sequential

review to coordinate construction coordination.

F. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.

1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record

Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by COTR and Architect. 3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken:

a. Contract name and number. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect/Engineer. d. Name and address of Contractor. e. Name and address of subcontractor, if applicable. f. Name and address of supplier, if applicable. g. Name of manufacturer, if applicable. h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a dash and then a sequential number (e.g., 061000-001 or 070150.19-001). Re-submittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another dash (e.g., 061000-001-A or 070150.19-001-A).

i. Alphanumeric project Identifier. Identifier is shown on the Project Drawings cover



sheet. j. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. l. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. m. Transmittal number. n. Allow 15 calendar days for processing each re-submittal.

G. Resubmissions: Re-submittal procedure shall follow the same procedures and same number as the initial submittal with the following exceptions:

1. Transmittal shall contain the same information as the first transmittal and the submission number shall indicate second, third, etc., submission. The drawing number/description shall be identical to the initial submission and the date shall be the revised date for that submission.

2. No new material shall be included on the same transmittal for a resubmission. 3. COTR rejection shall not warrant a claim by Contractor for additional time or cost.

H. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. Where significant deviations from the Contract requirements exist, follow the guidelines set forth in Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" for substitutions.

I. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless COTR observes noncompliance with provisions of the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal.

1. Additional copies submitted for Operations and Maintenance manuals will be marked

with action taken and will be returned.

J. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal from Contractor to COTR using the approved transmittal form provided by COTR. COTR will return submittals, without review, received from sources other than Contractor.

1. Transmittal Form: Use transmittal forms and follow other submittal procedures according to information provided to Contractor at the preconstruction meeting.

K. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, and authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

1. Bear all costs incurred for such reproduction and distribution. Prints of all reviewed

Shop Drawings may be made from transparencies that carry the appropriate review stamps.

L. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating “approved” by COTR in connection with construction.

1.5 SUBMITTAL LOG

A. Prepare a log that contains a complete listing of all submittals required by Contract. Submit the log at the preconstruction meeting along with Contractor's 90-day preliminary construction schedule specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation."



Organize the submittal log by Section number. Assign each submittal a sequential number for identification and tracking purposes.

1. Coordinate the submittal log with Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." The submittal log shall be submitted for COTR's review. Include the following information:

a. Title of submittal/description. b. Submittal number (sequential). c. Scheduled date for the first submittal. d. Drawing number, if applicable. e. Applicable Section number. f. Name of subcontractor/vendor. g. Scheduled date of COTR's final release or approval.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment.

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's written recommendations. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Manufacturer's installation instructions. d. Standard color charts. e. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. f. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. g. Printed performance curves. h. Operational range diagrams. i. Mill reports. j. Standard product operating and maintenance manuals. k. Compliance with recognized trade association standards. l. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards. m. Application of testing agency labels and seals. n. Notation of coordination requirements.

4. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.

5. Number of Copies: Submit six copies, in addition to the number of copies to be returned to Contractor. Provide one additional copy for submittals related to fire-protection system.

6. Do not submit Product Data until compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents has been confirmed.



C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.

1. Preparation: Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Dimensions. b. Identification of products. c. Fabrication and installation drawings. d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and

control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions. g. Templates and patterns. h. Schedules. i. Design calculations. j. Compliance with specified standards. k. Notation of coordination requirements. l. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. m. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated. n. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.

2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 40 inches.

3. Number of Copies: Submit one reproducible transparency and two black-line prints of each submittal. Provide one additional black-line print for items related to fire-protection systems. COTR will return the marked up reproducible transparency for Contractor’s distribution.

a. Both the reproducible transparency and the prints shall bear Contractor's approval stamp on each sheet.

D. Coordination Drawings:

1. Coordination Drawings are Shop Drawings prepared by Contractor that detail the relationship and integration of different construction elements that require careful coordination during fabrication or installation. Preparation of Coordination Drawings is specified in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."

2. Submit Coordination Drawings for integration of different construction elements. Show sequences and relationships of separate components to avoid conflicts in use of space.

E. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.

1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package.

2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:

a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.



3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality- control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as the

Authority’s property, are the property of Contractor.

4. Samples for Verification: (Not Used)

F. Product Schedule or List: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product. 2. Number and name of room or space. 3. Location within room or space. 4. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of product schedule or list, unless otherwise

indicated. COTR will return two copies.

a. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document.

G. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation."

H. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Application for Payment."

I. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Application for Payment."

J. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products.

2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.

K. Contractor Warranty Letter: Comply with requirements in Contract Provision "Warranty of Construction." Provide the dates of warranty coverage and provide point of contact information for warranty service.

L. Special Warranty Letters: Provide dates of warranty coverage and provide point of contact information for warranty service for special warranties required in Division 02 through 33 Sections.

2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections.

1. Number of Copies: Submit four copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated.



COTR will not return copies. 2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of

entity responsible for preparing certification. An officer shall sign certificates and certifications or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.

3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."

B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation."

C. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of Architects and Owners, and other information specified.

D. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements.

E. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.

F. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements and, where required, is authorized for this specific Project.

G. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.

H. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements.

I. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements.

J. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements.

K. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing

agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

L. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements.

M. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.



N. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence from a model code organization acceptable to the Authority that product complies with USBC. Include the following information:

1. Name of evaluation organization. 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers' names. 5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. 7. Limitations of use.

O. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data."

P. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but are not limited to,

performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.

Q. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable:

1. Preparation of substrates. 2. Required substrate tolerances. 3. Sequence of installation or erection. 4. Required installation tolerances. 5. Required adjustments. 6. Recommendations for cleaning and protection.

R. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report.

2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with

requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements. 6. Statement on whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

S. Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of the coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any and term of coverage.

T. Manufacturers' warranties.



U. Construction Photographs: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Photographic Documentation."

V. Material Safety Data Sheets: Submit information directly to COTR.

2.3 DELEGATED DESIGN

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.

1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to COTR.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required

submittals, submit three (3) copies of a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.

1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Review each submittal and check for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to COTR.

1. In checking Shop Drawings and Product Data, verify all dimensions and field conditions and check and coordinate Shop Drawings and Product Data of any Section or trade with the requirements of other sections or trades as related thereto, as required for proper and complete installation of the Work.

B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents, which shall include dimensions, clearances, compatibility, and coordination with Shop Drawings and Product Data submitted for other work.

C. If Contractor has not checked the submittals carefully, even though stamped as checked and

approved, submittals shall be returned to Contractor for proper checking before further processing or review by COTR regardless of any urgency claimed by Contractor. In such a situation, Contractor will be responsible for any resulting delays to the scheduled Contract completion. Furthermore, Contracting Officer may hold Contractor responsible for increased Authority costs resulting from Contractor's failure to comply with the requirements set forth herein.



3.2 COTR’S ACTION

A. General: COTR will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action.

B. COTR Responsibilities: The review of Shop Drawings and other submittals by COTR will be for general conformance with the Contract only, and the review shall not be interpreted as a checking of detailed dimensions, quantities, or approval of deviations from the Contract Documents. COTR review shall not relieve Contractor of its responsibility for accuracy of Shop Drawings nor for the furnishing and installation of materials or equipment according to the Contract requirements.

1. Approval of Shop Drawings or other submittals is not to be interpreted as approval of a substitute material. Approval of substitutions will be accomplished according to requirements set forth in Division 01 Section "Product Requirements."

C. Action Submittals: COTR will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. COTR will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows. Do not permit submittals marked "Revise and Resubmit" or "Rejected" to be used at Project site, or elsewhere where Work is in progress.

1. Approved: Means fabrication/installation may be undertaken. Approval does not authorize changes to the Contract Price or the Contract Time.

2. Approved as Corrected: Same as "Approved," providing Contractor complies with corrections noted on submittal. Resubmission required only if Contractor is unable to comply with noted corrections.

3. Revise and Resubmit: Fabrication and/or installation may not be undertaken. Make appropriate revisions and resubmit, limiting corrections to items marked.

4. Rejected: Submittal does not comply with requirements. Fabrication and/or installation may not be undertaken. Prepare a new submittal according to requirements and submit without delay.

D. Informational Submittals: COTR will review each submittal and will not return it, or will reject and return it, if it does not comply with requirements. COTR will forward each submittal to appropriate party.

E. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered non-responsive, and will be returned without review.

F. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will not be reviewed and may be discarded.


QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 1


SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and Contract Provisions, Special Provisions, Supplementary Conditions, and other Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 00 Section “Supplementary Conditions”. 2. Division 01 Section “Project Management and Coordination”. 3. Division 01 Section “Construction Progress Documentation” for developing a schedule of

required tests and inspections. 4. Division 01 Section “Submittals” for process required to submit the Contractor’s Quality

Control Plan. 5. Division 01 Section “Execution”. 6. Division 01 Section “Cutting and Patching” for repair and restoration of construction

disturbed by testing and inspecting activities. 7. Division 01 Section “Project Closeout”. 8. Division 01 Section “Operation and Maintenance Data”. 9. Division 01 Section “Project Record Documentation”. 10. Division 01 Section “Demonstration and Training”. 11. Divisions 02 through 34 Technical Specification Sections.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Administrative and procedural requirements for Contractor to provide and maintain an effective Quality-Control Program that complies with this Section and with requirements of the "Contract Provisions," Section VII, "Inspection of Construction and Final Inspection and Acceptance."

2. Establish a QC Program that consists of the following:

a. QC Organization. b. QC Plan Meeting. c. QC Plan. d. Coordination and Meeting of Mutual Understanding. e. QC meetings. f. Phases of Control. g. Submittal preparation, review, and approval. h. Operation & Maintenance data and Warranty receipt verification prior to product

delivery. i. Material verification at delivery and material location reports as outlined in a

formal Material Receiving Inspection Program. j. Inspection Program utilizing an Inspection Log and Sign-off Sheets. k. Testing and Inspections, completion inspections, QC certifications, accreditations,

documentation, training, and requirements necessary to provide materials, equipment, workmanship, fabrication, construction, and operations that comply



with the requirements of this Contract. 3. Contractor is not responsible for Special Inspections according to requirements of the

current Virginia Uniform Statewide Building Code (VUSBC). The Authority’s agent shall provide these Special Inspection services. However, the Contractor is responsible for establishing a Special Inspection schedule. This schedule shall be discussed at COTR’s weekly Progress Meetings and Contractor’s QC Meetings. The Contractor shall be responsible for all coordination and notification of requests for Code and Special Inspections with The Authority.

a. Special inspections are required for, but are not necessarily limited to, the

following:

(1) As identified by the Engineer of Record.

4. Specific quality-control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that require those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products.

5. Schedule of Values: Contractor shall include all test and inspection activities in its CPM and establish a Schedule of Values for all required QC documentation, all tests and inspection activities, reports, and procedures required in the Contract on a Section-by- Section basis. Additionally, Contractor shall include a pay line item specifically for Quality activities and QC Organizational personnel required by the General Conditions. Quality activities shall be reported per Division 01 Section "Applications for Payment."

6. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of its responsibilities for compliance with the Contract.

7. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's quality-control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

8. The provisions of this Section shall not limit requirements for Contractor to provide quality-control services required by the Authority or other agencies having jurisdiction.

9. The QC Plan does not repeat or summarize contract requirements. It describes the methods, processes, and procedures by which the Contractor will ensure Quality construction and compliance with the contract documents. Omissions in the QC Plan or the contractor’s Quality Control Program does not relieve the contractor of the responsibilities to provide work in accordance with the contract documents, applicable codes, regulations, and governing authorities. Approval of the QC Plan by The Authority does not guarantee Quality Control or Quality Production by the Contractor. These QC processes, procedures and programs are controlled and managed by the Contractor.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.

1. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)

a. ASTM C 1077: Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation latest edition.

b. ASTM D 3666: Minimum Requirements for Agencies Testing and Inspecting Road and Paving Materials latest edition.

c. ASTM D 3740: Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and



Construction latest edition. d. ASTM E 329: Agencies engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Materials

Used in Construction latest edition. e. ASTM E 543: Agencies performing Nondestructive Testing latest edition.

2. METROPOLITAN WASHINGTON AIRPORT AUTHORITY

a. Construction Safety Manual, most current edition.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Quality: Conformance to the requirements established by the contract specifications and drawings.

B. Control: To guide and have influence over.

C. Contractor Quality Control (CQC): The construction contractor’s system to establish, manage, control, and document their own, their supplier’s, and their subcontractor’s activities to ensure Quality compliance with the contract requirements and the QC Plan.

D. Contracting Officers Technical Representative (COTR). Primary on-site representative of the

Contracting Officer for technical matters. Duties and responsibilities of the COTR will be transmitted to the contractor via letter from the Contracting Officer.

E. Definable Feature of Work or Element of Work: A definable feature of work (DFOW) or

Element of Work is a task that is separate and distinct from other tasks and has control requirements and work crews unique to that task.

F. QC Management System: The management and implementation of processes, procedures, and

requirements that establish quality as identified in the QC Plan and mandated in the contract specifications. The Three Phases of Control are the core of the contractor’s Construction Quality Management System.

G. Mockups: If required by the contract, shall be full-size, physical example assemblies that are

constructed on site to illustrate finishes, materials, assemblies, etc. Mockups are used to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects or details and, where indicated, qualities of materials, execution, to review construction, coordination, testing, inspection, or operation; they are not Samples. Mockups establish the Initial Standard of Control by which the work shall be judged and accepted for that Definable Feature or Element of Work. Mockups supersede samples in the approval and acceptance of the Work. Construct mockups away from the work site or in a location designated by the COTR. Do not use mockups as part of the work unless specifically approved by the COTR.

H. Experienced: When used with an entity, “experienced” means having successfully completed a

minimum of ten (10) projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Specific experience requirements enumerated in these specifications supersede this requirement.

1.5 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS



A. General: If compliance with two (2) or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to the COTR for a decision before proceeding. This paragraph refers to industry and government standards. In cases of a difference between drawings and the specifications, the specifications shall govern.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following in accordance with Division 01 Section, "Submittals."

1. Action Submittals.

a. Quality Control (QC) Plan.

B. NOTE: Coordinate the submittal requirement dates with the submittal dates in Division 01 Section “Construction Progress Documentation”.

C. Submit a QC plan within twenty (20) calendar days after receipt of Notice to Proceed. The QC Plan shall include a preliminary submittal registry of all required submittals in the contract which shall be submitted in the first ninety (90) calendar days of construction. Once final submittal registry, accounting for all submittals, is approved by the COTR, insert registry into the QC Plan.

1. Submit at this time résumés of key personnel to be assigned to this contract and the limits of their authority. Show how this project management structure fits into the Contractor’s corporate management structure.

D. Any approval by the COTR of the QC Plan shall be treated as “accepted, dependent upon successful implementation of a Quality Program as outlined in the QC Plan and Contract Specifications.” Omissions in the QC Plan do not relieve the contractor of the responsibilities to comply with the contract requirements. Immediately stop work if the QC Plan becomes disapproved or Quality as defined in the contractor’s Quality Program cannot be produced. The exception is the work authorized in the paragraph entitled "Preliminary Work Authorized Prior to Approval," shall stop.

1.7 INFORMATION FOR THE CONTRACTING OFFICER

A. Provide sample copies, for approval, of all report forms, as identified below, to the Contracting Officer or Representative during the Pre-Construction Conference. The report forms shall consist of the Quality Control Daily Report, Superintendent Daily Report, Material Receiving Inspection Report, Preparatory Phase Report, Initial Phase Report, Inspection Log and Sign-off Sheet, Deficiency Log, Testing Log, Monthly Summary Report of Tests and Inspections, and Monthly Quality Control Summary Report. Other reports referenced below, once approved, may be in formats customarily used by the Contractor, and shall contain the information required by the contract specifications for Testing Laboratories and Inspection Reports, Material Location Reports, Specialist Reports, etc.

B. Deliver the following listed items to the COTR via the Authority directed Document Control at

the times specified below:

1. Quality Control Daily Report: one (1) original electronic or hard copy, delivered the next



calendar day after work is performed. 2. Superintendent’s Daily Report: one (1) original electronic or hard copy, delivered the next

calendar day after work is performed. Do not attach to the Quality Control Daily Report.

3. Material Receiving Inspection Report: one (1) original electronic or hard copy, delivered the next calendar day after work is performed. Do not attach to the Quality Control Daily Report.

4. Material Location Reports: one (1) original electronic or hard copy, delivered weekly. Do not attach to the Quality Control Daily Report.

5. Preparatory Phase Report: one (1) original electronic or hard copy, delivered the next calendar day after work is performed. Do not attach to the Quality Control Daily Report.

6. Initial Phase Report: one (1) original electronic or hard copy, delivered by the next calendar day after work is performed. Do not attach to the Quality Control Daily Report.

7. Field or Laboratory Test and Inspection Reports: one (1) original electronic or hard copy, delivered within two (2) workdays after the inspection and/or test is performed and, again delivered, at the end of the month with the Monthly Summary Report of Tests and Inspections. A certified technician performing all field tests and inspections shall sign all inspection and test reports. A certified testing laboratory manager performing all laboratory tests shall sign all test results. All reports will be reviewed, signed, and certified by a Professional Engineer, registered in the Commonwealth of Virginia, as complying with the contract specifications. Do not attach to the Quality Control Daily Report.

8. Monthly Summary Report of Tests and Inspections: one (1) original electronic or hard copy of all cumulative tests and inspections performed to date, delivered with all tests and inspection reports for each Definable Feature or Element of Work conducted that month. Deliver these reports within two (2) workdays of the end of the month. A certified technician performing all field tests and inspections shall sign all inspection reports. A certified testing laboratory manager performing all laboratory tests shall sign all test results. All reports will be reviewed, signed, and certified by a Professional Engineer, registered in the Commonwealth of Virginia, as complying with the contract specifications. Do not attach to the Quality Control Daily Report.

9. Inspection Log and Signoff Sheets for all Definable Features or Elements of Work: one (1) original electronic or hard copy, delivered within one (1) workday of the inspection or Signed-off activity. Do not attach to the Quality Control Daily Report.

10. Special Inspection Control Log: (If Special Inspections are required), one (1) original electronic or hard copy, delivered within two (2) workdays of the end of the month.

11. Testing Log: upon COTR’s request, deliver one (1) original electronic, or hard copy of a current up-to-date test log, documenting all performed tests, results, etc., do not attach to the Quality Control Daily Report.

12. Deficiency Log: one (1) original electronic or hard copy, delivered to the COTR at the weekly Progress Meeting. Do not attach to the Quality Control Daily Report.

13. Monthly Deficiency Report: one (1) original electronic or hard copy, delivered within two (1) workdays of the end of the month of all nonconforming work, tests, and inspections identified during construction. Do not attach to the Quality Control Daily Report.

14. QC Meeting Minutes: one (1) original electronic or hard copy, delivered within two (2) workdays after the meeting. Do not attach to the Quality Control Daily Report.

15. QC Certifications, Qualifications, and Accreditations: as required by contract specifications.

16. Monthly Quality Control Summary Report: one (1) original electronic or hard copy, delivered within two (2) workdays of the end of the month. Do not attach to a Quality Control Daily Report. This Executive Brief shall contain these items:

a. Status of the Schedule (Monthly Progress Report) impact to schedule due to change notices, modifications, problems encountered, weather, and any other changes or items affecting the schedule since the previous month.

b. Status of Submittals.



c. Status of Testing and Inspections activities performed that particular month. d. Status of Special Inspections (if required) performed that particular month. e. Status of Preparatory meetings and Initial meetings performed that particular

month. f. Status of Deficiencies/Rework items and corrective actions. g. Status of Non-compliances issued by COTR and corrective actions. h. Status of Record Drawings. i. Status or Identification of items affecting Quality. j. Status of Training, Operation, Maintenance, and Warranty items. k. Status of Safety and related events. l. Other items as directed by the COTR.

1.8 QC PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS

A. The Contractor shall establish and maintain an approved QC Program as described in this Section. The QC Program shall consist of, but is not limited to, the following:

1. QC Organization. 2. QC Plan. 3. QC Plan Meeting. 4. Coordination and Meeting of Mutual Understanding. 5. QC meetings. 6. Phases of Control. 7. Submittal preparation, review, and approval. 8. Operations and Maintenance data. 9. Warranty receipt verification prior to product delivery. 10. Material verification at delivery and material location reports as outlined in a formal

Material Receiving Inspection Program. 11. Inspection Program utilizing an Inspection Log and Sign-off Sheets. 12. Testing, inspections, completion inspections, QC certifications, accreditations,

documentation, training, and requirements necessary to provide materials, equipment, workmanship, fabrication, construction, and operations that comply with the requirements of this Contract.

13. The QC Program shall cover on-site and off-site work and shall be keyed to the work sequence.

14. No work, testing, or inspections may be performed unless the QCM or a pre-approved alternate is on the work site.

15. At all times during performance of this contract and until the work is completed and accepted, the contractor shall directly superintend the work by an approved competent superintendent who is satisfactory to the Contracting Officer and has the authority to act for the Contractor.

16. The QCM shall report to an officer of the firm and shall not be subordinate to the Project Manager, Superintendent or any other member of the QC Organization.

17. The Quality Control Manager is the primary individual responsible for the management and implementation of processes, procedures, and requirements that establish quality in construction as identified in the QC Plan and mandated in the contract specifications. The QCM shall identify, track, and notify The Authority and Management of all weaknesses and deficiencies in this QC Management System. The Project Manager shall be responsible



for the overall quality in the contract. The Project Superintendent shall be held responsible for the quality of all work produced by the Contractor, manages the correction of all noted deficiencies, and ensures Quality is established and preserved in the construction process through the Three Phases of Control.

B. Preliminary Work Authorized Prior to Approval

1. The only work that is authorized to proceed prior to the approval of the QC Plan is mobilization of storage and office trailers, temporary utilities, and surveying.

C. Approval

1. Approval of the QC Plan is required prior to the start of any work or construction. The Contracting Officer reserves the right to require changes in the QC Plan, processes, procedures, and operations as necessary to ensure the specified quality of work is constructed as outlined in the contract. The Contracting Officer reserves the right to interview any member of the QC organization at any time during the contract period to verify contract compliance. All QC organizational personnel shall be subject to acceptance by the Contracting Officer. The Contracting Officer may require the removal of any individual for non-compliance with quality requirements specified in the contract.

D. Notification of Changes

1. Notify the COTR, in writing, of any proposed changes to the QC Plan, including changes in the QC organizational personnel, a minimum of seven (7) calendar days prior to a proposed change. Proposed changes shall be subject to acceptance by the Contracting Officer.

1.9 QC ORGANIZATION

A. The contractor’s QC Organization is responsible for establishing a committed unified team in a positive cooperative environment where all personnel and employees communicate, create, maintain, and verify the desired level of quality in all aspects of construction as established in the QC Plan and Contract Specifications.

B. Staffing Levels: Provide sufficient qualified quality-control personnel to monitor each work activity at all times. Scheduling and coordinating of all inspections and testing shall match the type and pace of work activity.

1. In cases where multiple trades, disciplines, or subcontractors are on site at same time, each

activity shall be tested and inspected by personnel skilled and qualified in that portion of the work.

2. In cases where multiple shifts are employed, the quality-control staff shall be increased to meet all personnel and quality requirements of this section and the contract specifications for each shift when work is performed.

3. In all cases, the QC Organizational staff shall not conduct escorting duties.

C. The following positions are key personnel as defined by the Authority in this and other Division 01 Specification Sections. The QC Organizational personnel shall be interviewed by Quality Department and the COTR. The COTR will approve all QC Organizational personnel.



1. Project Manager

a. Duties: Responsible for overall Quality in Construction, project management control, planning, scheduling, cost, project administration, submittal management, and compliance with local and national codes.

b. Qualifications: Fifteen (15) years of construction supervisory experience, with

five (5) years of project management experience on projects of similar size, type, and complexity to this Project in which the individual had overall project responsibility.

c. To enhance the effectiveness of the Quality Control Organization the Project

Manager shall be intimately involved in Contractor Quality Control. To this end, the Project Manager shall have successfully completed the Army Corps of Engineers/NAVFAC Contractor Quality Control Course (details in Paragraph “Construction Quality Management Training”, below).

2. Project Superintendent

a. Duties: Serves as the Contractor’s on-site production manager to plan, organize, coordinate, supervise, and observe all on-site construction activities. The Superintendent ensures compliance with the contract specifications while maintaining total control and responsibility for the Quality of work produced. The Superintendent monitors and supervises all field personnel to assure compliance with the Contract Specifications. The Superintendent corrects all noted deficiencies and ensures Quality is established and preserved in the construction process through the Three Phases of Control.

b. Qualifications: Fifteen (15) years of construction supervisory experience, with

five (5) years’ experience as Superintendent in a supervisory role coordinating various trades at multiple work areas.

c. To enhance the effectiveness of the Quality Control Organization the Superintendent shall be intimately involved in Contractor Quality Control. To this end, the Superintendent shall have successfully completed the Army Corps of Engineers/NAVFAC Contractor Quality Control Course.

3. Quality Control Manager (QCM)

a. Duties: Provide a QCM at the work site to implement and manage the QC Program. In addition to implementing and managing the QC Program, the QCM may perform the duties of project superintendent. The QCM shall not be designated as the safety competent person as defined by Construction Safety manual. The QCM shall attend the QC Plan Meeting, shall prepare the QC Plan for COTR approval, shall conduct the Meeting of Mutual Understanding, conduct the QC meetings, perform and manage the Phases of Control, except for those phases of control designated to be performed by QC Assistant and/or QC specialists, perform submittal review and approval, ensure verification of materials, ensure all testing and inspections are coordinated and performed by trained, authorized and certified personnel and testing laboratories. The QCM shall provide and submit QC certifications, accreditations, reports, and documentation as required in the contract specifications. The QCM shall not prepare Submittals. The QCM is



responsible for assuring contractor compliance with Quality Standards as established in the contract specifications.

a. Duties: Provide a QCM at the work site to implement and manage the QC

Program. The only duties and responsibilities of the QCM are to manage and implement the QC Program on this contract. The QCM shall not be designated as the safety competent person as defined by Construction Safety manual. The QCM shall attend the QC Plan Meeting, shall prepare the QC Plan for COTR approval, shall conduct the Meeting of Mutual Understanding, conduct the QC meetings, perform and manage the Phases of Control, perform submittal review and approval, ensure verification of materials, ensure all testing and inspections are coordinated and performed by trained, authorized and certified personnel and testing laboratories. The QCM shall provide and submit QC certifications, accreditations, reports, and documentation as required in the contract specifications. The QCM shall not prepare Submittals. The QCM is responsible for assuring contractor compliance with Quality Standards as established in the contract specifications.

b. Qualifications: An individual with a minimum of five (5) years of construction

experience as a Project Manager, Superintendent, QCM, Inspector, or Construction Manager on similar size and type construction contracts which included the major trades that are part of this Contract. The individual shall be familiar with the requirements of the Construction Safety Manual, and have experience in the areas of hazard identification and safety compliance.

c. To enhance the effectiveness of the Quality Control Organization the QCM be

intimately involved in Contractor Quality Control. To this end, the QCM shall successfully complete the Army Corps of Engineers/NAVFAC Contractor Quality Control Course (details in Paragraph “Construction Quality Management Training”, below).

4. Construction Quality Management Training:

a. In addition to the above experience and education requirements, the Project

Manager, Superintendent, QCM, and Alternate QCM shall have completed the course entitled "Construction Quality Management for Contractors." If these individuals do not have a current certification, they shall obtain the CQM course certification within 60 - calendar days of award. This short course is periodically offered in alternate months by: (1) the Maryland Chapter, Associated General Contractors (AGC), 410-321-7870; [email protected] and by (2) the Virginia Chapter, Associated Builders and Contractors (ABC), 703-968-6205, [email protected]; [email protected]. The training uses Army Corps of Engineers course content. The course is facilitated by instructors from Army Corps of Engineers, North Atlantic Division, Baltimore District, and by instructors from the Naval Facilities Engineering Command, Engineering Field Activity Chesapeake.

5. Alternate QCM Duties and Qualifications

a. Duties: Designate an alternate for the QCM at the work site to serve in the event of

the designated QCM's absence. The period of absence may not exceed two weeks at one time, and not more than thirty (30) workdays during a calendar year.

b. Qualifications: The qualification requirements for the Alternate QCM shall be the



same as for the QCM.

6. Safety Representatives Duties and Qualifications: Al l safety ro le wi l l be addressed by the Projec t Superintendent

7. Project Scheduler:

a. Duties: Provide a Project Scheduler, either as Contractor’s employee or as

Contractor’s consultant, to provide planning, evaluation, and reporting using CPM scheduling, and to prepare required schedules. The Scheduler shall be an active participant at all meetings related to Project progress, alleged delays, and time impacts. Shall be available on-site full time. Time-impact analyses and special reports shall be provided at no additional cost to The Authority.

b. Qualifications: Minimum of two (2) years’ experience and not less than one (1)

project of similar size and scope, with the capability to produce CPM reports and diagrams within twenty-four (24) hours of COTR’s request. The Project Scheduler shall be classified as one of the Contractor’s key personnel.

8. Erosion and Sediment Control Inspector

a. Duties: The Erosion and Sediment Control Inspector shall be responsible for inspecting the erosion and sediment controls, reporting requirements, and for ensuring conformance with the approved Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SPPP). The Erosion and Sediment Control Inspector may have other duties; however, the designated individual shall be familiar with the requirements set forth in the Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook.

9. Submittal Reviewer (s) Duties and Qualifications:

a. Duties: Provide Submittal Reviewer(s), other than the QCM, qualified in the discipline(s) being reviewed, to review and certify that each and all submittals meet the requirements of the Contract prior to review and approval by the QCM.

b. Qualifications: Each submittal shall be reviewed by a registered Professional

Engineer in the Commonwealth of Virginia with ten (10) years construction experience.

10. Professional Land Surveyor: (Not Used)

11. Registered Fire Protection Engineer (FPE):

a. Duties: Shall be an independent third party hired directly by the Contractor as an integral part of the prime construction Contractor's Quality Control Organization. The Registered FPE shall have no business relationships with the contractor (owner, partner, operating officer, distributor, salesman, or technical representative) or with any subcontractors involved with this project; or with any fire protection equipment device manufacturers, suppliers, or installers for any such equipment provided as part of this project. The Registered FPE shall be responsible for review, approval, and coordination of all fire protection system material submittals, calculations, shop drawings, etc.

b. Qualifications: The Fire Protection Engineer shall be a registered Professional

Engineer in the Commonwealth of Virginia who has had a minimum of ten (10) years’ experience as a fire protection engineer.



1.10 QC PLAN MEETING

A. Within ten (10) calendar days of notice of award and prior to submission of the QC plan, meet with the COTR and QA Manager to discuss the QC plan requirements of this Contract. The purpose of this meeting is to communicate expectations and facilitate understanding of the QC plan requirements prior to plan development and submission.

1.11 QUALITY CONTROL (QC) PLAN

A. The QC Manager shall prepare and provide, for approval by the COTR, a QC plan submitted in a 3-ring binder with pages numbered sequentially that covers both on-site and off-site work and includes but may not necessarily be limited to the following:

B. A table of contents listing the major sections identified with tabs in the following order:

1. QC ORGANIZATION 2. PERSONNEL MATRIX 3. NAMES AND QUALIFICATIONS 4. DUTIES, RESPONSIBILITY AND AUTHORITY OF QC PERSONNEL 5. APPOINTMENT LETTERS 6. OUTSIDE ORGANIZATIONS QC STAFF (subcontractors and consultants) INCLUDING

INSPECTION AND TESTING AGENCIES 7. CERTIFICATIONS, QUALIFICATIONS, AND ACCREDITATIONS 8. TESTING AND INSPECTION PLAN, AND TESTING LOG 9. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, 90 DAY INITIAL SUBMITTAL REGISTER, AND

FINAL SUBMITTAL REGISTER WHEN APPROVED BY COTR 10. LIST OF ALL DEFINABLE FEATURES OR ELEMENTS OF WORK 11. PROCEDURES FOR PERFORMING THE PHASES OF CONTROL 12. INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS, DUTIES, AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF SPECIAL

INSPECTIONS, SPECIALISTS, SPECIALTY PERSONNEL, AND MANUFACTURERS REPRESENTATIVES

13. DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS AND PROCEDURES 14. ESTABLISH A PROGRAM TO IDENTIFY, RECORD, TRACK, COMPLETE AND

ELIMINATE DEFICIENCIES AND REWORK ITEMS 15. PROCEDURES FOR COMPLETION INSPECTION 16. FORMS 17. ATTACHMENTS

C. A chart showing the QC organizational structure.

D. A personnel matrix showing for each Section of the specifications who, by name, shall review and approve submittals, who, by name, shall perform and document the Phases of Control, and who, by name, shall perform and document the testing and inspections.

E. Names and qualifications, in résumé format, for each person in the QC organization. Include

the CQM course certifications for the Project Manager, Superintendent, QCM and Alternate QCM as required by the paragraphs entitled "Construction Quality Management Training" and "Alternate QCM Duties and Qualifications".



F. Identify duties, responsibilities, and authority of each person in the QC organization.

G. Letters signed by an officer of the firm appointing the QCM and Alternate QCM, stating that they are responsible for implementing and managing the Contractor’ s QC Program and is the primary individual responsible for the management and implementation of processes, procedures, and requirements that establish quality in construction identified in the QC Plan as mandated in the contract specifications. The QCM shall notify The Authority and Management of all failures and deficiencies in these QC management systems. Include in this letter the responsibility of the QCM and Alternate QCM to implement and manage the three phases of quality control and their authority to stop work that is not in compliance with the contract. The QCM shall issue letters of direction to all other QC staff and specialists under their control outlining their duties, authorities, and responsibilities, as outlined in the QC Organization section of the contract specifications. Copies of the letters shall be included in the QC plan.

H. A listing of all sub-contractors employed by the General Contractor, a description of each

subcontractor’s provided services, each subcontractor’s QC representative’s name, and contact phone numbers.

I. Testing laboratory information required by the paragraphs entitled "Accreditation

Requirements" or "Construction Materials Testing Laboratory Requirements", as applicable. Include all certification and accreditation requirements required in the contract for each laboratory and testing technician.

J. Submit in this section all certifications, qualifications, and accreditations as required for each

Section, Definable Feature or Element of Work in the Specifications.

K. A Testing and Inspection Plan, and Testing Log that includes all tests and inspections required in the contract, referenced by the specification paragraph number requiring the test and inspection, the frequency, the desired results, and the person, by name, responsible for each test and inspection, and shall be identified as a scheduled (CPM) activity.

L. Procedures for preparing, reviewing, approving, and managing submittals. Provide the name(s)

of the person(s) in the QC organization authorized to prepare, review and certify submittals prior to approval. The QCM shall not prepare submittals. Provide the initial submittal register as specified in Section entitled "Submittals." Once final submittal registry, accounting for all submittals, is approved by the COTR, insert registry into the QC Plan.

M. List of Definable Features or Elements of Work. The list shall be cross-referenced to the

contractor's Construction Schedule and all specification sections. For projects requiring a Progress Chart, the list of definable features or elements of work shall include but not be limited to all items of work on the schedule. For projects requiring a Network Analysis Schedule, the list of definable features or elements of work shall include but not be limited to all critical path activities. Include a chart of common deficiencies for all definable features or elements of work. Detail the control procedures that shall be employed to eliminate these common deficiencies. All elements of work and definable features of work in this contract shall be incorporated in the Three Phases of Control.

N. Procedures for Performing the Three Phases of Control. The primary purpose of the Three- Phases of Control is to require the contractor to plan and schedule each work activity to ensure quality is established, constructed, and maintained for each Definable Feature or Element of Work as required in the contract specifications. The contractor shall develop a plan for



incorporating each of the Definable Features or Elements of Work into a Quality Production effort. The Three Phases of Control are the core of the contractor’s Construction Quality Management System as outlined in the contractor’s QC Plan and contract specifications. The plan shall detail who shall be responsible for scheduling the phases, conducting the phases, as well as documenting the phases of work. The use of project specific checklists forms may be helpful. However, the QC Plan and the contract specifications requirements establish the quality, not just the checklists. The Preparatory and Initial Phases and meetings shall be conducted with a view towards establishing, achieving, and maintaining quality construction by planning ahead and identifying potential problems early for each Definable Feature or Element of work.

O. Establish an Inspection Program utilizing an Inspection Log and Signoff Sheets: The

Contractor’s superintendent shall establish, coordinate, and maintain with all trades and personnel, for each Definable Feature or Element of Work, a system of inspections and signoff sheets to certify that all work under the superintendent’s control has been coordinated, constructed, and installed according to the plans and specifications. All work shall be documented as being inspected and signed-off by the contractor before starting and performing construction on the next Definable Feature or Element of Work. These inspections and sign-off sheets shall be incorporated into the Phases of Control.

P. Identify all inspection requirements, duties, and responsibilities of Specialists, Specialty

Personnel, and Manufacturer’s Representatives. As outlined by the Engineer of Record, include a separate list of Special Inspections according to the requirements of the current Virginia Uniform Statewide Building Code (VUSBC).

Q. Documentation procedures and requirements, including proposed report formats, necessary to

provide materials, equipment, workmanship, fabrication, construction and operations that comply with the requirements of this Contract.

R. Procedures to identify, record, track, complete, and eliminate deficiencies and rework items.

S. Procedures for Identifying and Documenting the Completion Inspection process. Include in

these procedures the responsible party for punch out inspection, pre-final inspection, and final acceptance inspection.

T. Submit, for approval, a complete set of report forms to be utilized on this project.

U. All applicable subcontractors and suppliers Quality Control Plans complete with Contactor’s

CQC planned involvement.

1.12 MEETING OF MUTUAL UNDERSTANDING

A. After submission and approval of the QC Plan, and prior to the start of any physical construction, meet with the COTR and subcontractors to present the Contractor’s QC Program required by this Contract. The purpose of the meeting is to develop a mutual understanding of the contractor’s Quality Control Program, to include the contractor’s QC details, processes, and procedures to assure and control quality, including the requirements of documentation, administration for on-site and off-site work, and the coordination of the Contractor's management, production, and QC personnel. At the meeting, the Project Manager and QC Manager shall be required to explain in detail how the QC Program works. Discuss the Phases



of Control and how it will be implemented for each definable feature or element of work. As a minimum, the Contractor's personnel required to attend shall include an officer of the firm, the Project Manager, Project Superintendent, QCM, Alternate QCM, and Subcontractor Representatives for each Definable Feature or Element of Work. Include all Testing and Inspection Agencies required for the contract. Each subcontractor assigned to the contract shall have QC duties and responsibilities and shall have a principal of the firm at the meeting. Minutes of the meeting shall be prepared by the QCM and signed by the Project Manager. The Contractor shall provide a copy of the signed minutes to all attendees.

1.13 QC MEETINGS

A. After the start of construction, the QCM shall conduct QC meetings bi-weekly at the work site with the Project Manager, Superintendent, Subcontractor’s Foremen, and Safety Representative. The QCM shall prepare the minutes of the meeting and provide a copy to the COTR within two (2) workdays after the meeting. The COTR may attend these meetings. The QCM shall notify the COTR at least two (2) workdays in advance of each meeting. To prepare, review, and address quality issues as outlined below and as addressed in the COTR’s Progress Meeting, the QCM shall conduct these meetings in advance of the COTR’s weekly progress meeting. As a minimum, the following shall be discussed and addressed at each QC meeting:

1. Review the minutes of the previous meeting.

2. Review the schedule and the status of work:

a. Work, testing, or inspections accomplished since last meeting b. Special Inspections scheduled in the next two (2) weeks c. Inspection and Signoff schedules in the next two (2) weeks for each Definable

Feature of Work d. Rework items and deficiencies identified since last meeting e. Rework items and deficiencies corrected since last meeting

3. Review the status of submittals, O & M data and Warranty Manuals:

a. Submittals, O & M data and Warranties reviewed and approved since last meeting b. Submittals, O & M data and Warranties required in the near future

4. Review the work to be accomplished in the next two (2) weeks:

a. Establish completion dates for rework items and deficiencies.

b. Update the schedule showing planned and actual dates of the preparatory, initial, and follow-up phases, including testing and any other inspections required by this contract.

c. Discuss construction methods and the approach that shall be used to provide quality construction by planning ahead and identifying potential problems for each definable feature or element of work.

d. Discuss status of off-site and on-site work for inspections and testing. e. Documentation required for each construction activity and definable feature or

element of work. f. Discuss upcoming Job Hazard Analyses (JHAs).



5. Resolve QC and production problems and assist in resolving Request for Information issues.

6. Address items that may require revising the QC plan:

a. Changes in QC organization personnel. b. Changes in processes, procedures, checklists, qualifications, accreditations,

certifications, testing, inspections, etc…

7. Review health and safety plan.

1.14 PHASES OF CONTROL

A. The Phases of Control shall adequately cover both on-site and off-site work and shall include the following for each definable feature or element of work. Managed by the contractor, with COTR approval, The Three Phases of Control are the core of the Construction Quality Management System.

B. Material Receiving Inspection: Contractor shall establish a formal material receiving inspection

program to verify material compliance to approved Shop Drawings, approved submittals, and the contract plans and specifications. Once material is received and inspected, submit Material Receiving Inspection Reports by the next calendar day after work is performed. Do not attach to the Quality Control Daily Report.

C. Material Location Reports: At weekly intervals, prepare a comprehensive list of materials delivered to and stored at the site. This report shall be cumulative in nature, showing all materials previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with report a statement of progress on and delivery dates for all materials or items of equipment being fabricated or stored away from the building site. Submit copies of report to COTR at weekly intervals.

D. Inspection Program utilizing an Inspection Log and Signoff Sheets: The Contractor’s

superintendent shall establish, coordinate, and maintain with all trades and personnel, for each Definable Feature or Element of Work, a system of inspections and signoff sheets to certify that all work under the superintendent’s control has been coordinated, constructed, and installed according to the plans and specifications. All work shall be documented as being inspected and signed-off by the contractor before starting and performing construction on the next Definable Feature or Element of Work. These inspections and sign-off sheets shall be incorporated into the Phases of Control.

E. Preparatory Phase: Notify the COTR at least two (2) workdays in advance of each preparatory phase. This phase shall include a meeting conducted by the QC Manager and attended by the superintendent, all subcontractor’s foremen responsible for the definable feature or element of work, the contractor’s Independent 3rd Party Testing, and inspection Agencies, and the Contractor’s Safety Representative. Preparatory meetings will not be conducted without having these individuals present at the meeting, having approved submittals, and approved JHAs. If all personnel are not present, or if submittals and JHAs are not approved, cancel Preparatory Phase meeting. Document the results of the preparatory phase actions in the daily Quality Control Daily Report and in the Preparatory Phase Checklist. As a minimum the following should be covered prior to beginning work on each definable feature or element of work:

1. Review each paragraph of the applicable specification sections.



2. Review the project drawings. 3. Verify that appropriate shop drawings, O & M data, Warranties, and submittals for

materials and equipment have been submitted and approved. Verify receipt of approved factory test results, when required. If submittals are not approved, cancel Preparatory Phase meeting.

4. Establish control to be utilized to assure work complies with the contract plans and specifications.

5. Review the testing and inspection plan and ensure that provisions have been made to provide the required QC testing and inspections.

6. Examine the work area to ensure that the required preliminary work has been completed. 7. Examine the required materials, equipment, and sample work to ensure that they are on

hand and conform to the approved shop drawings and submitted data. 8. Discuss construction methods, construction tolerances, workmanship standards, and the

approach that shall be used to provide quality construction by planning ahead and identifying potential problems for each definable feature or element of work.

9. Discuss control measures to ensure quality through a system of sign-off sheets and inspections. All work shall be inspected and signed-off by the contractor before starting construction on the next Definable Feature or Element of Work. These inspections shall be incorporated into the Phases of Control.

10. Review the safety plan and appropriate job hazard analysis (JHA) to ensure that applicable safety requirements are met, and that required Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) are submitted. If the JHA is not approved, cancel Preparatory Phase meeting.

F. Initial Phase: Notify the COTR at least two (2) workdays in advance of each initial phase.

When the Standard of Quality for workmanship has been established for that definable feature or element of work, conduct the Initial Phase with the QC Manager, superintendent, all subcontractors’ foremen responsible for the definable feature or element of work’s quality standard, the contractor’s Independent 3rd Party Testing and Inspection Agencies, and the Contractor’s Safety Representative. Initial meetings will not be conducted without having these individuals present at the meeting, having approved submittals, and approved JHAs. If all personnel are not present, cancel Initial Phase meeting. Observe the initial segment of the definable feature or element of work to ensure that the work complies with Contract requirements. Document the results of the initial phase in the daily Quality Control Daily Report and in the Initial Phase Checklist. Repeat the initial phase for each new crew to work on-site, or when acceptable levels of specified quality are not being met. As a minimum the following should be covered for each definable feature or element of work:

1. Ensure controls established during Preparatory Phase are adequate to allow work to proceed in compliance with the plans and specifications.

2. Establish the Standard of Control for Quality required for workmanship as required in the specifications.

3. Resolve conflicts. 4. Ensure testing and inspections are performed by an approved Independent 3rd Party Testing

and Inspection Agencies. 5. Discuss control measures to ensure quality through a system of sign-off sheets and

inspections. All work will be inspected and signed-off by the contractor before starting construction on the next Definable Feature or Element of Work. These inspections shall be incorporated into the Phases of Control.

6. Check work procedures for compliance with the Safety Plan and the appropriate job hazard analysis to ensure that applicable safety requirements are met.

G. Follow-Up Phase: Perform the following for on-going daily work, or more frequently as necessary until the completion of each definable feature or element of work and document in



the daily Quality Control Daily Report:

1. Ensure the work is in compliance with Contract requirements. 2. Maintain the Standard of Control for Quality of workmanship established at the

Preparatory and Initial Phases. 3. Ensure that testing and inspections are performed by an approved Independent 3rd Party

Testing Agency. 4. Ensure that rework items and deficiencies are being identified, tracked, and corrected. 5. All work will be inspected and signed-off by the contractor before starting construction on

the next Definable Feature or Element of Work. 6. Eliminate repetitive Deficiencies and Rework. 7. Perform safety inspections.

H. Code-Required Inspections:

1. Comply with the current edition, approved by the Commonwealth of Virginia of the VUSBC, "Special Inspections” or other agencies having jurisdiction.

2. Contractor is not responsible for Special Inspections according to requirements of the current Virginia Uniform Statewide Building Code (VUSBC). Special Inspections are to be performed by the Authority’s agent.

3. Contractor will maintain and submit monthly a Code and Special Inspection Control Log, chronologically recording each Code and Special Inspection notification to the COTR, testing and/or inspections performed under the VUSBC, or other agencies having jurisdiction on-site, including the nature of the tests or inspections, the date performed, the results, approval or causes for rejection, corrective action taken, and dates of subsequent tests, inspections and final acceptance.

4. Notice to COTR: Notify COTR, in writing, at least two (2) workdays in advance of all code-required inspections. COTR should be apprised in advance of every preparatory and initial inspection. All preparatory, initial, and follow-up inspections shall be made a matter of record in Contractor's quality-control documentation.

I. Additional Preparatory and Initial Phases

1. Additional Preparatory and Initial Phase meetings shall be repeated for all definable features or elements of work where the Initial Standard of Control has changed or is not maintained; examples where Preparatories or Initial Meetings may need to be repeated are:

a. Changes in the QC Organization, supervision, or changes to personnel performing

the work. b. When the quality standards established at the Preparatory and Initial Meetings

have changed or are no longer acceptable. c. Changes of materials. d. Changes in equipment. e. Changes in the Season. f. Changes in Weather. g. Changes to the Environment. h. If work is resumed after a substantial period of inactivity. i. When the standard of Quality is not recognized or understood by those producing

the work as established in the specifications and the Three Phases of Control meetings.

j. As required by the COTR in writing.

J. Notification of Phases of Control for Off-Site Work



1. On determination by COTR that an item shall require surveillance by the Authority at the

point of production, manufacture, or shipment, Contractor shall be notified, in writing, of such determination. Contractor shall furnish to COTR three copies of all purchase orders or subcontracts, for all tiers of subcontractors or suppliers for each item. In addition, copies of documented quality-control operations, tests, and inspections shall be made available to the Authority's representative at the point of production, manufacture, or shipment. The QCM shall notify the COTR at least three (3) weeks prior to the start of the preparatory and initial phases.

K. Notification of Off-Site Inspections and Tests:

1. If Factory Witness Tests and Inspections are required for this project, follow procedures outlined in the technical specifications for scheduling, testing, and inspection requirements.

2. Identify these tests and inspections in the contractor’s QC Plan.

1.15 SUBMITTAL REVIEW AND APPROVAL

A. Procedures for preparation, review, approval, and submission of submittals are described in Division 01 Section “Submittals”.

B. The QC Manager shall not prepare submittals, but shall review and approve submittals.

1.16 TESTING

A. Comply with all testing and inspection requirements as outlined in the technical specification sections of this contract, to include compliance with all applicable provisions and requirements of Division 1.

B. Independent Testing and Inspection Laboratory: When codes or requirements of the contract

require tests or inspections by civil, mechanical, electrical, VUSBC, or other entities, a corporately and financially independent testing or inspection organization shall be contracted by the Contractor to perform these contractually required tests and inspections. These testing and inspection agencies shall function as an unbiased testing and inspection authority; professionally independent of the contractor, subcontractors, manufacturers, suppliers, and installers of equipment; or systems evaluated by the testing and inspection organizations for this contract. The various types of independent accrediting agencies and requirements are listed below:

C. Accreditation Requirements: Construction materials testing and inspection laboratories

performing work on Authority construction contracts shall be accredited by one of the laboratory accreditation authorities. The laboratory's scope of accreditation shall include the ASTM standards listed in the paragraph titled "Construction Materials Testing Laboratory Requirements" as appropriate to the testing field. The policy applies to the specific laboratory performing the actual testing or inspection and the testing technicians performing the tests and inspections, not just the "Corporate Office".

D. Electrical testing of components, equipment, and systems: The testing firm shall be regularly engaged in the testing of electrical equipment, devices, installations, and systems. The testing firm shall have at least five (5) years’ experience in the testing of electrical equipment of the type, rating, and voltage used on this Project. The testing laboratories shall be a current full-



member company of the International Electrical Testing Association (http://www.netaworld.org/). This independent testing firm shall perform testing and inspections as required under the terms of this Contract.

E. Structural and Pipe Welding: An independent testing and inspection firm shall perform all

structural and pipe welding examinations as required by this Contract. The inspectors employed by the firm shall hold current certification as an AWS Certified Welding Inspector (CWI) for visual weld examinations and ASNT-TC-1A Certification for nondestructive examination of welds. ASNT-TC-1A certifications shall be by an ASNT-TC-1A ACCP Level III.

F. Construction Materials Testing Laboratory Requirements: Provide an independent construction

material testing laboratory accredited by an acceptable laboratory accreditation authority to perform sampling, inspections, and tests required by this Contract. Testing laboratories that have obtained accreditation by an acceptable laboratory accreditation authority listed in the paragraph entitled "Laboratory Accreditation Authorities" shall submit with the Quality Control Plan, a copy of the Certificate of Accreditation and Scope of Accreditation. The scope of the laboratory's accreditation shall include the test or inspection methods and certifications required by the Contract. On and Off-site testing and inspection facilities shall submit a certified statement by the Supervising Professional Engineer, licensed in the Commonwealth of Virginia, as meeting the specification requirements and the following minimum ASTM standards listed below as appropriate to field and laboratory testing and inspection. Include all Testing Technician qualifications per accredited Laboratory and specification requirements.

1. Laboratories engaged in testing of construction materials shall meet the requirements of ASTM E 329.

2. Laboratories engaged in testing of concrete and concrete aggregates shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 1077.

3. Laboratories engaged in testing of bituminous paving materials shall meet the requirements of ASTM D 3666.

4. Laboratories engaged in testing of soil and rock, as used in engineering design and construction, shall meet the requirements of ASTM D 3740.

5. Laboratories engaged in nondestructive testing (NDT) shall meet the requirements of ASTM E 543.

6. Laboratories engaged in Hazardous Materials Testing shall meet the requirements of OSHA and EPA.

G. Laboratory Accreditation Authorities: Laboratory Accreditation Authorities are the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) administered by the National Institute of Standards and Technology, the American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) program, ICBO Evaluation Service, Inc. (ICBO ES), and the American Association for Laboratory Accreditation (A2LA) program and the Washington Area Council of Engineering Laboratories (WACEL). Furnish to the COTR, a copy of the current Certificate of Accreditation and Scope of Accreditation. The scope of the laboratory's accreditation shall include the test and inspection methods required by the Contract.

H. Capability Check: The COTR retains the right to examine the laboratory equipment in the

proposed laboratory, the laboratory’s managers and testing technicians’ qualifications, procedures, techniques, and other items for compliance with the standards set forth in this Contract.

I. Capability Recheck: If non-conformities are discovered during the capability check or any

succeeding recheck, Contractor shall be assessed a charge of $750.00 to reimburse the Authority for each recheck of the laboratory or the checking of a subsequently selected



laboratory. These charges shall be deducted from the total amount due Contractor.

J. Test and Inspection Report Results: Cite applicable Contract requirements, tests, inspections, or analytical procedures used. Provide actual results and include a statement that the item tested, inspected, or analyzed conforms or fails to conform to specified requirements. IF THE ITEM FAILS TO CONFORM, NOTIFY COTR IMMEDIATELY. Conspicuously stamp the cover sheet for each report in large red letters "CONFORMS" or "DOES NOT CONFORM" to the specification requirements, whichever is applicable. A certified testing laboratory manager performing all laboratory tests shall sign all test results. A certified technician performing all field tests and inspections shall sign all inspection reports. All test and inspection reports shall be reviewed, certified, and signed by a professional engineer, licensed in the Commonwealth of Virginia, as complying with the contract specifications, before submission to COTR. Submit within two (2) workdays after the tests or inspections are performed.

K. Control Tests: Outlines those tests and inspections conducted by the Contractor that assist in

maintaining the standard of quality for all operations and procedures, for each Definable Feature or Element of Work, as identified in the Quality Control Plan and the Specifications. As described above, the Contractor shall procure the services of an independent commercial laboratory to perform the required control tests and inspections. The contractor shall identify these minimum Control Test and Inspection requirements:

1. Procedures, requirements, analytical procedures used, and criteria for all Testing and Inspections.

2. Methods of construction. 3. Number of control tests, inspections, and frequency of tests and inspections to be made for

each Definable Feature or Element of Work. 4. Provide actual results and include a statement that the item tested, inspected, or analyzed

conforms or fails to conform to specified requirements. 5. Identify testing or inspection agency performing testing and inspections. 6. Ensure proper certification and sign-off of all tests and inspections conducted and reviewed

by Contractor Independent testing and inspecting Technicians, Managers, and Professional Engineers.

7. The QC Manager will ensure only accredited laboratories and certified technicians are performing testing and inspections as outlined in the contract specifications.

8. Notify COTR a minimum of two (2) workdays in advance of contractor performing any testing and inspections.

L. Acceptance or Validation Testing by The Authority: Contractor shall furnish to COTR the quantities of materials to be used for Acceptance or Validation testing as required in the Specifications. Acceptance or Validation testing shall be performed by the Authority at an independent laboratory at no cost to Contractor. No direct payment shall be made to Contractor for the furnishing of materials used for Acceptance or Validation testing. The Authorities Acceptance and Validation program does not relieve the contractor of its responsibility to fully comply with all regulations, standards, codes, and quality requirements of the contract specifications.

M. Staffing: All laboratory, inspection, and testing technician personnel shall work in an

accredited laboratory under the supervision of a Professional Engineer licensed in the Commonwealth of Virginia.

1.17 QC CERTIFICATIONS



A. Quality Control Daily Report Certification

1. Each Quality Control Daily Report shall contain the following statement:

a. “On behalf of (Name of Contractor), I certify that this report and the Inspector's Daily Reports are complete and correct, and that all materials and equipment used, as well as work performed during this reporting period are in compliance with Drawings, Specifications, and Contract provisions, except as noted in this report or attached reports.”

B. Application for Payment Certification:

1. Refer to Division 01 Section "Application for Payment" for address to which the Applications shall be sent. Coordinate language with Division 01 Section: “Application for Payment”.

C. Completion Certification:

1. Upon completion of work under this Contract, the QCM shall furnish a certification letter to the Contracting Officer attesting that " that all work required of the contract has been completed, inspected, tested and is in full compliance with the Contract Documents."

1.18 COMPLETION INSPECTIONS

A. Punch-Out Inspection: Near the completion of all work or any increment thereof established by a completion time stated in the Contract Clause entitled "Commencement, Prosecution, and Completion of Work," or stated elsewhere in the specifications, the QCM shall conduct an inspection of the work and develop a "punch-list" of items which do not conform to the approved drawings and specifications. Include in the punch-list any remaining items on the "Deficiency Log" which were not corrected prior to the Punch-Out Inspection. The punch-list shall include the estimated date by which the deficiencies will be corrected. A copy of the punch-list shall be provided to the COTR. The QCM and staff shall make follow-on inspections to ascertain that all deficiencies have been corrected before requesting a Pre-Final Inspection. Once all deficiencies are corrected the Contractor shall notify the COTR that the facility or item is ready for The Authority’s "Pre-Final Inspection."

B. Pre-Final Inspection: The Authority or Authority’s Representative will perform this inspection

to verify that the facility is complete and ready to be inspected. An Authority "Pre-Final Punch- List" may be developed as a result of this inspection. Any items noted on the "Pre-Final" inspection shall be corrected in timely manner and shall be accomplished before the contract completion date for the work or any particular increment thereof if the project is divided into increments by separate completion dates. The QCM shall ensure that all items on the Punch-list are corrected prior to notifying the Authority of a request for a "Final" Acceptance Inspection.

C. Final Acceptance Inspection: The COTR, The Authorities Representatives, the QCM, the

superintendent, and other personnel as deemed necessary by the COTR shall be in attendance for this inspection. The Contracting Officer based on corrections to the punch-lists on the “Pre- Final” inspection will formally schedule the Final Acceptance Inspection. The contractor shall give Written Notice to the COTR and CO, at least fourteen (14) calendar days prior to the Final Acceptance Inspection, stating that all contract work is completed and all items previously identified on the Punch-Out and Pre-Final Inspections have been corrected and are accepted by The Authority’s Representatives and COTR. The contractor will also furnish a Certification



Letter, from the QC Manager to the COTR and CO, stating and attesting “that all work required of the contract has been completed, inspected, tested and is in full compliance with the Contract Documents.” Failure of the Contractor to give this Written Notice and Certification Letter to the COTR and CO shall be reason and grounds for the Contracting Officer to bill the Contractor for the Authority's additional inspection costs in accordance with the clause in the Contract Provisions entitled "Inspection of Construction." When the Contracting Officer takes possession of partially completed work, it shall be in accordance with clause in the Contract Provisions entitled "Use and Possession Prior to Completion".

1.19 DOCUMENTATION

A. Contractor shall maintain current quality control records, on approved forms, of all control activities, production, tests, and inspections performed. These records shall include factual evidence that required tests and/or inspections have been performed, including type and number of tests and/or inspections involved; results of tests and/or inspections; nature of defects, causes for rejection, etc.; proposed remedial action; and corrective actions taken. These records shall cover both conforming and defective or deficient features (non-conforming work) and shall include a statement that all supplies and materials incorporated into the work are in full compliance with terms of the Contract as documented in the Contractor’s materials receiving inspection program. Only Legible copies of these records shall be furnished, submitted, and delivered to COTR. The records shall cover all work placed subsequent to the previously furnished records and shall be verified by Contractor's QCM. Contractor shall document all tests and inspections as specified in the technical provisions of the Specifications. All specified records shall be readily available for review by COTR throughout the life of the Contract.

B. Maintain current and complete records of on-site and off-site QC Program operations and

activities. Establish and maintain the following in a series of 3 ring binders. Binders shall be divided and tabbed as shown below. These binders shall be readily available to the Authority's Quality Assurance Team upon request.

1. All completed Preparatory and Initial Phase Reports, arranged by specification Section, Definable Feature, or Element of Work.

2. All milestone and required inspections, arranged by Activity/Event Number. 3. Special Inspection Control Log, arranged by Definable Feature or Element of Work and

Trade. 4. A current up-to-date copy of the approved Testing and Inspection Plan, and supporting

documentation that accounts for all testing and inspection requirements as listed in the specifications and the Monthly Summary Report of Tests and Inspections that documents all field tests, inspections, reports, and supporting documentation, arranged by date for each Definable Feature or Element of Work as identified in each specification section.

5. A current up-to-date copy of the Superintendent’s inspection logs and sign-off sheets for each Definable Feature or Element of Work.

6. Copies of all contract RFIs, arranged in numerical order. 7. Copies of all contract modifications, arranged in numerical order. Also include

documentation that modified work was accomplished. 8. A current up-to-date comprehensive copy of the Deficiency Log and Noncompliance Log.

C. Report Forms - A copy of all approved forms shall be included with the Quality Control Plan. The forms shall be designed to assist in the control of the quality. The following minimum requirements are listed for specific reports:

1. Quality Control Daily Report: Reports are required for each day that work is performed



and for every seven consecutive calendar days of no work and on the last day of a no-work period. Account for each calendar day throughout the life of the Contract. The reporting of work shall be identified by terminology consistent with the construction schedule. Quality Control Daily Reports are to be prepared, signed and dated by an approved QCM and shall contain the following information:

a. Identify Date of report, report number, Contract Number, and Contract Title. b. Identify Schedule Activity No., Submittal # and list equipment/material received

each day that is incorporated into the job. c. Indicate if Preparatory Phase work was performed today (Yes/No checkboxes).

d. If Preparatory Phase work was performed today (including on-site and off-site work), identify its Schedule Activity Number and Definable Feature or Element of Work. The Index number is a cross reference to the Preparatory Phase Checklist. An example of the Index number is: 0025-P01, where "0025" is the Quality Control Daily Report Number, "P" indicates Preparatory Phase, and "01" is the Preparatory Phase Checklist number(s) for this date. Each entry in this Section shall be accompanied with a corresponding Preparatory Phase Checklist.

e. Indicate if Initial Phase work was performed today (Yes/No checkboxes). f. If Initial Phase work was performed today (including on-site and off-site work),

identify its Schedule Activity Number and Definable Feature or Element of Work. The Index Number is a cross reference to the Initial Phase Checklist. An example of the Index Number is: 0025-I01, where "0025" is the Quality Control Daily Report Number, "I" indicates Initial Phase, and "01" is the Initial Phase Checklist number(s) for this date. Each entry in this Section shall be accompanied with a corresponding Initial Phase Checklist.

g. Results of the Follow-up Phase inspections held today (including on-site and off- site work), including Schedule Activity Number, location of definable feature or element of work, Specification Sections, etc. Indicate in the report for this definable feature or element of work that the work complies with the Contract as approved in the Initial Phase, work complies with safety requirements, and that required testing and inspections have been performed. Include a list of who performed the tests and inspections.

h. List the rework items and deficiencies identified, but not corrected by close of business, along with its associated Schedule Activity Number.

i. List the rework items and deficiencies corrected from the deficiency log along with the corrective action taken and its associated Schedule Activity Number.

j. Include a "remarks" section in this report that shall contain pertinent information including but not limited to:

(1) Directions received. (2) Quality control problem areas. (3) Deviations from the QC plan. (4) Construction deficiencies encountered. (5) QC meetings held that day. (6) Acknowledgement that record drawings, specifications, O & M data, and

Warranty Manuals, have been updated and/or submitted. (7) Corrective direction given by the QC Organization and corrective action

taken by the Contractor. (8) For each remark given, identify the Schedule Activity Number that is

associated with the remark.

k. Quality Control Daily Report certification, signature, and date.



2. Superintendent Daily Report: This report shall be prepared anytime work or production is conducted or performed on or off site throughout the life of the contract. This Contractor’s Production Report is the primary document utilized by the Superintendent for documentation of all construction activities performed by the Contractor and/or their subcontractors. Sign-off sheets and Inspection logs will supplement and support this Daily Report. The reporting of work shall be identified by terminology consistent with the construction schedule and standard construction practices. Do not attach this report to the Quality Control Daily Report. The Superintendent Daily Reports are prepared, signed, and dated by an approved Superintendent and shall contain the following information:

a. Identify Date of report, report number, Contract Number, Contract Title, and

Location.

b. Identify Contractor’s name and Superintendent’s Name. c. Identify whether work was performed A.M and/or P.M. Include Weather with Max

Temperatures (F°) and Min. Temperatures (F°), precipitation, winds, humidity and dew point. Document any weather feature that may affect construction.

d. Enter Work Performed Today by Schedule Activity Number, Work Location and Description of Work Activity, Employer, Number of workers, the Trade of the workers and the hours of work conducted per each trade.

e. List Total of Work Hours on job site. Cumulative Total of Work Hours from Previous Report and Total of Work Hours from Start of Construction

f. Identify Job Safety: If Safety Meetings were Held. Was there any lost time Accidents? Was Crane/Man-lift/Trenching/Scaffold/HV Electric/High Work/or Hazmat Work accomplished? Was Hazardous Material or Waste Released into the Environment? List Safety Actions taken today. Safety Inspections Conducted. Have Safety Requirements been met?

g. Identify by submittal number all Equipment and/or Material received that day to be incorporated into the contract. Ensure all Equipment, Materials, and required quantities received have been inspected and approved in comparison to approved submittals. Give Description of Equipment and Material received; utilizing the Material Verification at delivery checklist and Material Location Reports as outlined in the contractors formal Material Receiving Inspection Program. The Superintendent shall ensure all materials, products, quantities and equipment incorporated in this contract are approved and are accepted before installation.

h. Identify Construction or Plant Equipment on the work site each day. Identify who owns the equipment? Describe the Type, Make, quantity, and Model of the Equipment and the hours utilized for each piece of equipment.

i. Remarks: Document construction activities, establishment, and maintenance of quality processes and procedures, observations, correction to deficiencies, and coordination of trades to ensure Quality Production. Document superintendent’s utilization of sign-off sheets, inspection sheets, checklists, submittals, etc… to instill and establish Quality. Identify production shortfalls and construction deficiencies and ways to correct these Deficiencies and short-falls on the Superintendent Daily Report. Document all deficiencies and corrections to Deficiencies on the Contractor’s Deficiency Log maintained by the QC manager.

3. Preparatory Phase Report: File this report for each Definable Feature or Element of Work that is in the Preparatory Phase. The report shall be identified by terminology consistent with the construction schedule. Do not attach this report to the Quality Control Daily Report of the same date.

a. Specification Section, date of report, and Contract number shall be filled out.

Duplicate this information in the header of the second page of the report.



b. Definable Feature or Element of Work, Schedule Activity Number and Index Number entry, and format shall match entry in the Preparatory Phase section of the Quality Control Daily Report. Duplicate this information in the header of the second page of the report.

c. Personnel Present: Indicate the number of hours of advance notice that was given to the COTR and indicate (Yes/No checkboxes) whether or not the COTR was notified. Indicate the Names of Preparatory Phase Meeting attendees, their position and their company affiliation. The meeting is conducted by the QCM and attended by the superintendent, all subcontractor’s foremen responsible for the

definable feature or element of work, the contractor’s Independent 3rd Party Testing and Inspection Agencies, and the General Contractor’s Safety Representative. If all personnel are not present, cancel Preparatory Phase meeting.

d. Submittals: Indicate if submittals have been approved (Yes/No checkboxes), if no indicate what has not been submitted. If submittals are not approved, cancel Preparatory Phase meeting. Are materials on hand (Yes/No checkboxes) and if not, what items are missing. Check delivered material/equipment against approved submittals and comment as required.

e. Material Storage: Indicate if materials/equipment is stored properly (Yes/No checkboxes) and if not, what action is/was taken.

f. Specifications: Review and comment on Specification Paragraphs that describe the material/equipment, procedure for accomplishing the work and clarify any differences.

g. Preliminary Work & Permits: Ensure preliminary work is in accordance with the contract documents and necessary permits are on file, if not, describe the action taken.

h. Testing and Inspections: Identify who will perform tests and/or inspections, the frequency, and where tests and/or inspections are to occur. Review the testing and inspection plan, report abnormalities, and if the test and inspection facilities have been approved.

i. Discuss Control Procedures that shall be employed to consistently obtain the required specified quality; for example Sign-off sheets and Inspection logs.

j. Safety: Indicate if the job hazard analysis (JHA) has been approved (Yes/No checkboxes) and comment on the review of the applicable portions of the Construction Safety Manual. If the JHA is not approved, cancel Preparatory Phase meeting.

k. Meeting Comments: Note comments and remarks during the Preparatory Phase Meeting that was not addressed in previous sections of this checklist.

l. Other Items or Remarks: Note any other remarks or items that were a result of the Preparatory Phase.

m. QCM shall sign and date the report.

4. Initial Phase Checklist: Complete this report for each Definable Feature or Element of Work that is in the Initial Phase of Control. The report shall be identified by terminology consistent with the construction schedule. Do not attach this report to the Quality Control Daily Report of the same date.

a. Specification Section, date of report, and Contract number shall be entered. b. Definable Feature or Element of Work, Schedule Activity Number and Index

Number entry, and format shall match entry in the Initial Phase section of the Quality Control Daily Report.

c. Personnel Present: Indicate the number of hours of advance notice that was given to the COTR and indicate (Yes/No checkboxes) whether or not the COTR was



notified. Indicate the Names of Initial Phase Meeting attendees, their position and company/Authority they are with. This meeting is conducted by the QCM and attended by the superintendent, all subcontractor’s foremen responsible for the definable feature or element of work, the contractor’s Independent 3rd Party Testing and Inspection Agencies, and the General Contractor’s Safety Representative. If all personnel are not present, cancel the Initial Phase meeting.

d. Control Procedures: Comment on control procedures identified at Preparatory Phase of Control and assurance that work is in accordance with plans, specifications, and submittals; for example Sign-off sheets and Inspection logs. Control procedures not producing the required compliance shall be adjusted until the procedures consistently obtain the required quality.

e. Preliminary Work: Ensure preliminary work being placed is in compliance and if not, what action is/was taken.

f. Workmanship: Identify whether the Standard of Control was established and accepted. Identify where the initial Standard of Control work is located; if a sample panel or Mock-up is required (Yes/No checkboxes); is the initial work the sample (Yes/No checkboxes); and if Yes, describe the panel location and precautions taken to preserve the sample.

g. Resolution: Comment on any differences and the resolutions reached. h. Check Safety: Comment on the safety review of the job conditions. i. Other: Note any other remarks or items that were a result of the Initial Phase. j. QCM shall sign and date the report.

D. Testing Log: As tests are performed, the QCM shall record, as a tracking device, all tests on the "Testing Log", the dates that tests were performed, the dates the test results were forwarded to the COTR, remarks and acknowledgement that an accredited or Contracting Officer approved testing laboratory was used, the dates that all failing or nonconforming tests were corrected, accepted, or approved. Forward a copy of the updated “Test Log" upon request of the COTR. Log shall be used as a management tool by the QCM to account and track all tests requirements of the QC Plan and contract specifications. Do not attach to the Quality Control Daily Report.

E. Deficiency Log: The QCM shall maintain a comprehensive list of all work that does not comply with the contract, identifying what items need to be reworked, the date the item was originally discovered, the date the item shall be corrected by, and the date the item was corrected. All failed or nonconforming work, tests, and inspections will be documented in this Log. There is no requirement to report on the Deficiency Log a rework or deficient item that is corrected the same day it was discovered. Provide a copy of the comprehensive deficiency log weekly to the COTR at the weekly progress meeting and at the end of the month for the Deficiency Report. The Contractor shall be responsible for including on this log all items needing rework including those identified by the COTR and their staff. Do not attach to the Quality Control Daily Report.

F. Code and Special Inspection Control Log: The Contractor will maintain and submit monthly a

Code and Special Inspection Control Log, chronologically recording each Code and Special Inspection notification to the COTR, tests and/or inspections performed under the VUSBC, or other agencies having jurisdiction on-site, including the nature of the test or inspection, the date performed, the results, approval or causes for rejection, corrective action taken, and dates of subsequent tests, inspections, and final acceptance.

G. Test and Inspection Reports: Contractor shall be responsible for establishing a system that shall record, on approved forms, all tests, and inspection results. Information on test and/or inspection designation, location, date of test and/or inspection, specification requirements, results and retest results, causes for rejection and recommended remedial actions shall be



documented. A copy of the test and inspection results shall be sent directly from the Agency performing the testing services to the COTR. The COTR will be notified “IMMEDIATELY” of any failing tests and/or inspections. A certified technician performing all field tests and inspections shall sign all inspection reports. A certified testing laboratory manager performing all laboratory tests shall sign all test results. All test and/or inspection reports shall be reviewed, certified, and signed by a professional engineer, licensed in the Commonwealth of Virginia, as complying with the contract specifications. Do not attach to the Quality Control Daily Report. Submit within two (2) workdays after the test and/or inspection is performed.

1. Test and Inspection Reports shall be submitted twice per month for each Definable Feature

or Element of Work:

a. Submitted two (2) days after the test and/or inspection is performed. b. Submitted within two (2) days from the end of the month with the Monthly

Summary Report of Tests and Inspections.

H. Monthly Summary Report of Tests:

1. The QCM shall submit at the end of each month a current and up-to-date Monthly Summary Report of Tests and Inspections, per each Definable Feature or Element of Work, that includes and accounts for all testing and inspections performed to date for that specific Definable Feature or Element of Work in that month. Submit with each Monthly Summary Report of Tests and Inspections, all testing reports, and documentation pertaining to that month’s testing and inspections.

2. The Monthly Summary Report of Tests and Inspections will summarize, in detail, all information required of a Test and/or Inspection Report and contract specifications.

3. A Professional Engineer, licensed in the Commonwealth of Virginia, shall review, certify, and sign all Monthly Summary Report of Tests and Inspections as complying with the contract specifications.

I. Inspection Log and Signoff Sheets: The Contractor’s superintendent shall establish, coordinate, and maintain with all trades and personnel, for each Definable Feature or Element of Work, a system of inspections and signoff sheets to certify that all work under the superintendent’s control has been coordinated, constructed, and installed according to the plans and specifications. All work will be documented as being inspected and signed-off by the contractor before starting and performing construction on the next Definable Feature or Element of Work. These inspections and sign-off sheets shall be incorporated into the Phases of Control.

J. Monthly Deficiency Report: Contractor shall submit a monthly comprehensive deficiency

report to COTR identifying all nonconforming work, substandard tests and inspections identified during the contract period including the nature of the test or inspection, location and nature of defects, causes for rejection, and remedial actions taken or proposed for any open items on prior deficiency reports including the date scheduled for resolution of the item. Do not attach to the Quality Control Daily Report.

K. Record Drawings: The QCM is required to ensure the record drawings, required by Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents," are kept current on a daily basis and marked to show deviations which have been made from the construction drawings. Ensure each deviation has been identified with the appropriate modifying documentation (e.g. CN No., Modification No., Request for Information No., etc.). The QCM shall initial each deviation and each revision. Upon completion of work, the QCM shall furnish a certificate attesting to the accuracy of the record drawings prior to submission to the COTR.



L. Operation, Maintenance, and Warranty Manuals: The QCM shall ensure that the Operation and Maintenance data required by Division 01 Section “Operation and Maintenance Data” and the Warranties specified in Division 01 Section “Project Closeout” are inserted on a daily basis in the appropriate sections of the approved formatted manuals after they have been approved by the COTR.

M. Materials Receiving Inspection Report: Contractor shall establish a formal materials receiving

inspection program to verify material compliance to approved Shop Drawings, approved submittals, and the contract plans and specifications. Do not attach to the Quality Control Daily Report.

N. Material Location Report: At weekly intervals, prepare a comprehensive list of materials delivered to and stored at the site. This report shall be cumulative, showing materials previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with this report a statement of progress on and delivery dates for all materials or items of equipment being fabricated or stored away from the building site. Submit copies of report to COTR at weekly intervals.

1.20 NOTIFICATION ON NON-COMPLIANCE

A. The COTR will notify the contractor of any detected non-compliance with the foregoing requirements. The Contractor shall take immediate corrective action after the receipt of such notice. Such notice, when delivered to the Contractor via the Authority provided Oracle Primavera Unifier project management system shall be deemed sufficient for the purpose of notification. If the Contractor fails or refuses to comply promptly the Contracting Officer may:

1. Issue an order stopping all or part of the work until satisfactory corrective action has been taken. The Contractor shall make no part of the time lost, due to such stop orders, the subject of a claim for extension of time for excess costs or damages.

2. Repair, replace, or otherwise remedy the defective work at the Contractor’s expense. Cost incurred by the Authority to correct defective work shall be deducted from the total amount due the Contractor.

3. Withhold an amount from the payment due the Contractor as may be deemed necessary at the discretion of the Contracting Officer.

4. Terminate the Contractor’s right to proceed for Default after providing required notice.

B. In cases where implementation of the Quality Control Program does not comply with the Contractor’s Quality Control Plan, the contract provisions, or the Contractor fails to properly operate and maintain an effective Quality Control Program, the Contracting Officer may:

1. Order the Contractor to replace ineffective or unqualified Quality Control Personnel or subcontractors.

2. Issue an order stopping all or part of the work until acceptable personnel are on site and a new Quality Control Plan is approved by the COTR. The Contractor shall make no part of the time lost due to such stop orders the subject of claim for extension of time for excess costs or damages.

3. Take a credit from the contract for Quality Control Activities not performed.

4. Terminate the Contractors right to proceed for Default after providing required notice.

C. The Contractor shall maintain a detailed record of every non-compliance and corrective action taken.

D. Non-Compliance Notification: The COTR will use the Authority provided web-based Oracle



Primavera Unifier project management system (Unifier) to notify the Contractor on Non- Compliance work or material. Acknowledgement and corrective action by the Contractor shall be transmitted to the COTR through Unifier. The Authority will provide the Contractor a Unifier license(s) and training.




REFERENCES 014200 - 1


SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section defines many of the terms used elsewhere in the Construction Documents and lists complete names and telephone numbers for many of the associations and agencies identified elsewhere in the Construction Documents by their acronym.

B. Abbreviations, where not defined in the Contract Documents, will be interpreted by the Contracting Officer to mean the normal construction industry terminology.

C. Plural words will be interpreted as singular and singular words will be interpreted as plural where applicable for context of the Contract Documents.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in Sections I and II of the Authority Solicitation Offer and Award. Certain terms used in the Contract Documents are defined generally in this Article. Definitions and explanations contained in this Section are not necessarily either complete or exclusive, but are general for the Work to the extent that they may not be stated more explicitly in another element of the Contract Documents.

B. Approve: The term "approved," where used in regard to COTR's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, is limited to COTR's duties and responsibilities as delegated by the Contracting Officer in the Contract and Special Provisions.

C. Architect/Engineer: For the purpose of this Project, the "Design Professional of Record." To distinguish from the Contracting Officer and Contracting Officer's Technical Representative (COTR).

D. Authority: Metropolitan Washington Airports Authority

E. Award: The acceptance, by the Authority, of the successful offeror's proposal.

F. Award Date: The date on which the Authority gives notice of acceptance to the successful offeror.

G. AOA (or A.O.A.): Air Operations Area. The area of the Airport used or intended to be used for landing, taking off, surface maneuvering, loading, unloading, or servicing aircraft. This security area requires security badging. Workers in this area are required to obtain and display an AOA photo I.D. credential. Drivers in this area are required to obtain an Airport Vehicle Operator's Permit for the Air Operations Area.



H. Beneficial Use: Use by the Authority prior to 100 percent completion and final acceptance.

I. Contract Documents: Documents containing requirements of the Work. These include all Contract provisions and attachments made thereto or referenced therein.

J. Contract Provisions: The administrative and procedural requirements starting at Award Date and ending at Final Acceptance, as provided for in Section VII, "Contract Provisions."

K. Contract Time or Duration (Time Limit): The number of calendar days established in Section III, "Schedule," indicating the time allowed for the completion of all physical and administrative work contemplated in the Contract, including any authorized extensions thereto.

L. Contracting Officer's Technical Representative (COTR): The Contracting Officer's designated representative, as defined in Section VII, "Contract Provisions."

M. Contractor: Individual, partnership, corporation or joint venture under Contract to the Authority for performance of prescribed Work.

N. Drawings: Erection/installation/construction plans, or any other supplementary plans or similar graphic data, illustrating work to be performed that are provided to Contractor as part of the Contract Documents.

O. Directed: A command or instruction by the Authority. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."

P. Final Acceptance: Refer to Division 01 Section "Project Closeout."

Q. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."

R. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.

S. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.

T. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.

U. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.

V. "Installer": Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.

1. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to trades people of the corresponding generic name.



W. "Experienced": When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of ten previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

X. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is indicated.

Y. Punch list Work: Minor corrective actions required to achieve "Final Acceptance." Occurs after "Substantial Completion" of the Work in strict compliance with quality-control requirements.

Z. Roadway: (Not Used)

AA. Special Provisions: For the purpose of this Contract, the directions and requirements provided for in Section VI of the Contract Documents.

BB. Shop Drawings: Refer to Division 01 Section "Submittals."

CC. Specifications: General term comprising all directions, provisions and requirements contained herein, together with any other contractual requirements such as may be added or adopted as the Contract Provisions, Special Provisions, or Supplementary Conditions, all of which are necessary for the proper performance of the Contract.

DD. Substantial Completion: Refer to Division 01 Section "Project Closeout."

EE. Factory-Authorized Service Representative: An authorized representative of a manufacturer who is trained and approved by the manufacturer to inspect and approve the installation of manufacturer’s products and that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and who is authorized by the manufacturer to confirm the issuance of appropriate warranties.

1.4 INDUSTRY STANDARDS

A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.

B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Conflicting Requirements: Refer to Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for additional information regarding conflicting requirements.

1. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to COTR for a decision before proceeding.

D. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project shall be familiar with



industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.

1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source and make them available on request.

E. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up- to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) (800) 872-2253 Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (202) 272-0080

CFR

www.access-board.gov Code of Federal Regulations

(888) 293-6498

Available from Government Printing Office www.access.gpo.gov/nara/cfr

(202) 512-1530

CRD Handbook for Concrete and Cement Available from Army Corps of Engineers Waterways Experiment Station www.wes.army.mil

(601) 634-2355

DOD Department of Defense Military Specifications and Standards Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point www.dodssp.daps.mil

(215) 697-6257

DSCC Defense Supply Center Columbus (See FS)

FED-STD Federal Standard (See FS)

FS Federal Specification Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point. www.dodssp.daps.mil

(215) 697-6257

Available from General Services Administration www.fss.gsa.gov

(202) 501-1021

Available from National Institute of Building Sciences www.nibs.org

(202) 289-7800

FTMS Federal Test Method Standard (See FS)

ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. www.icc-es.org

(800) 423-6587



MIL See MILSPEC

MS MIL See MILSPEC

MILSPEC Military Specification and Standards Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point www.dodssp.daps.mil

(215) 697-6257

MUTCD Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices Department of Transportation Federal Highway Administration (See FHA. Located in Paragraph Federal Government Agencies").

UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (800) 872-2253

Available from Access Board (202) 272-0080 www.access-board.gov

1.5 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) www.aluminum.org

(202) 862-5100

AAADM American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers www.aaadm.com

(216) 241-7333

AABC Associated Air Balance Council www.aabchq.com

(202) 737-0202

AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association www.aamanet.org

(847) 303-5664

AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials http://www.transportation.org

(202) 624-5800

AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (The) www.aatcc.org

(919) 549-8141

ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association www.abma-dc.org

(202) 367-1155

ACI ACI International (American Concrete Institute) www.aci-int.org

(248) 848-3700



ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association http://www.concrete-pipe.org

(972) 506-7216

AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The) www.aeic.org

(205) 257-2530

AF&PA American Forest & Paper Association (800) 878-8878 www.afandpa.org (202) 463-2700

AGA American Gas Association www.aga.org

(202) 824-7000

AGC Associated General Contractors of America (The) www.agc.org

(703) 548-3118

AHA American Hardboard Association (Now part of CPA)

AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers www.aham.org

(202) 872-5955

AI Asphalt Institute http://www.asphaltinstitute.org

(859) 288-4960

AIA American Institute of Architects (The) (800) 242-3837 www.aia.org (202) 626-7300

AISC American Institute of Steel Construction (800) 644-2400 www.aisc.org (312) 670-2400

AISI American Iron and Steel Institute www.steel.org

(202) 452-7100

AITC American Institute of Timber Construction http://www.aitc-glulam.org

(303) 792-9559

ALCA Associated Landscape Contractors of America (800) 395-2522 www.alca.org (703) 736-9666

ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated www.alsc.org

(301) 972-1700

AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. www.amca.org

(847) 394-0150

ANSI American National Standards Institute www.ansi.org

(202) 293-8020

AOSA Association of Official Seed Analysts Http://www.aosaseed.com

(505) 522-1437



APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association http://www.apawood.org

(253) 565-6600

APA Architectural Precast Association http://www.archprecast.org

(239) 454-6989

API American Petroleum Institute www.api.org

(202) 682-8000

ARI Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute www.ari.org

(703) 524-8800

ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association http://www.asphaltroofing.org

(202) 207-0917

ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers (800) 548-2723

www.asce.org (703) 295-6300

ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers www.ashrae.org

(800) 527-4723 (404) 636-8400

ASME ASME International (800) 843-2763 (The American Society of Mechanical Engineers

International) www.asme.org (212) 591-7722

ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering http://www.asphaltroofing.org

(440) 835-3040

ASTM ASTM International (American Society for Testing and Materials International) www.astm.org

(610) 832-9585

AWCI AWCI International (Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industries International) www.awci.org

(703) 534-8300

AWCMA American Window Covering Manufacturers Association (See WCSC)

AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute (800) 449-8811 www.awinet.org (703) 733-0600

AWPA American Wood-Preservers' Association www.awpa.com

(334) 874-9800

AWS American Welding Society (800) 443-9353 www.aws.org (305) 443-9353

AWWA American Water Works Association (800) 926-7337 www.awwa.org (303) 794-7711



BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association http://www.buildershardware.com

(212) 297-2122

BIA Brick Industry Association (The) www.bia.org

(703) 620-0010

BICSI Building Industry Consulting Service International, Inc. (800) 242-7405

www.bicsi.org (813) 979-1991

BIFMA BIFMA International (616) 285-3963

BISSC Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee www.bissc.com (773) 761-4100

CCC Carpet Cushion Council http://www.asphaltroofing.org (203) 637-1312

CCFSS Center for Cold-Formed Steel Structures http://www.asphaltroofing.org

(573) 341-4471

CDA Copper Development Association Inc. (800) 232-3282

www.copper.org (212) 251-7200

CFFA Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc. http://www.asphaltroofing.org

(216) 241-7333

CGA Compressed Gas Association www.cganet.com (703) 788-2700

CGSB Canadian General Standards Board (800) 665-2472

http://www.asphaltroofing.org (819) 956-0425

CIMA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association (888) 881-2462

http://www.asphaltroofing.org (937) 222-2462

CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association www.cisca.org

(630) 584-1919

CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute www.cispi.org (423) 892-0137

CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute http://www.asphaltroofing.org

(301) 596-2583

CPA Composite Panel Association www.pbmdf.com (301) 670-0604

CPPA Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association (800) 510-2772

http://www.cppa-info.org (202) 462-9607

CRI Carpet & Rug Institute (The) (800) 882-8846

http://www.carpet-rug.com (706) 278-3176



CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute www.crsi.org

(847) 517-1200

CSA CSA International (800) 463-6727 (Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services)

http://www.csa-international.org (416) 747-4000

CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) (800) 689-2900 www.csinet.org (703) 684-0300

CSSB Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau http://www.cedarbureau.org

(604) 820-7700

CTI Cooling Technology Institute (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute) www.cti.org

(281) 583-4087

DHI Door and Hardware Institute www.dhi.org

(703) 222-2010

EIA Electronic Industries Alliance www.eia.org

(703) 907-7500

EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association (800) 294-3462 http://www.eima.com/ (770) 968-7945

EJCDC Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee (800) 548-2723 www.asce.org (703) 295-6300

EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. www.ejma.org

(914) 332-0040

ESD ESD Association www.esda.org

(315) 339-6937

FCI Fluid Controls Institute http://www.asphaltroofing.org

(216) 241-7333

FGI Fabricated Geomembrane Institute www.fabricatedgeomembrane.com

(217) 333-3929

FMG FM Global (Formerly: FM - Factory Mutual System) www.fmglobal.com

(401) 275-3000

FRSA Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors Association, Inc. www.floridaroof.com

(407) 671-3772

FSA Fluid Sealing Association (610) 971-4850



FSC

www.fluidsealing.com

Forest Stewardship Council

52 951 5146905

www.fscoax.org

GA Gypsum Association www.gypsum.org

(202) 289-5440

GANA Glass Association of North America www.glasswebsite.com

(785) 271-0208

GS Green Seal www.greenseal.org

(202) 872-6400

GSI Geosynthetic Institute www.geosynthetic-institute.org

(610) 522-8440

HI Hydraulic Institute (888) 786-7744 www.pumps.org (973) 267-9700

HI Hydronics Institute www.gamanet.org

(908) 464-8200

HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (See NAAMM)

HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association www.hpva.org

(703) 435-2900

HPW H. P. White Laboratory, Inc. www.hpwhite.com

(410) 838-6550

IAS International Approval Services (See CSA)

ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. www.icea.net

(770) 830-0369

ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc. www.icri.org

(847) 827-0830

IEC International Electrotechnical Commission www.iec.ch

41 22 919 02 11

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) www.ieee.org

(212) 419-7900

IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America www.iesna.org

(212) 248-5000

IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council (315) 646-2234



IGMA

www.igcc.org

Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (The)

(613) 233-1510

www.igmaonline.org

ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc. www.iliai.com

(812) 275-4426

ISO International Organization for Standardization www.iso.ch

41 22 749 01 11

ISSFA International Solid Surface Fabricators Association www.issfa.net

(702) 567-8150

ITS Intertek (800) 345-3851 www.intertek.com (607) 753-6711

ITU International Telecommunication Union www.itu.int/home

41 22 730 51 11

KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association www.kcma.org

(703) 264-1690

LMA Laminating Materials Association www.lma.org

(201) 664-2700

LPI Lightning Protection Institute (800) 488-6864 www.lightning.org (847) 577-7200

MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association www.mbma.com

(216) 241-7333

MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association www.maplefloor.org

(847) 480-9138

MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association www.metalframingmfg.org

(312) 644-6610

MH Material Handling Industry of America (See MHIA)

MHIA Material Handling Industry of America (800) 345-1815 www.mhia.org (704) 676-1190

MIA Marble Institute of America www.marble-institute.com

(440) 250-9222

MPI Master Painters Institute www.paintinfo.com

(888) 674-8937

MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and (703) 281-6613



Fittings Industry Inc. www.mss-hq.com

NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers www.naamm.org

(312) 332-0405

NACE NACE International (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) www.nace.org

(281) 228-6200

NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association www.nadca.com

(202) 737-2926

NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (The) www.naima.org

(703) 684-0084

NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. www.nbgqa.com

(800) 557-2848

NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association www.ncma.org

(703) 713-1900

NCPI National Clay Pipe Institute www.ncpi.org

(262) 248-9094

NCTA National Cable & Telecommunications Association www.ncta.com

(202) 775-3550

NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau www.nebb.org

(301) 977-3698

NECA National Electrical Contractors Association http://www.necanet.org/

(301) 657-3110

NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association www.nelma.org

(207) 829-6901

NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association www.nema.org

(703) 841-3200

NETA InterNational Electrical Testing Association www.netaworld.org

(303) 697-8441

NFPA NFPA (800) 344-3555 www.nfpa.org (617) 770-3000



NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council www.nfrc.org

(301) 589-1776

NGA National Glass Association www.glass.org

(703) 442-4890

NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association (800) 933-0318 www.natlhardwood.org (901) 377-1818

NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority www.nlga.org

(604) 524-2393

NOFMA National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association www.nofma.org

(901) 526-5016

NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association (800) 323-9545 www.nrca.net (847) 299-9070

NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (888) 846-7622 www.nrmca.org (301) 587-1400

NSF NSF International (800) 673-6275 (National Sanitation Foundation International)

www.nsf.org (734) 769-8010

NSSGA National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association (800) 342-1415 www.nssga.org (703) 525-8788

NTMA National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (800) 323-9736 www.ntma.com (540) 751-0930

NTRMA National Tile Roofing Manufacturers Association (See RTI)

NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association (See WDMA)

OPL Omega Point Laboratories, Inc. (800) 966-5253 www.opl.com (210) 635-8100

PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute www.pci.org

(312) 786-0300

PDCA Painting & Decorating Contractors of America (800) 332-7322 www.pdca.com (314) 514-7322

PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute (800) 589-8956 www.pdionline.org (978) 557-0720

PTI Post-Tensioning Institute (602) 870-7540



RCSC

www.post-tensioning.org

Research Council on Structural Connections

(800) 644-2400

www.boltcouncil.org (312) 670-2400

RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute www.rfci.com

(301) 340-8580

RIS Redwood Inspection Service (888) 225-7339 calredwood.org (415) 382-0662

RTI Roof Tile Institute (Formerly: NTRMA - National Tile Roofing Manufacturers Association) www.ntrma.org

(312) 670-4177

SAE SAE International www.sae.org

(724) 776-4841

SDI Steel Deck Institute www.sdi.org

(847) 462-1930

SDI Steel Door Institute www.steeldoor.org

(440) 899-0010

SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association www.sefalabs.com

(516) 294-5424

SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council www.sgcc.org

(315) 646-2234

SIA Security Industry Association www.sefalabs.com

(703) 683-2075

SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association (See IGMA)

SJI Steel Joist Institute www.steeljoist.org

(843) 626-1995

SMA Screen Manufacturers Association www.smacentral.org

(561) 533-0991

SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association www.smacentral.org

(703) 803-2980

SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (800) 523-6154



(Formerly: SPI/SPFD - The Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc.; Spray Polyurethane Foam Division) www.sprayfoam.org

SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The) www.spib.org

(850) 434-2611

SPI/SPFD Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc. (The) Spray Polyurethane Foam Division (See SPFA)

SPRI SPRI (Single Ply Roofing Institute) www.spri.org

(781) 647-7026

SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America (800) 982-0355 www.ssina.com (202) 342-8630

SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings (877) 281-7772 www.sspc.org (412) 281-2331

STI Steel Tank Institute www.steeltank.com

(847) 438-8265

SWI Steel Window Institute www.steelwindows.com

(216) 241-7333

SWRI Sealant, Waterproofing, & Restoration Institute www.swrionline.org

(816) 472-7974

TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. www.tileusa.com

(864) 646-8453

TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance www.tiaonline.org

(703) 907-7700

TMS The Masonry Society www.masonrysociety.org

(303) 939-9700

TPI Truss Plate Institute, Inc. www.tpinst.org

(608) 833-5900

TPI Turfgrass Producers International (800) 405-8873 www.turfgrasssod.org (847) 705-9898

UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (800) 285-4476 www.ul.com (847) 272-8800

UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association www.uni-bell.org

(972) 243-3902



USGBC U.S. Green Building Council www.usgbc.org

(202) 828-7422

WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association (800) 424-2869 www.wastec.org (202) 244-4700

WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (800) 283-1486 www.wclib.org (503) 639-0651

WCMA Window Covering Manufacturers Association (See WCSC)

WCSC Window Covering Safety Council (800) 506-4636 (Formerly: WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers

Association) www.windowcoverings.org

(212) 661-4261

WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association (800) 223-2301 (Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and

Door Association) www.wdma.com

(847) 299-5200

WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association (800) 550-7889 www.wmmpa.com (530) 661-9591

B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract

Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials www.iapmo.org

(909) 472-4100

ICBO International Conference of Building Officials (See ICC)

ICBO ES ICBO Evaluation Service, Inc. (See ICC-ES)

ICC International Code Council (Formerly: CABO - Council of American Building Officials) www.iccsafe.org

(703) 931-4533

ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (800) 423-6587

www.icc-es.org (562) 699-0543

C. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are



believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

CE Army Corps of Engineers www.usace.army.mil

CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission (800) 638-2772 www.cpsc.gov (301) 504-0990

DOC Department of Commerce www.doc.gov

(202) 482-2000

EPA Environmental Protection Agency www.epa.gov

(202) 260-2090

FAA Federal Aviation Administration www.faa.gov

(202) 366-4000

FCC Federal Communications Commission www.fcc.gov

(202) 225-5322

FDA Food and Drug Administration www.fda.gov

(888) 463-6332

FHA Federal Highway Administration www.fhwa.dot.gov

(410) 962-0093

GSA General Services Administration www.gsa.gov

(202) 708-5082

HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development www.hud.gov

(202) 708-1112

LBL Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory National Laboratory www.lbl.gov

(510) 486-4000

NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology (301) 975-6478

OSHA

www.nist.gov

Occupational Safety & Health Administration

(800) 321-6742

www.osha.gov (202) 693-1999

PBS Public Building Service (See GSA)

PHS Office of Public Health and Science phs.os.dhhs.gov

(202) 690 7694

TRB Transportation Research Board www.nas.edu/trb

(202) 334-2934



TSA Transportation Security Administration www.tsa.gov/public/index.jsp

1(866)-289-9673

USDA Department of Agriculture www.usda.gov

(202) 720-2791

USPS United States Postal Service www.usps.com

(202) 268-2000

D. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

DCR Virginia Department of Conservation and Recreation http://www.dcr.state.va.us

(804) 786-1712

VDH Virginia Department of Health Culpepper District www.vdh.state.va.us

(540) 829-7340

USBC The Virginia Statewide Building Code (USBC) The Commonwealth of Virginia – Uniform Statewide Building Code

(804) 371- 7160

VDHCD Virginia Department of Housing and Community Development Division of Building and Fire Regulation 501 North 2nd Street Richmond, VA 23219-1321

VDOT Virginia Department of Transportation www.virginiadot.org

(703) 383-8368

VDEQ Virginia Department of Environmental Quality www.deq.state.va.us

1-800-592-5482

1.6 GOVERNING REGULATIONS/AUTHORITIES

A. Contact authorities having jurisdiction directly for information and decisions having a bearing on the work. Names and addresses are subject to change; they are believed to be but are not assured to be accurate and up to date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

B. Codes: The contractor shall adhere to all applicable portions of code standards and specifications in the construction of the work. Unless otherwise noted (reference Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements”), the Authority will review the Contractor’s submittals and construction of the work for code compliance. The Authority’s acceptance of completed construction does not relieve the Contractor from strict compliance with all applicable regulations and codes.



1. Definition: The Metropolitan Washington Airports Authority has a “building department” recognized by the Commonwealth of Virginia. This department is charged with enforcing the Virginia Uniform Statewide Building Code (VUSBC). Where the words “code official”, “department having jurisdiction” or “agency having jurisdiction” is referenced in any code, including the VUSBC or its adopted model codes (ICC), those terms shall mean the Authority Building Official and/or his designated representative.

2. Standards that influence the construction of the project include, but are not limited to, all applicable federal and Commonwealth laws, all applicable codes, rules, regulations and standards applicable to this project.




TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 1


SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and Contract Provisions, Special Provisions, Supplementary Conditions, and other Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes requirements for temporary facilities and controls, including temporary utilities, support facilities, security, and protection facilities for Contractor staging area.

B. Temporary utilities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Sewers and drainage. 2. Water service and distribution. 3. Heating and cooling facilities. 4. Ventilation. 5. Electric power service. 6. Telephone and other communication services.

C. Support facilities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Dewatering facilities and drains. 2. Project identification and temporary signs.

3. Waste disposal facilities. 4. Lifts and hoists. 5. Temporary elevator usage. 6. Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities.

D. Security and protection facilities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Environmental protection. 2. Pest control. 3. Security enclosure and lockup. 4. Temporary enclosures. 5. Temporary partitions. 6. Fire protection.

E. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 01 Section "Submittals" for procedures for submitting copies of implementation and termination schedule and utility reports.

2. Division 31 Section "Termite Control" for pest control. 3. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity

requirements for products used in those Sections.



1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by COTR, permanent or temporary roofing is complete, insulated, and weather tight; exterior walls are insulated and weather tight; and all openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures.

1.4 USE CHARGES

A. General: Temporary utilities are available from the Authority at no charge unless otherwise noted. Provide necessary labor and materials to connect to the Authority's utilities at points designated by COTR and extend utilities to trailers, offices, sheds, etc.

1. Provide COTR approved meters for water, natural gas, electricity, and each other utility used for Project. Supply utilities to Subcontractors' temporary facilities through Contractor's meters. The requirement to provide meters for utilities does not imply that the Contractor will be charged for these utilities, except under provisions outlined in this and other Sections.

2. Report consumption of each utility to COTR each month. Contractor is expected to consume reasonable amounts of each utility. Should Contractor, in COTR's opinion, use excessive amounts of any utility or waste a utility, Contractor may be required to pay for temporary utilities.

B. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but are not limited to, the following:

1. The Authority’s construction forces. 2. Occupants of Project. 3. COTR. 4. Architect/Engineer. 5. Testing agencies. 6. Personnel of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit to COTR, for the Authority's review and approval, site plans indicating all temporary facilities, support and security; utility connections and traffic flows. Provide detailed drawings of utility connections and special facilities.

B. Temporary Utility Reports: Submit reports of tests, inspections, meter readings, and similar procedures performed on temporary utilities at both staging area and the Project site. Make all structures weather proof when heated and air-conditioned. Should Contractor, in COTR's opinion fail to keep the heated and cooled structures sealed and weather proof, Contractor may be required to pay for temporary utilities.


A. Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction, that include but are not limited to, the following:

1. Building Code requirements. 2. Health and safety regulations. 3. Police and Fire Department regulations.



4. Environmental protection regulations. 5. ADA Compliance: All temporary facilities shall be ADA compliant.

B. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6, NECA's "Temporary Electrical Facilities," and NFPA 241.

1. Trade Jurisdictions: Assigned responsibilities for installation and operation of temporary utilities are not intended to interfere with trade regulations and union jurisdictions.

2. Electrical Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electrical service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

C. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for the Authority's Building Codes/Environmental Department to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Coordinate with the Authority’s Building Codes/Environmental Department for requirements for certifications, permits, and inspections.

1. Obtain permits from the Authority's Building Codes/Environmental Department for temporary construction and temporary utilities.

D. Fire-retardant and Flame Spread Requirements: Unless otherwise noted, fire – retardant treat all wood and wood composition products utilized in the Project and preservative treat all wood utilized on the exterior of any building. Preservative treat all wood utilized on other items indicated or specified with preservative treatment. Provide lumber and plywood with an Underwriters’ Laboratory (UL) stamp certifying a value of 25 or less flame spread and a value of 200 or less smoke development. Fire retardant lumber shall not be ripped or milled.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Temporary Utilities: At earliest feasible time, when acceptable to COTR, change over from use of temporary service to use of permanent service.

1. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before the Authority's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.

B. Conditions of Use: The following conditions apply to use of temporary services, permanent services, and facilities by all parties engaged in the Work:

1. Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat. 2. Relocate temporary services and facilities as required by progress of the Work. 3. Take necessary fire-prevention measures. 4. Do not overload facilities. 5. Do not allow hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to

develop or persist on-site.

1.8 CONTRACTOR PERSONNEL PARKING

A. The Contractor's personnel will be allowed to park their personal vehicles in staging areas or in areas designated by COTR. Such designated parking areas are not necessarily fenced or otherwise protected, and temporary fencing for such parking areas is a requirement of this Contract.



B. Display a Vehicle special, non-transferable parking permit available from the Authority on all vehicles parked in such area. Each employee will be required to obtain and pay for their own parking permit and shall be responsible for fines for not displaying permit or for parking in other than designated contractor parking areas. The COTR will provide application forms and explain method of obtaining parking permits at the Pre-Construction Conference.

C. Contractor is responsible for busing his employees from the off airport parking lot to work areas.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Provide new materials. Undamaged, previously used materials in serviceable condition may be used if approved by COTR. Provide materials suitable for use intended.

B. Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Division 06 Section "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry."

C. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 09 Sections "Exterior Painting." and "Interior

Painting"

D. Tarpaulins: Fire-resistive labeled with flame-spread index of 15 or less.

E. Water: Potable.

F. Temporary Fuel Tanks: Comply with applicable safety and environmental regulations for temporary surface fuel tanks. Location and installation of tanks will be subject to review and approval of COTR and the Authority's Fire Marshal.

2.2 EQUIPMENT

A. General: Provide new equipment suitable for use intended. If acceptable to COTR, undamaged, previously used equipment in serviceable condition may be used.

B. Electrical Outlets: Properly configured, NEMA-polarized outlets that will prevent insertion of 110v or 120v plugs into higher-voltage outlets, and equipped with ground-fault circuit interrupters with reset button.

C. Power Distribution System Circuits: Where permitted, overhead, and visible wiring circuits, not exceeding 125-V ac, 20-A rating, and lighting circuits may be nonmetallic-sheathed cable.

D. Electrical Power Cords: Provide grounded extension cords; use hard-service as defined by NFPA 70, Article 400, where exposed to abrasion and traffic. If single lengths of extension cords will not reach areas where construction activities are in progress provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electrical extension cords.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Prior to installation of temporary facilities and utilities, submit to the COTR a site layout providing locations and details of the facilities and utilities.

B. Use qualified personnel for installation of temporary facilities. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required.

C. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

3.2 CONTRACTOR STAGING AREA - GENERAL

A. Contractor will be allowed to store and stage his materials in a staging area located on Airport property as indicated or as designated by the COTR for such purposes. Space is limited to area indicated. COTR and Contractor will make a joint site visit to document condition of staging area prior to occupancy. Take photos for the record.

B. Erect and maintain a 6-foot high chain link fence topped with 3-strands of barbed wire around perimeter of staging area will be acceptable. Protect all stored equipment from the weather. The Authority accepts no responsibility for items stored in this area.

C. Upon completion of Construction, remove all temporary staging area facilities and return the areas to their original condition.

D. Park construction equipment in the storage site or storage area identified by the COTR when equipment is not engaged in construction activity.

E. Do not stockpile construction materials, spoils, debris or refuse in any area other than that specifically approved for such purpose by the COTR.

F. Constrain stockpiled material in a manner to prevent its movement by wind.

3.3 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION (Not Used)

3.4 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with the following:

1. Locate storage sheds and other temporary construction and support facilities for easy access.

2. Provide incombustible construction for shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet of building lines. Comply with NFPA 241 and USBC.

B. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 31 and Division 32 Sections for temporary drainage and dewatering facilities and operations not directly associated with construction activities included in individual Sections. Where feasible, use same facilities. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.



1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining property nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.

2. Before connection and operation of permanent drainage piping system, provide temporary drainage where roofing or similar waterproof deck construction is completed.

3. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.

C. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Prepare Project identification and other signs in sizes indicated. Install signs where indicated or where directed by COTR to inform public and persons seeking entrance to Project. Provide two Project signs.

1. Engage an experienced sign painter to apply graphics for Project identification signs. Comply with details indicated.

2. Prepare temporary signs to provide directional information to construction personnel and visitors.

3. Construct signs of exterior-type, Grade B-B, high-density concrete form overlay plywood in sizes and thickness indicated. Support on nominal 4-inch-by-4-inch-by-10-foot-long posts or framing of preservative-treated wood or steel.

4. Paint sign panel and applied graphics with exterior-grade alkyd gloss enamel over exterior primer.

5. The following signs will be allowed on the Project:

a. Identifying captions over offices. b. Other signs as required by the Contract Documents.

6. Take necessary steps to prevent installation of unauthorized signs and, should any appear, remove them immediately. Repair and repaint damage caused thereby at no additional cost to the Authority.

7. No more that two Project Identification Signs will be permitted. Project identification signs are the only signs on which the Contractors name and logo will be permitted.

D. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Containerize and clearly label hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Comply with Division 01 Section "Execution " for progress cleaning requirements.

1. If required by COTR, provide separate containers, clearly labeled, for each type of waste material to be deposited.

2. Develop a waste management plan for Work performed on Project. Indicate types of waste materials Project will produce and estimate quantities of each type. Provide detailed information for on-site waste storage and separation of recyclable materials. Provide information on destination of each type of waste material and means to be used to dispose of all waste materials.

E. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate

materials and equipment involved, including temporary utility services. Sheds may be open shelters or, if permitted by COTR, fully enclosed spaces within building or elsewhere on-site subject to approval of COTR.

1. Construct framing, sheathing, and siding using fire-retardant-treated lumber and plywood.

2. Paint exposed lumber and plywood with exterior-grade acrylic-latex emulsion over exterior primer.



3. Submit the design of storage structures of more than 150 sq. ft. to COTR for review and approval by the Authority's Building Codes/Environmental Department.

F. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities for hoisting materials and personnel if greater than 30 feet high or more than three (3) floors. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities.

G. Temporary Elevator Usage: Refer to Division 14 Sections for temporary use of new elevators.

H. Existing Stair Usage: Use of the Authority's existing stairs will be permitted, as long as stairs are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to COTR. At Substantial Completion, restore stairs to condition existing before initial use.

1. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect stairs and to maintain means of egress. If, despite such protection, stairs become damaged, restore damaged areas so no evidence remains of correction work.

3.5 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. Avoid using tools and equipment that produce harmful noise. Restrict use of noisemaking tools and equipment to hours of 11:00 p.m. to 5:00 a.m., unless directed otherwise by the COTR, which will minimize complaints from persons or firms near Project site.

B. Temporary Partitions: Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas from fumes and noise.

1. Construct dustproof partitions of not less than nominal 4-inch studs, 5/8-inch gypsum wallboard with joints taped on occupied side, and 1/2-inch fire-retardant plywood on construction side. Provide protective wall covering as required. Paint all gypsum board surfaces.

C. Temporary Fire Protection: Until fire-protection needs are supplied by permanent facilities, install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241 and VUSBC.

1. Provide fire extinguishers, installed on walls on mounting brackets, visible and accessible from space being served, with sign mounted above.

a. Field Offices: Class A, stored-pressure, water-type extinguishers.

b. Other Locations: Class ABC, dry-chemical extinguishers or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA-recommended classes for exposures.

c. Locate fire extinguishers per NFPA 10 and where convenient and effective for their intended purpose; provide not less than one extinguisher on each floor at or near each usable stairwell.

2. Store combustible materials in containers in fire-safe locations. 3. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire-

protection facilities, stairways, and other access routes for firefighting. Prohibit smoking in hazardous fire-exposure areas.

4. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition.



5. Permanent Fire Protection: At earliest feasible date in each area of Project, complete installation of permanent fire-protection facility, including connected services, and place into operation and use. Instruct key personnel on use of facilities.

6. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and first-aid fire-protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.

7. Provide temporary standpipes with fire hose valve connections for fire protection.

D. Storage: Where materials and equipment are stored, and are of value or attractive for theft, provide secure lockup. Enforce discipline in connection with installation and release of material to minimize opportunity for theft and vandalism.

3.6 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. Limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses to minimize waste and abuse.

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Protect from damage caused by freezing temperatures and similar elements.

1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.

2. Prevent water-filled piping from freezing. Maintain markers for underground lines. Protect from damage during excavation operations.


PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 1


SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following administrative and procedural requirements: selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products.

1. This Section includes substitutions made for "or as approved by the Authority" items.


1. Division 01 Section "Allowances" for products selected under an allowance. 2. Division 01 Section "Alternates" for products selected under an alternate. 3. Division 01 Section "References" for applicable industry standards for products

specified. 4. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products

and installations specified to be warranted.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.

1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation, shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility, except that products consisting of recycled-content materials are allowed, unless explicitly stated otherwise. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.

3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.

B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.

C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other



designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product List: Submit a list, in tabular form acceptable to COTR, showing specified products. Include generic names of products required. Include manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each product.

1. Coordinate product list with Contractor's Construction Schedule and Submittals Schedule.

2. Form: Tabulate information for each product under the following column headings:

a. Specification Section number and title. b. Generic name used in the Contract Documents. c. Proprietary name, model number, and similar designations. d. Manufacturer's name and address. e. Supplier's name and address. f. Installer's name and address. g. Projected delivery date or time span of delivery period. h. Identification of items that require early submittal approval for scheduled delivery

date. i. Item Tag Number or similar ID if identified in the drawings j. Location (room number from the drawings) k. Serial Number (once available)

3. Initial Submittal: Within 90 calendar days after the Notice to Proceed, submit 3 copies of initial product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from the Contract requirements.

4. COTR's Action: COTR will respond in writing to Contractor within 15 calendar days of receipt of initial product list. COTR's response will include a list of unacceptable product selections and a brief explanation of reasons for this action. COTR's response, or lack of response, does not constitute a waiver of requirement that products comply with the Contract Documents.

5. Updated submittal: Submit updated product list every 90 days following initial submittal. The updated list shall be submitted in approved electronic spread sheet format with additional fields as required by COTR.

6. Completed List: Submit 10 hard copies and one electronic copy of completed product list 90 calendar days before requesting inspection for substantial completion. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from the Contract requirements.

B. Substitution Requests: Submit six copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Substitution Request Form: Submit requests in the form and according to procedures required for Contract Modification proposals supplied to Contractor at the preconstruction meeting or as directed by COTR. Do not submit requests for substitutions as "Requests for Information" (RFIs).

2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,



as applicable:

a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to

other parts of the Work and to construction performed by the Authority and separate contractors that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.

c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures.

e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and

addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test

results for compliance with requirements indicated. h. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for

Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

i. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery.

j. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Price. k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in

the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated. l. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently

become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.

m. Failure by Contractor to include the above requirements in the submittal may cause rejection of the submittal in its entirety.

3. COTR's Action: If necessary, COTR will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within 15 calendar days of receipt of a request for substitution. COTR will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 calendar days of receipt of request, or two weeks of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Form of Acceptance: Change notice. b. Use product specified if COTR couldn’t make a decision on use of a proposed

substitution within time allocated.

C. Comparable Product Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. COTR’s Action: If necessary, COTR will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within 7 working days of receipt of a comparable product request. COTR will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 calendar days of receipt of request, or 7 calendar days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.



a. Form of Approval: As specified in Division 01 Section "Submittals." b. Use product specified if COTR couldn’t make a decision on use of a comparable

product request within time allocated.

D. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Submittals." Show compliance with requirements.


A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Delivery and Handling:

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces.

2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.

3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.

C. Storage:

1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weather tight

enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Comply with product manufacturers written instructions for temperature, humidity,

ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 5. Store foam plastic away from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period

of installation and concealment. 6. Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms. 7. Protect stored products from damage. 8. Replace products and materials damaged by the elements due to improper storage at no

additional cost to the Authority. This damage can be, but not limited to, oxidization, mold, mildew, warping, and rust.

1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES



A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.

1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Authority.

2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Authority.

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution.

1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed.

2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using appropriate form properly executed.

3. Refer to Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties.

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Closeout."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT OPTIONS

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation.

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.

2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.

3. The Authority reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," COTR will make selection. 5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is

COTR's. 6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications

establish "salient characteristics" of products.

7. "Or as approved by the Authority": Note that products submitted under an "or as approved by the Authority” provision are considered to be substitutions. Substitutions shall follow the requirements of Paragraph VII-42 of Contract Provisions and provisions in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.

B. Product Selection Procedures:

1. Product: Where Specifications name a single product and manufacturer, provide the



named product that complies with requirements. 2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source,

provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. 3. Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and

manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. 4. Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a

product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. 5. Available Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and

manufacturers, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part - 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.

6. Available Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part - 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.

7. Product Options: Where Specifications indicate that sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or system, provide the specified product or system. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for consideration of an unnamed product or system.

8. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by the other named manufacturers.

9. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, select a product that complies with requirements and matches COTR's sample. COTR's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.

a. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for proposal of product.

10. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product that complies with other specified requirements.

a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, COTR will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items.

b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, COTR will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.

2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Timing: COTR will consider requests for substitution if received within 60 calendar days after issuance of the Notice to Proceed. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at the sole discretion of the Contracting Officer.



B. Conditions: COTR will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, COTR will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

1. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. 2. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce

indicated results. 3. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. 4. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule. 5. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having

jurisdiction. 6. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. 7. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. 8. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.

9. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

C. Contractor's submittal and COTR's review or approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data, or Samples that relate to a substitute does not by itself constitute a final approval of the requested substitution, nor does it relieve Contractor from fulfilling existing Contract requirements.

D. If a substitution offers a substantial advantage to the Authority, in terms of cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations of merit, after deducting offsetting responsibilities the Authority may be required to bear, the substitution shall be submitted as a Value Engineering Change Proposal.

2.3 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS

A. Conditions: COTR will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, COTR will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract

Documents, it is consistent with the Contract Documents, it will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.

2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and

names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested.



EXECUTION 017300 - 1


SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. General installation of products. 4. Progress cleaning. 5. Starting and adjusting. 6. Protection of installed construction. 7. Correction of the Work.


1. Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for procedures for coordinating field engineering with other construction activities.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: Submit qualification data for professional engineer.

B. Certificates: Submit certificate signed and sealed by professional engineer certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements.

C. Certified Surveys: Submit 2 copies signed and sealed by professional engineer.

D. Project Record Documents: Submit a record of Work performed (materials tests, inspections, acceptance tests, etc.) and record survey data as required under provisions in Division 01 Sections "Submittals" and "Project Closeout."


A. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in the Commonwealth of Virginia experienced in the area for which he is utilized.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work, including all site utility systems.

1. Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services.

B. Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning site work, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the Work.

1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; and underground electrical and communication services.

2. For additional requirements for locating and marking existing utilities, see Division 01 Section "Summary."

C. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.

1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.

2. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation.

3. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed.

4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to COTR that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction.

B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.



D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information (RFI) to COTR.

E. Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT (Not Used)

3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING

A. Identification: Existing Horizontal Control points and Benchmarks are as identified on the Contract Documents.

B. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent Benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent Benchmarks and control points during construction operations.

1. Do not change or relocate existing Benchmarks or control points without prior written approval of COTR. Report lost or destroyed permanent Benchmarks or control points promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent Benchmarks or control points to COTR before proceeding.

2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent Benchmarks and control points promptly with the approval of COTR. Base replacements on the original survey control points.

C. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent Benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with the Authority for type and size of Benchmark.

1. Record Benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents.

2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work.

3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to its original condition.

D. Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiring field-engineering services, including utilities, prepare a certified survey showing coordinates, dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and site work. Coordinates shall be VA State Plane North Zone (NAD 83) and elevations shall be (NAVD 88).

3.5 INSTALLATION

A. Inspection of Conditions: Require Installer of each major component to inspect both the substrate and conditions under which Work is to be performed. Proceed only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to COTR. Coordinate this requirement with Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."

B. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance



and ease of removal for replacement.

3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of eight (8) feet in spaces without a suspended

ceiling. 5. Roughing-in of utilities in areas with vaulted or domed roofs shall follow contour of roof

lines.

C. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated.

D. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

E. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. For additional requirements see Section "Supplementary Conditions."

G. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by COTR.

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.

H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints as directed by COTR. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.

3.6 AUTHORITY-INSTALLED PRODUCTS (If Required)

A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for the Authority's construction forces.

B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by the Authority's construction forces.

1. Construction Schedule: Inform COTR of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for the Authority's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify COTR if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress.

2. Pre-installation Conferences: Include the Authority's construction forces at preinstallation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive the Authority's work. Attend pre-installation conferences conducted by the Authority's construction forces if portions of the Work depend on the Authority's construction.

EXECUTION

017300 - 5


3.7 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris.

2. Remove combustible debris from the site daily. 3. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the

temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F. 4. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste.

Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work.

1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the

entire work area, as appropriate.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

F. Exposed Surfaces: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

G. Cutting and Patching: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials.

1. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.

H. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-airport property will not be permitted. Washing waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted.

I. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

J. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.

K. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to ensure that no part of the construction completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise

EXECUTION

017300 - 6


deleterious exposure during the construction period.

L. Grass Mowing: Mow grass areas contained in Project site, or made inaccessible to the Authority's mowing contractors.

3.8 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Follow equipment manufacturer's startup procedures, unless otherwise directed by COTR.

B. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

C. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper operation.

D. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

E. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."

3.9 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.

3.10 CORRECTION OF THE WORK

A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching."

1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.

B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.

C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair.

D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired.

E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.


CUTTING AND PATCHING 017329 - 1

WASHINGTON DULLES INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT 1F1503

TASK 1 JP MORGAN CHASE BLDG HVAC UPGRADE APRIL 11, 2016

SECTION 017329 - CUTTING AND PATCHING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings, Contract Provisions, Special Provisions, Supplementary Conditions, and other

Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching.


1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of

other Work.

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after

installation of other Work.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal, requesting approval from COTR to proceed,

describing procedures at least 10 days before the time cutting and patching will be performed,.

Include the following information:

1. Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate

why they cannot be avoided.

2. Changes to Existing Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to

structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's appearance

and other significant visual elements.

3. Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work.

4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed.

5. Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: List utilities that cutting and

patching procedures will disturb or affect. List utilities that will be relocated and those

that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long service will be disrupted.

Before cutting/core drilling the slab, structural members, concrete walls, etc. X-ray the

slab, beam, wall, etc. to determine whether any embedded items such as conduit and

reinforcing steel would be cut or disturbed and provide X-rays to COTR. If the

cutting/core drilling will cut any conduits, notify the COTR to re-locate the opening or

take other action as required. If reinforcing steel is encountered, notify the COTR to

either re-locate the opening or evaluate the effect of cutting the reinforcement. Perform




this evaluation by a registered professional engineer licensed in the Commonwealth of

Virginia. Refer to Division 01 Section “Summary” for utility outage requirements.

6. Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to

structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of

reinforcement with original structure. When cutting and patching involves welding or

open flame cutting, obtain the approval of the Authority's Fire Marshal for such work

prior to its start. Before cutting or drilling a structural element, X-ray the element to

determine whether any embedded items such as conduit and reinforcing steel would be

cut or disturbed and provide X-rays to COTR. If the cutting/drilling will cut any rebar or

conduits, notify the COTR to re-locate the opening or take other action as required. If

reinforcing steel is encountered, notify the COTR to either re-locate the opening or

evaluate the effect of cutting the reinforcement. Perform this evaluation by a registered

professional engineer licensed in the Commonwealth of Virginia.

7. COTR's Approval: Obtain COTR’s approval in writing of cutting and patching proposal

before cutting and patching. Approval does not waive COTR’s right to later require

removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work.


A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change

their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio.

B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch the following operating elements and related

components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that

results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Obtain COTR's written

approval of the cutting and patching of the following operating elements or safety related items:

C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components

in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity that results in reducing their capacity

to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or

safety.

D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual

evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or

in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect’s opinion, reduce the building's

aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually

unsatisfactory manner.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged

during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing

warranties.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications.

B. Existing Materials: Use materials identical to existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use




materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed,

will match the visual and functional performance of existing materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to

be performed.

1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates,

including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.

2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.

B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.

Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be

exposed during cutting and patching operations.

C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage

to adjoining areas.

D. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems

are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned; bypass such services/systems before

cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas.

3.3 PERFORMANCE

A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and

patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.

1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance

of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their

original condition.

B. Cutting: Cut existing construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar

operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or

adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply

with original Installer's written recommendations.

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not

hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size

required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover

openings when not in use.




2. Existing Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed

surfaces.

3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a

diamond-core drill.

4. Excavating and Backfilling: Should excavating and backfilling be required by cutting

and patching operations comply with requirements in applicable Division 31 Sections.

5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be

removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent

entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. Remove conductors back to

source of supply.

6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations

following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as

possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other

Sections of these Specifications.

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to

demonstrate integrity of installation.

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish

restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence

of patching and refinishing.

3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area

into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even

surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall

coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and

appearance.

a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint

coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface

containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent

surfaces

4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or re-hang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane

surface of uniform appearance.

5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a

weather tight condition.


PROJECT CLOSEOUT 017700 - 1


SECTION 017700 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project closeout, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Inspection procedures. 2. Warranties. 3. Final cleaning.


1. Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements” for final requirements of the Warranty Manual.

2. Division 01 Section "Photographic Documentation" for submitting Final Acceptance construction photographs and negatives.

3. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, Record Product Data, and other Record Documents.

4. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements.

5. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for products of those Sections.

1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. Definition: "Substantial Completion" is the stage in the progress of the work when COTR determines that all the Work, or a designated portion thereof, is sufficiently complete and functional according to the Contract Documents so that the Authority can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use. The only remaining physical work shall be the completion of punch list work prior to Final Acceptance.

B. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request.

1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, reasons why the Work is not complete, and a schedule for completing punch list work according to Section III of the Contract.

2. Ensure previously outstanding technical submittals and Shop Drawings have been submitted and approved.

3. Advise COTR of pending insurance changeover requirements. 4. Submit warranties required by Contract Documents, workmanship bonds, maintenance



service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents.

a. Submit Contractor Warranty Letter, for review and approval, a minimum of 60 days before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. After date of Substantial Completion has been determined revise the Contractor’s Warranty Letter to include that date as start of Warranty period.

5. Obtain and submit releases permitting the Authority unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

6. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents except Record Contract CPM Schedule; also prepare and submit Operation and Maintenance manuals, Final Completion construction photographs and photographic negatives, damage or settlement surveys, and similar final record information.

7. Prepare and submit proof that specified testing and code inspections have been completed, accepted and certified, including, but not limited to, structural work, sprinkler piping systems, fire alarm and FPS systems, bacteriological testing of domestic lines, back-flow prevention, electrical system testing, and hydrostatic pressure testing of sanitary lines. Submit approvals of Health Department or the FDA as applicable.

8. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by COTR. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.

9. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to COTR. Advise the Authority's personnel of changeover in security provisions.

10. Complete startup testing of systems. 11. Submit test/adjust/balance records.

12. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements.

13. Advise the Authority of changeover in utilities. 14. Submit changeover information related to the Authority's occupancy, use, operation, and

maintenance. 15. Instruct the Authority's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,

equipment, and systems, as required by Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training." – submit demonstration and training videos.

16. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 17. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual

defects.

C. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, COTR will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. COTR will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by COTR, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

2. Punch list work must be completed within the duration specified in Section III, "Schedule." Failure to complete the punch list work within the duration specified may result in the Contracting Officer ordering the work to be completed by others at the cost to Contractor.

3. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Acceptance.

1.4 FINAL COMPLETION AND ACCEPTANCE



A. Definition: "Final Completion" is the stage in the Contract when the Contracting Officer determines that all Work has been 100 percent completed according to the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, including administrative obligations. The date of Final Acceptance is the date of execution by the Contracting Officer of a Certificate of Final Acceptance.

B. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final

Completion, complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 01 Section "Application for Payment."

2. Submit certified copy of COTR's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by COTR. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

3. Submit a Contractor/COTR joint statement evidencing that all Record Documents, Operation and Maintenance Manuals, warranties, and similar required submittals have been approved.

4. Complete demobilization and removal of temporary facilities from the site including construction equipment and facilities, mockups, and other similar elements. Restore areas to previously existing condition, if applicable.

5. Execute final Contract Modification and submit final Subcontractor Payment Form. 6. Return all AOA badging and all Authority Ids. 7. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance

requirements. 8. Submit Record Contract CPM Schedule. 9. Submit warranty book. 10. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty.

C. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request,

COTR will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. COTR will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

1.5 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Preparation: Submit four copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.

1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest to highest floor.

2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.

3. Include the following information at the top of each page:

a. Contract name and number. b. Date. c. Name of COTR.



d. Name of Architect/Engineer. e. Name of Contractor. f. Page number.

1.6 WARRANTIES

A. Submittal Time: Submit one draft copy of proposed Warranty Manual Specified below within 90 days of Notice to Proceed. COTR will return comments to the Contractor no later than 30 calendar days after receipt.

1. Provide Manufacturer’s Standard Warranties, made out to the Authority, and statement of willingness to provide any applicable Special Warranties required by the Contract Documents 14 calendar days prior to shipping of materials and equipment. Products and Equipment shall not be considered delivered (for payment purposes) until the approved warranties have been received.

2. Submit written warranties on request of COTR for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated.

B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by the Authority during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.

C. Warranty Manual: Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Contract Specifications. Warranty documents include Contractor and major subcontractors warranty letters, special warranty documents, and manufacturer's warranties.

1. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents. Binders shall not be filled beyond 75 percent of their rated capacity. Binders shall also have boomerang plastic sheet lifters, metal backbone, concealed rivet construction, and three-trigger position locking mechanism (lock, unlock, open) on top and bottom. Binder color shall be black unless another color is selected by COTR.

a. Provide maximum 3-inch binder thickness. b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "PROJECT

WARRANTIES," Contract number and name, and subject matter of contents. If identification cannot be attached to the front include it as the first page in the manual. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets. The use of business labels is prohibited.

2. Dividers: Provide three-hole, heavyweight, plastic tabbed dividers, (, or as approved by the Authority) for each separate section. Provide laser printed description for each tabbed section on the front and back of tabs. Tabs shall indicate the appropriate Specification Section. Provide a description of the warranty or heading for sub tabs using the same laser printed format on the dividers. Provide an index of the contents in each section on the first page behind each section divider. The index shall be generated using a word processor and printed on a laser printer. Include a matching master table of contents for each volume using the same indexing system. Install a colored sheet between each different warranty within a tabbed section.

3. Provide a digital version of the warranty manual on CD-ROM. This version shall



consist of a scanned Adobe pdf file of each warranty document in the manual.

D. Provide additional copies of each warranty that shall be included in Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: For final cleaning, use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with Authority requirements, local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. General cleaning during construction is included in Division 01 Section "Execution."

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:

a. Clean Project site in areas disturbed by construction activities of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances.

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits.

c. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site.

d. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.

e. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.

f. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. g. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap;

shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. h. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.

Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials.



Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.

i. Remove labels that are not permanent. j. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces.

Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates.

k. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances.

l. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. m. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains

resulting from water exposure. n. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed

surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. o. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during

construction. p. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.

Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and high intensity discharge fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.

q. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare and submit a report to COTR.

D. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on the Authority's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully.

1. Where extra materials of value remaining after completion of associated Work have become the Authority's property, arrange for disposition of these materials as directed by COTR.

E. Apply continuous inspections or consultations by Contractor as required and as warranted by COTR.


OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 1


SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following:

1. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory and formatting. 2. Manuals, General and formatting 3. Emergency Information Manuals and formatting. 4. Operation Information Manuals and formatting for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 5. Maintenance Information Manuals and formatting for the care and maintenance of

products, materials, finishes, systems, and equipment.


1. Division 01 Section “Application for Payment” for values assigned to Operation and Maintenance Manuals

2. Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements” for ensuring the development and continuing update of the Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory and Operation and Maintenance Manual.

3. Division 01 Section “Submittals” for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals.

4. Division 01 Section “Project Closeout” for submitting operation and maintenance manuals.

5. Division 01 Section “Project Record Documents” for preparing Record Drawings for operation and maintenance manuals.

6. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for products in those Sections.

C. For purposes of payment, O & M and Material and Finishes Manuals are to be valued at 5% of Contract.

D. Payment for materials and equipment will be withheld if complete O & M manual material is not received from the contractor at time of material or equipment delivery. Namely, instruction sheets, operation manuals, installation instructions, and other documents received from the manufacturer at the time of delivery.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction.



B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.

C. Equipment: An instrument or appliance designed for a specific operation.

D. Product: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.

E. Location: A defined area such as roof, room, hallway, ceiling, pavement, wall, or floor that has special maintenance requirements that are documented in the Operation and Maintenance Data.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Manual Format: Submit to COTR within 90 calendar days of Notice to Proceed one (1) draft paper copy and one (1) electronic copy of the proposed Operation and Maintenance Manual Format. Format shall include a table of contents and be as specified in Part 2 of this Section. COTR will return comments regarding the Operation and Maintenance Manual Format and planned contents of the completed manual within 30 calendar days of receipt. Throughout the construction period of the project, Operation and Maintenance data shall be continually inserted in the appropriate sections/parts of the Manual as it is approved.

B. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Submit to COTR within 90 calendar days of Notice to Proceed one (1) draft copy of the Operation and Maintenance Documentation

Directory. Format shall be as specified in Part 2 of this section. COTR will return comments regarding the Directory and planned contents of the completed manual set within 30 calendar days of receipt of submittal. Throughout the construction period of the project, the Directory shall be updated to reflect changes resulting from other submittal approvals.

C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals Initial Submittal: Submit four (4) printed draft printed copies of each Manual in the approved format, including four (4) copies on CD-ROM containing all information from the manuals in electronic format, at least 90 calendar days before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion. Include a copy of the complete Operations and Maintenance Directory. COTR will return a copy of draft within 30 calendar days of receipt, and mark whether general scope and content of Manuals are acceptable.

D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals Revised Submittals: Submit four (4) printed revised copies of each manual in final form, including four (4) copies on CD-ROM containing all the information from the manuals in electronic format, at least 45 calendar days before substantial completion or training, whichever occurs first. COTR will return a copy with comments within 15 calendar days after receipt.

E. Operation and Maintenance Manuals Final Submittal: Correct or modify each manual to comply with COTR’s comments. Submit six (6) printed copies of the Document Directory and six (6) printed copies of each corrected manual at least 15 calendar days before substantial completion or training whichever occurs first.

1. Provide four (4) copies of all Operation and Maintenance Data in electronic format on CD-ROM consistent with the organization and format in the “Manuals, General” section.



All electronic files shall be in Adobe PDF format and limited to 10 megabytes in size per file.

2. All information must be legible in the digital versions. Instead of scanned images, Original files are required.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by more than one factory-authorized service representative, the General Contractor shall assemble and coordinate information furnished by representatives and prepare manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY

A. Provide the Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory in separate binder from operation and maintenance information. Binders, dividers and all portions of the Directory shall comply with requirements of “Manuals, General” as applicable. Size of binder for directory shall be appropriate for quantity of contents. Information in O & M Directory shall be in alphabetical order with references to contract Division and Specification Section.

B. Organization: Include a section in the directory for each of the following:

1. General Information. 2. Table of Contents 3. List of systems and subsystems. 4. List of equipment. 5. List of Products

C. General Information: Include documents that are pertinent to the project, including, but not limited to, a detailed description of the facility or project, general safety information and a users guide to the project operation and maintenance manuals.

D. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.

E. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.

F. List of Products: List products alphabetically to include all products not part of a system, subsystem, or component of equipment. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each product.

G. Tables of Contents: Include a complete table of contents for each volume of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

H. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment and products with the same designation used by the Authority. If no designation is provided for equipment, systems, subsystems, or equipment assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, “Preparation of



Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems.”

I. Provide a draft of the proposed “Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory” at least 90 calendar days before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion. Submit draft to COTR for approval in writing.

2.2 MANUALS, GENERAL

A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize information by Division and then into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following in the order listed:

1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents.

B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information on the title page:

1. Specific subject matter included in manual such as Division number and title, Specification Section number and title, equipment, systems and subsystems.

2. Name and number of the Contract. 3. Date of submittal. 4. Name, address, telephone number, and contact person of Contractor, Subcontractor, and

supplier. 5. Name and address of Architect/Engineer. 6. Cross-reference to related systems in other portions of the Operation and Maintenance

Manuals.

C. Table of Contents: Include a Table of Contents, printed by a laser printer, for each volume, arranged according to the specification sections. List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in the Contract Documents.

1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to

accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set.

D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents by Division then by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.

1. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring metal hinged loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents. Binders shall not be filled beyond 75 percent of their rated capacity. Binders shall also have boomerang plastic sheet lifters, concealed rivet construction, and three-trigger position Dublock mechanism (lock, unlock, open) on top and bottom of binders. Binder color shall be black unless another color is selected by COTR.

a. Provide maximum 3 inch binder thickness. Smaller binders are acceptable as long



as 75 percent rated binder capacity is not exceeded. b. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data for a system, organize

data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross- reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system.

c. Identify each binder on front (If Identification cannot be placed on the front provide as the first page) and spine of binder, with printed title “OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL,” Contract number and name, and specific subject matter of contents, such as “Division 23 Heating Ventilating and Air Conditioning”. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets. The use of business labels is prohibited.

2. Dividers: Provide three-hole, heavyweight, and plastic tabbed dividers for each separate section. Provide laser printed description for each tab section (front and back of tabs), to indicate the appropriate Specification Section. Provide a description of the product or heading for sub tabs using the same laser printed format on the dividers.

3. Provide a typed index describing each product, equipment, and subject addressed in each

section on the first page behind each section divider. Include a matching master table of contents for each volume using the same indexing system. Install a colored sheet between major topics and each different device within a tabbed section.

4. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Provide protective transparent plastic sheet protectors to

enclose the Title Page, all Table of Content pages, and photographs.

a. For CD-ROMs, provide transparent plastic three-ring sleeves designed to accommodate CD-ROMs.

5. Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch, 20-lb/sq. ft. white bond paper. Copies of faxed materials may be rejected. Two-sided text shall be provided on 24-lb/sq. ft. white bond paper to eliminate “bleed through” of text with a minimum brightness of 96.

6. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.

a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts.

b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in transparent envelopes and bind envelopes with text. Insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, in the transparent envelopes along with drawings. Drawings shall cross-reference the appropriate manual volume and Specification Section. Drawing holding envelopes are not acceptable.

c. Provide operation and maintenance material on CD-ROM.

E. Transfer Cases: Manuals shall be submitted in durable, multiple thickness fiberboard transfer boxes (legal-size boxes, 15 inches wide by 24 inches long by 10 inches high) with plastic tote handles string and button closures, reinforced poly edge, and a large labeling area that accurately describes the contents.

1. Approved Product: Bankers Box, “Liberty Plus,” Fast Fold, Item No. 12112 or other

product as approved by the Authority.

2.3 EMERGENCY INFORMATION



A. Content: Organize information by Division into a separate section for each of the following:

1. Type of emergency. 2. Emergency instructions. 3. Emergency procedures.

B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include

instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:

1. Fire. 2. Flood. 3. Gas leak. 4. Water leak. 5. Fuel leak. 6. Power failure. 7. Water outage. 8. System, subsystem, or equipment failure. 9. Chemical release or spill. 10. Weather related events, thunderstorms, hurricanes, tornados, etc.

C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of the Authority’s operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.

D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Instructions on stopping. 2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. 4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 5. Special operating instructions and procedures.

E. Provide a draft of the proposed Emergency Information Manual. Submit draft at least 90 calendar days before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion to COTR for approval in writing.

2.4 OPERATION INFORMATION

A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information. Organize manuals into separate and distinct volumes by Division.

1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. 2. Safety instruction and related issues. 3. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. 4. Operating standards. 5. Operating procedures. 6. Operating logs. 7. Wiring diagrams, including color-coding and terminal designations. Include all factory

preset or field-set dip switch and jumper settings for all electronic equipment. 8. Control diagrams. 9. Piped system diagrams.



10. Precautions against improper use. 11. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates. 12. Material Safety Data Sheets.

B. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures. 10. Procedures or operations that may void warranty. 11. Copies of equipment warranties.

C. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed.

D. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed and color-coding shall be used where required for identification.

E. Provide a draft of the proposed Operation Information Manual. Submit draft at least 90 calendar days before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion to COTR for approval in writing.

2.5 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

A. This Section shall contain information for all products with the exception of Systems and Equipment, which shall be provided as indicated elsewhere in this Section.

B. Content: Organize information into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Provide one section for architectural products, including applied materials and finishes, and a second for products designed for moisture protection and products exposed to the weather. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, schedule of products, location of products and warranties and bonds, as described below.

C. Source Information: List each product included in manual identified by product name and arranged to match manual’s table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.

D. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer’s name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. 6. Fire/flame-spread test certificates.



7. Material Safety Data Sheets.

E. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer’s written recommendations and the following:

1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions.

F. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services.

G. Schedule of Products and Locations: Provide complete information, including reference drawings, in the materials and finishes manual on all products specified in Divisions 02 through 33.

H. Warranties and Bonds: Provide copies of all applicable warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. 2. Clearly indicate commencement and expiration dates.

I. Provide a draft of the proposed Product Maintenance Information Manual. Submit draft at least 90 calendar days before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion to COTR for approval in writing.

2.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers’ maintenance documentation, preventative maintenance program, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below. Organize information into separate and distinct volumes by Division, and further divided into separate volumes by system (for example, HVAC systems and plumbing systems).

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual

identified by product name and arranged to match manual’s table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.

C. Descriptions: Include the following:

1. Product name, model number, and location. 2. Manufacturer’s name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests.



9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. 10. Charts of valve tag numbers, with the room number location and function of each valve. 11. Circuit directories of panelboards for electric and electronic systems, including the

following:

a. Electric service. b. Controls. c. Telecommunications. d. Computer network. e. Security.

D. Manufacturers’ Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers’ maintenance documentation

including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:

1. Safety information. 2. Standard printed maintenance instructions and bulletins. 3. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly

and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 4. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 5. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

E. Preventative Maintenance Plan: Provide an annual preventative maintenance plan indicating when maintenance tasks should be performed, such that work is spread evenly as possible throughout the year. Preventative Maintenance should not be misconstrued as reconditioning, or major repairs or replacement of components, but designed to reveal through certain procedures and inspection the need for such actions in time to prevent malfunctions during operation.

F. Preventative Maintenance and Maintenance and Repair Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential preventative maintenance and maintenance and repair procedures:

1. Preventative Maintenance:

a. Provide instructions and location diagrams for the following:

1) Checking general condition of System and Components. 2) Inspecting for accumulation of dust, dirt or any foreign matter, and clean as

needed. 3) Cleaning or replacing all filters and screens and adjust packing for pumps,

valves, etc. 4) Examining indicating lamps, gauges, thermometers, etc., and replace as

required. 5) Checking electrical primary, secondary, terminal blocks and contacts, for

loose connections. 6) Checking Operation of strainers, valves, instruments and control switches,

including their contacts. 7) Checking instrument transformers for proper condition and replace burned

out fuses. 8) Removing dust from all electrical insulators and insulation and inspecting

bus bars and connections for proper condition, loose connection, and overheating or overloads.

9) Examining safety interlocks, automatic shutters, dampers, valves, etc, and their operating mechanisms for proper operation.



10) Checking space heaters, thermostats, and all controls for proper operation 11) Lubricating mechanisms, contacts, and other moving component parts. 12) Specific procedures applicable to specialized equipment and systems.

2. Maintenance and Repairs:

a. Include information and detailed diagnostic testing and inspection instructions, and procedures that detail essential system and equipment maintenance procedures including but not limited to:

1) Examination of shaft seal for excessive leakage. 2) Monitoring of systems for excessive bearing noise. 3) Checking equipment motor housing for excessive heat buildup. 4) Measuring and recording suction and discharge pressures. 5) Verifying lubrication requirements. 6) Realignment of shaft coupling. 7) Checking motor amperes drawn at full load. 8) Checking motor shaft run-out 9) Performing thermographic scanning of motor starters, motors, pumps, and

all mechanical and electrical equipment that requires a connection. 10) Proper cleaning and corrosion control of drip pan and drainage lines. 11) Inspection of internal equipment components for unusual wear of failure. 12) Procedures for maintenance including precautions against improper

maintenance.

b. Include the following information and items that detail essential system and equipment repair procedures:

1) Complete troubleshooting guide. 2) Complete repair instructions including equipment and component removal,

disassembly, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 3) Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions including noise, vibration,

and efficiency adjustments. 4) Demonstration and training video, if such video, CD-ROM or DVD is

provided by the manufacturer.

G. Maintenance Service Schedules

1. Provide recommended frequencies, inspections, service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and maintenance and service with standard time allotment.

a. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.

b. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers’ forms for recording maintenance.

H. Spare Parts List, Recommended Inventory Requirements, and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified, and cross-referenced to manufacturers’ maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.



I. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent.

J. Schedule of Products and Locations: Provide complete information, including reference drawings if necessary, in the Equipment and Systems manual on all products specified in Divisions 02 through 33.

K. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of all applicable warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. 2. Clearly indicate commencement and expiration dates.

L. Provide a draft of the proposed Product Maintenance Information Manual. Submit draft at least 90 calendar days before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion to COTR for approval in writing.

2.7 WARRANTY MANUAL

A. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Contract Specifications. Warranty documents include Contractor and Major Subcontractors warranty letters, special warranty documents, and manufacturer's warranties.

B. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring metal hinged loose-leaf binders in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents. Binders shall not be filled beyond 75 percent of their rated capacity. Binders shall also have boomerang plastic sheet lifters, metal backbone, concealed rivet construction, and three-trigger position DublLock mechanism (lock, unlock, open) on top and bottom. Binder color shall be black unless another color is selected by COTR.

C. Identify each binder on front (If identification can not be attached to the front include it as the first page in the manual) and spine, with printed title "PROJECT WARRANTIES," Contract number and name. The use of business labels is prohibited.

D. Dividers: Provide three-hole, heavyweight, and tabbed dividers for each separate section. Provide laser printed description front and back of tabs, to indicate the appropriate Specification Section. Provide a typed index of the contents in each section on the first page behind each section divider. Include a matching master table of contents for the manual using the same indexing system. Install a colored sheet between each different warranty within a tabbed section.

E. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

F. Provide a draft of the proposed Warranty Manual. Submit draft at least 90 calendar days before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion to COTR for approval in writing.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION

A. Compile all required information, as it is approved, into volumes grouped first by specification Division and then by Section in accordance with the information requirements outlined in Part 2 of this specification section and the approved Operation and Maintenance Manual Format.

B. For the first Directory Submittal, prepare a separate manual that provides an organized reference to the complete manual set. Subsequent submittals of the Directory shall integrate this information by Division.

C. Emergency Information: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by the Authority’s operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated. Include the emergency information in the volume of the manual set to which it applies.

D. Product Maintenance Information: For Divisions that specify products (refer to definitions) assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating manufacturer’s product information, part numbers, description, and care and maintenance instructions for each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work. Provide sufficient information, and when applicable color samples, for all products to enable repair or replacement of matching products or finishes.

E. Operation and Maintenance Information: For Divisions that specify systems, sub-systems, and equipment (refer to definitions) assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance and repair data providing complete information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment. Include complete operation, preventative maintenance, maintenance and repair instructions, and parts listing with sources indicated; recommended parts inventory listing, and similar information. Include all diagnostic and repair information available to manufacturer’s and Installer’s maintenance personnel.

1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information

for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional

manual for use by the Authority’s operating personnel.

F. Manufacturers’ Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers’ standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet with black arrows to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.

1. Provide supplementary text if manufacturers’ standard printed data is not provided by the manufacturer. Provide supplementary text where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems.



G. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers’ printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams and their relation to the structure or facility. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. Prepare floor plans that show the location of equipment in the building.

1. Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared Record Drawings in Division 01 Section “Project Record Documents.”

H. Comply with Division 01 Section “Project Closeout” for a schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation.


PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 1


SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings, Contract Provisions, Special Provisions, Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record Documents, including the following:

1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications 3. Record Product Data. 4. Record Samples. 5. Record Schedule. 6. Miscellaneous Record Submittals. 7. Computer Aided Design and Drafting (CADD) requirements for Record Drawings.


1. Division 01 Section “Construction Progress Documentation" for construction schedules as basis for Record Schedule.

2. Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements” for ensuring the record drawings and specifications are kept current on a daily basis and marked to show deviations which have been made from the original Contract documents

3. Division 01 Section "Project Closeout " for general closeout procedures

4. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements.

5. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific requirements for Project Record Documents of products in those Sections.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. CADD Record Drawings. Comply with the following:

1. Submit copies of CADD Record Drawings as follows:

a. Initial Submittal: Submit one set of complete, full-sized, CADD Record Drawings. Additional sets of drawings are not to be copied and submitted until after substantial completion to insure all changes are shown on the drawings. The COTR will facilitate review of drawings and indicate whether the CADD Record Drawings are acceptable. The COTR will return review comments indicating any corrections that need to be made to the drawings. The corrected CADD Record Drawings may then be reproduced, and organized into sets, printed, bound, and submitted as final submittal.



b. Final Submittal: After construction is complete and changes are recorded, submit six complete, full-sized, printed sets of CADD Record Drawings. Include each sheet, whether or not changes and additional information were recorded. Submit two copies of the CADD Record drawings in the approved electronic format. In addition, submit the original set of marked-up record drawings onto which the mark-ups were made.

B. Record Specifications: Submit two copies of Project Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications.

C. Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal at the direction of the COTR.

1. Where Record Product Data is required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit marked-up Product Data as an insert in the manual instead of submittal as Record Product Data.

D. Record Samples: Submit Record Samples as specified.

E. Record Schedule: Submit three copies of Record Schedule.

F. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Submit miscellaneous Record Submittals as specified.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: During construction, maintain one complete, full sized, set of blue- or black-line prints of the Drawings, applicable shop drawings, and coordination drawings for record purposes. These drawings shall be updated periodically, by the contractor, in CADD to replace the hand mark-ups. The mark-ups shall be preserved for the record. A complete set of Conformed Drawings in CADD will be provided to the Contractor for his use in maintaining the CADD Record Drawings. The CADD files will be provided in Bentley Microstation v7 v8 or Autodesk AutoCAD v2010.

1. Maintenance of Drawings: Maintain the drawings in a clean, dry, legible condition.

Keep drawings available during normal working hours for inspection by the COTR. 2. Preparation: Routinely mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where

installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the mark-ups on the record set.

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later especially underground structures.

b. Record information in an understandable drawing technique. Ensure mark-ups are legible and reproducible.

c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check markups before enclosing concealed installations.

3. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dimensional changes to Drawings.



b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Depths of foundations below first floor. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Duct size and routing. i. Locations of concealed internal utilities. j. Changes made by Change Notice and RFI. k. Changes made following COTR's written orders. l. Details not on the original Drawings. m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.

4. Mark the Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked, insert them into drawing set and assign an appropriate sheet number (one that follows the number sequence of the contract drawings). Show cross-references to the new sheets on the Drawings. Update drawing index as needed to reflect new sheets.

5. Mark record drawings with red pen that will reproduce clearly. Use different colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at the same location.

6. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or not indicated on the original Drawings.

7. Note applicable Construction Change Notices, Requests for Information, Technical Support Requests, and similar identification numbers, where applicable. Copies of change documentation shall be inserted into the set for clarification but are not a substitute for mark-ups. If identification numbers for documentation are marked on the drawing when no change resulted, indicate "No Change".

B. Newly Prepared Project Record Drawing Sheets: The contractor may add new sheets with supporting sketches and change documentation instead of marking original sheets when neither the original Drawings nor Shop Drawings are suitable to show actual installation or if the new sheets can show the changes more clearly or additional space is required for markup information.

1. Assign a number to each new sheet and cross-reference on the appropriate related sheets. 2. Consult with COTR for proper scale and scope of detailing and notations required to

record the actual physical installation and its relation to other construction. 3. Integrate newly prepared sheets into Record Drawing sets and update drawing index to

reflect new sheets.

C. Format:

1. Identify and date each Record Drawing. Include the designation “PROJECT RECORD DRAWING” in a prominent location on each sheet.

2. Cover Sheet shall have the designation “PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS”, Date, Name of Contractor, and signature.

3. Record CADD Drawings:

a. CADD files provided by COTR and utilized for recording of record mark-ups shall maintain the format of the files provided. Place electronic mark-ups in a newly created layer on each drawing.

b. CADD files created by Contractor: Organize CADD information into separate



electronic files that correspond to each sheet of the Record Drawing set. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each CADD file.

4. Include the following identification on newly prepared Project Record Drawing Sheets:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING." d. Name of Architect/Engineer (if applicable). e. Name of Contractor. f. Initials of person incorporating the change. g. Drawing identification number. (Ixx/Dxx)

5. Organization of Newly Prepared Project Record Drawing Prints: Organize newly

prepared Record Drawings into manageable sets. Include any contract required coordination drawings and applicable shop drawings. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.

D. ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR RECORD DRAWINGS

1. When there are multiple copies of the same sheet with different mark-ups on each copy, the General Contractor is responsible for consolidating all mark-ups onto a single copy of each individual sheet.

2. The information from all RFI's, Change Notices, Design Clarifications, field adjustments, or any other changes, must be noted on the appropriate drawing. These mark-ups must include enough information to clearly show the actual constructed conditions resulting from the change. The information may be drawn onto the drawing, copied onto the drawing or copied onto a new full size sheet. Every change in construction must have RFI’s, Change Orders or similar supplementary documents; therefore they must be copied in original size and attached to the back of the preceding drawing or at the end of the drawing set, as an appendix, as a full size sheet, same in size as the drawing set. Multiple RFI’s, CN’s and other supplemental documents may be copied in each single sheet.

3. All changes made on the drawings shall reference the appropriate RFI, Change Notices, Design Clarification, or details from the contractor prepared shop drawings. If the markup is due to a field adjustment, it shall be indicated as such.

4. Additional Sheets such as shop drawings and sheets showing copies of applicable change documentation must be inserted into the set as necessary. Such sheets shall have a title block.

5. All shop drawings showing information not on the construction drawings (with the exception of concrete embedded steel reinforcement bending drawings and steel reaction and fabrication drawings) shall be marked up and included in the record drawing set. They shall be the same size (changes in scale noted) as all other drawings, include a title block, and clearly indicate that they are record shop drawings. When the shop drawings more accurately show locations and conditions, they may be marked in lieu of referenced on the original drawings. This does not relieve the contractor from the shop drawing inclusion requirements in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals that are a separate item

6. Include contract required coordination drawings in the record drawing set.

2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS



A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. Print marked specifications, addenda, and contract modifications on paper any color but white and ensure that black font is clearly legible on the color chosen. Use the same paper color throughout the project. Use black font for these changes.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Mark copy with the brand name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.

3. Record the name of the manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made.

4. For each principal product, indicate whether Record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as Record Product Data.

5. Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings, and Product Data where applicable.

2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA

A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation.

3. Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings, and Product Data where applicable. 4. Upon completion of mark-up, submit a complete set of record Product Data to COTR for

the Authority's records. 5. Where Record Product Data is required as part of maintenance manuals, submit

marked-up product data as an insert in the manual.

2.4 RECORD SAMPLE SUBMITTAL

A. Prior to date of Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall meet the Authority's personnel at the site to determine which of the samples maintained during the construction period shall be transmitted to the Authority for record purposes. Comply with the COTR's instructions for packaging, identification marking, and delivery to the Authority's sample storage space. Dispose of other samples in manner specified for disposal of surplus and waste materials.

2.5 RECORD SCHEDULE

A. Record Schedule Submittal: Immediately prior to date of inspection for Final Acceptance, submit a copy of the As-built Contract CPM Schedule (if applicable) to the COTR.

B. Mark the Contractor’s Construction Schedule to show actual start and finish dates for all work activities and milestones, based on the accepted monthly updates. This Record Schedule shall be in same format as Contractor’s Construction Schedule. This Record Schedule shall be in tabular and in time-scaled PDM plot formats.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS



A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous

record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. Submit to COTR.

1. Categories of requirements resulting in miscellaneous records include, but are not limited to the following:

a. Field records on excavations and foundations. b. Field records on underground construction and similar Work. c. Survey showing locations and elevations of underground lines. d. Invert elevations of drainage piping. e. Surveys establishing building lines and levels. f. Authorized measurements utilizing unit prices or allowances. g. Records of plant treatment.

h. Ambient and substrate condition tests. i. Certifications received in lieu of labels on bulk products. j. Batch mixing and bulk delivery records. k. Testing and qualification of tradesmen. l. Documented qualification of installation firms. m. Load and performance testing. n. Inspections and certifications by governing authorities. o. Leakage and water-penetration tests. p. Fire resistance and flame spread test results. q. Final inspection and correction procedures. r. Summary letter from Special Inspector indicating structural work was completed in

accordance with applicable standards. s. Report of potable water testing. t. Backflow prevention certificates. u. Final inspections of all trades. v. Certificates for piping for fire protection systems and FPS supervisory systems. w. Approvals of Health Department or FDA as applicable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as they occur.

B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Repair or reproduce torn or dirty sheets. Provide access to Project Record Documents for COTR's reference during normal working hours.


DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900 - 1


SECTION 017900 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing the Authority's personnel, including the following:

1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment.


1. Division 01 Section “Application for Payment for cost values assigned to Demonstration and Training requirements.

2. Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for requirements for pre- instruction conferences.

3. Division 01 Section “Operation and Maintenance Data for preparing and submitting demonstration and training agenda and course of study.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Instruction Program: Submit, 90 calendar days prior to request for substantial completion inspection, two copies of outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module.

1. Provide two separate sessions per module. One session per module shall be conducted after normal working hours.

2. At completion of training, submit six (6) complete set(s) of training manual(s) for the Authority's use.

B. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article provide credentials to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. Provide credentials to demonstrate the capabilities and experience of firms required by this Section.

C. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of instruction time.

D. Evaluations: For each participant and for each training module, submit results and documentation of performance-based test.



E. Demonstration and Training Video: Submit two copies at end of each training module on media that will play in a standard DVD player.


A. Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating maintenance personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for this Project. Provide 4 references for the Facilitator’s firm that will be used to determine if their training and education has indicated a record of successful learning performance.

B. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training.

C. Videographer Qualifications: A videographer who is a trained professional with a minimum of five years’ experience in video recording training sessions.

D. Pre-instruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to demonstration and training including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Inspect and discuss locations and other facilities required for instruction. 2. Review and finalize instruction schedule and verify availability of educational materials,

instructors' personnel, audiovisual equipment, and facilities needed to avoid delays. 3. Review required content of instruction.

4. Review weather, forecasted weather conditions, and procedures to follow if conditions are unfavorable for instruction that must occur outside.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate instruction schedule with the Authority's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting the Authority's operations. Coordinate with COTR.

B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time, and course content.

C. Coordinate content of training agenda with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by COTR.

D. Ensure that approved Operations and Maintenance Manuals are available prior to conducting any training.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM

A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training agenda for



each system, sub system, and equipment. Develop an instruction program for equipment that is not part of a system or a subsystem, as required by individual Specification Sections, and as follows:

1. Fire-protection systems, including fire alarm and fire-extinguishing systems. 2. Heat generation, including boilers, feedwater equipment, pumps, steam distribution

piping, and water distribution piping. 3. Refrigeration systems, including chillers, cooling towers, condensers, pumps, and

distribution piping. 4. HVAC systems, including air-handling equipment, air distribution systems and terminal

equipment and devices. 5. HVAC instrumentation and controls. 6. Electrical service and distribution, including transformers, switchboards,

panelboards, uninterruptible power supplies and motor controls.

B. Training Agenda: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each agenda. Submit to COTR 45 calendar days prior to request for substantial completion inspection. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following:

1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following:

a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. c. Operating standards. d. Regulatory requirements. e. Equipment function. f. Operating characteristics. g. Limiting conditions. h. Performance curves.

2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail:

a. Emergency manuals. b. Operations manuals. c. Maintenance manuals. d. Project Record Documents. e. Identification systems. f. Hazards/Material Safety Data Sheets. g. Warranties and bonds. h. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.

3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable:

a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages. b. Instructions on stopping. c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits. e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems. f. Special operating instructions and procedures.

4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable:

a. Startup procedures.



b. Equipment or system break-in procedures. c. Routine and normal operating instructions. d. Regulation and control procedures. e. Control sequences.

f. Safety procedures. g. Instructions on stopping. h. Normal shutdown instructions. i. Operating procedures for emergencies. j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure. k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. m. Special operating instructions and procedures.

5. Adjustments: Include the following:

a. Alignments. b. Checking adjustments. c. Noise and vibration adjustments. d. Economy and efficiency adjustments.

6. Troubleshooting: Include the following:

a. Diagnostic instructions. b. Test and inspection procedures.

7. Maintenance: Include the following:

a. Inspection procedures. b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. d. Procedures for routine cleaning e. Procedures for preventive maintenance. f. Procedures for routine maintenance. g. Instruction on use of special tools.

8. Repairs: Include the following:

a. Diagnosis instructions. b. Repair instructions. c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly

instructions. d. Instructions for identifying parts and components. e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module. Assemble training agenda into a combined training manual.



B. Provide conditioned space with tables and chairs for conducting the classroom portion of all training.

C. Provide instructional equipment at instruction location.

3.2 INSTRUCTION

A. Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training agenda, to coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and COTR for number of participants, instruction times, and location.

B. Engage qualified instructors to instruct the Authority's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.

1. Furnish an instructor, approved by COTR, to describe basis of each system designed for

this project, operational requirements, criteria, and regulatory requirements. 2. COTR will furnish Contractor with names of training participants.

C. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.

1. Schedule training with COTR with at least 15 calendar days’ advance notice. 2. Submit a daily training agenda (module) to COTR for review and approval for each

system/equipment no later than 15calendar days prior to the scheduled system equipment startup. After granting the agenda approval, COTR shall provide a listing of dates, times, and places of the training programs for Contractor coordination.

D. Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each participant's mastery of module by use of an oral/demonstration or a written performance-based test.

E. Demonstration and Training Video: Record instruction of the Authority's personnel in the operation and maintenance of equipment and systems. Edit video to remove non-instructional conversation. Videographer shall select vantage points to best show equipment, systems, and procedures demonstrated. Provide movie file of each unique training session in its entirety. Record video at a recording quality equal to or better than a standard DVD.

1. Record each training module separately. Include classroom instructions and demonstrations, board diagrams, and other visual aids, but not student practice.

2. At beginning of each training module, record each chart containing learning objective and lesson outline.

F. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to the Authority. Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial training use.


WASHINGTON DULLES INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT IF1503

HVAC IMPROVEMENTS AT JP MORGAN CHASE BUILDING APRIL 11, 2016

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 1

SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 011000 "Summary" for restrictions on use of the premises, Owner-occupancy

requirements, and phasing requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and dispose of them off-site unless indicated

to be salvaged or reinstalled.

B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage,

and deliver to Owner ready for reuse.

C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage,

prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated.

D. Existing to Remain: Leave existing items that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise

indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.

E. Dismantle: To remove by disassembling or detaching an item from a surface, using gentle

methods and equipment to prevent damage to the item and surfaces; disposing of items unless

indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.

1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.

B. Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones

and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to

Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner.




1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner.

1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished.

2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure.

3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials,

demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid

delays.

4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed

by selective demolition operations.

5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.


A. Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician.

B. Engineering Survey: Submit engineering survey of condition of building.

C. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including Drawings, that indicates the measures

proposed for protecting individuals and property, for dust control and , for noise control.

Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers.

D. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:

1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending

dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's and other tenants' on-site operations are

uninterrupted.

2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted.

3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.

4. Use of elevator and stairs.

5. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of

Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work.

E. Predemolition Photographs or Video: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction,

including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by demolition

operations. Comply with Section 013233 "Photographic Documentation." Submit before Work

begins.

F. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for

recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that

recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician

and date refrigerant was recovered.

G. Warranties: Documentation indicating that existing warranties are still in effect after completion

of selective demolition.




1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged.


A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification

program.

1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area.

Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.

B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as

far as practical.

1. Before selective demolition, Owner will remove the following items: TBD

C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding

with selective demolition.

D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the

Work.

1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work.

2. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify

Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate

contract.

E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.

F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them

against damage during selective demolition operations.

1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged

during selective demolition, by methods and with materials and using approved contractors so

as not to void existing warranties. Notify warrantor before proceeding. Existing warranties

include the following: TBD




B. Notify warrantor on completion of selective demolition, and obtain documentation verifying

that existing system has been inspected and warranty remains in effect. Submit documentation

at Project closeout.

1.11 COORDINATION

A. Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's operations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before

beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities

having jurisdiction.

B. Standards: Comply with ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition

operations.

B. Review Project Record Documents of existing construction or other existing condition and

hazardous material information provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing

conditions are same as those indicated in Project Record Documents.

C. Perform an engineering survey of condition of building to determine whether removing any

element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or

adjacent structures during selective building demolition operations.

1. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective

demolition activities.

D. Verify that hazardous materials have been remediated before proceeding with building

demolition operations.

E. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction

photographs or video.

1. Comply with requirements specified in Section 013233 "Photographic Documentation."

2. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide

photographs or video of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by

salvage operations.




3. Before selective demolition or removal of existing building elements that will be

reproduced or duplicated in final Work, make permanent record of measurements,

materials, and construction details required to make exact reproduction.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Refrigerant: Before starting demolition, remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment

according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

3.3 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and

protect them against damage.

B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify,

disconnect, and seal or cap off utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas

to be selectively demolished.

1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor.

2. Arrange to shut off utilities with utility companies.

3. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide

temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain

continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.

4. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC

systems, equipment, and components indicated on Drawings to be removed.

a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap

or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.

b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same

or compatible piping material and leave in place.

c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.

d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and

remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and

make equipment operational.

e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove

equipment and deliver to Owner.

f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug

remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.

g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible

ductwork material and leave in place.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Protection: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent

injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.

1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and

to and from occupied portions of building.




2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of

existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage

and damage to structure and interior areas.

3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are

exposed during selective demolition operations.

4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed.

5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling

specified in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."

B. Temporary Shoring: Design, provide, and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as

required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and

finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of

construction being demolished.

1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.

C. Remove temporary barricades and protections where hazards no longer exist.

3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new

construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of

governing regulations and as follows:

1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete

selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting

members on the next lower level.

2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use

cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.

Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and

chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain.

3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring

existing finished surfaces.

4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At

concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden

space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices

during flame-cutting operations.

5. Maintain fire watch during and for at least 3 hours after flame-cutting operations.

6. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.

7. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and

promptly dispose of off-site.

8. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid

free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.

9. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to

impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.

10. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.

B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal

operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other

adjacent occupied and used facilities.




C. Removed and Salvaged Items:

1. Clean salvaged items.

2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.

3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.

4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner.

5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

D. Removed and Reinstalled Items:

1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse.

2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.

3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new

materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials

necessary to make item functional for use indicated.

E. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling

during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable,

protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their

original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.

3.6 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS

A. Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Using power-driven saw, cut concrete to a depth of at

least 3/4 inch (19 mm) at junctures with construction to remain. Dislodge concrete from

reinforcement at perimeter of areas being demolished, cut reinforcement, and then remove

remainder of concrete. Neatly trim openings to dimensions indicated.

B. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations

in RFCI's "Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings.”

3.7 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and recycle or dispose of them according

to Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.

2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces

and areas.

3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that

will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.

4. Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419 "Construction Waste

Management and Disposal."

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.




3.8 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective

demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition

operations began.

3.9 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION SCHEDULE


TomLee

Typewritten Text

N/A

TomLee

Typewritten Text



CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 1

SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials,

mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the

following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash, slag cement, other pozzolans, and silica fume;

materials subject to compliance with requirements.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when

characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances

warrant adjustments.

1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.

C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing Drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and

placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar

diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing,

and supports for concrete reinforcement.

D. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the

structure.

1. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:




1. Cementitious materials.

2. Admixtures.

3. Form materials and form-release agents.

4. Steel reinforcement and accessories.

5. Curing compounds.

6. Bonding agents.

C. Field quality-control reports.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as

ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified

Concrete Flatwork Technician.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, qualified according to ASTM C 1077

and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing

Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program.

2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing

Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician, Grade I. Testing agency

laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician,

Grade II.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and

damage.


A. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from

physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low

temperatures.

1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C)

for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the

temperature range required by ACI 301 (ACI 301M).

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on

frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or

chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.

B. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) and as follows:

1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled

mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water




equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to

cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep

subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL

A. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract

Documents:

1. ACI 301 (ACI 301M).

2. ACI 117 (ACI 117M).

2.2 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that provide continuous, true, and

smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.

1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.

2. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1,

and as follows:

a. High-density overlay, Class 1 or better.

b. Medium-density overlay, Class 1 or better; mill-release agent treated and edge

sealed.

c. Structural 1, B-B or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.

d. B-B (Concrete Form), Class 1 or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.

B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material.

Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

C. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch (19 by 19 mm), minimum.

D. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that does not bond with,

stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and does not impair subsequent treatments of

concrete surfaces.

1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.

E. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or metal

form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of

concrete on removal.

1. Furnish units that leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch (25 mm) to the plane of

exposed concrete surface.

2. Furnish ties that, when removed, leave holes no larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in diameter in

concrete surface.




3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing

or waterproofing.

2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.

B. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, as drawn.

2.4 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES

A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), plain-steel bars, cut true to

length with ends square and free of burrs.

B. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening

reinforcing bars and welded-wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel

wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater

compressive strength than concrete and as follows:

1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view, where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use

CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.

2.5 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from

the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from

single source from single manufacturer.

B. Cementitious Materials:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I/II gray.

2. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F or C.

3. Slag Cement: ASTM C 989/C 989M, Grade 100 or 120.

4. Silica Fume: ASTM C 1240, amorphous silica.

C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33/C 33M, Class 3M coarse aggregate or better, graded.

Provide aggregates from a single source.

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1 inch (25 mm) nominal.

2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260/C 260M.

E. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and

that do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened

concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.




F. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.

2.6 WATERSTOPS

A. Self-Expanding Rubber Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip,

bentonite-free hydrophilic polymer-modified chloroprene rubber, for adhesive bonding to

concrete, 3/8 by 3/4 inch (10 by 19 mm).

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to

the following:

a. CETCO, a Minerals Technologies company.

b. Grace Construction Products; W.R. Grace & Co. -- Conn.

c. Sika Greenstreak.

2.7 CURING MATERIALS

A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing

approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) when dry.

B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

C. Water: Potable.

D. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B,

dissipating.



the following:

a. ChemMasters, Inc.

b. Kaufman Products, Inc.

c. W. R. Meadows, Inc.

2.8 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing

and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit

requirements, and as follows:

1. Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to

hardened concrete.

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?ulid=11016

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?uid=123456999185










2.9 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of

laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M).

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture

designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.

B. Cementitious Materials: Use fly ash, pozzolan, slag cement, and silica fume as needed to reduce

the total amount of portland cement, which would otherwise be used, by not less than 40

percent.

C. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.

2.10 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS

A. Footings: Normal-weight concrete.

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) at 28 days.

2. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm), plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).

3. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-inch (25-mm)

nominal maximum aggregate size.

B. Foundation Walls: Normal-weight concrete.





C. Building Walls: Normal-weight concrete.





2.11 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.12 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to

ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information.




1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and

delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32

deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

B. Project-Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to

ASTM C 94/C 94M. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type batch machine mixer.

1. For mixer capacity of 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) or smaller, continue mixing at least 1-1/2

minutes, but not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of

batch is released.

2. For mixer capacity larger than 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m), increase mixing time by 15 seconds

for each additional 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m).

3. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Project

identification name and number, date, mixture type, mixture time, quantity, and amount

of water added. Record approximate location of final deposit in structure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK INSTALLATION

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M), to

support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied,

until structure can support such loads.

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment,

elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117 (ACI 117M).

C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows:

1. Class A, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) for smooth-formed finished surfaces.

D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.

E. Construct forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces.

Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast-concrete surfaces. Provide

top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.

1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.

2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.

F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required

elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed

strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.

G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork

is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent

loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.

H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.




I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads

required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.

J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and

other debris just before placing concrete.

K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and

maintain proper alignment.

L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written

instructions, before placing reinforcement.

3.2 EMBEDDED ITEM INSTALLATION

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that

is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,

instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with

tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC 303.

3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS

A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does

not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50

deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be

damaged by form-removal operations, and curing and protection operations need to be

maintained.

1. Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that support

weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved at least 70 percent of its 28-day

design compressive strength.

2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without

loosening or disturbing shores.

B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or

otherwise damaged form-facing material are not acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new

form-release agent.

C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints.

Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces

unless approved by Architect.

3.4 SHORING AND RESHORING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M) and ACI 301 (ACI 301M) for design, installation, and

removal of shoring and reshoring.




B. Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate and

provide adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection.

3.5 STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and

supporting reinforcement.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that

reduce bond to concrete.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and

support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld

crossing reinforcing bars.

D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

3.6 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations

indicated or as approved by Architect.

1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across

construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through

sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.

2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete.

3. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and

girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs.

4. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls,

near corners, and in concealed locations where possible.

5. Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened

or partially hardened concrete surfaces.

C. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate

or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.

3.7 WATERSTOP INSTALLATION

A. Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other locations indicated,

according to manufacturer's written instructions, adhesive bonding, mechanically fastening, and

firmly pressing into place. Install in longest lengths practicable.

3.8 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded

items is complete and that required inspections are completed.




B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless

approved by Architect.

C. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to

limitations of ACI 301 (ACI 301M).

1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to

mixture.

D. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new

concrete is placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness.

If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit

concrete to avoid segregation.

1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth not to exceed formwork design pressures

and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.

2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301

(ACI 301M).

3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators

vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6

inches (150 mm) into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of

concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration

to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and

other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.

3.9 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in

an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and

defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface

irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces to receive a rubbed finish.

B. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed-finished as-cast concrete where

indicated:

1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete

surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform

color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing

process.

C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces

adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent

formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent

unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.




3.10 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEM INSTALLATION

A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in

place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-

place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to

complete the Work.

B. Equipment Bases and Foundations:

1. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

2. Construct concrete bases 4 inches ((100 mm)) high unless otherwise indicated, and

extend base not less than 6 inches (150 mm) in each direction beyond the maximum

dimensions of supported equipment unless otherwise indicated or unless required for

seismic anchor support.


4. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,

install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of concrete

base.

5. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete

base and anchor into structural concrete substrate.

6. Prior to pouring concrete, place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings,

templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

7. Cast anchor-bolt insert into bases. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper

attachment to supported equipment.

3.11 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot

temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 (ACI 301M)

for hot-weather protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or

windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and

during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after

placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported

slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after

loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for remainder

of curing period.

D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed

surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.

E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the

following materials:

a. Water.




b. Continuous water-fog spray.

c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete

surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover

for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at

least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less

than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period, using cover

material and waterproof tape.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller

according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall

within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair

damage during curing period.

a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without

damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound

manufacturer.

3.12 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and

replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.

B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of 1 part portland cement to 2-1/2

parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve, using only enough water for handling

and placing.

C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks,

spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and

stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.

1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than

1/2 inch (13 mm) in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch (19

mm). Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water,

and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching

mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone

plugs secured in place with bonding agent.

2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and

standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar matches surrounding color.

Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before

proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than

surrounding surface.

3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and

structural performance as determined by Architect.

D. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and

patching mortar.




E. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's

approval.

3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a special inspector to perform field tests and inspections

and prepare test reports.

B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and

inspections and to submit reports.

C. Inspections:

1. Steel reinforcement placement.

2. Steel reinforcement welding.

3. Headed bolts and studs.

4. Verification of use of required design mixture.

5. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing.

6. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature.

7. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and

slabs.

D. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to

ASTM C 172/C 172M shall be performed according to the following requirements:

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete

mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m), but less than 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m), plus one set for

each additional 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m) or fraction thereof.

2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample,

but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional

tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

3. Air Content: ASTM C 231/C 231M, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one

test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each

concrete mixture.

4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is

40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below or 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each

composite sample.

5. Unit Weight: ASTM C 567/C 567M, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete;

one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each

concrete mixture.

6. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M.

a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each

composite sample.

b. Cast and field cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite

sample.

7. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured

specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days.




a. Test one set of two field-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens

at 28 days.

b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of

two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.

8. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-

cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures

for protecting and curing in-place concrete.

9. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three

consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength

and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by

more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa).

10. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and

Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain

Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete

testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive

strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking

strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

11. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may

be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of

concrete.

12. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete

when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other

requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency

may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with

ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect.

13. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine

compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

14. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply

with the Contract Documents.

3.14 PROTECTION OF LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS

A. Protect liquid floor treatment from damage and wear during the remainder of construction

period. Use protective methods and materials, including temporary covering, recommended in

writing by liquid floor treatments installer.




METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 1

SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment.

2. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified

in other Sections.

3. Metal grating and supports.

B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following:

1. Loose steel lintels.

2. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete for applications where they are not

specified in other Sections.

C. Related Requirements:

1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves,

slotted-channel inserts, wedge-type inserts, and other items cast into concrete.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint

and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats

are compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of metal fabrications that are anchored to or that receive other work.

Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves,

concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in

concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.


A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Paint products.

2. Grout.




B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations, sections,

and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.

Provide Shop Drawings for the following:

1. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment.

2. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified

in other Sections.

3. Metal grating and supports.


A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.

B. Mill Certificates: Signed by stainless-steel manufacturers, certifying that products furnished

comply with requirements.

C. Welding certificates.

D. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers,

certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.

E. Research/Evaluation Reports: For post-installed anchors, from ICC-ES.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,

"Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with

metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature

changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints,

overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.




1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material

surfaces.

2.2 METALS

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise

indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials

without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, and Plate: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304.

D. Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304.

E. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M, cold-formed steel tubing.

F. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Standard Weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.

G. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4.

1. Size of Channels: 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 inches (41 by 41 mm).

2. Material: Galvanized steel, ASTM A 653/A 653M, commercial steel, Type B, with G90

(Z275) coating; 0.079-inch (2-mm) nominal thickness.

H. Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 6061-T6.

I. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T6.

J. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 443.0-F.

2.3 FASTENERS

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use

and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941

(ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class

required.

1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum.

2. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel.

B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M,

Property Class 4.6); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat

washers.

C. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts,

ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M); with hex nuts, ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M); and, where

indicated, flat washers; Alloy Group 1 (A1).




D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563

(ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers.

1. Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being

fastened is indicated to be galvanized.

E. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the

load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in

concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified

independent testing agency.

F. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise

indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or

ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip

galvanized per ASTM F 2329.

G. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors.

1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with

ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise

indicated.

2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 1

(A1) stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts, ASTM F 594

(ASTM F 836M).

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 099123 Interior Painting."

B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and

compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.

D. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout

complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by

manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

E. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-

weight, air-entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 4000 psi (27.6

MPa).

2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units

only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain

structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.




B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of

approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on

exposed surfaces.

C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or

otherwise impairing work.

D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion

resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing.

F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or

welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head

(countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

G. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude

water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws,

and similar items.

I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring

devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.

J. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally

welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches (3.2 by 38 mm), with a minimum 6-inch (150-

mm) embedment and 2-inch (50-mm) hook, not less than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends and

corners of units and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to

complete the Work.

B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise

indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent

construction.

1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated.

2. Furnish inserts for units installed after concrete is placed.

C. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated.




D. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with primer specified in Section 099123 "Interior

Painting" where indicated.

2.7 METAL GRATING AND SUPPORTS

A. Provide grating sections where indicated fabricated from pressure-locked aluminum bar grating.

Limit openings in gratings to no more than 1/2 inch (12 mm) in least dimension.

B. Provide stainless-steel angle supports as indicated.

1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete

construction.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM

A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown

with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed

field splices where possible.

B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with

other work.

1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or masonry

construction.

C. Galvanize and prime miscellaneous steel trim.

D. Prime miscellaneous steel trim with primer specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."]

2.9 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES

A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from

concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than

two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.

2.10 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

B. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into

surrounding surface.

2.11 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for

steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.




1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint

adhesion.

B. Preparation for Shop Priming Galvanized Items: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of

grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with metallic phosphate process.

C. Shop prime iron and steel items unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on

fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.

1. Shop prime with primers specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3,

"Commercial Blast Cleaning."

E. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification

No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.

1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.

2.12 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, Class I, AA-M12C22A41.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing

metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with

edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and

levels.

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are

not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after

fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion

resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent

surface.

D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal

fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for




use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and

other connectors.

E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete,

masonry, or similar construction.

F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that come into contact with grout,

concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with the following:

1. Cast Aluminum: Heavy coat of bituminous paint.

2. Extruded Aluminum: Two coats of clear lacquer.

3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported,

including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.

B. Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry, concrete, or steel pipe columns. Secure girders

with anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or concrete or with bolts through top plates of

pipe columns.

1. Where grout space under bearing plates is indicated for girders supported on concrete or

masonry, install as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article.

C. Install pipe columns on concrete footings with grouted baseplates. Position and grout column

baseplates as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article.

1. Grout baseplates of columns supporting steel girders after girders are installed and

leveled.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and

abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair

galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.




BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07 11 13 - 1

SECTION 07 11 13 - BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Cold-applied, emulsified-asphalt dampproofing.




A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with application only when existing and forecasted weather

conditions permit dampproofing to be performed according to manufacturers' written

instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary dampproofing materials and primers from single source

from single manufacturer.

B. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC content limits of authorities having jurisdiction

unless otherwise required.

2.2 COLD-APPLIED, EMULSIFIED-ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1. BASF Corporation; Construction Systems.

2. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company.

3. Henry Company.








4. W. R. Meadows, Inc.

B. Trowel Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type II, Class 1.

C. Fibered Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type II, Class 1.

D. Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type III, Class 1.

2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended in writing by dampproofing manufacturer

for intended use and compatible with bituminous dampproofing.

B. Emulsified-Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 1227, Type III, Class 1, except diluted with water as

recommended in writing by manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions with Applicator present, for compliance with

requirements for surface smoothness, surface moisture, and other conditions affecting

performance of bituminous dampproofing work.

B. Proceed with application only after substrate construction and penetrating work have been

completed and unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Mask or otherwise protect adjoining exposed surfaces from being stained, spotted, or coated

with dampproofing. Prevent dampproofing materials from entering and clogging weep holes

and drains.

B. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to the dampproofing work; fill voids,

seal joints, and remove bond breakers if any, as recommended in writing by prime material

manufacturer.

3.3 APPLICATION, GENERAL

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for dampproofing application, cure time

between coats, and drying time before backfilling unless more stringent requirements are

indicated.

1. Apply dampproofing to provide continuous plane of protection.

2. Apply additional coats if recommended in writing by manufacturer or to achieve a

smooth surface and uninterrupted coverage.





B. Where dampproofing footings and foundation walls, apply from finished-grade line to top of

footing; extend over top of footing and down a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) over outside

face of footing.

3.4 COLD-APPLIED, EMULSIFIED-ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING

A. Concrete Foundations: Apply two brush or spray coats at not less than 1.5 gal./100 sq. ft.

(0.6 L/sq. m) for first coat and 1 gal./100 sq. ft. (0.4 L/sq. m) for second coat.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures

recommended in writing by manufacturer of affected construction.

END OF SECTION 07 11 13

TomLee

Typewritten Text



TomLee

Typewritten Text



JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 1

SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Silicone joint sealants.

2. Urethane joint sealants.

3. Latex joint sealants.


1. Section 079219 "Acoustical Joint Sealants" for sealing joints in sound-rated construction.


A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants

showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.

C. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation.

2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.

3. Joint-sealant formulation.

4. Joint-sealant color.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

B. Product Test Reports: For each kind of joint sealant, for tests performed by manufacturer and

witnessed by a qualified testing agency.

C. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.

TomLee

Typewritten Text





A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by

manufacturer.


A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-

sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F (5 deg C).

2. When joint substrates are wet.

3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for

applications indicated.

4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed

from joint substrates.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not

comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified

warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or

replace those joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements

specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from

the following:

1. Movement of the structure caused by stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant

manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression.

2. Disintegration of joint substrates from causes exceeding design specifications.

3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.

4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric

contaminants.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible

with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as

demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Silicone, S, NS, 50, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent

movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920,

Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT.



the following:

a. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc.

b. Pecora Corporation.

c. Sika Corporation; Joint Sealants.

2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Urethane, S, NS, 25, NT: Single-component, nonsag, nontraffic-use, plus 25 percent and

minus 25 percent movement capability, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S,

Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.



the following:

a. BASF Corporation; Construction Systems.


c. Sika Corporation; Joint Sealants.

d. Tremco Incorporated.

2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS

A. Acrylic Latex: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF.



the following:















b. May National Associates, Inc.; a subsidiary of Sika Corporation.

c. Pecora Corporation.

d. Tremco Incorporated.

2.5 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING

A. Sealant Backing Material, General: Nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants,

primers, and other joint fillers; and approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer

based on field experience and laboratory testing.



the following:


b. Construction Foam Products; a division of Nomaco, Inc.

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin),

and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum

sealant performance.

C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant

manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or

joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of

sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate

tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants

and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or

harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to

promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces

adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting

performance of the Work.











B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to

comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of

joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and

approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint

sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.

2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a

combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing

optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning

operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air.

Porous joint substrates include the following:

a. Concrete.

b. Masonry.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do

not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint

sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:

a. Metal.

b. Glass.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as

indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to

comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-

sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with

adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or

by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling

without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products

and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint

sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position

required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint

widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.




1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.

2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.

3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application, and

replace them with dry materials.

D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants

and backs of joints.

E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time

backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.

2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.

3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.

F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing

begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form

smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure

contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.

2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not

discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.

3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193 unless otherwise indicated.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods

and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of

products in which joints occur.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances

and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without

deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage

or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or deteriorated joint sealants

immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.

3.6 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces

JS-1.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete.




b. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of louvers.

c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: Silicone, nonstaining, S, NS, 50, NT.

3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

B. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces

JS-2.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.

b. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of concrete walls.

c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, S, NS, 25, NT.


C. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces

not subject to significant movement JS-3.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors.

b. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex.





HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 1

SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes hollow-metal work.


1. Section 083473.13 "Metal Sound Control Door Assemblies" for packaged, acoustical

hollow-metal door and frame assemblies with STC ratings of 35 or more.

2. Section 087100 "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow-metal doors.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to

NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates,

and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and

items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:

1. Elevations of each door type.

2. Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal-edge details and metal thicknesses.

3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses.

4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.

5. Details of each different wall opening condition.

6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections.

7. Details of accessories.




8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing.

9. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.

C. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow-metal work prepared by or under the supervision of

supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings.

Coordinate with final Door Hardware Schedule.


A. Product Test Reports: For each type of hollow-metal door and frame assembly, for tests

performed by a qualified testing agency.


A. Deliver hollow-metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit

and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.

1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units.

B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded

to jambs and mullions.

C. Store hollow-metal work vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum

4-inch- (102-mm-) high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch (6-mm) space between each

stacked door to permit air circulation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



1. Amweld International, LLC.

2. Ceco Door; ASSA ABLOY.

3. Curries Company; ASSA ABLOY.

4. Mesker Door Inc.

5. Pioneer Industries.

6. Steelcraft; an Allegion brand.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow-metal work from single source from single manufacturer.











2.2 INTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Construct interior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials,

fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as

specified.

B. Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 2.

1. Physical Performance: Level B according to SDI A250.4.

2. Doors:

a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.

b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm).

c. Face: Metallic-coated, cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch

(1.0 mm).

d. Edge Construction: Model 2, Seamless.

e. Core: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane,

polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core at manufacturer's

discretion.

f. Core: Polystyrene.

3. Frames:

a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch (1.3 mm).

2.3 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors:

1. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042

inch (1.0 mm) thick.

B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch (1.0

mm), and as follows:

1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable

for exposed applications.

B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of

scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.

C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z (12G) coating

designation; mill phosphatized.




1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M

or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M,

Class B.

E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.

F. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application

indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for

attaching hollow-metal frames of type indicated.

G. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches (102 mm), as measured

according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.

H. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting

of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-

developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion

characteristics.

I. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil (0.4-mm) dry film

thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur

components, and other deleterious impurities.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form

metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical,

fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly

identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.

B. Hollow-Metal Doors:

1. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Provide beveled or square edges at

manufacturer's discretion.

2. Top Edge Closures: Close top edges of doors with flush closures of same material as face

sheets.

3. Bottom Edge Closures: Close bottom edges of doors with end closures or channels of

same material as face sheets.

C. Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling

limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal

as frames.

1. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners

unless otherwise indicated.

2. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be

grouted.

3. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds per

anchor; however, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk holes at

bottoms of jambs.

4. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:




a. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and

bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as

follows:

1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high.

2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high.

3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches (2286 to 2438 mm) high.

4) Five anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24

inches (610 mm) or fraction thereof above 96 inches (2438 mm) high.

5. Head Anchors: Two anchors per head for frames more than 42 inches (1067 mm) wide

and mounted in metal-stud partitions.

6. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers

as follows. Keep holes clear during construction.

a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers.

b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.

D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and edge channels from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.

E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised

hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to

SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.

1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door

hardware.

2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for

preparation of hollow-metal work for hardware.

2.6 STEEL FINISHES

A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer.

1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer

complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate;

compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.

2.7 ACCESSORIES

A. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch (0.4 mm) thick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.




B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame

installation.

C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of

the Work.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding,

filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed

faces.

B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door

hardware.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install hollow-metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in

place. Comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelites, borrowed

lites, and other openings, of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-

HMMA 840 as required by standards specified.

1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent

anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving

surfaces smooth and undamaged.

a. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling

limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously;

grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

b. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening.

c. Install door silencers in frames before grouting.

d. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been

properly set and secured.

e. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as

necessary to comply with installation tolerances.

f. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that will be filled with grout

containing antifreezing agents.

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor,

and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.

a. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled

expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.

3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames.




4. In-Place Metal or Wood-Stud Partitions: Secure slip-on drywall frames in place

according to manufacturer's written instructions.

5. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment,

twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:

a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line

90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal

line parallel to plane of wall.

c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of

jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor.

C. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified

below. Shim as necessary.

1. Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors:

a. Between Door and Frame Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) plus or minus 1/32

inch (0.8 mm).

b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) to 1/4 inch (6.3 mm) plus or

minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).

c. At Bottom of Door: 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).

d. Between Door Face and Stop: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) to 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) plus or

minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).


A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final

inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace

defective work, including hollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after

installation.

C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of

prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.

D. Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint

according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded areas of paint are specified in

painting Sections.



HVAC IMPROVEMENTS AT JP MORGAN CHASE BUILDING APRILL 11, 2016

DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 1

SECTION 08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Mechanical door hardware for the following:

a. Swinging doors.

2. Electrified door hardware.


1. Section 081113 "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames".

2. Section 083323 "Overhead Coiling Doors" for door hardware provided as part of

overhead coiling door assemblies.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Installation Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory

prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for

locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.

B. Electrical System Roughing-In: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware

with connections to power supplies and building safety and security systems.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components

and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For electrified door hardware.

1. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

2. Include details of interface of electrified door hardware and building safety and security

systems.

TomLee

Typewritten Text




C. Samples: For each exposed product in each finish specified, in manufacturer's standard size.

1. Tag Samples with full product description to coordinate Samples with door hardware

schedule.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed finish.

1. Sample Size: Full-size units or minimum 2-by-4-inch (51-by-102-mm) Samples for sheet

and 4-inch (102-mm) long Samples for other products.

a. Full-size Samples will be returned to Contractor. Units that are acceptable and

remain undamaged through submittal, review, and field comparison process may,

after final check of operation, be incorporated into the Work, within limitations of

keying requirements.

2. Tag Samples with full product description to coordinate Samples with door hardware

schedule.

E. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer's Architectural

Hardware Consultant. Coordinate door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work

to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of electrified door hardware.

C. Product Test Reports: For compliance with accessibility requirements, for tests performed by

manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for door hardware on doors located in

accessible routes.

D. Field quality-control reports.

E. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals.

B. Schedules: Final door hardware and keying schedule.

1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective

covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.





A. Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and approved

by product manufacturers and of an Architectural Hardware Consultant who is available during

the course of the Work to consult Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and

keying.


A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to

Project site.

B. Tag each item or package separately with identification coordinated with the final door

hardware schedule, and include installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with

each item or package.

C. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to Owner.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that

fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage.

b. Faulty operation of doors and door hardware.

c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering and use.

2. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion unless otherwise

indicated below:

a. Electromagnetic Locks: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

b. Exit Devices: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

c. Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of door hardware from single manufacturer.





A. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing

agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf (67 N) to release the latch.

Locks do not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.

C. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with the

DOJ's "2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design".

2.3 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE

A. Provide products for each door that comply with requirements indicated in Part 2 and door

hardware schedule.

1. Door hardware is scheduled on Drawings.

2.4 HINGES

A. Hinges: BHMA A156.1.



the following:

a. Baldwin Hardware Corporation.

b. Bommer Industries, Inc.

c. Hager Companies.

d. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

e. Stanley Commercial Hardware; a division of Stanley Security Solutions.

2.5 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES

A. Lock Functions: As indicated in door hardware schedule.

B. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire

doors, and as follows:

1. Mortise Locks: Minimum 3/4-inch (19-mm) latchbolt throw.

2. Deadbolts: Minimum 1.25-inch (32-mm) bolt throw.

C. Lock Backset: 2-3/4 inches (70 mm) unless otherwise indicated.

D. Lock Trim:

1. Levers: Forged.

2. Escutcheons (Roses): Forged.

3. Dummy Trim: Match lever lock trim and escutcheons.










E. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike for each lock bolt or latchbolt complying with

requirements indicated for applicable lock or latch and with strike box and curved lip extended

to protect frame; finished to match lock or latch.

1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by

manufacturer.

2. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim.

3. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for aluminum

framing.

4. Rabbet Front and Strike: Provide on locksets for rabbeted meeting stiles.

F. Mortise Locks: BHMA A156.13; Operational Grade 1; stamped steel case with steel or brass

parts; Series 1000.



the following:

a. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

b. Best Access Systems; Stanley Security Solutions, Inc.

c. Corbin Russwin, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

d. Hager Companies.

e. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; ASSA ABLOY.

2.6 ELECTRIC STRIKES

A. Electric Strikes: BHMA A156.31; Grade 2; with faceplate to suit lock and frame.



the following:


b. Hager Companies.

c. Stanley Commercial Hardware; a division of Stanley Security Solutions.

2.7 ELECTROMAGNETIC LOCKS

A. Electromagnetic Locks: BHMA A156.23; electrically powered; with electromagnet attached to

frame and armature plate attached to door; full-exterior or full-interior type, as required by

application indicated.



the following:

a. Hager Companies.

b. Rutherford Controls Int'l. Corp.

















2.8 EXIT DEVICES AND AUXILIARY ITEMS

A. Exit Devices and Auxiliary Items: BHMA A156.3.



the following:


b. Corbin Russwin, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

c. DORMA Americas.

d. Rutherford Controls Int'l. Corp.

e. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; ASSA ABLOY.

f. Stanley Commercial Hardware; a division of Stanley Security Solutions.

g. Yale Security Inc; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

2.9 LOCK CYLINDERS

A. Lock Cylinders: Tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver.

Interchangeable cores, seven pin patented MX8 Keyway



the following:

a. Stanley Commercial Hardware; a division of Stanley Security Solutions.

b. Best.

c. Access Systems.

2.10 KEYING

1. Existing System:

a. Master key or grand master key locks to Owner's existing system.

B. Keys: Nickel silver.

2.11 OPERATING TRIM

A. Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6; stainless steel unless otherwise indicated.



the following:

a. Hager Companies.

b. Rockwood Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

c. Trimco.


















2.12 SURFACE CLOSERS

A. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4; rack-and-pinion hydraulic type with adjustable sweep and

latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves and forged-steel main arm. Comply with

manufacturer's written instructions for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure

to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet

field conditions and requirements for opening force.



the following:

a. Cal-Royal Products, Inc.

b. Corbin Russwin, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

c. DORMA Americas.

d. Hager Companies.

e. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

f. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; ASSA ABLOY.

g. Stanley Commercial Hardware; a division of Stanley Security Solutions.

h. Yale Security Inc; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

2.13 OVERHEAD STOPS AND HOLDERS

A. Overhead Stops and Holders: BHMA A156.8.



the following:

a. Architectural Builders Hardware Mfg., Inc.

b. Hager Companies.

c. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

d. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; ASSA ABLOY.

2.14 THRESHOLDS

A. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21; fabricated to full width of opening indicated.



the following:

a. Hager Companies.

b. National Guard Products, Inc.

c. Pemko Manufacturing Co.

d. Reese Enterprises, Inc.

e. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

f. Zero International, Inc.

























2.15 FABRICATION

A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not provide products that have manufacturer's name or trade

name displayed in a visible location except in conjunction with required fire-rating labels and as

otherwise approved by Architect.

1. Manufacturer's identification is permitted on rim of lock cylinders only.

B. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal indicated, fabricated by forming

method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and

hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware

units and BHMA A156.18.

C. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates prepared

for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws that comply with commercially

recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not

permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door

hardware unless otherwise indicated.

2.16 FINISHES

A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,

temporary protective covering before shipping.

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are

acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations

in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are

acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to

minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances, labeled fire-rated door assembly construction, wall and floor

construction, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring

connections before electrified door hardware installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Steel Doors and Frames: For surface-applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and frames

according to ANSI/SDI A250.6.




B. Wood Doors: Comply with door and hardware manufacturers' written instructions.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following unless

otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.

1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8.

2. Wood Doors: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood

Flush Doors."

B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where

cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be

painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface

protective trim units with finishing work. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes

have been completed on substrates involved.

C. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule, but not fewer than

the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30

inches (750 mm) of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of

support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided.

D. Key Control System:

1. Key Control Cabinet: Tag keys and place them on markers and hooks in key control

system cabinet, as determined by final keying schedule.

2. Key Lock Boxes: Install where indicated or approved by Architect to provide controlled

access for fire and medical emergency personnel.

3. Key Control System Software: Set up multiple-index system based on final keying

schedule.

E. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior doors and other doors indicated in full bed of sealant

complying with requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

F. Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in door

hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic.

G. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed.


A. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant: Engage a qualified independent Architectural

Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to

ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to




operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating

and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.

B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.

C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without

damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

3.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and

maintenance instructions for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and

replacement of door hardware.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain door hardware.

3.9 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE

A. Listed on Drawings.




FIXED LOUVERS 089119 - 1

SECTION 089119 - FIXED LOUVERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fixed, extruded-aluminum louvers.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Louver Terminology: Definitions of terms for metal louvers contained in AMCA 501 apply to

this Section unless otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

B. Horizontal Louver: Louver with horizontal blades (i.e., the axes of the blades are horizontal).

C. Vertical Louver: Louver with vertical blades (i.e., the axes of the blades are vertical).

D. Drainable-Blade Louver: Louver with blades having gutters that collect water and drain it to

channels in jambs and mullions, which carry it to bottom of unit and away from opening.

E. Wind-Driven-Rain-Resistant Louver: Louver that provides specified wind-driven rain

performance, as determined by testing according to AMCA 500-L.



1. For louvers specified to bear AMCA seal, include printed catalog pages showing

specified models with appropriate AMCA Certified Ratings Seals.

B. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and

attachments to other work. Show frame profiles and blade profiles, angles, and spacing.

1. Show weep paths, gaskets, flashing, sealant, and other means of preventing water

intrusion.

2. Show mullion profiles and locations.

C. Samples: For each type of metal finish required.





A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed according to

AMCA 500-L by a qualified testing agency or by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified

testing agency, for each type of louver and showing compliance with performance requirements

specified.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before

fabrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain louvers from single source from a single manufacturer where

indicated to be of same type, design, or factory-applied color finish.


A. Delegated Design: Design louvers, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified

professional engineer, using structural performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Structural Performance: Louvers shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following

loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without permanent deformation

of louver components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louver-blade rattle or flutter, or

permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. Wind pressures shall be considered to act normal

to the face of the building.

1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on a uniform pressure of 30 lbf/sq. ft. (1436 Pa),

acting inward or outward.

C. Louver Performance Ratings: Provide louvers complying with requirements specified, as

demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units identical to those provided, except for length

and width according to AMCA 500-L.

D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature

changes.




1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C),

material surfaces.

E. SMACNA Standard: Comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal

Manual" for fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures.

2.3 FIXED, EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS

A. Horizontal, Drainable-Blade Louver:

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>

2. Louver Depth: 6 inches (150 mm).

3. Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.080 inch (2.03 mm).

4. Mullion Type: Exposed.

5. Louver Performance Ratings:

a. Free Area: Not less than 8.0 sq. ft. (0.74 sq. m) for 48-inch- (1220-mm-) wide by

48-inch- (1220-mm-) high louver.

b. Point of Beginning Water Penetration: Not less than 900 fpm (4.6 m/s).

c. Air Performance: Not more than 0.15-inch wg (37-Pa) static pressure drop at 900-

fpm (4.6-m/s) free-area exhaust velocity.

6. AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.

2.4 LOUVER SCREENS

A. General: Provide screen at each exterior louver.

1. Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: Interior face.

2. Screening Type: Insect screening.

B. Secure screen frames to louver frames with stainless-steel machine screws, spaced a maximum

of 6 inches (150 mm) from each corner and at 12 inches (300 mm) o.c.

C. Louver Screen Frames: Fabricate with mitered corners to louver sizes indicated.

1. Metal: Same type and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens are attached.

2. Finish: Same finish as louver frames to which louver screens are attached.

3. Type: Rewirable frames with a driven spline or insert.

D. Louver Screening for Aluminum Louvers:

1. Insect Screening: Aluminum, 18-by-16 (1.4-by-1.6-mm) mesh, 0.012-inch (0.30-mm)

wire.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=7059&mf=04&src=wd




2.5 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5, T-52, or T6.

B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required

for forming, or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish.

C. Fasteners: Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions.

1. Use Phillips flat-head screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

2. For fastening aluminum, use aluminum or 300 series stainless-steel fasteners.

3. For color-finished louvers, use fasteners with heads that match color of louvers.

D. Postinstalled Fasteners for Concrete and Masonry: Torque-controlled expansion anchors, made

from stainless-steel components, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 4

times the loads imposed, for concrete, or 6 times the load imposed for masonry, as determined

by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Factory assemble louvers to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as

necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and

coordinated installation.

B. Maintain equal louver blade spacing to produce uniform appearance.

C. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances

made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter

sealant joints.

1. Frame Type: Channel unless otherwise indicated.

D. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly.

E. Provide subsills made of same material as louvers for recessed louvers.

F. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds concealed from

view unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between

frame members necessary.

2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Finish louvers after assembly.

B. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of

anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of

such items to Project site.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Locate and place louvers level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.

B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where

required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.

C. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured.

D. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as

indicated.

E. Protect unpainted galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces that are in contact with concrete,

masonry, or dissimilar metals from corrosion and galvanic action by applying a heavy coating

of bituminous paint or by separating surfaces with waterproof gaskets or nonmetallic flashing.

F. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation as louver installation progresses,

where weathertight louver joints are required. Comply with Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for

sealants applied during louver installation.


A. Clean exposed louver surfaces that are not protected by temporary covering, to remove

fingerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let soil accumulate during construction

period.

B. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent not

harmful to finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry.

C. Restore louvers damaged during installation and construction so no evidence remains of

corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by Architect, remove

damaged units and replace with new units.




1. Touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating that matches color and gloss

of, and is compatible with, factory-applied finish coating.




NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 1

SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior partitions.



1. Studs and Runners: Provide documentation that framing members' certification is

according to SIFA's "Code Compliance Certification Program for Cold-Formed Steel

Structural and Non-Structural Framing Members."


A. Evaluation Reports: For embossed steel studs and runners, from ICC-ES or other qualified

testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical

to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to

ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

B. Horizontal Deflection: For wall assemblies, limited to 1/360 of the wall height based on

horizontal loading of 5 lbf/sq. ft. (239 Pa).

2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.

TomLee

Typewritten Text




1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless

otherwise indicated.

2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120), hot-dip galvanized unless


B. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.

1. Steel Studs and Runners:

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not

limited to, the following:

1) MBA Building Supplies.

2) MRI Steel Framing, LLC.

3) Phillips Manufacturing Co.

4) Steel Network, Inc. (The).

b. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch (0.836 mm).

c. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Embossed Steel Studs and Runners:



limited to the following:

1) ClarkDietrich Building Systems.

2) Marino\WARE.

3) Phillips Manufacturing Co.

b. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0190 inch (0.483 mm).

c. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

C. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following:

1. Clip System: Clips designed for use in head-of-wall deflection conditions that provide a

positive attachment of studs to runners while allowing 2-inch (51-mm) minimum vertical

movement.






2. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- (51-mm-) deep

flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into
















top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches (305 mm) of the top of

studs to provide lateral bracing.

3. Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch- (51-mm-)

deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer

runner sized to friction fit inside runner.

4. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes

applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in

thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.





2) MBA Building Supplies.


D. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.


offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,

the following:

a. ClarkDietrich Building Systems.

b. MRI Steel Framing, LLC.

2. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch (0.836 mm).


A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.

1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power,

and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames,

cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions

affecting performance of the Work.












3.2 PREPARATION

A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of

overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building

structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that

hangers will develop their full strength.

1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in

advance of time needed for coordination and construction.


A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.

1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply

to framing installation.

B. Install framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, with connections securely

fastened.

C. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim,

grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.

D. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.

E. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing

members. Frame both sides of joints independently.

3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than

spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

1. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior

walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.

C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.

D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural

supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to

terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts that penetrate partitions above

ceiling.

1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to

produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished

assemblies.




2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install

runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.

a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.

b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch

(13-mm) clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in

finished assembly.

c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead

structure.

3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required

for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to

match framing required above door heads.

4. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated.

E. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than

1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.




GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 1

SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior gypsum board.


1. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural steel framing and

suspension systems that support gypsum board panels.



1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather,

condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack

panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board

manufacturer's written instructions, whichever are more stringent.

B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,

discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or

splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

TomLee

Typewritten Text




PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical

to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to

ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL

A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and

that correspond with support system indicated.

2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.



the following:

a. CertainTeed Corporation.

b. Georgia-Pacific Building Products.

c. National Gypsum Company.

d. United States Gypsum Company.

2. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm).

3. Long Edges: Tapered.

B. Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture- and mold-resistant

core and paper surfaces.



the following:

a. CertainTeed Corporation.

b. Georgia-Pacific Building Products.

c. National Gypsum Company.

d. United States Gypsum Company.

2. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X.

3. Long Edges: Tapered.

4. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.














2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc.

2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead.

b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.

2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat, use formulation that is compatible

with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.

2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and

trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.

a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.

4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.


A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and

manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002 unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from

0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick.

2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by

panel manufacturer.

C. Sound-Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing)

produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag

wool, or rock wool.

D. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant

complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through




perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative

assemblies according to ASTM E 90.



the following:

a. Franklin International.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and support framing, with

Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance

of the Work.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold

damaged.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A. Comply with ASTM C 840.

B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid

abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels

not less than one framing member.

C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with

not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate

supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered

edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not

make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.

F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings,

etc.), except in chases braced internally.

1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke

ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.7 sq. m) in

area.

2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.







3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof

slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow

1/4- to 3/8-inch- (6.4- to 9.5-mm-) wide joints to install sealant.

G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural

abutments. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these locations and trim

edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting

structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to

open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

I. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings

and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both

faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with

manufacturer's written instructions for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths

around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.

J. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily

installed after panels have been installed on one side.

3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:

1. Type X: Vertical surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

B. Single-Layer Application:

1. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) unless otherwise

indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.

a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses

of panels.

b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise

indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

2. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.

3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same

fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written

instructions.

B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations

approved by Architect for visual effect.

C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:




1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners.

2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.

3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations,

fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for

decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not

intended to receive tape.

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to

ASTM C 840:

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.

2. Level 2: Where indicated on Drawings.

3. Level 3: Where indicated on Drawings.

4. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated.

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior

Painting."

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other

non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall

application.

B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,

construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,

discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or

splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.


TomLee

Typewritten Text



RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09 65 13 - 1

SECTION 09 65 13 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Resilient base.



B. Samples: For exposed product and for each color and texture specified, not less than 12 inches

(300 mm) long.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For type of product indicated.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective

covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet (3 linear m) for every 500 linear feet (150 linear m) or

fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed.


A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with

ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than

50 deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C).


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than

70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C), in spaces to receive resilient products

during the following time periods:




1. 48 hours before installation.

2. During installation.

3. 48 hours after installation.

B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range

recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35

deg C).

C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been

completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VINYL BASE



1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.

2. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; a division of Burke Industries Inc.

3. Johnsonite; a Tarkett company.

4. Roppe Corporation, USA.

B. Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TV (vinyl, thermoplastic).

1. Group: I (solid, homogeneous).

2. Style and Location:

a. Style B, Cove: Provide in areas with resilient flooring.

C. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).

D. Height: 4 inches (102 mm).

E. Lengths: Cut lengths 48 inches (1219 mm) long or coils in manufacturer's standard length.

F. Outside Corners: Preformed.

G. Inside Corners: Preformed.

H. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.

2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient

products and substrate conditions indicated.









PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum

moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


1. Installation of resilient products indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of

resilient products.

B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching

compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

C. Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where they are

to be installed.

1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient products and installation

materials into spaces where they will be installed.

D. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient

products.

3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.

B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other

permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of

adjacent pieces aligned.

D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in

continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.

F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient

base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.

G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces.





A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient-product installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.

2. Sweep and vacuum horizontal surfaces thoroughly.

3. Damp-mop horizontal surfaces to remove marks and soil.

C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction

operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

D. Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion.




INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 1

SECTION 09 91 23 - INTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following

interior substrates:

1. Concrete.

2. Concrete masonry units (CMUs).

3. Steel and iron.

4. Galvanized metal.

5. Wood.

6. Gypsum board.


1. Section 055119 "Metal Stairs" for shop priming metal grating stairs.

2. Section 055213 "Pipe and Tube Railings" for shop priming pipe and tube railings.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MPI Gloss Level 1: Not more than five units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according

to ASTM D 523.

B. MPI Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees,

according to ASTM D 523.

C. MPI Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to

ASTM D 523.

D. MPI Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees,

according to ASTM D 523.

E. MPI Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

F. MPI Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

G. MPI Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.





A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application

instructions.

1. Include Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category

specified, with the proposed product highlighted.

2. Indicate VOC content.


A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are

packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color applied.


A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient

temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C).


A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are

between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C).

B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5

deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



1. Behr Process Corporation.

2. Benjamin Moore & Co.

3. Dulux (formerly ICI Paints); a brand of AkzoNobel.

4. Duron, Inc.

5. Glidden Professional.

6. M.A.B. Paints.

7. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.

8. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).

9. Valspar Corporation - Architectural (Pro).














2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its

"MPI Approved Products Lists."

B. Material Compatibility:

1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and

substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by

manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat

manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

C. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements

for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter

as follows:

1. Concrete: 12 percent.

2. Wood: 15 percent.

3. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural

Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are

not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item,

provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to

reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease,

and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie

coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.




D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do

not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that

permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content

or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written

instructions.

F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using methods

recommended in writing by paint manufacturer.

G. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and areas where shop

paint is abraded. Paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply

with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.

H. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by

mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of

subsequently applied paints.

I. Wood Substrates:

1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer.

2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off.

3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.

4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic

wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI

Manual."

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.

2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces.

Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture

with prime coat only.

3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar

hinged items to match exposed surfaces.

4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,

identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed

or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.

B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of

same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide

sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film

has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.




D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,

roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color

breaks.


A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and

inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.

1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing.

2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint

manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply

additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint

manufacturer's written recommendations.


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from

Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by

washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of

other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and

leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or

defaced painted surfaces.

3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces:

1. Latex System MPI INT 3.1A:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkali resistant, water based, MPI #3.

b. Prime Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat.

c. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat.

d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat (MPI Gloss Level 1), MPI #53.

2. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System MPI INT 3.1L:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkali resistant, water based, MPI #3.

b. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, matching

topcoat.

c. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based (MPI Gloss

Level 3), MPI #151.




B. CMU Substrates:


a. Block Filler: Block filler, latex, interior/exterior, MPI #4.

b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat.

c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat (MPI Gloss Level 1), MPI #53.

C. Steel Substrates:

1. Latex System, Alkyd Primer MPI INT 5.1Q:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, quick dry, for metal, MPI #76.



D. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:


a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, cementitious, MPI #26.



E. Wood Substrates: Doors.

1. Latex over Latex Primer System MPI INT 6.3T:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex, for interior wood, MPI #39.


a. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #54.

F. Gypsum Board Substrates:

1. Latex over Latex Sealer System MPI INT 9.2A:

a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, MPI #50.

b. Prime Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat.

c. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat.

d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat (MPI Gloss Level 1), MPI #53.


TomLee

Typewritten Text



SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220517 - 1

SECTION 220517 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Sleeves.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, with plain ends.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.

B. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to provide 1-inch annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls.

1. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

C. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and walls are constructed.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

D. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. 2. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between

sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. 3. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint sealants

appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.



SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220517 - 2

E. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials.

3.2 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE

A. Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications:

1. Interior Partitions:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.




ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220518 - 1

SECTION 220518 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Escutcheons.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ESCUTCHEONS

A. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors.

B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD that completely covers opening.

1. Escutcheons for New Piping: a. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type. b. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type.


A. Replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates using new materials.




METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220519 - 1

SECTION 220519 - METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Liquid-in-glass thermometers. 2. Thermowells. 3. Dial-type pressure gages. 4. Gage attachments.




A. Product certificates.


A. Operation and maintenance data.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS

A. Metal-Case, Industrial-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

a. Flo Fab inc. b. Trerice, H. O. Co.

2. Standard: ASME B40.200.

3. Case: Cast aluminum; 7-inch nominal size unless otherwise indicated. 4. Case Form: Adjustable angle unless otherwise indicated. 5. Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and blue or red organic liquid.







6. Tube Background: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in deg F.

7. Window: Glass. 8. Stem: Aluminum and of length to suit installation.

a. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem.

9. Connector: 1-1/4 inches, with ASME B1.1 screw threads. 10. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a maximum of

1.5 percent of scale range.

2.2 THERMOWELLS

A. Thermowells:

1. Standard: ASME B40.200. 2. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting. 3. Material for Use with Copper Tubing: CNRorCUNI. 4. Material for Use with Steel Piping: CRES. 5. Type: Stepped shank unless straight or tapered shank is indicated. 6. External Threads: NPS 1/2, NPS 3/4, or NPS 1, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads. 7. Internal Threads: 1/2, 3/4, and 1 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads. 8. Bore: Diameter required to match thermometer bulb or stem. 9. Insertion Length: Length required to match thermometer bulb or stem. 10. Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated piping and tubing. 11. Bushings: For converting size of thermowell's internal screw thread to size of

thermometer connection.

B. Heat-Transfer Medium: Mixture of graphite and glycerin.

2.3 PRESSURE GAGES

A. Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Flo Fab inc. b. Trerice, H. O. Co. c. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company.


3. Case: Sealed type(s); cast aluminum or drawn steel; 4-1/2-inch nominal diameter. 4. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated. 5. Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/4 NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe

threads and bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated. 6. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.








7. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in psi. 8. Pointer: Dark-colored metal. 9. Window: Glass. 10. Ring: Metal. 11. Accuracy: Grade B, plus or minus 2 percent of middle half of scale range.

2.4 GAGE ATTACHMENTS

A. Snubbers: ASME B40.100, brass; with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and piston-type surge-dampening device. Include extension for use on insulated piping.

B. Valves: Brass ball, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install thermowells with socket extending one-third of pipe diameter and in vertical position in piping tees.

B. Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer connectors. Include bushings if required to match sizes.

C. Install thermowells with extension on insulated piping.

D. Fill thermowells with heat-transfer medium.

E. Install direct-mounted thermometers in thermowells and adjust vertical and tilted positions.

F. Install direct-mounted pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at the most readable position.

G. Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gage for fluids.

H. Install thermometers in the following locations:

1. Inlet and outlet of each water heater.

I. Install pressure gages in the following locations:

1. Suction and discharge of each domestic water pump.

J. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance of meters, gages, machines, and equipment.

K. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.




3.2 THERMOMETER SCHEDULE

A. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each domestic water heater shall be the following:

1. Sealed, bimetallic-actuated type.

B. Thermometer stems shall be of length to match thermowell insertion length.

3.3 THERMOMETER SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Domestic Cold-Water Piping: 0 to 100 deg F.

B. Scale Range for Domestic Hot-Water Piping: 20 to 240 deg F.

3.4 PRESSURE-GAGE SCHEDULE

A. Pressure gages at suction and discharge of each pump shall be the following:

1. Sealed, direct-mounted, metal case.

3.5 PRESSURE-GAGE SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Domestic Water Piping: 0 to 160 psi.




BALL VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523.12 - 1

SECTION 220523.12 - BALL VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Brass ball valves. 2. Bronze ball valves.


A. Product Data: For each type of valve.

1. Certification that products comply with NSF 61 Annex G.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES

A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer.

B. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded end valves. 2. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria. 3. ASME B16.18 for solder-joint connections. 4. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.

C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 Annex G for valve materials for potable-water service.

D. Bronze valves shall be made with dezincification-resistant materials. Bronze valves made with copper alloy (brass) containing more than 15 percent zinc are not permitted.

E. Valve Pressure-Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.

F. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

G. Valve Actuator Types:

1. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves smaller than NPS 4.

H. Valves in Insulated Piping:




1. Include 2-inch stem extensions. 2. Extended operating handles of nonthermal-conductive material and protective sleeves

that allow operation of valves without breaking vapor seals or disturbing insulation. 3. Memory stops that are fully adjustable after insulation is applied.

2.2 BRASS BALL VALVES

A. Two-Piece, Brass Ball Valves with Full Port and Brass Trim:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. CWP Rating: 600 psig. c. Body Design: Two piece. d. Body Material: Forged brass. e. Ends: Threaded and soldered. f. Seats: PTFE. g. Stem: Brass. h. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. i. Port: Full.

2.3 BRONZE BALL VALVES

A. Two-Piece, Bronze Ball Valves with Full Port, and Bronze or Brass Trim:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. CWP Rating: 600 psig. c. Body Design: Two piece. d. Body Material: Bronze. e. Ends: Threaded and soldered. f. Seats: PTFE. g. Stem: Bronze or brass. h. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. i. Port: Full.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.




D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

3.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. If valves with specified CWP ratings are unavailable, the same types of valves with higher CWP ratings may be substituted.

B. Select valves with the following end connections:

1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.

2. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends.

3.3 DOMESTIC HOT- AND COLD-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller:

1. Bronze and Brass Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends.

2. Two-piece, brass ball valves with full port and brass trim. 3. Two-piece, bronze ball valves with full port and bronze or brass trim.

END OF SECTION 220523.12



CHECK VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523.14 - 1

SECTION 220523.14 - CHECK VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Bronze swing check valves.



1. Certification that products comply with NSF 61 Annex G.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



B. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded end valves. 2. ASME B16.1 for flanges on iron valves. 3. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria. 4. ASME B16.18 for solder joint. 5. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.

C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 Annex G for valve materials for potable-water service.

D. Bronze valves shall be made with dezincification-resistant materials. Bronze valves made with copper alloy (brass) containing more than 15 percent zinc are not permitted.



G. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.




2.2 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc:


2. Crane; Crane Energy Flow Solutions. a. Milwaukee Valve Company. b. NIBCO INC.

3. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 3. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Design: Horizontal flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze. e. Ends: Threaded or soldered. See valve schedule articles. f. Disc: Bronze.

B. Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:


a. Crane; Crane Energy Flow Solutions. b. Milwaukee Valve Company. c. NIBCO INC.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 4. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Design: Horizontal flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze. e. Ends: Threaded or soldered. See valve schedule articles. f. Disc: PTFE.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

















E. Install swing check valves for proper direction of flow in horizontal position with hinge pin level.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.


A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:

1. Pump-Discharge Check Valves:

a. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves with bronze or non-metallic disc.

B. If valves with specified CWP ratings are unavailable, the same types of valves with higher CWP ratings may be substituted.

C. End Connections:

1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded or soldered. 2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged or threaded.

3.4 DOMESTIC HOT- AND COLD-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves, Class 125, bronze nonmetallic disc with soldered or threaded end connections.




HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 1

SECTION 220529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Metal pipe hangers and supports. 2. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. 3. Fastener systems.


A. Delegated Design: Design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for plumbing piping and equipment shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Design supports for multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.




A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.




2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped. 3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. 4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to

support bearing surface of piping. 5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.

B. Copper Pipe Hangers:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory-fabricated components.

2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copper-coated steel.

2.2 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS

A. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig orASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier.

B. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate with 100-psig ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig, or ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig minimum compressive strength.

C. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

D. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature.

2.3 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel anchors, for use in hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.


A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building structure.

B. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

C. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.

E. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

F. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

G. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

H. Insulated Piping:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation.

b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.





4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.

5. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.

3.2 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth.

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.

3.4 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports and attachments for general service applications.




F. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper attachments for copper piping and tubing.

G. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.

H. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 36, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.

3. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

4. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

I. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24.

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

J. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.

2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.

3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles.

4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. 5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are

considerable and rod sizes are large. 6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 7. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above

by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:

a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb. b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb. c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.

8. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams. 9. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.

K. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.




2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.

L. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

M. Use mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction.




IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553 - 1

SECTION 220553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Equipment labels. 2. Warning signs and labels. 3. Pipe labels.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Metal Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Anodized aluminum, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.

2. Letter Color: Same as piping system service. 3. Background Color: Same as piping system service. 4. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than

2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. 5. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24

inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal lettering.

6. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. 7. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), and the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number, and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules) and the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.




2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS

A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

B. Letter Color: Red.

C. Background Color: White.

D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.

E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal lettering.

G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.

H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information plus emergency notification instructions.

2.3 PIPE LABELS

A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction.

B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.

C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.

D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings; also include pipe size and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping-system service lettering to accommodate both directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.

2. Lettering Size: Size letters according to ASME A13.1 for piping.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.




B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.2 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Pipe Label Locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.

Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations and on both sides of through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible

enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed

piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 20 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 10 feet in

areas of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.

B. Pipe Label Color Schedule:

1. Domestic Cold Water Piping

a. Background: Safety green. b. Letter Colors: White.

2. Domestic Hot and Hot Recirculation Water Piping

a. Background: Safety yellow. b. Letter Colors: Black.




PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 1

SECTION 220719 - PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following plumbing piping services:

1. Domestic hot-water piping. 2. Domestic recirculating hot-water piping.




A. Field quality-control reports.


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less.

2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less.

B. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous components:

1. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General," articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.




C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795.

E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.

F. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:

1. Type I, 850 Deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ-SSL. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS

A. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449.

2.3 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.

1. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

C. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.



2.4 MASTICS

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.

1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).




2.5 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:

1. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

2.6 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136.

1. Width: 3 inches. 2. Thickness: 11.5 mils. 3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 4. Elongation: 2 percent. 5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 6. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.

B. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.

C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.

3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.




F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor

legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation

jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.

a. For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.

M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.

O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.




P. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1. Vibration-control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates.

3.3 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface

and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing.

4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface


3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches.

4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.

D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.

1. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers.

F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. 2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in

Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."




3.4 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated.

2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.

6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.

7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.

8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape.

9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union." Match size and color of pipe labels.

C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.




D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following:

1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation.

2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.

3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.

4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.

5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER PREFORMED PIPE INSULATION

A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.

2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the

thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of

adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least

1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available.




2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.

D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:


2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body.

3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.

4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.


A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of fittings, , three locations of valves, and three for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General" Article.

C. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements.

3.7 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:

1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces. 2. Underground piping. 3. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.

3.8 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Domestic Hot and Recirculated Hot Water: Insulation shall be the following:

1. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1/2 inch thick.




END OF SECTION 220719 END OF SECTION 220719



DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 1

SECTION 221116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes under-building-slab and aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, and fittings inside buildings.


A. Product Data: For transition fittings and dielectric fittings.


A. System purging and disinfecting activities report.

B. Field quality-control reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

B. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 14 and NSF 61 Annex G. Plastic piping components shall be marked with "NSF-pw."

2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, drawn temper.

B. Cast-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings.

C. Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings.

D. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends.

E. Copper Unions:

1. MSS SP-123. 2. Cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body. 3. Ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces.




4. Solder-joint or threaded ends.

2.3 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS

A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials:

1. AWWA C110/A21.10, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free unless otherwise indicated.

2. Full-face or ring type unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.

C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys.

D. Flux: ASTM B 813, water flushable.

E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 TRANSITION FITTINGS

A. General Requirements:

1. Same size as pipes to be joined. 2. Pressure rating at least equal to pipes to be joined. 3. End connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting.

2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Dielectric Unions: 1. Standard: ASSE 1079. 2. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F. 3. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

C. Dielectric Flanges: 1. Standard: ASSE 1079. 2. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly. 3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F. 4. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder-joint

copper alloy and threaded ferrous.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.

B. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

C. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.

D. Install domestic water piping level without pitch and plumb.

E. Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility company's requirements.

F. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

G. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

H. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space.

I. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

J. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher than the system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

K. Install piping free of sags and bends.

L. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

M. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and specialty.

N. Install pressure gages on suction and discharge piping for each plumbing pump and packaged booster pump. Comply with requirements for pressure gages in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."

O. Install thermometers on inlet and outlet piping from each water heater. Comply with requirements for thermometers in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."

P. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."




Q. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

R. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

3.2 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly.

C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged.

D. Brazed Joints for Copper Tubing: Comply with CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed Joints" chapter.

E. Soldered Joints for Copper Tubing: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

F. Joints for Dissimilar-Material Piping: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems.

3.3 TRANSITION FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping.

B. Transition Fittings in Underground Domestic Water Piping:

1. Fittings for NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Fitting-type coupling. 2. Fittings for NPS 2 and Larger: Sleeve-type coupling.

C. Transition Fittings in Aboveground Domestic Water Piping NPS 2 and Smaller: Plastic-to-metal transition fittings or unions.

3.4 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.

B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric unions.




3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. When installing piping adjacent to equipment and machines, allow space for service and maintenance.

C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect to the following:

1. Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than sizes of water heater connections.

2. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than that required by plumbing code.

3. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

3.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification materials and installation in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Piping Inspections:

a. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

b. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction:

1) Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing in after roughing in and before setting fixtures.

2) Final Inspection: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified in "Piping Tests" Subparagraph below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

c. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.




d. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Piping Tests:

a. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water.

b. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

c. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

d. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow it to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

e. Repair leaks and defects with new materials, and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.

f. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.

B. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.8 ADJUSTING

A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:

1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs. 2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position. 3. Open throttling valves to proper setting. 4. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow.

a. Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide hot-water flow in each branch.

b. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.

5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during installation.

6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs. 7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for

application where used and are clean and ready for use. 8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.

3.9 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:




1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using.

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below:

a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets.

b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:

1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.

2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.

c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time.

d. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination. e. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. Include copies of water-sample approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

3.10 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise indicated.

C. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be the following:

1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L cast- or wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and soldered joints.




DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 - 1

SECTION 221119 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Vacuum breakers. 2. Strainers. 3. Drain valves.







PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 61 Annex G and NSF 14.


A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 VACUUM BREAKERS

A. Pipe-Applied, Atmospheric-Type Vacuum Breakers:

1. Standard: ASSE 1001. 2. Size: NPS 1/4 to NPS 3, as required to match connected piping. 3. Body: Bronze.



DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 - 2

4. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded.

2.4 STRAINERS FOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

A. Y-Pattern Strainers:

1. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated. 2. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining that complies with

AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved, epoxy coated and for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 3. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 4. Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations unless otherwise indicated. 5. Perforation Size:

a. Strainers NPS 2 and Smaller: 0.033 inch.

6. Drain: Factory-installed, hose-end drain valve.

2.5 DRAIN VALVES

A. Ball-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves:

1. Standard: MSS SP-110 for standard-port, two-piece ball valves. 2. Pressure Rating: 400-psig minimum CWP. 3. Size: NPS 3/4. 4. Body: Copper alloy. 5. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. 6. Seats and Seals: Replaceable. 7. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel. 8. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint. 9. Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7 and

cap with brass chain.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install Y-pattern strainers for water on supply side of each pump.




DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS 221123 - 1

SECTION 221123 - DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. In-line, seal-less centrifugal pumps. 2. Horizontally mounted, in-line, close-coupled centrifugal pumps.






A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor-operated water pumps.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 IN-LINE, SEAL-LESS CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, in-line, close-coupled, canned-motor, seal-less, overhung-impeller centrifugal pumps.

B. Pump Construction:

1. Pump and Motor Assembly: Hermetically sealed, replaceable-cartridge type with motor and impeller on common shaft and designed for installation with pump and motor shaft horizontal.

2. Casing: Bronze, with threaded or companion-flange connections. 3. Impeller: Plastic. 4. Motor: Single speed, unless otherwise indicated.




2.2 HORIZONTALLY MOUNTED, IN-LINE, CLOSE-COUPLED CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, in-line, single-stage, close-coupled, overhung-impeller centrifugal pumps designed for installation with pump and motor shaft mounted horizontal.


1. Casing: Radially split with threaded companion-flange connections for pumps with NPS 2 pipe connections and flanged connections for pumps with NPS 2-1/2 pipe connections.

2. Impeller: Statically and dynamically balanced, closed, and keyed to shaft. 3. Shaft and Shaft Sleeve: Steel shaft with deflector, with copper-alloy shaft sleeve. Include

water slinger on shaft between motor and seal. 4. Seal: Mechanical, with carbon-steel rotating ring, stainless-steel spring, ceramic seat, and

rubber bellows and gasket. 5. Bearings: Oil-lubricated; bronze-journal or ball type. 6. Shaft Coupling: Flexible, capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft

misalignment.

C. Motor: Single speed, with grease-lubricated ball bearings; and resiliently or rigidly mounted to pump casing.

2.3 MOTORS

A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors.

1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.

2.4 CONTROLS

A. Timers: Electric, for control of hot-water circulation pump.

1. Type: Programmable, Insert time clock with manual override on-off switch. 2. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1, suitable for wall mounting.

Operation of Pump: On or off. 3. Programmable Sequence of Operation: Up to two on-off cycles each day for seven days.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PUMP INSTALLATION

A. Comply with HI 1.4.

B. Install in-line, sealless centrifugal pumps with shaft horizontal unless otherwise indicated.




C. Install horizontally mounted, in-line, close-coupled centrifugal pumps with shaft horizontal.

D. Install continuous-thread hanger rods and spring hangers of size required to support pump weight.

1. Comply with requirements for hangers and supports specified in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to pumps to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect domestic water piping to pumps. Install suction and discharge piping equal to or greater than size of pump nozzles.

1. Install flexible connectors adjacent to pumps in suction and discharge piping of the following pumps:

a. Horizontally mounted, in-line, close-coupled centrifugal pumps. b. Comply with requirements for flexible connectors specified in Section 221116

"Domestic Water Piping."

2. Install shutoff valve and strainer on suction side of each pump, and check, shutoff, and throttling valves on discharge side of each pump. Install valves same size as connected piping.

3. Install pressure gage and snubber at suction of each pump and pressure gage and snubber at discharge of each pump. Install at integral pressure-gage tappings where provided or install pressure-gage connectors in suction and discharge piping around pumps

D. Connect timers to pumps that they control.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust domestic water pumps to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Adjust timer schedule. Coordinate with Authority for schedule.




SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING 230517 - 1

SECTION 230517 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Sleeves.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Cast-Iron Wall Pipes: Cast or fabricated of cast or ductile iron and equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.

B. Galvanized-Steel Wall Pipes: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, with plain ends and welded steel collar; zinc coated.

C. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, with plain ends.

D. Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.

B. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to provide 1-inch annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls.

1. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

C. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.



SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING 230517 - 2

2. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.

3. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.

D. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials.

3.2 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE

A. Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications:

1. Interior Partitions:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves. b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel-sheet sleeves.




ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING 230518 - 1

SECTION 230518 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Escutcheons. 2. Floor plates.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ESCUTCHEONS

A. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With rough-brass finish and setscrew fastener.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.

C. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors.

B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD that completely covers opening.

1. Escutcheons for New Piping:

a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type. b. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type. c. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with rough-

brass finish. d. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type. e. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type with rough-brass

finish.



ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING 230518 - 2

f. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type.


A. Replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates using new materials.




METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING 230519 - 1

SECTION 230519 - METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Liquid-in-glass thermometers. 2. Thermowells. 3. Dial-type pressure gages. 4. Gage attachments. 5. Flowmeters.



B. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Product certificates.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS

A. Metal-Case, Industrial-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:


a. Flo Fab inc. b. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Company. c. Trerice, H. O. Co.









3. Case: Cast aluminum; 7-inch nominal size unless otherwise indicated. 4. Case Form: Adjustable angle unless otherwise indicated. 5. Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and blue or red organic liquid. 6. Tube Background: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings

graduated in deg F. 7. Window: Glass. 8. Stem: Aluminum and of length to suit installation.

a. Design for Air-Duct Installation: With ventilated shroud. b. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem.

9. Connector: 1-1/4 inches, with ASME B1.1 screw threads. 10. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a maximum of

1.5 percent of scale range.

2.2 DUCT-THERMOMETER MOUNTING BRACKETS

A. Description: Flanged bracket with screw holes, for attachment to air duct and made to hold thermometer stem.

2.3 THERMOWELLS

A. Thermowells:

1. Standard: ASME B40.200. 2. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting. 3. Material for Use with Copper Tubing: CNR. 4. Material for Use with Steel Piping: CRES. 5. Type: Stepped shank unless straight or tapered shank is indicated. 6. External Threads: NPS 1/2, NPS 3/4, or NPS 1, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads. 7. Internal Threads: 1/2, 3/4, and 1 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads. 8. Bore: Diameter required to match thermometer bulb or stem. 9. Insertion Length: Length required to match thermometer bulb or stem. 10. Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated piping and tubing. 11. Bushings: For converting size of thermowell's internal screw thread to size of

thermometer connection.

B. Heat-Transfer Medium: Mixture of graphite and glycerin.

2.4 PRESSURE GAGES

A. Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages:


a. Flo Fab inc.






b. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Company. c. Trerice, H. O. Co. d. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company.


3. Case: Sealed type(s); cast aluminum or drawn steel; 4-1/2-inch nominal diameter. 4. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated. 5. Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and

bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated. 6. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer. 7. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in psi. 8. Pointer: Dark-colored metal. 9. Window: Glass. 10. Ring: Metal. 11. Accuracy: Grade B, plus or minus 2 percent of middle half of scale range.

2.5 GAGE ATTACHMENTS

A. Snubbers: ASME B40.100, brass; with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and piston-type surge-dampening device. Include extension for use on insulated piping.

B. Siphons: Loop-shaped section of brass pipe with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2 pipe threads.

C. Valves: Brass ball, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.

2.6 FLOWMETERS

A. Ultrasonic Flowmeters:

1. Description: Flowmeter with sensor, indicator, and connecting wiring. 2. Flow Range: Sensor and indicator shall cover operating range of equipment or system

served. 3. Sensor: Transit-time ultrasonic with transmitter for measuring flow in gallons per minute.

a. Minimum Pressure Rating: 150 psig. b. Minimum Temperature Rating: 250 deg F.

4. Indicator: Solid-state, integrating-type meter. 5. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent. 6. Display: Shows rate of flow. 7. Operating Instructions: Include complete instructions with each flowmeter.

B. Venturi Flowmeters:

1. Description: Flowmeter with calibrated flow-measuring element, hoses or tubing, fittings, valves, indicator, and conversion chart.

2. Flow Range: Sensor and indicator shall cover operating range of equipment or system served.







3. Sensor: Venturi-type, calibrated, flow-measuring element; for installation in piping.

a. Design: Differential-pressure-type measurement for water. b. Construction: Bronze, brass, or factory-primed steel, with brass fittings and

attached tag with flow conversion data. c. Minimum Pressure Rating: 250 psig. d. Minimum Temperature Rating: 250 deg F. e. End Connections for NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded. f. End Connections for NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged or welded. g. Flow Range: Flow-measuring element and flowmeter shall cover operating range

of equipment or system served.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install thermowells with socket extending one-third of pipe diameter and in vertical position in piping tees.

B. Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer connectors. Include bushings if required to match sizes.

C. Install thermowells with extension on insulated piping.

D. Fill thermowells with heat-transfer medium.

E. Install direct-mounted thermometers in thermowells and adjust vertical and tilted positions.

F. Install remote-mounted thermometer bulbs in thermowells and install cases on panels; connect cases with tubing and support tubing to prevent kinks. Use minimum tubing length.

G. Install duct-thermometer mounting brackets in walls of ducts. Attach to duct with screws.

H. Install direct-mounted pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at the most readable position.

I. Install remote-mounted pressure gages on panel.

J. Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gage for fluids (except steam).

K. Install valve and syphon fitting in piping for each pressure gage for steam.

L. Install flow indicators in piping systems in accessible positions for easy viewing.

M. Assemble and install connections, tubing, and accessories between flow-measuring elements and flowmeters according to manufacturer's written instructions.

N. Install flowmeter elements in accessible positions in piping systems.




O. Install differential-pressure-type flowmeter elements, with at least minimum straight lengths of pipe, upstream and downstream from element according to manufacturer's written instructions.

P. Install permanent indicators on walls or brackets in accessible and readable positions.

Q. Install connection fittings in accessible locations for attachment to portable indicators.

R. Install thermometers in the following locations:

1. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic zone. 2. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic boiler. 3. Two inlets and two outlets of each chiller. 4. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air-handling units. 5. Two inlets and two outlets of each hydronic heat exchanger. 6. Inlet and outlet of each thermal-storage tank. 7. Outside-, return-, supply-, and mixed-air ducts.

S. Install pressure gages in the following locations:

1. Discharge of each pressure-reducing valve. 2. Inlet and outlet of each chiller chilled-water and condenser-water connection. 3. Suction and discharge of each pump.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance of meters, gages, machines, and equipment.

B. Connect flowmeter-system elements to meters.

C. Connect flowmeter transmitters to meters.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.

3.4 THERMOMETER SCHEDULE

A. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each hydronic boiler shall be the following:

1. Industrial-style, liquid-in-glass type.

B. Thermometers at inlets and outlets of each chiller shall be the following:





C. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air-handling units and built-up central systems shall be the following:


D. Thermometers at inlets and outlets of each hydronic heat exchanger shall be the following:


E. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each thermal-storage tank shall be the following:


F. Thermometer stems shall be of length to match thermowell insertion length.

3.5 THERMOMETER SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Chilled-Water Piping: 0 to 100 deg F.

B. Scale Range for Condenser-Water Piping: 0 to 150 deg F.

C. Scale Range for Heating, Hot-Water Piping: 20 to 240 deg F.

3.6 PRESSURE-GAGE SCHEDULE

A. Pressure gages at suction and discharge of each pump shall be the following:

1. Sealed, direct-mounted, metal case.

3.7 PRESSURE-GAGE SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Chilled-Water Piping: 0 to 100 psi.

B. Scale Range for Condenser-Water Piping: 0 to 100 psi.

C. Scale Range for Heating, Hot-Water Piping: 0 to 100 psi.

3.8 FLOWMETER SCHEDULE

A. Flowmeters for Chilled-Water Piping: Ultrasonic and Venturi type.




BALL VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523.12 - 1

SECTION 230523.12 - BALL VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Brass ball valves. 2. Bronze ball valves.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS



B. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded-end valves. 2. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria. 3. ASME B16.18 for solder-joint connections. 4. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves. 5. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.

C. Bronze valves shall be made with dezincification-resistant materials. Bronze valves made with copper alloy (brass) containing more than 15 percent zinc are not permitted.

D. Refer to HVAC valve schedule articles for applications of valves.



G. Valve Actuator Types: 1. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves smaller than NPS 4.

H. Valves in Insulated Piping:

1. Include 2-inch stem extensions.




2. Extended operating handle of nonthermal-conductive material, and protective sleeves that allow operation of valves without breaking the vapor seals or disturbing insulation.

3. Memory stops that are fully adjustable after insulation is applied.

I. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

2.2 BRASS BALL VALVES

A. Two-Piece Brass Ball Valves with Full Port and Brass Trim:



2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. SWP Rating: 150 psig. c. CWP Rating: 600 psig. d. Body Design: Two piece. e. Body Material: Forged brass. f. Ends: Threaded. g. Seats: PTFE. h. Stem: Brass. i. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. j. Port: Full.

2.3 BRONZE BALL VALVES

A. Two-Piece Bronze Ball Valves with Full Port and Bronze or Brass Trim:



2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. SWP Rating: 150 psig. c. CWP Rating: 600 psig. d. Body Design: Two piece.












e. Body Material: Bronze. f. Ends: Threaded. g. Seats: PTFE. h. Stem: Bronze. i. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. j. Port: Full.

PART 3 - EXECUTION







A. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are unavailable, the same types of valves with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.

B. Select valves with the following end connections:

1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.

2. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends.

3.3 CHILLED-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: Two piece, full port, brass or bronze.

1. Valves may be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends.

3.4 CONDENSER-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE



3.5 HEATING-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE






3.6 END OF SECTION 230523.12



CHECK VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523.14 - 1

SECTION 230523.14 - CHECK VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Bronze lift check valves. 2. Bronze swing check valves. 3. Iron swing check valves.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS



B. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded-end valves. 2. ASME B16.1 for flanges on iron valves. 3. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria. 4. ASME B16.18 for solder joint. 5. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves. 6. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.


D. Valve Pressure-Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.

E. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

F. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

2.2 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc:






2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 3. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Design: Horizontal flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze. e. Ends: Threaded. f. Disc: Bronze.

B. Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:



2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 4. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Design: Horizontal flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze. e. Ends: Threaded. f. Disc: PTFE.

2.3 IRON SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Class 125, Iron Swing Check Valves with Metal Seats:



2. Description:
















a. Standard: MSS SP-71, Type I. b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12, CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. NPS 14 to NPS 24, CWP Rating: 150 psig. d. Body Design: Clear or full waterway. e. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. f. Ends: Flanged. g. Trim: Bronze. h. Gasket: Asbestos free.

B. Class 125, Iron Swing Check Valves with Nonmetallic-to-Metal Seats:


a. Crane; Crane Energy Flow Solutions.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-71, Type I. b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12, CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. NPS 14 to NPS 24, CWP Rating: 150 psig. d. Body Design: Clear or full waterway. e. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. f. Ends: Flanged. g. Trim: Composition. h. Seat Ring: Bronze. i. Disc Holder: Bronze. j. Disc: PTFE. k. Gasket: Asbestos free.

PART 3 - EXECUTION






E. Install swing check valves for proper direction of flow in horizontal position with hinge pin level.






3.2 ADJUSTING




1. Pump-Discharge Check Valves:

a. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves with bronze or nonmetallic disc. b. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Iron swing check valves with lever and weight or with

spring; metal-seat check valves.

B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are unavailable, the same types of valves with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.

C. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections:

1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules.

2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules.

3. For Copper Tubing, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends. 4. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends. 5. For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end

option is indicated in valve schedules. 6. For Steel Piping, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends.


A. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger:

1. Iron Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: May be provided with threaded ends instead of flanged ends.

2. Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 125 nonmetallic-to-metal seats. 3. Iron Swing Check Valves with Closure Control, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12: Class 125, lever

and spring.


A. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger:


2. Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 125 nonmetallic-to-metal seats.




3. Iron Swing Check Valves with Closure Control, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12: Class 125, lever and spring.


A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller:

1. Bronze Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends. 2. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125, nonmetallic disc.

B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger:


2. Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 125, nonmetallic-to-metal seats. 3. Iron Swing Check Valves with Closure Control, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12: Class 125, lever

and spring.




GATE VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523.15 - 1

SECTION 230523.15 - GATE VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Bronze gate valves. 2. Iron gate valves. 3. Chainwheels.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS



B. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded-end valves. 2. ASME B16.1 for flanges on iron valves. 3. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria. 4. ASME B16.18 for solder joint. 5. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves. 6. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.


D. Valve Pressure-Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.

E. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

F. RS Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extensions.

G. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.




2.2 BRONZE GATE VALVES

A. Class 125, NRS, Bronze Gate Valves:



2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 1. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet. d. Ends: Threaded. e. Stem: Bronze. f. Disc: Solid wedge; bronze. g. Packing: Asbestos free. h. Handwheel: Malleable iron.

B. Class 125, RS, Bronze Gate Valves:



2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 2. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet. d. Ends: Threaded. e. Stem: Bronze. f. Disc: Solid wedge; bronze. g. Packing: Asbestos free. h. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum.

2.3 IRON GATE VALVES

A. Class 125, NRS, Iron Gate Valves:














2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-70, Type I. b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12, CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. NPS 14 to NPS 24, CWP Rating: 150 psig. d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. e. Ends: Flanged. f. Trim: Bronze. g. Disc: Solid wedge. h. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free.

B. Class 125, OS&Y, Iron Gate Valves:



2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-70, Type I. b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12, CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. NPS 14 to NPS 24, CWP Rating: 150 psig. d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. e. Ends: Flanged. f. Trim: Bronze. g. Disc: Solid wedge. h. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free.

2.4 CHAINWHEELS

A. Description: Valve actuation assembly with sprocket rim, chain guides, chain, and attachment brackets for mounting chainwheels directly to hand wheels.

1. Sprocket Rim with Chain Guides: Ductile iron, of type and size required for valve. 2. Chain: Hot-dip-galvanized steel, of size required to fit sprocket rim.












PART 3 - EXECUTION






E. Install chainwheels on operators for gate valves NPS 4 and larger and more than 96 inches above floor. Extend chains to 60 inches above finished floor.

3.2 ADJUSTING




1. Shutoff Service: Gate valves.

B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are unavailable, the same types of valves with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.

C. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections:

1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends, except where solder-joint valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.

2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends, except where threaded valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.

3. For Copper Tubing, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends. 4. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends. 5. For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends, except where threaded valve-end

option is indicated in valve schedules below. 6. For Steel Piping, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends.


A. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Iron Gate Valves, Class 125, NRS.





A. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Iron Gate Valves, Class 125, NRS.


A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze Valves, Class 125, NRS with threaded ends.

B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Iron Gate Valves, Class 125, NRS.




HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 - 1

SECTION 230529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Metal pipe hangers and supports. 2. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. 3. Equipment supports.


A. Delegated Design: Design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.




A. Welding certificates.


A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. 2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped. 3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.




4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to support bearing surface of piping.

5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.

2.2 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS

A. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier.

B. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate with 100-psig ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig orASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig minimum compressive strength.

C. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.

D. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

E. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature.

2.3 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel anchors, for use in hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

2.4 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbon-steel shapes.


A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.




PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building structure.

B. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

C. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.

E. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

F. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

G. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

H. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

I. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

J. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

K. Insulated Piping:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation.

b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.





3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.


4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick. e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.

5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicate-insulation inserts of length at least as long as protective shield.

6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.

3.3 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

3.4 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.




D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports and attachments for general service applications.

F. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

G. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.

H. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of up to 1050 deg F, pipes NPS 4 to NPS 24, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.

3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 36, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.

4. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

5. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 6. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel-

pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate. 7. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with

steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate, and with U-bolt to retain pipe.

8. Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30, from two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

9. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 42 if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary.

I. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24.

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

J. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads. 2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

K. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.




2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.

3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles.

4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. 5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are

considerable and rod sizes are large. 6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 7. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above

by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:

a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb. b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb. c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.

8. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams. 9. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.

L. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.

M. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

N. Use mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction.




IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553 - 1

SECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Equipment labels. 2. Warning signs and labels. 3. Pipe labels.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Metal Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Anodized aluminum, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.

2. Letter Color: Same as piping system service. 3. Background Color: Same as piping system service. 4. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than

2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. 5. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24

inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal lettering.

6. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. 7. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), and the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number, and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules) and the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.




2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS

A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

B. Letter Color: Red.

C. Background Color: White.

D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.

E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal lettering.

G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.

H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information plus emergency notification instructions.

2.3 PIPE LABELS

A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction according to ASME A13.1.

B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.

C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.

D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings; also include pipe size and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.

2. Lettering Size: Size letters according to ASME A13.1 for piping.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.

3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Pipe Label Locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.

Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations and on both sides of through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible

enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed

piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 20 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 10 feet in

areas of congested piping and equipment.

B. Pipe Label Color Schedule:

1. Chilled-Water Piping: White letters on a safety-green background. 2. Condenser-Water Piping: White letters on a safety-green background. 3. Heating Water Piping: Black letters on a safety-yellow background. 4. Natural Gas Piping: Black letters on a safety-yellow background.




TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 1

SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Balancing Air Systems:

a. Variable-air-volume systems.

2. Balancing Hydronic Piping Systems:

a. Variable-flow hydronic systems.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.

B. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.

C. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

D. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.

E. TAB Specialist: An independent entity meeting qualifications to perform TAB work.

F. TDH: Total dynamic head.


A. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article.

B. Certified TAB reports.


A. TAB Specialists Qualifications: Certified by AABC NEBB or TABB.

1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by AABC NEBB or TABB.

2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by AABC NEBB or TABB as a TAB technician.




B. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 111, Section 4, "Instrumentation."

C. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.2 - "Air Balancing."

D. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6.7.2.3 - "System Balancing."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.

B. Examine installed systems for balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify that locations of these balancing devices are applicable for intended purpose and are accessible.

C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.

D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.

E. Examine ceiling plenums and underfloor air plenums used for supply, return, or relief air to verify that they are properly separated from adjacent areas. Verify that penetrations in plenum walls are sealed and fire-stopped if required.

F. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves.

1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.

2. Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design." Compare results with the design data and installed conditions.

G. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing, cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.

H. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.




I. Examine HVAC equipment and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, filters are clean, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.

J. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, and verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning.

K. Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens have been replaced by permanent screens with indicated perforations.

L. Examine control valves for proper installation for their intended function of throttling, diverting, or mixing fluid flows.

M. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.

N. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.

O. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.

P. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures for balancing the systems.

B. Perform system-readiness checks of HVAC systems and equipment to verify system readiness for TAB work. Include, at a minimum, the following:

1. Airside:

a. Duct systems are complete with terminals installed. b. Volume, smoke, and fire dampers are open and functional. c. Clean filters are installed. d. Fans are operating, free of vibration, and rotating in correct direction. e. Variable-frequency controllers' startup is complete and safeties are verified. f. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. g. Ceilings are installed. h. Windows and doors are installed. i. Suitable access to balancing devices and equipment is provided.

2. Hydronics:

a. Verify leakage and pressure tests on water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.

b. Piping is complete with terminals installed. c. Water treatment is complete. d. Systems are flushed, filled, and air purged. e. Strainers are pulled and cleaned.




f. Control valves are functioning per the sequence of operation. g. Shutoff and balance valves have been verified to be 100 percent open. h. Pumps are started and proper rotation is verified. i. Pump gage connections are installed directly at pump inlet and outlet flanges or in

discharge and suction pipe prior to valves or strainers. j. Variable-frequency controllers' startup is complete and safeties are verified. k. Suitable access to balancing devices and equipment is provided.

3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in AABC's "National Standards for Total System Balance" and in this Section.

B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.

1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness as used to construct ducts.

2. After testing and balancing, install test ports and duct access doors that comply with requirements in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."

3. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation, coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Section 230713 "Duct Insulation," Section 230716 "HVAC Equipment Insulation," and Section 230719 "HVAC Piping Insulation."

C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.

D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.

3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Cross-check the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.

C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.

D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements.

E. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.

F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.

G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.




H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.

I. Check for airflow blockages.

J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.

K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components.

L. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts."

3.5 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS

A. Adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:

1. Verify that the system static pressure sensor is located two-thirds of the distance down the duct from the fan discharge.

2. Verify that the system is under static pressure control. 3. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow. Measure inlet static

pressure, and adjust system static pressure control set point so the entering static pressure for the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of the terminal-unit manufacturer's recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome terminal-unit discharge system losses.

4. Calibrate and balance each terminal unit for maximum and minimum design airflow as follows:

a. Adjust controls so that terminal is calling for maximum airflow. Some controllers require starting with minimum airflow. Verify calibration procedure for specific project.

b. Measure airflow and adjust calibration factor as required for design maximum airflow. Record calibration factor.

c. When maximum airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units.

d. Adjust controls so that terminal is calling for minimum airflow. e. Measure airflow and adjust calibration factor as required for design minimum

airflow. Record calibration factor. If no minimum calibration is available, note any deviation from design airflow.

f. When in full cooling or full heating, ensure that there is no mixing of hot-deck and cold-deck airstreams unless so designed.

g. On constant volume terminals, in critical areas where room pressure is to be maintained, verify that the airflow remains constant over the full range of full cooling to full heating. Note any deviation from design airflow or room pressure.

5. After terminals have been calibrated and balanced, test and adjust system for total airflow. Adjust fans to deliver total design airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer.

a. Set outside-air, return-air, and relief-air dampers for proper position that simulates minimum outdoor-air conditions.




b. Set terminals for maximum airflow. If system design includes diversity, adjust terminals for maximum and minimum airflow so that connected total matches fan selection and simulates actual load in the building.

c. Where duct conditions allow, measure airflow by Pitot-tube traverse. If necessary, perform multiple Pitot-tube traverses to obtain total airflow.

d. Where duct conditions are not suitable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, a coil traverse may be acceptable.

e. If a reliable Pitot-tube traverse or coil traverse is not possible, measure airflow at terminals and calculate the total airflow.

6. Measure fan static pressures as follows:

a. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan inlet or through the flexible connection. c. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up the air-handling

system. d. Report any artificial loading of filters at the time static pressures are measured.

7. Set final return and outside airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outdoor airflow.

a. Balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as described for constant-volume air systems.

b. Verify that terminal units are meeting design airflow under system maximum flow.

8. Re-measure the inlet static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the system static pressure set point to the most energy-efficient set point to maintain the optimum system static pressure. Record set point and give to controls contractor.

9. Verify final system conditions as follows:

a. Re-measure and confirm that minimum outdoor, return, and relief airflows are within design. Readjust to match design if necessary.

b. Re-measure and confirm that total airflow is within design. c. Re-measure final fan operating data, rpms, volts, amps, and static profile. d. Mark final settings. e. Test system in economizer mode. Verify proper operation and adjust if necessary.

Measure and record all operating data. f. Verify tracking between supply and return fans.

3.6 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports for pumps, coils, and heat exchangers. Obtain approved submittals and manufacturer-recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required coil and heat exchanger flow rates with pump design flow rate.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts.

C. In addition to requirements in "Preparation" Article, prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing as follows:




1. Check liquid level in expansion tank. 2. Check highest vent for adequate pressure. 3. Check flow-control valves for proper position. 4. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters. 5. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection. 6. Check that air has been purged from the system.

3.7 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Balance systems with automatic two- and three-way control valves by setting systems at maximum flow through heat-exchange terminals, and proceed as specified above for hydronic systems.

B. Adjust the variable-flow hydronic system as follows:

1. Verify that the differential-pressure sensor is located as indicated. 2. Determine whether there is diversity in the system.

C. For systems with no diversity:

1. Adjust pumps to deliver total design gpm.

a. Measure total water flow.

1) Position valves for full flow through coils. 2) Measure flow by main flow meter, if installed. 3) If main flow meter is not installed, determine flow by pump TDH or

exchanger pressure drop.

b. Measure pump TDH as follows:

1) Measure discharge pressure directly at the pump outlet flange or in discharge pipe prior to any valves.

2) Measure inlet pressure directly at the pump inlet flange or in suction pipe prior to any valves or strainers.

3) Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gage heights. 4) Verify pump impeller size by measuring the TDH with the discharge valve

closed. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and verify that the pump has the intended impeller size.

5) With valves open, read pump TDH. Adjust pump discharge valve until design water flow is achieved.

c. Monitor motor performance during procedures and do not operate motor in an overloaded condition.

2. Adjust flow-measuring devices installed in mains and branches to design water flows.

a. Measure flow in main and branch pipes. b. Adjust main and branch balance valves for design flow. c. Re-measure each main and branch after all have been adjusted.




3. Adjust flow-measuring devices installed at terminals for each space to design water flows.

a. Measure flow at terminals. b. Adjust each terminal to design flow. c. Re-measure each terminal after it is adjusted. d. Position control valves to bypass the coil and adjust the bypass valve to maintain

design flow. e. Perform temperature tests after flows have been balanced.

4. For systems with pressure-independent valves at terminals:

a. Measure differential pressure and verify that it is within manufacturer's specified range.

b. Perform temperature tests after flows have been verified.

5. For systems without pressure-independent valves or flow-measuring devices at terminals:

a. Measure and balance coils by either coil pressure drop or temperature method. b. If balanced by coil pressure drop, perform temperature tests after flows have been

verified.

6. Prior to verifying final system conditions, determine the system differential-pressure set point.

7. If the pump discharge valve was used to set total system flow with variable-frequency controller at 60 Hz, at completion open discharge valve 100 percent and allow variable-frequency controller to control system differential-pressure set point. Record pump data under both conditions.

8. Mark final settings and verify that all memory stops have been set. 9. Verify final system conditions as follows:

a. Re-measure and confirm that total water flow is within design. b. Re-measure final pumps' operating data, TDH, volts, amps, and static profile. c. Mark final settings.

10. Verify that memory stops have been set.

D. For systems with diversity:

1. Determine diversity factor. 2. Simulate system diversity by closing required number of control valves, as approved by

the design engineer. 3. Adjust pumps to deliver total design gpm.

a. Measure total water flow.

1) Position valves for full flow through coils. 2) Measure flow by main flow meter, if installed. 3) If main flow meter is not installed, determine flow by pump TDH or

exchanger pressure drop.




b. Measure pump TDH as follows:

1) Measure discharge pressure directly at the pump outlet flange or in discharge pipe prior to any valves.

2) Measure inlet pressure directly at the pump inlet flange or in suction pipe prior to any valves or strainers.

3) Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gage heights. 4) Verify pump impeller size by measuring the TDH with the discharge valve

closed. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and verify that the pump has the intended impeller size.

5) With valves open, read pump TDH. Adjust pump discharge valve until design water flow is achieved.

c. Monitor motor performance during procedures and do not operate motor in an overloaded condition.

4. Adjust flow-measuring devices installed in mains and branches to design water flows.

a. Measure flow in main and branch pipes. b. Adjust main and branch balance valves for design flow. c. Re-measure each main and branch after all have been adjusted.

5. Adjust flow-measuring devices installed at terminals for each space to design water flows.

a. Measure flow at terminals. b. Adjust each terminal to design flow. c. Re-measure each terminal after it is adjusted. d. Position control valves to bypass the coil, and adjust the bypass valve to maintain

design flow. e. Perform temperature tests after flows have been balanced.

6. For systems with pressure-independent valves at terminals:

a. Measure differential pressure, and verify that it is within manufacturer's specified range.

b. Perform temperature tests after flows have been verified.

7. For systems without pressure-independent valves or flow-measuring devices at terminals:

a. Measure and balance coils by either coil pressure drop or temperature method. b. If balanced by coil pressure drop, perform temperature tests after flows have been

verified.

8. Open control valves that were shut. Close a sufficient number of control valves that were previously open to maintain diversity, and balance terminals that were just opened.

9. Prior to verifying final system conditions, determine system differential-pressure set point.

10. If the pump discharge valve was used to set total system flow with variable-frequency controller at 60 Hz, at completion open discharge valve 100 percent and allow variable-




frequency controller to control system differential-pressure set point. Record pump data under both conditions.

11. Mark final settings and verify that memory stops have been set. 12. Verify final system conditions as follows:

a. Re-measure and confirm that total water flow is within design. b. Re-measure final pumps' operating data, TDH, volts, amps, and static profile. c. Mark final settings.

13. Verify that memory stops have been set.

3.8 TOLERANCES

A. Set HVAC system's airflow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances:

1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent. 2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent. 3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent. 4. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 5 percent. 5. Condenser Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 5 percent.

B. Maintaining pressure relationships as designed shall have priority over the tolerances specified above.

3.9 FINAL REPORT

A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections for tested systems and balanced systems.

1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer.

2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration. 3. Certify validity and accuracy of field data.

B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following:

1. Pump curves. 2. Fan curves. 3. Manufacturers' test data. 4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. 5. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and

Product Data.

C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:

1. Title page. 2. Name and address of the TAB specialist. 3. Project name. 4. Project location.




5. Architect's name and address. 6. Engineer's name and address. 7. Contractor's name and address. 8. Report date. 9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report. 10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.

Number each page in the report. 11. Summary of contents including the following:

a. Indicated versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems. c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract

Documents.

12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings. 14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values. 15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:

a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers. b. Conditions of filters. c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions. d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils. e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems. g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller. h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.

D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present each system with single-line diagram and include the following:

1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows. 2. Water and steam flow rates. 3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes. 4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations. 5. Terminal units. 6. Balancing stations. 7. Position of balancing devices.

E. Air-Handling-Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following:

1. Unit Data:

a. Unit identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and unit size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Unit arrangement and class. g. Discharge arrangement. h. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.




i. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches. j. Number, make, and size of belts. k. Number, type, and size of filters.

2. Motor Data:

a. Motor make, and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. c. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full-load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches.

3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):

a. Total airflow rate in cfm. b. Total system static pressure in inches wg. c. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg. e. Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg. f. Preheat-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg. g. Cooling-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg. h. Heating-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg. i. Outdoor airflow in cfm. j. Return airflow in cfm. k. Outdoor-air damper position. l. Return-air damper position. m. Vortex damper position.

F. Apparatus-Coil Test Reports:

1. Coil Data:

a. System identification. b. Location. c. Coil type. d. Number of rows. e. Fin spacing in fins per inch o.c. f. Make and model number. g. Face area in sq. ft.. h. Tube size in NPS. i. Tube and fin materials. j. Circuiting arrangement.


a. Airflow rate in cfm. b. Average face velocity in fpm. c. Air pressure drop in inches wg. d. Outdoor-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. e. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.




f. Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. g. Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. h. Water flow rate in gpm. i. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig. j. Entering-water temperature in deg F. k. Leaving-water temperature in deg F. l. Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types. m. Refrigerant suction pressure in psig. n. Refrigerant suction temperature in deg F. o. Inlet steam pressure in psig.

G. Gas- and Oil-Fired Heat Apparatus Test Reports: In addition to manufacturer's factory startup equipment reports, include the following:

1. Unit Data:

a. System identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and unit size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Fuel type in input data. g. Output capacity in Btu/h. h. Ignition type. i. Burner-control types. j. Motor horsepower and rpm. k. Motor volts, phase, and hertz. l. Motor full-load amperage and service factor. m. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. n. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches.


a. Total airflow rate in cfm. b. Entering-air temperature in deg F. c. Leaving-air temperature in deg F. d. Air temperature differential in deg F. e. Entering-air static pressure in inches wg. f. Leaving-air static pressure in inches wg. g. Air static-pressure differential in inches wg. h. Low-fire fuel input in Btu/h. i. High-fire fuel input in Btu/h. j. Manifold pressure in psig. k. High-temperature-limit setting in deg F. l. Operating set point in Btu/h. m. Motor voltage at each connection. n. Motor amperage for each phase. o. Heating value of fuel in Btu/h.

H. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:




1. Fan Data:

a. System identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Arrangement and class. g. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. h. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches.

2. Motor Data:

a. Motor make, and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. c. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full-load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches. g. Number, make, and size of belts.


a. Total airflow rate in cfm. b. Total system static pressure in inches wg. c. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg. e. Suction static pressure in inches wg.

I. Air-Terminal-Device Reports:

1. Unit Data:

a. System and air-handling unit identification. b. Location and zone. c. Apparatus used for test. d. Area served. e. Make. f. Number from system diagram. g. Type and model number. h. Size. i. Effective area in sq. ft..


a. Airflow rate in cfm. b. Air velocity in fpm. c. Preliminary airflow rate as needed in cfm. d. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm. e. Final airflow rate in cfm. f. Final velocity in fpm.




g. Space temperature in deg F.

J. System-Coil Reports: For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units, include the following:

1. Unit Data:

a. System and air-handling-unit identification. b. Location and zone. c. Room or riser served. d. Coil make and size. e. Flowmeter type.


a. Airflow rate in cfm. b. Entering-water temperature in deg F. c. Leaving-water temperature in deg F. d. Water pressure drop in feet of head or psig. e. Entering-air temperature in deg F. f. Leaving-air temperature in deg F.

K. Pump Test Reports: Calculate impeller size by plotting the shutoff head on pump curves and include the following:

1. Unit Data:

a. Unit identification. b. Location. c. Service. d. Make and size. e. Model number and serial number. f. Water flow rate in gpm. g. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig. h. Required net positive suction head in feet of head or psig. i. Pump rpm. j. Impeller diameter in inches. k. Motor make and frame size. l. Motor horsepower and rpm. m. Voltage at each connection. n. Amperage for each phase. o. Full-load amperage and service factor. p. Seal type.


a. Static head in feet of head or psig. b. Pump shutoff pressure in feet of head or psig. c. Actual impeller size in inches. d. Full-open flow rate in gpm. e. Full-open pressure in feet of head or psig. f. Final discharge pressure in feet of head or psig.




g. Final suction pressure in feet of head or psig. h. Final total pressure in feet of head or psig. i. Final water flow rate in gpm. j. Voltage at each connection. k. Amperage for each phase.

L. Instrument Calibration Reports:

1. Report Data:

a. Instrument type and make. b. Serial number. c. Application. d. Dates of use. e. Dates of calibration.

3.10 VERIFICATION OF TAB REPORT

A. The TAB specialist's test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the presence of designated Authority representative.

B. Designated Authority representative shall randomly select measurements, documented in the final report, to be rechecked. Rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements recorded or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8-hour business day.

C. If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as "FAILED."

D. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be considered incomplete and shall be rejected.

E. If TAB work fails, proceed as follows:

1. TAB specialists shall recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report and balancing device settings to include all changes; resubmit the final report and request a second final inspection.

2. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner may contract the services of another TAB specialist to complete TAB work according to the Contract Documents and deduct the cost of the services from the original TAB specialist's final payment.

3. If the second verification also fails, designated Authority representative may contact AABC Headquarters regarding the AABC National Performance Guaranty.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.




3.11 ADDITIONAL TESTS

A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.

B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near-peak summer and winter conditions.




DUCT INSULATION 230713 - 1

SECTION 230713 - DUCT INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following duct services:

1. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air. 2. Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air. 3. Indoor, concealed return located in unconditioned space. 4. Indoor, exposed return located in unconditioned space.



B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.




A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Comply with requirements in "Duct Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Duct and Plenum Insulation Schedule," and "Aboveground, Outdoor Duct and Plenum Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.




C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795.

E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.

F. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type I. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

2.2 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.




C. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.



2.3 MASTICS



B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.

1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film thickness.

2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. 3. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight. 4. Color: White.




2.4 SEALANTS

A. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:

1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 4. Color: Aluminum. 5. For indoor applications, use sealants that have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 6. Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California

Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."



1. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.

2.6 TAPES

A. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136.

1. Width: 3 inches. 2. Thickness: 6.5 mils. 3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 4. Elongation: 2 percent. 5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 6. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.

2.7 SECUREMENTS

A. Aluminum Bands: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal.

B. Insulation Pins and Hangers:

1. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements: a. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches

square.




b. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low-carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.

c. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.

2. Nonmetal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate fastened to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements: a. Baseplate: Perforated, nylon sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 1-1/2 inches in diameter. b. Spindle: Nylon, 0.106-inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation

indicated, up to 2-1/2 inches. c. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated

capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.

3. Self-Sticking-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements: a. Baseplate: Galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square. b. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low-carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch-

diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. c. Adhesive-backed base with a peel-off protective cover.

4. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch-thick, galvanized-steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter. a. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to

ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.

5. Nonmetal Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch-thick nylon sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.

C. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch-wide, stainless steel or Monel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION



A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings.




B. Install insulation materials, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of duct system as specified in insulation system schedules.




F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

G. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

H. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

I. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor

legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.


J. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

K. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:



3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.

a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.


5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings.

L. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.




M. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.

N. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.

3.3 PENETRATIONS






B. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations.





C. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

D. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches.


E. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Duct: For penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches.

2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."




3.4 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION

A. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 50 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.

2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions.

3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows:

a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c.

b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.

c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers. f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with

insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.

4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.

a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-barrier seal.

b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches.

5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c.

6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch-wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.




3.5 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION

A. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:

1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight. 2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket. 3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch-wide joint strips at

end joints. 5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation

with vapor-barrier mastic.

B. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints.

3.6 FIRE-RATED INSULATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Where fire-rated insulation system is indicated, secure system to ducts and duct hangers and supports to maintain a continuous fire rating.

B. Insulate duct access panels and doors to achieve same fire rating as duct.

C. Install firestopping at penetrations through fire-rated assemblies.




1. Inspect ductwork, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to one location(s) for each duct system defined in the "Duct Insulation Schedule, General" Article.


3.8 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation:

1. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air. 2. Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air.

B. Items Not Insulated:




1. Fibrous-glass ducts. 2. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and

ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. 3. Factory-insulated flexible ducts. 4. Factory-insulated plenums and casings. 5. Flexible connectors. 6. Vibration-control devices. 7. Factory-insulated access panels and doors.

3.9 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Concealed, Supply-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket, 1-1/2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

B. Exposed, Supply-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket, 1-1/2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.




HVAC PIPING INSULATION 230719 - 1

SECTION 230719 - HVAC PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following HVAC piping systems:

1. Chilled-water and brine piping, indoors. 2. Heating hot-water piping, indoors. 3. Condenser water piping, indoors.




1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger.

2. Detail attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation. 3. Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation. 4. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each

type of insulation. 5. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties. 6. Detail application of field-applied jackets. 7. Detail application at linkages of control devices.




A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.






PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

B. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

C. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795.

D. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.

E. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:

1. Type I, 850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ-SSL. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS

A. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449.

2.3 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.




C. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.






2.4 MASTICS



B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services.

1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film thickness.

2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. 3. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight. 4. Color: White.

C. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above-ambient services.

1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 1.8 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film thickness. 2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. 3. Solids Content: 60 percent by volume and 66 percent by weight. 4. Color: White.

2.5 SEALANTS

A. Joint Sealants:

1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 2. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F. 4. Color: White or gray. 5. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when



B. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:

1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 4. Color: White. 5. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when








1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

B. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005, Temper H-14.

1. Factory cut and rolled to size. 2. Smooth finish, 0.024-inch thickness. 3. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 3-mil-thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and

kraft paper. 4. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers:

a. Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket. b. Preformed 2-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows. c. Tee covers. d. Flange and union covers. e. End caps. f. Beveled collars. g. Valve covers. h. Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers are not

available.

2.7 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136. 1. Width: 3 inches. 2. Thickness: 11.5 mils. 3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 4. Elongation: 2 percent. 5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 6. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.

B. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive. 1. Width: 2 inches. 2. Thickness: 3.7 mils. 3. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width. 4. Elongation: 5 percent. 5. Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch in width.




2.8 SECUREMENTS

A. Aluminum Bands: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal.

B. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch-wide, stainless steel or Monel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION


B. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.

C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.


A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.




F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.




2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.


4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:



3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.

a. For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.


5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.

M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.

O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.

P. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1. Vibration-control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Manholes. 5. Handholes. 6. Cleanouts.




3.3 PENETRATIONS






B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations.





D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.


F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. 2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies.

3.4 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:




1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated.

2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.

6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.

7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.

8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape.

9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union." Match size and color of pipe labels.

C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.

D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following:

1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation.




2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.

3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.

4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.

5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER PREFORMED PIPE INSULATION

A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.

2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward-clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the

thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of

adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least

1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:


2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.

D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:





2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body.

3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.

4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.

3.6 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION

A. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints.




1. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of threaded fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers, two locations of welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and three locations of flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General" Article.


3.8 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:

1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces. 2. Underground piping. 3. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.

3.9 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Chilled Water and Brine, above 40 Deg F: Insulation shall be the following:




1. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I: 1-1/2 inches thick.

B. Heating-Hot-Water Supply and Return, 200 Deg F and Below: Insulation shall be the following:

1. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I: 1 inch thick.

C. Condenser Water Supply and Return, 200 Deg F and Below: Insulation shall be the following:

1. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I: 1 inch thick.

3.10 INDOOR FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE

A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.

B. Piping, exposed within mechanical spaces and 10.5’ or less from floor level: 1. Aluminum




COMMISSIONING OF HVAC 230800 - 1

SECTION 230800 - COMMISSIONING OF HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes commissioning process requirements for the following HVAC&R systems, assemblies, and equipment: 1. Heat generation systems, including hot-water boilers. 2. Cooling generation systems, including chilled-water systems. 3. Distribution systems, including air distribution (heating and cooling) systems hot-water

distribution systems chilled-water distribution systems air-handling units. 4. Terminal and packaged units, including variable air volume units. 5. Controls and instrumentation, including BAS.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. BAS: Building automation system.

B. DDC: Direct digital controls.

C. HVAC&R: Heating, Ventilating, Air Conditioning, and Refrigeration.

D. "Systems," "Subsystems," "Equipment," and "Components": Where these terms are used together or separately, they shall mean "as-built" systems, subsystems, equipment, and components.

E. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.


A. Qualification Data: For BAS and HVAC&R Testing Technician.

B. Construction Checklists: For the following:

1. Instrumentation and control for HVAC&R. 2. Heating-water piping and accessories. 3. Cooling-water piping and accessories. 4. Particulate air filtration. 5. Air-handling units. 6. Boilers. 7. Chillers. 8. Pumps. 9. Cooling towers.





A. BAS Testing Technician Qualifications: Technicians to perform BAS construction checklist verification tests, construction checklist verification test demonstrations, commissioning tests, and commissioning test demonstrations shall have the following minimum qualifications:

1. Journey-level or equivalent skill level with knowledge of BAS, HVAC&R, electrical concepts, and building operations.

2. Minimum three years' experience installing, servicing, and operating systems manufactured by approved manufacturer.

3. International Society of Automation (ISA) Certified Control Systems Technician (CCST) Level I.

B. HVAC&R Testing Technician Qualifications: Technicians to perform HVAC&R construction checklist verification tests, construction checklist verification test demonstrations, commissioning tests, and commissioning test demonstrations shall have the following minimum qualifications:

1. Journey-level or equivalent skill level. Vocational School four-year program graduate or an Associates degree in mechanical systems, air conditioning, or similar field. Degree may be offset by three years' experience in servicing mechanical systems in the HVAC industry. Generally, required knowledge includes HVAC&R systems, electrical concepts, building operations, and application and use of tools and instrumentation to measure performance of HVAC&R equipment, assemblies, and systems.

2. Minimum three years' experience installing, servicing, and operating systems manufactured by approved manufacturer.

3. One of the following:

a. National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) Certified Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Technician.

b. Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) Certified Test and Balance Technician. c. Owner retains the right to waive NEBB or AABC Certification.

C. Testing Equipment and Instrumentation Quality and Calibration: For test equipment and instrumentation required to perform HVAC&R commissioning work, perform the following:

1. Submit test equipment and instrumentation list. For each equipment or instrument, identify the following:

a. Equipment/instrument identification number. b. Planned commissioning application or use. c. Manufacturer, make, model, and serial number. d. Calibration history, including certificates from agencies that calibrate the

equipment and instrumentation.

2. Test equipment and instrumentation shall meet the following criteria:

a. Capable of testing and measuring performance within the specified acceptance criteria.

b. Be calibrated at the manufacturer's recommended intervals with current calibration tags permanently affixed to the instrument being used.




c. Be maintained in good repair and operating condition throughout the duration of use on this Project.

d. Be recalibrated/repaired if dropped or damaged in any way since last calibrated.

D. Proprietary Test Instrumentation and Tools:

1. Equipment Manufacturer's Proprietary Instrumentation and Tools: For installed equipment included in the commissioning process, test instrumentation and tools manufactured or prescribed by equipment manufacturer to service, calibrate, adjust, repair, or otherwise work on its equipment or required as a condition of equipment warranty, perform the following:

a. Submit proprietary instrumentation and tools list. For each instrument or tool, identify the following:

1) Instrument or tool identification number. 2) Equipment schedule designation of equipment for which the instrument or

tool is required. 3) Manufacturer, make, model, and serial number. 4) Calibration history, including certificates from agencies that calibrate the

instrument or tool, where appropriate.

b. Include a separate list of proprietary test instrumentation and tools in the operation and maintenance manuals.

c. HVAC&R proprietary test instrumentation and tools become the property of Owner at the time of Substantial Completion.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL TESTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Certify that HVAC&R systems, subsystems, and equipment have been installed, calibrated, and started and are operating according to the Contract Documents and approved Shop Drawings and submittals.

B. Certify that HVAC&R instrumentation and control systems have been completed and calibrated, that they are operating according to the Contract Documents and approved Shop Drawings and submittals, and that pretest set points have been recorded.

C. Certify that TAB procedures have been completed and that TAB reports have been submitted, discrepancies corrected, and corrective work approved.

D. Set systems, subsystems, and equipment into operating mode to be tested according to approved test procedures (e.g., normal shutdown, normal auto position, normal manual position, unoccupied cycle, emergency power, and alarm conditions).




E. Construction Checklists: Prepare and submit detailed construction checklists for HVAC&R systems, subsystems, equipment, and components.

1. Contributors to the development of construction checklists shall include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. HVAC&R systems and equipment installers. b. TAB technicians. c. HVAC&R instrumentation and controls installers.

F. Perform tests using design conditions, whenever possible.

1. Simulated conditions may, with approval of Architect, be imposed using an artificial load when it is impractical to test under design conditions. Before simulating conditions, calibrate testing instruments. Provide equipment to simulate loads. Set simulated conditions as directed by Commissioning Coordinator and document simulated conditions and methods of simulation. After tests, return configurations and settings to normal operating conditions.

2. Commissioning test procedures may direct that set points be altered when simulating conditions is impractical.

3. Commissioning test procedures may direct that sensor values be altered with a signal generator when design or simulating conditions and altering set points are impractical.

G. If tests cannot be completed because of a deficiency outside the scope of the HVAC&R system, document the deficiency and report it to Owner. After deficiencies are resolved, reschedule tests.

H. If seasonal testing is specified, complete appropriate initial performance tests and documentation and schedule seasonal tests.

I. Coordinate schedule with, and perform the following activities at the direction of, Commissioning Coordinator.

J. Comply with construction checklist requirements, including material verification, installation checks, start-up, and performance tests requirements specified in Sections specifying HVAC systems and equipment.

K. Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools, and equipment to complete and document the following:

1. Performance tests. 2. Demonstration of a sample of performance tests. 3. Commissioning tests. 4. Commissioning test demonstrations.

3.2 TAB COMMISSIONING TESTS

A. TAB Verification:

1. Conditions of the Test:




a. Commissioning Test Demonstration Sampling Rate: As specified in "Inspections" Article in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC."

b. Systems operating in full heating mode with minimum outside-air volume. c. Systems operating in full cooling mode with minimum outside-air volume. d. For measurements at air-handling units with economizer controls; systems

operating in economizer mode with 100 percent outside air.

2. Acceptance Criteria:

a. Under all conditions, rechecked measurements comply with "Inspections" Article in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC."

b. Additionally, no rechecked measurement shall differ from measurements documented in the final report by more than two times the tolerances allowed.

c. Under all conditions, where the Contract Documents indicate a differential in airflow between supply and exhaust and/or return in a space, the differential relationship shall be maintained.

3.3 HEATING CONTROL SYSTEM COMMISSIONING TESTS

A. Heating-Water Supply Temperature Control:

1. Prerequisites: Installation verification of the following:

a. Startup of boiler. b. Startup of heating-water pump(s). c. TAB of heating-water flow and pressure. d. Input Device: Heating-water supply temperature sensor. e. Output Device: Boiler fire rate and pump speed. f. Display the following at the operator's workstation:

1) Heating-water supply temperature. 2) Heating-water supply temperature set point. 3) Control-valve position.


a. Minimum heating-water flow. b. Midrange Heating-Water Flow: 50 to 60 percent of maximum. c. Maximum heating-water flow.

3. Acceptance Criteria: Under all conditions, heating-water supply temperature is within plus or minus 2.0 deg F of set point.

B. Heating-Water Supply Temperature Reset:


a. Startup of boiler. b. Startup of heating-water pump(s). c. TAB of heating-water flow and pressure.




d. Input Device: Heating-water supply temperature sensor. e. Input Device: Outdoor-air temperature sensor. f. Output Device: Boiler fire rate and pump speed. g. Display the following at the operator's workstation:

1) Outdoor-air temperature. 2) Heating-water supply temperature. 3) Heating-water supply temperature set point.

2. Conditions of the Test: Outdoor-air temperature input value may be overridden for this test.

a. Low Temperature: Outdoor-air temperature below 20 deg F. b. Midrange Temperature: Outdoor-air temperature between 30 and 45 deg F. c. High Temperature: Outdoor-air temperature above 65 deg F.

3. Acceptance Criteria: Heating-water supply temperature resets in straight-line relationship with outdoor-air temperature for the reset schedule. Under all conditions, heating-water supply temperature is within 2.0 deg F of set point.

C. Control Primary Circulating Pump(s):


a. Startup of heating-water pump(s). b. Input Device: System command. c. Output Device: System command. d. Display the following at the operator's workstation:

1) Outdoor-air temperature. 2) Operating status of primary circulating pump(s).


a. Simulate varying load on heating water system to demonstrate boiler activation in cascaded fashion. Include call for domestic hot water production and resulting automatic changes to lead/lag boiler and cascade operation.


a. Demonstrate boilers automatically cascade as required to meet load and domestic hot water production occurs at call from domestic water heat exchanger temperature sensor input.

3.4 CENTRAL REFRIGERATION SYSTEM COMMISSIONING TESTS

A. Start and Stop Condenser-Water Pump(s):





a. Startup of condenser-water pump(s). b. Startup of cooling tower. c. Input Devices: DDC commandand water pressure transducer. d. Output Device: Relay and pump VFD. e. Display the following at the operator's workstation:

1) Low-level cooling-tower sump alarm. 2) Outdoor-air temperature. 3) Cooling (software) demand indication. 4) Time and time schedule. 5) Condenser-water pump(s) on-off status. 6) Condenser-water pump(s) on-off-speed indication.


a. Verify Lockout: Start with condenser-water pump enable-input devices in the "disable" state to prevent pump start. One-by-one, place the enable-input devices in the "enable" state, and then return each to the "disable" state before placing the next enable-input device to the "enable" state.

b. Verify Start: Start with condenser-water pump enable-input devices in the "disable" state to prevent pump start. One-by-one, place the enable-input devices in the "enable" state.

c. Verify Shutdown: Place all enable-input devices in the "enable" state to allow the pump(s) to start. One-by-one, place the enable-input devices to their "disable" state, and then return each to the "enable" state before placing the next enable-input device to the "disable" state.

d. Verify Schedule: Compare condenser-water pump start and stop schedule times with Owner-approved time-of-day schedule.


a. Lockout: No single enable-input device starts the pump(s) when released to the enable state.

b. Start: Condenser-water pump(s) start when and only when all enable-input devices are in the "enable" state.

c. Shutdown: Each enable-input device stops the condenser-water pump(s) when placed in the "disable" state, regardless of the state of other enable-input devices.

d. Schedule: Condenser-water pump start and stop schedule times agree with Owner-approved time-of-day schedule.

B. Start and Stop Chilled-Water Pump(s):


a. Startup of chilled-water pump(s). b. Startup of condenser-water pump(s). c. Startup of cooling tower. d. Input Device: Flow switch in condenser-water circuit. e. Output Device: DDC command. f. Display of the following at the operator's workstation:




1) Chilled-water flow rate. 2) Condenser-water flow indication. 3) Chilled-water pump(s) on-off status. 4) Chilled-water pump(s) on-off-speed indication.


a. Verify Start: Start with chilled-water pump enable-input device in the "disable" state to prevent pump start. Place the enable-input device in the "enable" state.

b. Verify Shutdown: Start with the enable-input device in the "enable" state to allow the pump(s) to run. Then place the enable-input device to the "disable" state.


a. Start: Chilled-water pump(s) start when and only when the enable-input device is in the "enable" state.

b. Shutdown: The enable-input device stops the chilled-water pump(s) when placed in the "disable" state.

c. Chiller operation is enabled and limited by chilled water flow.

C. Start and Stop Cooling-Tower Fans(s):


a. Input Device: DDC command. b. Output Device: Relay and VFD. c. Display:

1) Condenser-water flow indication. 2) Cooling-tower fan(s) on-off-speed indication.


a. Verify Start: Start with cooling-tower fan enable-input device in the "disable" state to prevent fan(s) start. Place the enable-input device in the "enable" state.

b. Verify Shutdown: Start with the enable-input device in the "enable" state to allow the fan(s) to run. Then place the enable-input device to the "disable" state.


a. Start: Chilled-water pump(s) start when and only when the enable-input device is in the "enable" state.

b. Shutdown: The enable-input device stops the chilled-water pump(s) when placed in the "disable" state.

D. Alternative Chiller(s):


a. Input Device: DDC command. b. Output Device: Chiller terminal strip.




c. Display:

1) Chiller(s) on-off indication. 2) Chiller failure alarm.


a. Lead-Lag Rotation - Chiller Start: Create a number of chilled-water system start-stop cycles equal to the number of chillers plus one.

b. Lead-Lag Rotation - Lead Chiller Fail: Disable the lead chiller while it is running. c. Lead-Lag Rotation - Lag Chiller Fail: Disable a lag chiller while it is running. d. Lead-Lag Rotation - Chiller Start Fail: Disable a chiller while it is in standby

mode. Initiate a lead-lag rotation call for the disabled chiller to start. e. Add/Drop Sequence - Increasing Demand: Increase chilled-water demand

incrementally to observe the corresponding addition of chillers. Increase demand gradually as the load approached the set point for adding the next chiller to permit observation of the actual load at the time the next chiller is enabled.

f. Add/Drop Sequence - Decreasing Demand: Decrease chilled-water demand incrementally to observe the corresponding dropping of chillers. Decrease demand gradually as the load approached the set point for dropping the next chiller to permit observation of the actual load at the time the next chiller is disabled.

g. Add/Drop Sequence - Operating Chiller Fail: h. Add/Drop Sequence - Chiller Start Fail:


a. Lead-Lag Rotation - Chiller Start: On each chilled-water system start event, the other chiller in rotation starts as the lead chiller, and the previous lead chiller is designated as the lag chiller.

b. Lead-Lag Rotation - Lead Chiller Fail: When the lead chiller fails, the other chiller in rotation starts as the lead chiller, and a chiller failure alarm is initiated for the failed chiller.

c. Lead-Lag Rotation - Lag Chiller Fail: When the lag chiller fails, a chiller failure alarm is initiated for the failed chiller.

d. Lead-Lag Rotation - Chiller Start Fail: When a chiller fails to start, the next chiller in rotation starts in its place, and a chiller failure alarm is initiated for the failed chiller.

e. Add/Drop Sequence - Increasing Demand: Chillers are added at the specified load set point, plus or minus 5 percent. Chilled-water supply temperature remains stable within plus or minus 2.0 deg F of set point.

f. Add/Drop Sequence - Decreasing Demand: Chillers are dropped at the specified load set point, plus or minus 5 percent. Chilled-water supply temperature remains stable within plus or minus 2.0 deg F of set point.

g. Add/Drop Sequence - Operating Chiller Fail: When an operating chiller fails, the next chiller in sequence starts and a chiller failure alarm is initiated for the failed chiller.

h. Add/Drop Sequence - Chiller Start Fail: When a chiller fails to start, the next chiller in sequence starts in its place, and a chiller failure alarm is initiated for the failed chiller.




3.5 TERMINAL UNIT EQUIPMENT COMMISSIONING TESTS

A. Variable-Air-Volume Terminal Air Units:


a. Occupancy Input Device: Occupancy sensor. b. Occupancy Output Device: DDC system binary output. c. Room Temperature Input Device: Electronic temperature sensor. d. Room Temperature Output Device: Electronic damper actuators. e. Display the following at the operator's workstation:

1) Room/area served. 2) Room occupied/unoccupied. 3) Room temperature indication. 4) Room temperature set point. 5) Room temperature set point, occupied. 6) Room temperature set point, unoccupied. 7) Air-damper position as percentage open.


a. Commissioning Test Demonstration Sampling Rate: 20 percent of all units inclusive of existing 4th floor units.

b. Temperature Control - Occupied: Start with the room unoccupied. Occupy the room and observe the change to occupied status. Observe temperature control until room temperature is stable at occupied set point plus or minus 1.0 deg F.


a. Temperature Control - Occupied:

1) Control system status changes from "occupied" to "unoccupied" after the specified time.

2) Room temperature is stable at occupied set point plus or minus 2.0 deg F within 10 minutes of occupancy. Room temperature does not overshoot or undershoot set point by more than 3.0 deg F during transition.

3.6 AIR-HANDLING SYSTEM COMMISSIONING TESTS

A. Supply Fan(s) Variable-Volume Control:


a. Volume Control Input Device: Static-pressure transmitter sensing supply-duct static pressure referenced to conditioned-space static pressure.

b. Volume Control Output Device: DDC system analog output to motor speed controller. Set variable-speed drive to minimum speed when fan is stopped.

c. High-Pressure Input Device: Static-pressure transmitter sensing supply-duct static pressure referenced to static pressure outside the duct.




d. High-Pressure Output Device: DDC system binary output to alarm. e. Display the following at the operator's workstation:

1) Supply-fan-discharge static-pressure indication. 2) Supply-fan-discharge static-pressure set point. 3) Supply-fan speed.


a. Minimum supply-air flow. b. Midrange Supply-Air Flow: 50 to 60 percent of maximum. c. Maximum supply-air flow. d. Excess supply-air discharge static pressure.


a. At all supply-air flow rates, and during changes in supply-air flow, discharge air static pressure is at set point plus or minus percent.

b. Fan stops and an alarm is initiated at the operator's workstation when supply-air discharge static pressure is at the excess static pressure plus or minus 2 percent.




DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 1

SECTION 230923 - DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. DDC system for monitoring and controlling of HVAC systems. 2. Delivery of selected control devices to equipment and systems manufacturers for factory

installation and to HVAC systems installers for field installation.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Algorithm: A logical procedure for solving a recurrent mathematical problem. A prescribed set of well-defined rules or processes for solving a problem in a finite number of steps.

B. Analog: A continuously varying signal value, such as current, flow, pressure, or temperature.

C. BACnet Specific Definitions:

1. BACnet: Building Automation Control Network Protocol, ASHRAE 135. A communications protocol allowing devices to communicate data over and services over a network.

2. BACnet Interoperability Building Blocks (BIBBs): BIBB defines a small portion of BACnet functionality that is needed to perform a particular task. BIBBs are combined to build the BACnet functional requirements for a device.

3. BACnet/IP: Defines and allows using a reserved UDP socket to transmit BACnet messages over IP networks. A BACnet/IP network is a collection of one or more IP subnetworks that share the same BACnet network number.

4. BACnet Testing Laboratories (BTL): Organization responsible for testing products for compliance with ASHRAE 135, operated under direction of BACnet International.

5. PICS (Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement): Written document that identifies the particular options specified by BACnet that are implemented in a device.

D. Binary: Two-state signal where a high signal level represents ON" or "OPEN" condition and a low signal level represents "OFF" or "CLOSED" condition. "Digital" is sometimes used interchangeably with "Binary" to indicate a two-state signal.

E. Controller: Generic term for any standalone, microprocessor-based, digital controller residing on a network, used for local or global control. Three types of controllers are indicated: Network Controller, Programmable Application Controller, and Application-Specific Controller.

F. Control System Integrator: An entity that assists in expansion of existing enterprise system and support of additional operator interfaces to I/O being added to existing enterprise system.

G. COV: Changes of value.




H. DDC System Provider: Authorized representative of, and trained by, DDC system manufacturer and responsible for execution of DDC system Work indicated.

I. Distributed Control: Processing of system data is decentralized and control decisions are made at subsystem level. System operational programs and information are provided to remote subsystems and status is reported back. On loss of communication, subsystems shall be capable of operating in a standalone mode using the last best available data.

J. DOCSIS: Data-Over Cable Service Interface Specifications.

K. Gateway: Bidirectional protocol translator that connects control systems that use different communication protocols.

L. I/O: System through which information is received and transmitted. I/O refers to analog input (AI), binary input (BI), analog output (AO) and binary output (BO). Analog signals are continuous and represent control influences such as flow, level, moisture, pressure, and temperature. Binary signals convert electronic signals to digital pulses (values) and generally represent two-position operating and alarm status. "Digital," (DI and (DO), is sometimes used interchangeably with "Binary," (BI) and (BO), respectively.

M. LAN: Local area network.

N. LNS: LonWorks Network Services.

O. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control, signaling power-limited circuits.

P. Modbus TCP/IP: An open protocol for exchange of process data.

Q. MS/TP: Master-slave/token-passing, IEE 8802-3. Datalink protocol LAN option that uses twisted-pair wire for low-speed communication.

R. Network Controller: Digital controller, which supports a family of programmable application controllers and application-specific controllers, that communicates on peer-to-peer network for transmission of global data.

S. Network Repeater: Device that receives data packet from one network and rebroadcasts it to another network. No routing information is added to protocol.

T. Peer to Peer: Networking architecture that treats all network stations as equal partners.

U. POT: Portable operator's terminal.

V. RAM: Random access memory.

W. RF: Radio frequency.

X. Router: Device connecting two or more networks at network layer.

Y. TCP/IP: Transport control protocol/Internet protocol incorporated into Microsoft Windows.




Z. UPS: Uninterruptible power supply.

AA. USB: Universal Serial Bus.

BB. User Datagram Protocol (UDP): This protocol assumes that the IP is used as the underlying protocol.

CC. VAV: Variable air volume.

DD. WLED: White light emitting diode.


A. Product Data: For each type of product include the following:

1. Construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

2. Operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished accessories indicating process operating range, accuracy over range, control signal over range, default control signal with loss of power, calibration data specific to each unique application, electrical power requirements, and limitations of ambient operating environment, including temperature and humidity.

3. Product description with complete technical data, performance curves, and product specification sheets.

4. Installation, operation and maintenance instructions including factors effecting performance.

5. Bill of materials of indicating quantity, manufacturer, and extended model number for each unique product.

a. Operator workstations. b. Servers. c. Printers. d. Gateways. e. Routers. f. Protocol analyzers. g. DDC controllers. h. Enclosures. i. Electrical power devices. j. UPS units. k. Accessories. l. Instruments. m. Control dampers and actuators. n. Control valves and actuators.

6. When manufacturer's product datasheets apply to a product series rather than a specific product model, clearly indicate and highlight only applicable information.

7. Each submitted piece of product literature shall clearly cross reference specification and drawings that submittal is to cover.

B. Software Submittal:




1. Cross-referenced listing of software to be loaded on each operator workstation, server, gateway, and DDC controller.

2. Description and technical data of all software provided, and cross-referenced to products in which software will be installed.

3. Operating system software, operator interface and programming software, color graphic software, DDC controller software, maintenance management software, and third-party software.

4. Include a flow diagram and an outline of each subroutine that indicates each program variable name and units of measure.

5. Listing and description of each engineering equation used with reference source. 6. Listing and description of each constant used in engineering equations and a reference

source to prove origin of each constant. 7. Description of operator interface to alphanumeric and graphic programming. 8. Description of each network communication protocol. 9. Description of system database, including all data included in database, database capacity

and limitations to expand database. 10. Description of each application program and device drivers to be generated, including

specific information on data acquisition and control strategies showing their relationship to system timing, speed, processing burden and system throughout.

11. Controlled Systems: Instrumentation list with element name, type of device, manufacturer, model number, and product data. Include written description of sequence of operation including schematic diagram.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details where applicable. 2. Include details of product assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

3. Detail means of vibration isolation and show attachments to rotating equipment. 4. Plan Drawings indicating the following:

a. Screened backgrounds of walls, structural grid lines, HVAC equipment, ductwork and piping.

b. Room names and numbers with coordinated placement to avoid interference with control products indicated.

c. Each desktop operator workstation, server, gateway, router, DDC controller, control panel instrument connecting to DDC controller, and damper and valve connecting to DDC controller, if included in Project.

d. Exact placement of products in rooms, ducts, and piping to reflect proposed installed condition.

e. Network communication cable and raceway routing. f. Proposed routing of wiring, cabling, conduit, and tubing, coordinated with building

services for review before installation.

5. Schematic drawings for each controlled HVAC system indicating the following:

a. I/O points labeled with point names shown. Indicate instrument range, normal operating set points, and alarm set points. Indicate fail position of each damper and valve, if included in Project.




b. I/O listed in table format showing point name, type of device, manufacturer, model number, and cross-reference to product data sheet number.

c. A graphic showing location of control I/O in proper relationship to HVAC system. d. Wiring diagram with each I/O point having a unique identification and indicating

labels for all wiring terminals. e. Unique identification of each I/O that shall be consistently used between different

drawings showing same point. f. Elementary wiring diagrams of controls for HVAC equipment motor circuits

including interlocks, switches, relays and interface to DDC controllers. g. Narrative sequence of operation. h. Graphic sequence of operation, showing all inputs and output logical blocks.

6. Control panel drawings indicating the following:

a. Panel dimensions, materials, size, and location of field cable, raceways, and tubing connections.

b. Interior subpanel layout, drawn to scale and showing all internal components, cabling and wiring raceways, nameplates and allocated spare space.

c. Front, rear, and side elevations and nameplate legend. d. Unique drawing for each panel.

7. DDC system network riser diagram indicating the following:

a. Each device connected to network with unique identification for each. b. Interconnection of each different network in DDC system. c. For each network, indicate communication protocol, speed and physical means of

interconnecting network devices, such as copper cable type, or fiber-optic cable type. Indicate raceway type and size for each.

d. Each network port for connection of an operator workstation or other type of operator interface with unique identification for each.

8. DDC system electrical power riser diagram indicating the following:

a. Each point of connection to field power with requirements (volts/phase//hertz/amperes/connection type) listed for each.

b. Each control power supply including, as applicable, transformers, power-line conditioners, transient voltage suppression and high filter noise units, DC power supplies, and UPS units with unique identification for each.

c. Each product requiring power with requirements (volts/phase//hertz/amperes/connection type) listed for each.

d. Power wiring type and size, race type, and size for each.

9. Monitoring and control signal diagrams indicating the following:

a. Control signal cable and wiring between controllers and I/O. b. Point-to-point schematic wiring diagrams for each product. c. Control signal tubing to sensors, switches and transmitters. d. Process signal tubing to sensors, switches and transmitters.

10. Color graphics indicating the following:




a. Itemized list of color graphic displays to be provided. b. For each display screen to be provided, a true color copy showing layout of

pictures, graphics and data displayed. c. Intended operator access between related hierarchical display screens.

D. System Description:

1. Full description of DDC system architecture, network configuration, operator interfaces and peripherals, servers, controller types and applications, gateways, routers and other network devices, and power supplies.

2. Complete listing and description of each report, log and trend for format and timing and events which initiate generation.

3. System and product operation under each potential failure condition including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Loss of power. b. Loss of network communication signal. c. Loss of controller signals to inputs and outpoints. d. Operator workstation failure. e. Gateway failure. f. Network failure g. Controller failure. h. Instrument failure. i. Control damper and valve actuator failure. j. .

4. Complete bibliography of documentation and media to be delivered to Owner. 5. Description of testing plans and procedures. 6. Description of Owner training.

E. Samples:

1. For each exposed product, installed in finished space for approval of selection of aesthetic characteristics.

F. Delegated-Design Submittal: For DDC system products and installation indicated as being delegated.

1. Supporting documentation showing DDC system design complies with performance requirements indicated, including calculations and other documentation necessary to prove compliance.

2. Schedule and design calculations for control dampers and actuators. a. Torque required at worst case condition for sizing actuator. b. Actuator selection indicating torque provided. c. Actuator signal to control damper (on, close or modulate). d. Actuator position on loss of power. e. Actuator position on loss of control signal.

3. Schedule and design calculations for control valves and actuators.

a. Flow at Project design and minimum flow conditions.




b. Pressure-differential drop across valve at Project design flow condition. c. Maximum system pressure-differential drop (pump close-off pressure) across valve

at Project minimum flow condition. d. Design and minimum control valve coefficient with corresponding valve position. e. Maximum close-off pressure. f. Leakage flow at maximum system pressure differential. g. Torque required at worst case condition for sizing actuator. h. Actuator selection indicating torque provided. i. Actuator signal to control damper (on, close or modulate). j. Actuator position on loss of power. k. Actuator position on loss of control signal.

4. Schedule and design calculations for selecting flow instruments.

a. Instrument flow range. b. Project design and minimum flow conditions with corresponding accuracy, control

signal to transmitter and output signal for remote control. c. Extreme points of extended flow range with corresponding accuracy, control signal

to transmitter and output signal for remote control. d. Pressure-differential loss across instrument at Project design flow conditions. e. Where flow sensors are mated with pressure transmitters, provide information for

each instrument separately and as an operating pair.


A. Coordination Drawings: Plan drawings, reflected ceiling plan(s), and other details, drawn to scale and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved.

B. Qualification Data:

1. Systems Provider Qualification Data:

a. Resume of project manager assigned to Project. b. Resumes of application engineering staff assigned to Project. c. Resumes of installation and programming technicians assigned to Project. d. Resumes of service technicians assigned to Project. e. Brief description of past project including physical address, floor area, number of

floors, building system cooling and heating capacity and building's primary function.

f. Description of past project DDC system, noting similarities to Project scope and complexity indicated.

g. Names of staff assigned to past project that will also be assigned to execute work of this Project.

h. Owner contact information for past project including name, phone number, and e-mail address.

i. Contractor contact information for past project including name, phone number, and e-mail address.

2. Manufacturer's qualification data. 3. Testing agency's qualifications data.




C. Product Certificates:

1. Data Communications Protocol Certificates: Certifying that each proposed DDC system component complies with ASHRAE 135.

D. Preconstruction Test Reports: For each separate test performed.

E. Source quality-control reports.

F. Field quality-control reports.

G. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For DDC system to include in emergency, operation and maintenance manuals.

1. Include the following:

a. Project Record Drawings of as-built versions of submittal Shop Drawings provided in electronic PDF format.

b. Testing and commissioning reports and checklists of completed final versions of reports, checklists, and trend logs.

c. As-built versions of submittal Product Data. d. Names, addresses, e-mail addresses and 24-hour telephone numbers of Installer

and service representatives for DDC system and products. e. Operator's manual with procedures for operating control systems including logging

on and off, handling alarms, producing point reports, trending data, overriding computer control and changing set points and variables.

f. Programming manuals with description of programming language and syntax, of statements for algorithms and calculations used, of point database creation and modification, of program creation and modification, and of editor use.

g. Engineering, installation, and maintenance manuals that explain how to:

1) Design and install new points, panels, and other hardware. 2) Perform preventive maintenance and calibration. 3) Debug hardware problems. 4) Repair or replace hardware.

h. Documentation of all programs created using custom programming language including set points, tuning parameters, and object database.

i. Backup copy of graphic files, programs, and database on electronic media such as DVDs.

j. List of recommended spare parts with part numbers and suppliers. k. Complete original-issue documentation, installation, and maintenance information

for furnished third-party hardware including computer equipment and sensors. l. Complete original-issue copies of furnished software, including operating systems,

custom programming language, operator workstation software, and graphics software.




m. Licenses, guarantees, and warranty documents. n. Recommended preventive maintenance procedures for system components,

including schedule of tasks such as inspection, cleaning, and calibration; time between tasks; and task descriptions.

o. Owner training materials.


A. Furnish extra materials and parts that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

B. Include product manufacturers' recommended parts lists for proper product operation over four-year period following warranty period. Parts list shall be indicated for each year.

C. Furnish parts, as indicated by manufacturer's recommended parts list, for product operation during one-year period following warranty period.


A. DDC System Provider Qualifications:

1. Authorized representative of, and trained by, DDC system manufacturer. 2. Demonstrated past experience with installation of DDC system products being installed

for period within five consecutive years before time of bid. 3. Each person assigned to Project shall have demonstrated past experience. 4. Staffing resources of competent and experienced full-time employees that are assigned to

execute work according to schedule. 5. Service and maintenance staff assigned to support Project during warranty period. 6. DDC system manufacturer's backing to take over execution of Work if necessary to

comply with requirements indicated. Include Project-specific written letter, signed by manufacturer's corporate officer, if requested.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum." 3. AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." 4. AWS D1.4/D1.4M, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel."

D. Pipe and Pressure-Vessel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.




1.8 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace products that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures shall be adjusted, repaired, or replaced at no additional cost or reduction in service to Owner.

2. Include updates or upgrades to software and firmware if necessary to resolve deficiencies.

a. Install updates only after receiving Owner's written authorization.

3. Warranty service shall occur during normal business hours and commence within 24 hours of Owner's warranty service request.

4. Warranty Period: Two year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

1. Siemens Building Technologies, Inc.

2.2 CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES

A. Contractor may elect to allow DDC controls system work items beyond mechanical rooms including cabling, space temperature sensors, and connections to VAV box and fan coil unit controllers to be performed by a qualified electrical contractor. Contractor is solely responsible for the coordination of these efforts between the electrical contractor and HVAC controls contractor to achieve a complete and functioning DDC controls system.

B. Construction activities associate with the controls portion of this project as stated in the preceding paragraph of electrical contractor include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Provide quality-assurance and quality-control services specified in Section 011000. 2. Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate tests and inspections, and coordi-

nate schedule of tests and inspections. 3. Provide information necessary to adjust, move, or relocate work shown on the Con-

tract Drawings as a result of concealed existing conditions. 4. Provide protection of the Work. 5. Perform firestopping of penetrations made through fire-rated walls.

C. Construction activities of HVAC Controls Contractor include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Coordinate the Siemens products Bill of Material for the intent and operational

requirements of the project for installation by the electrical contractor.






2. Coordinate and supervise quality assurance testing of the network cabling to ensure complete and proper communications of the operating controls network.

3. Provide the controls network graphic screen programming and content for VAV boxes and fan-coil units.

2.3 DDC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Microprocessor-based monitoring and control including analog/digital conversion and program logic. A control loop or subsystem in which digital and analog information is received and processed by a microprocessor, and digital control signals are generated based on control algorithms and transmitted to field devices to achieve a set of predefined conditions.

1. DDC system shall consist of a high-speed, peer-to-peer network of distributed DDC controllers, other network devices, operator interfaces, and software.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional to design DDC system to satisfy requirements indicated.

1. System Performance Objectives:

a. DDC system shall manage HVAC systems. b. DDC system control shall operate HVAC systems to achieve optimum operating

costs while using least possible energy and maintaining specified performance. c. DDC system shall respond to power failures, HVAC equipment failures, and

adverse and emergency conditions encountered through connected I/O points. d. DDC system shall operate while unattended by an operator and through operator

interaction. e. DDC system shall record trends and transaction of events and produce report

information such as performance, energy, occupancies, and equipment operation.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Products installed in ducts, equipment, and return-air paths shall comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.

C. Network Bandwidth: Design each network of DDC system to include at least 20 percent available spare bandwidth with DDC system operating under normal and heavy load conditions indicated. Calculate bandwidth usage, and apply a safety factor to ensure that requirement is satisfied when subjected to testing under worst case conditions.

D. Future Expandability:




1. DDC system size shall be expandable to an ultimate capacity of at least two times total I/O points indicated.

2. Additional DDC controllers, I/O and associated wiring shall be all that is needed to achieve ultimate capacity. Initial network infrastructure shall be designed and installed to support ultimate capacity.

3. Operator interfaces installed initially shall not require hardware and software additions and revisions for ultimate capacity.

E. Input Point Displayed Accuracy: Input point displayed values shall meet following end-to-end overall system accuracy, including errors associated with meter, sensor, transmitter, lead wire or cable, and analog to digital conversion.

1. Flow:

a. Air: Within 5 percent of design flow rate. b. Air (Terminal Units): Within 10 percent of design flow rate. c. Water: Within 2 percent of design flow rate.

2. Moisture (Relative Humidity):

a. Air: Within 5 percent RH. b. Space: Within 5 percent RH. c. Outdoor: Within 2 percent RH.

3. Pressure:

a. Air, Ducts and Equipment: 1 percent of instrument range. b. Space: Within 1 percent of instrument range span. c. Water: Within 1 percent of instrument range.

4. Speed: Within 10 percent of reading.

5. Temperature, Dew Point:

a. Outdoor: Within 1 deg F Insert value.

6. Temperature, Dry Bulb:

a. Air: Within 1 deg F. b. Space: Within 1 deg F. c. Outdoor: Within 1 deg F. d. Chilled Water: Within 1 deg F. e. Condenser Water: Within 1 deg F. f. Heating Hot Water: Within 1 deg F. g. Temperature Difference: Within 0.25 deg F.

7. Temperature, Wet Bulb:

a. Air: Within 1 deg F. b. Space: Within 1 deg F. c. Outdoor: Within 1 deg F.




F. Precision of I/O Reported Values: Values reported in database and displayed shall have following precision:

1. Current:

a. Milliamperes: Nearest 1/100th of a milliampere. b. Amperes: Nearest 1/10th of an ampere up to 100 A; nearest ampere for 100 A and

more.

2. Flow: a. Water: Nearest 1/10th gpm through 100 gpm; nearest gpm between 100 and

1000 gpm; nearest 10 gpm between 1000 and 10,000 gpm; nearest 100 gpm above 10,000 gpm.


a. Relative Humidity (Percentage): Nearest 1 percent.

4. Level: Nearest 1/100th of an inch through 10 inches, nearest 1/10 of an inch between 10 and 100 inches, nearest inch above 100 inches.

5. Speed:

a. Rotation (rpm): Nearest 1 rpm. b. Velocity: Nearest 1/10th fpm through 100 fpm; nearest fpm between 100 and

1000 fpm; nearest 10 fpm above 1000 fpm.

6. Position, Dampers and Valves (Percentage Open): Nearest 1 percent. 7. Pressure:

a. Air, Ducts and Equipment: Nearest 1/10th in. w.c.. b. Space: Nearest 1/100th in. w.c. c. Steam: Nearest 1/10th psig through 100 psig, nearest psig above 100 psig. d. Water: Nearest 1/10 psig through 100 psig, nearest psig above 100 psig.

8. Temperature:

a. Air, Ducts and Equipment: Nearest 1/10th of a degree. b. Outdoor: Nearest degree. c. Space: Nearest 1/10th of a degree. d. Chilled Water: Nearest 1/10th of a degree. e. Condenser Water: Nearest 1/10th of a degree. f. Heating Hot Water: Nearest degree. g. Heat Recovery Runaround: Nearest 1/10th of a degree. h. Steam: Nearest degree.

9. Vibration: Nearest 1/10th in/s. 10. Voltage: Nearest 1/10 volt up to 100 V; nearest volt above 100 V.

G. Control Stability: Control variables indicated within the following limits:

1. Flow:




a. Air, Ducts and Equipment, except Terminal Units: Within 5 percent of design flow rate.

b. Air, Terminal Units: Within 10 percent of design flow rate. c. Water: Within 2 percent of design flow rate.


a. Space: Within 2 percent RH. b. Outdoor: Within 2 percent RH.

3. Level: Within 5 percent of reading.

4. Pressure:

a. Air, Ducts and Equipment: 1 percent of instrument range. b. Water: Within 1 percent of instrument range.

5. Temperature, Dry Bulb:

a. Air: Within 1 deg F. b. Space: Within 1 deg F. c. Chilled Water: Within 1 deg F. d. Heating Hot Water: Within 2 deg F.

6. Temperature, Wet Bulb:

a. Air: Within 1 deg F. b. Space: Within 1 deg F.

H. Environmental Conditions for Controllers, Gateways, and Routers:

1. Products shall operate without performance degradation under ambient environmental temperature, pressure and humidity conditions encountered for installed location.

a. If product alone cannot comply with requirement, install product in a protective enclosure that is isolated and protected from conditions impacting performance. Enclosure shall be internally insulated, electrically heated, cooled and ventilated as required by product and application.

I. Environmental Conditions for Instruments and Actuators:

1. Instruments and actuators shall operate without performance degradation under the ambient environmental temperature, pressure, humidity, and vibration conditions specified and encountered for installed location.

a. If instruments and actuators alone cannot comply with requirement, install instruments and actuators in protective enclosures that are isolated and protected from conditions impacting performance. Retain "Electric Power Quality" Paragraph below for applications requiring additional protection.

J. Continuity of Operation after Electric Power Interruption:




1. Equipment and associated factory-installed controls, field-installed controls, electrical equipment, and power supply connected to building normal and backup power systems shall automatically return equipment and associated controls to operating state occurring immediately before loss of normal power, without need for manual intervention by operator when power is restored either through backup power source or through normal power if restored before backup power is brought online.

2.5 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE

A. System architecture shall consist of no more than two levels of LANs.

1. Level one LAN shall connect network controllers and operator workstations. 2. Level one LAN shall connect programmable application controllers to other

programmable application controllers, and to network controllers. 3. Level two LAN shall connect application-specific controllers to programmable

application controllers and network controllers. 4. Level two LAN shall connect application-specific controllers to application-specific

controllers.

B. DDC system shall consist of dedicated LANs that are not shared with other building systems and tenant data and communication networks.

C. System architecture shall be modular and have inherent ability to expand to not less than two times system size indicated with no impact to performance indicated.

D. System architecture shall perform modifications without having to remove and replace existing network equipment.

E. Number of LANs and associated communication shall be transparent to operator. All I/O points residing on any LAN shall be capable of global sharing between all system LANs.

F. System design shall eliminate dependence on any single device for system alarm reporting and control execution. Each controller shall operate independently by performing its' own control, alarm management and historical data collection.

G. Special Network Architecture Requirements:

1. Air-Handling Systems: For control applications of an air-handling system that consists of air-handling unit(s) and VAV terminal units, include a dedicated LAN of application-specific controllers serving VAV terminal units connected directly to controller that is controlling air-handling system air-handling unit(s). Basically, create a DDC system LAN that aligns with air-handling system being controlled.

2.6 DDC SYSTEM OPERATOR INTERFACES

A. Operator Means of System Access: Operator shall be able to access entire DDC system through any of multiple means, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Desktop and portable operator workstation with hardwired connection through LAN port.




2. Portable operator terminal with hardwired connection through LAN port. 3. Portable operator workstation with wireless connection through LAN router. 4. Remote connection using outside of system personal computer or PDA through Web

access. 5. Remote connection using portable operator workstation and telephone dial-up modem.

B. Access to system, regardless of operator means used, shall be transparent to operator.

C. Network Ports: For hardwired connection of desktop or portable operator workstation. Network port shall be easily accessible, properly protected, clearly labeled, and installed at the following locations:

1. Each mechanical equipment room. 2. Each boiler room. 3. Each chiller room. 4. Each air-handling unit room.

D. Desktop Workstations:

1. Connect to DDC system Level one LAN through a communications port directly on LAN or through a communications port on a DDC controller.

2. Able to communicate with any device located on any DDC system LAN. 3. Able to communicate, with modems, remotely with any device connected to any DDC

system LAN. 4. Communication via a modem shall not interfere with LAN activity and LAN activity

shall not prevent workstation from handling incoming calls.

E. Portable Workstations:

1. Connect to DDC system Level one LAN through a communications port directly on LAN or through a communications port on a DDC controller.

2. Able to communicate with any device located on any DDC system LAN. 3. Connect to DDC system LAN through a communications port on an application-specific

controller, or a room temperature sensor connected to an application-specific controller. 4. Connect to system through a wireless router connected to Level one LAN. 5. Portable workstation shall be able to communicate with any device connected to any

system LAN regardless of point of physical connection to system. 6. Monitor, program, schedule, adjust set points, and report capabilities of I/O connected

anywhere in system. 7. Have dynamic graphic displays that are identical to desktop workstations.

F. Critical Alarm Reporting:

1. Operator-selected critical alarms shall be sent by DDC system to notify operator of critical alarms that require immediate attention.

2. DDC system shall send alarm notification to multiple recipients that are assigned for each alarm.

3. DDC system shall notify recipients by any or all means, including e-mail, text message, and prerecorded phone message to mobile and landline phone numbers.




2.7 NETWORKS

A. Acceptable networks for connecting operator workstations and network controllers include the following:

1. ATA 878.1, ARCNET. 2. IP. 3. IEEE 8802-3, Ethernet.

B. Acceptable networks for connecting programmable application controllers include the following:

1. ATA 878.1, ARCNET. 2. IP. 3. IEEE 8802-3, Ethernet.

C. Acceptable networks for connecting application-specific controllers include the following:

1. ATA 878.1, ARCNET. 2. EIA-485A. 3. IP. 4. IEEE 8802-3, Ethernet.

2.8 NETWORK COMMUNICATION PROTCOL

A. Network communication protocol(s) used throughout entire DDC system shall be open to public and available to other companies for use in making future modifications to DDC system.

B. ASHRAE 135 Protocol:

1. ASHRAE 135 communication protocol shall be sole and native protocol used throughout entire DDC system.

2. DDC system shall not require use of gateways except to integrate HVAC equipment and other building systems and equipment, not required to use ASHRAE 135 communication protocol.

3. If used, gateways shall connect to DDC system using ASHRAE 135 communication protocol and Project object properties and read/write services indicated by interoperability schedule.

4. Operator workstations, controllers and other network devices shall be tested and listed by BACnet Testing Laboratories.

2.9 DESKTOP OPERATOR WORKSTATIONS

A. Performance Requirements:

1. Performance requirements may dictate equipment exceeding minimum requirements indicated.

2. Energy Star compliant.




A. Operator Workstation: PC-based microcomputer with minimum configuration as follows:

1. Motherboard: With 8 integrated USB 2.0 ports, integrated Intel Pro 10/100 (Ethernet), integrated audio, bios, and hardware monitoring.

2. Processor: Intel Core i5, 3.2 GHz. 3. Random-Access Memory: 8 GB. 4. Video Card: Intel HD integrated Graphics. 5. Monitor: 21” (530mm), LCD color. 6. Keyboard: QWERTY, 105 keys in ergonomic shape. 7. Floppy-Disk Drive: 1.44 MB. 8. Hard-Disk Drive: 1 TB. 9. CD-ROM Read/Write Drive: 48x24x48. 10. Mouse: Three button, optical. 11. Uninterruptible Power Supply: 2 kVa. 12. Operating System: Microsoft Windows 8 with high-speed Internet access. 13. Printer: Color, laser-jet type as follows:

a. Print Head: 600x2400 dpi optimized color resolution. b. Paper Handling: Minimum of 250 sheets. c. Print Speed: Minimum of 19 ppm in black and in color. d. Application Software.

B. Speakers:

1. Two, with individual controls for volume, bass and treble. 2. Signal to Noise Ratio: At least 65 dB. 3. Power: At least 4 W per speaker/channel. 4. Magnetic shielding to prevent distortion on the video monitor.

C. I/O Cabling: Include applicable cabling to connect I/O devices.

2.10 SYSTEM SOFTWARE

A. System Software Minimum Requirements:

1. Real-time multitasking and multiuser 64-bit operating system that allows concurrent multiple operator workstations operating and concurrent execution of multiple real-time programs and custom program development.

2. Operating system shall be capable of operating DOS and Microsoft Windows applications.

3. Database management software shall manage all data on an integrated and non-redundant basis. Additions and deletions to database shall be without detriment to existing data. Include cross linkages so no data required by a program can be deleted by an operator until that data have been deleted from respective programs.

4. Network communications software shall manage and control multiple-network communications to provide exchange of global information and execution of global programs.

5. Operator interface software shall include day-to-day operator transaction processing, alarm and report handling, operator privilege level and data segregation control, custom programming, and online data modification capability.




6. Scheduling software shall schedule centrally based time and event, temporary, and exception day programs.

B. Operator Interface Software:

1. Minimize operator training through use of English language prorating and English language point identification.

2. Minimize use of a typewriter-style keyboard through use of a pointing device similar to a mouse.

3. Operator sign-off shall be a manual operation or, if no keyboard or mouse activity takes place, an automatic sign-off.

4. Automatic sign-off period shall be programmable from one to 60 minutes in one-minute increments on a per operator basis.

5. Operator sign-on and sign-off activity shall be recorded and sent to printer. 6. Security Access:

a. Operator access to DDC system shall be under password control. b. An alphanumeric password shall be field assignable to each operator. c. Operators shall be able to access DDC system by entry of proper password. d. Operator password shall be same regardless of which computer or other interface

means is used. e. Additions or changes made to passwords shall be updated automatically. f. Each operator shall be assigned an access level to restrict access to data and

functions the operator is cable of performing. g. Software shall have at least five access levels. h. Each menu item shall be assigned an access level so that a one-for-one

correspondence between operator assigned access level(s) and menu item access level(s) is required to gain access to menu item.

i. Display menu items to operator with those capable of access highlighted. Menu and operator access level assignments shall be online programmable and under password control.

7. Operators shall be able to perform commands including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Start or stop selected equipment. b. Adjust set points. c. Add, modify, and delete time programming. d. Enable and disable process execution. e. Lock and unlock alarm reporting for each point. f. Enable and disable totalization for each point. g. Enable and disable trending for each point. h. Override control loop set points. i. Enter temporary override schedules. j. Define holiday schedules. k. Change time and date. l. Enter and modify analog alarm limits. m. Enter and modify analog warning limits. n. View limits. o. Enable and disable demand limiting. p. Enable and disable duty cycle. q. Display logic programming for each control sequence.




8. Reporting:

a. Generated automatically and manually. b. Sent to displays, printers and disk files. c. Types of Reporting:

1) General listing of points. 2) List points currently in alarm. 3) List of off-line points. 4) List points currently in override status. 5) List of disabled points. 6) List points currently locked out. 7) List of items defined in a "Follow-Up" file. 8) List weekly schedules. 9) List holiday programming. 10) List of limits and deadbands.

9. Summaries: For specific points, for a logical point group, for an operator selected group(s), or for entire system without restriction due to hardware configuration.

C. Graphic Interface Software:

1. Include a full interactive graphical selection means of accessing and displaying system data to operator. Include at least five levels with the penetration path operator assignable (for example, site, building, floor, air-handling unit, and supply temperature loop). Native language descriptors assigned to menu items are to be operator defined and modifiable under password control.

2. Include a hierarchical-linked dynamic graphic operator interface for accessing and displaying system data and commanding and modifying equipment operation. Interface shall use a pointing device with pull-down or penetrating menus, color and animation to facilitate operator understanding of system.

3. Include at least 10 levels of graphic penetration with the hierarchy operator assignable. 4. Descriptors for graphics, points, alarms and such shall be modified through operator's

workstation under password control. 5. Graphic displays shall be online user definable and modifiable using the hardware and

software provided. 6. Data to be displayed within a graphic shall be assignable regardless of physical hardware

address, communication or point type. 7. Graphics are to be online programmable and under password control. 8. Points may be assignable to multiple graphics where necessary to facilitate operator

understanding of system operation. 9. Graphics shall also contain software points. 10. Penetration within a graphic hierarchy shall display each graphic name as graphics are

selected to facilitate operator understanding. 11. Back-trace feature shall permit operator to move upward in the hierarchy using a pointing

device. Back trace shall show all previous penetration levels. Include operator with option of showing each graphic full screen size with back trace as horizontal header or by showing a "stack" of graphics, each with a back trace.

12. Display operator accessed data on the monitor.




13. Operator shall select further penetration using pointing device to click on a site, building, floor, area, equipment, and so on. Defined and linked graphic below that selection shall then be displayed.

14. Include operator with means to directly access graphics without going through penetration path.

15. Dynamic data shall be assignable to graphics. 16. Display points (physical and software) with dynamic data provided by DDC system with

appropriate text descriptors, status or value, and engineering unit. 17. Use color, rotation, or other highly visible means, to denote status and alarm states. Color

shall be variable for each class of points, as chosen by operator. 18. For operators with appropriate privilege, points shall be commanded directly from

display using pointing device.

a. For an analog command point such as set point, current conditions and limits shall be displayed and operator can position new set point using pointing device.

b. For a digital command point such as valve position, valve shall show its current state such as open or closed and operator could select alternative position using pointing device.

c. Keyboard equivalent shall be available for those operators with that preference.

19. Operator shall be able to split or resize viewing screen into quadrants to show one graphic on one quadrant of screen and other graphics or spreadsheet, bar chart, word processing, curve plot and other information on other quadrants on screen. This feature shall allow real-time monitoring of one part of system while displaying other parts of system or data to better facilitate overall system operation.

20. Help Features:

a. On-line context-sensitive help utility to facilitate operator training and understanding.

b. Bridge to further explanation of selected keywords. Document shall contain text and graphics to clarify system operation.

1) If help feature does not have ability to bridge on keywords for more information, a complete set of user manuals shall be provided in an indexed word-processing program, which shall run concurrently with operating system software.

c. Available for Every Menu Item:

1) Index items for each system menu item.

21. Graphic generation software shall allow operator to add, modify, or delete system graphic displays.

a. Include libraries of symbols depicting HVAC symbols such as fans, coils, filters, dampers, valves pumps, and electrical symbols.

b. Graphic development package shall use a pointing device in conjunction with a drawing program to allow operator to perform the following:

1) Define background screens. 2) Define connecting lines and curves.




3) Locate, orient and size descriptive text. 4) Define and display colors for all elements. 5) Establish correlation between symbols or text and associated system points

or other displays.

D. Project-Specific Graphics: Graphics documentation including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Site plan showing each building, and additional site elements, which are being controlled or monitored by DDC system.

2. Plan for each building floor, including interstitial floors, and each roof level of each building, showing the following:

a. Room layouts with room identification and name. b. Locations and identification of all monitored and controlled HVAC equipment and

other equipment being monitored and controlled by DDC system. c. Location and identification of each hardware point being controlled or monitored

by DDC system. d. .

3. Control schematic for each of following, including a graphic system schematic representation, similar to that indicated on Drawings, with point identification, set point and dynamic value indication, sequence of operation andcontrol logic diagram.

a. Chilled-water system. b. Condenser-water system. c. Heating hot-water system. d. Air-handling system and unit. e. Fan. f. Pump. g. Terminal unit.

4. Graphic display for each piece of equipment connected to DDC system through a data communications link. Include dynamic indication of all points associated with equipment.

5. DDC system network riser diagram that shows schematic layout for entire system including all networks and all controllers, gateways operator workstations and other network devices.

E. Customizing Software:

1. Software to modify and tailor DDC system to specific and unique requirements of equipment installed, to programs implemented and to staffing and operational practices planned.

2. As a minimum, include the following modification capability:

a. Operator assignment shall include designation of operator passwords, access levels, point segregation and auto sign-off.

b. Peripheral assignment capability shall include assignment of segregation groups and operators to consoles and printers, designation of backup workstations and printers, designation of workstation header points and enabling and disabling of print-out of operator changes.




c. System configuration and diagnostic capability shall include communications and peripheral port assignments, DDC controller assignments to network, DDC controller enable and disable, assignment of command trace to points and application programs and initiation of diagnostics.

d. System text addition and change capability shall include English or native language descriptors for points, segregation groups and access levels and action messages for alarms, run time and trouble condition.

e. Time and schedule change capability shall include time and date set, time and occupancy schedules, exception and holiday schedules and daylight savings time schedules.

f. Point related change capability shall include the following:

1) System and point enable and disable. 2) Run-time enable and disable. 3) Assignment of points to segregation groups, calibration tables, lockout, and

run time and to a fixed I/O value. 4) Assignment of alarm and warning limits.

g. Application program change capability shall include the following:

1) Enable and disable of software programs. 2) Programming changes. 3) Assignment of comfort limits, global points, time and event initiators, time

and event schedules and enable and disable time and event programs.

3. Software shall allow operator to add points, or groups of points, to DDC system and to link them to energy optimization and management programs. Additions and modifications shall be online programmable using operator workstation, downloaded to other network devices and entered into their databases. After verification of point additions and associated program operation, database shall be uploaded and recorded on hard drive and disk for archived record.

4. Include high-level language programming software capability for implementation of custom DDC programs. Software shall include a compiler, linker, and up- and down-load capability.

5. Include a library of DDC algorithms, intrinsic control operators, arithmetic, logic and relational operators for implementation of control sequences. Also include, as a minimum, the following:

a. Proportional control (P). b. Proportional plus integral (PI). c. Proportional plus integral plus derivative (PID). d. Adaptive and intelligent self-learning control.

1) Algorithm shall monitor loop response to output corrections and adjust loop response characteristics according to time constant changes imposed.

2) Algorithm shall operate in a continuous self-learning manner and shall retain in memory a stored record of system dynamics so that on system shut down and restart, learning process starts from where it left off.




6. Fully implemented intrinsic control operators including sequence, reversing, ratio, time delay, time of day, highest select AO, lowest select AO, analog controlled digital output, analog control AO, and digitally controlled AO.

7. Logic operators such as "And," "Or," "Not," and others that are part of a standard set available with a high-level language.

8. Arithmetic operators such as "Add," "Subtract," "Multiply," "Divide," and others that are part of a standard set available with a high-level language.

9. Relational operators such as "Equal To," "Not Equal To," "Less Than," "Greater Than," and others that are part of a standard set available with a high-level language.

F. Alarm Handling Software:

1. Include alarm handling software to report all alarm conditions monitored and transmitted through DDC controllers, gateways and other network devices.

2. Include first in, first out handling of alarms according to alarm priority ranking, with most critical alarms first, and with buffer storage in case of simultaneous and multiple alarms.

3. Alarm handling shall be active at all times to ensure that alarms are processed even if an operator is not currently signed on to DDC system.

4. Alarms display shall include the following:

a. Indication of alarm condition such as "Abnormal Off," "Hi Alarm," and "Low Alarm."

b. "Analog Value" or "Status" group and point identification with native language point descriptor such as "Space Temperature, Building 110, 2nd Floor, Room 212."

c. Discrete per point alarm action message, such as "Call Maintenance Dept. Ext-5561."

d. Include extended message capability to allow assignment and printing of extended action messages. Capability shall be operator programmable and assignable on a per point basis.

5. Alarms shall be directed to appropriate operator workstations, printers, and individual operators by privilege level and segregation assignments.

6. Send e-mail alarm messages to designated operators. 7. Send e-mail, page, text and voice messages to designated operators for critical alarms. 8. Alarms shall be categorized and processed by class.

a. Class 1:

1) Associated with fire, security and other extremely critical equipment monitoring functions; have alarm, trouble, return to normal, and acknowledge conditions printed and displayed.

2) Unacknowledged alarms to be placed in unacknowledged alarm buffer. 3) All conditions shall cause an audible sound and shall require individual

acknowledgment to silence audible sound.

b. Class 2:

1) Critical, but not life-safety related, and processed same as Class 1 alarms, except do not require individual acknowledgment.




2) Acknowledgement may be through a multiple alarm acknowledgment.

c. Class 3:

1) General alarms; printed, displayed and placed in unacknowledged alarm buffer queues.

2) Each new alarm received shall cause an audible sound. Audible sound shall be silenced by "acknowledging" alarm or by pressing a "silence" key.

3) Acknowledgement of queued alarms shall be either on an individual basis or through a multiple alarm acknowledgement.

4) Alarms returning to normal condition shall be printed and not cause an audible sound or require acknowledgment.

d. Class 4:

1) Routine maintenance or other types of warning alarms. 2) Alarms to be printed only, with no display, no audible sound and no

acknowledgment required.

9. Include an unacknowledged alarm indicator on display to alert operator that there are unacknowledged alarms in system. Operator shall be able to acknowledge alarms on an individual basis or through a multiple alarm acknowledge key, depending on alarm class.

10. To ensure that no alarm records are lost, it shall be possible to assign a backup printer to accept alarms in case of failure of primary printer.

G. Reports and Logs:

1. Include reporting software package that allows operator to select, modify, or create reports using DDC system I/O point data available.

2. Each report shall be definable as to data content, format, interval and date. 3. Report data shall be sampled and stored on DDC controller, within storage limits of DDC

controller, and then uploaded to archive for historical reporting. 4. Operator shall be able to obtain real-time logs of all I/O points by type or status, such as

alarm, point lockout, or normal. 5. Reports and logs shall be stored on workstation and server hard drives in a format that is

readily accessible by other standard software applications, including spreadsheets and word processing.

6. Reports and logs shall be readily printed and set to be printed either on operator command or at a specific time each day.

H. Standard Reports: Standard DDC system reports shall be provided and operator shall be able to customize reports later.

1. All I/O: With current status and values. 2. Alarm: All current alarms, except those in alarm lockout. 3. Disabled I/O: All I/O points that are disabled. 4. Alarm Lockout I/O: All I/O points in alarm lockout, whether manual or automatic. 5. Alarm Lockout I/O in Alarm: All I/O in alarm lockout that are currently in alarm. 6. Logs:

a. Alarm history.




b. System messages. c. System events. d. Trends.

I. Custom Reports: Operator shall be able to easily define any system data into a daily, weekly, monthly, or annual report. Reports shall be time and date stamped and shall contain a report title.

J. Standard Trends:

1. Trend all I/O point present values, set points, and other parameters indicated for trending. 2. Trends shall be associated into groups, and a trend report shall be set up for each group. 3. Trends shall be stored within DDC controller and uploaded to hard drives automatically

on reaching 75 of DDC controller buffer limit, or by operator request, or by archiving time schedule.

4. Preset trend intervals for each I/O point after review with Owner. 5. Trend intervals shall be operator selectable from 10 seconds up to 60 minutes. Minimum

number of consecutive trend values stored at one time shall be 100 per variable. 6. When drive storage memory is full, most recent data shall overwrite oldest data. 7. Archived and real-time trend data shall be available for viewing numerically and

graphically by operators.

K. Custom Trends: Operator shall be able to define a custom trend log for any I/O point in DDC system.

1. Each trend shall include interval, start time, and stop time. 2. Data shall be sampled and stored on DDC controller, within storage limits of DDC

controller, and then uploaded to archive on workstation hard drives. 3. Data shall be retrievable for use in spreadsheets and standard database programs.

L. Programming Software:

1. Include programming software to execute sequences of operation indicated. 2. Include programming routines in simple and easy to follow logic with detailed text

comments describing what the logic does and how it corresponds to sequence of operation.

3. Programing software shall be as follows:

a. Graphic Based: Programming shall use a library of function blocks made from preprogrammed code designed for DDC control systems.

1) Function blocks shall be assembled with interconnection lines that represent to control sequence in a flowchart.

2) Programming tools shall be viewable in real time to show present values and logical results of each function block.

4. Include means for detecting programming errors and testing software control strategies with a simulation tool before implementing in actual control. Simulation tool may be inherent with programming software or as a separate product.

M. Database Management Software:




1. Where a separate database is used for information storage, DDC system shall include database management software that separates database monitoring and managing functions by supporting multiple separate windows.

2. Database secure access shall be accomplished using standard SQL authentication including ability to access data for use outside of DDC system applications.

3. Database management function shall include summarized information on trend, alarm, event, and audit for the following database management actions:

a. Backup. b. Purge. c. Restore.

4. Database management software shall support the following:

a. Statistics: Display database server information and trend, alarm, event, and audit information on database.

b. Maintenance: Include method of purging records from trend, alarm, event and audit databases by supporting separate screens for creating a backup before purging, selecting database, and allowing for retention of a selected number of day's data.

c. Backup: Include means to create a database backup file and select a storage location.

d. Restore: Include a restricted means of restoring a database by requiring operator to have proper security level.

5. Database management software shall include information of current database activity, including the following:

a. Ready. b. Purging record from a database. c. Action failed. d. Refreshing statistics. e. Restoring database. f. Shrinking a database. g. Backing up a database. h. Resetting Internet information services. i. Starting network device manager. j. Shutting down the network device manager. k. Action successful.

6. Database management software monitoring functions shall continuously read database information once operator has logged on.

7. Include operator notification through on-screen pop-up display and e-mail message when database value has exceeded a warning or alarm limit.

8. Monitoring settings window shall have the following sections:

a. Allow operator to set and review scan intervals and start times. b. E-mail: Allow operator to create and review e-mail and phone text messages to be

delivered when a warning or an alarm is generated. c. Warning: Allow operator to define warning limit parameters, set reminder

frequency and link e-mail message.




d. Alarm: Allow operator to define alarm limit parameters, set reminder frequency and link e-mail message.

e. Database Login: Protect system from unauthorized database manipulation by creating a read access and a write access for each of trend, alarm, event and audit databases as well as operator proper security access to restore a database.

9. Monitoring settings taskbar shall include the following informational icons:

a. Normal: Indicates by color and size, or other easily identifiable means that all databases are within their limits.

b. Warning: Indicates by color and size, or other easily identifiable means that one or more databases have exceeded their warning limit.

c. Alarm: Indicates by color and size, or other easily identifiable means that one or more databases have exceeded their alarm limit.

2.11 ASHRAE 135 GATEWAYS

A. Include BACnet communication ports, whenever available as an equipment OEM standard option, for integration via a single communication cable. BACnet-controlled plant equipment includes, but is not limited to, boilers, chillers, and variable-speed drives.

B. Include gateways to connect BACnet to legacy systems, existing non-BACnet devices, and existing non-BACnet DDC-controlled equipment, only when specifically requested and approved by Owner.

C. Include with each gateway an interoperability schedule showing each point or event on legacy side that BACnet "client" will read, and each parameter that BACnet network will write to. Describe this interoperability of BACnet services, or BIBBs, defined in ASHRAE 135, Annex K.

D. Gateway Minimum Requirements:

1. Read and view all readable object properties on non-BACnet network to BACnet network and vice versa where applicable.

2. Write to all writeable object properties on non-BACnet network from BACnet network and vice versa where applicable.

3. Include single-pass (only one protocol to BACnet without intermediary protocols) translation from non-BACnet protocol to BACnet and vice versa.

4. Comply with requirements of Data Sharing Read Property, Data Sharing Write Property, Device Management Dynamic Device Binding-B, and Device Management Communication Control BIBBs according to ASHRAE 135.

5. Hardware, software, software licenses, and configuration tools for operator-to-gateway communications.

6. Backup programming and parameters on CD media and the ability to modify, download, backup, and restore gateway configuration.




2.12 DDC CONTROLLERS

A. DDC system shall consist of a combination of network controllers, programmable application controllers and application-specific controllers to satisfy performance requirements indicated.

B. DDC controllers shall perform monitoring, control, energy optimization and other requirements indicated.

C. DDC controllers shall use a multitasking, multiuser, real-time digital control microprocessor with a distributed network database and intelligence.

D. Each DDC controller shall be capable of full and complete operation as a completely independent unit and as a part of a DDC system wide distributed network.

E. Environment Requirements:

1. Controller hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions. 2. Controllers located in conditioned space shall be rated for operation at 32 to 120 deg F. 3. Controllers located outdoors shall be rated for operation at 40 to 150 deg F.

F. Power and Noise Immunity:

1. Controller shall operate at 90 to 110 percent of nominal voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shutdown below 80 percent of nominal voltage.

2. Operation shall be protected against electrical noise of 5 to 120 Hz and from keyed radios with up to 5 W of power located within36 inches of enclosure.

G. DDC Controller Spare Processing Capacity:

1. Include spare processing memory for each controller. RAM, PROM, or EEPROM will implement requirements indicated with the following spare memory:

a. Network Controllers: 50 percent. b. Programmable Application Controllers: Not less than 60 percent. c. Application-Specific Controllers: Not less than 70 percent.

2. Memory shall support DDC controller's operating system and database and shall include the following:

a. Monitoring and control. b. Energy management, operation and optimization applications. c. Alarm management. d. Historical trend data of all connected I/O points. e. Maintenance applications. f. Operator interfaces. g. Monitoring of manual overrides.

H. DDC Controller Spare I/O Point Capacity: Include spare I/O point capacity for each controller as follows:

1. Network Controllers:




a. 10 percent of each AI, AO, BI, and BO point connected to controller. b. Minimum Spare I/O Points per Controller:

1) AIs: Two. 2) AOs: Two. 3) BIs: Three. 4) BOs: Three.

2. Programmable Application Controllers:


1) AIs: Two. 2) AOs: Two. 3) BIs: Three. 4) BOs: Three.

3. Application-Specific Controllers:


1) AIs: One. 2) AOs: One. 3) BIs: One. 4) BOs: One.

I. Maintenance and Support: Include the following features to facilitate maintenance and support:

1. Mount microprocessor components on circuit cards for ease of removal and replacement. 2. Means to quickly and easily disconnect controller from network. 3. Means to quickly and easily access connect to field test equipment. 4. Visual indication that controller electric power is on, of communication fault or trouble,

and that controller is receiving and sending signals to network.

J. Input and Output Point Interface:

1. Hardwired input and output points shall connect to network, programmable application and application-specific controllers.

2. Input and output points shall be protected so shorting of point to itself, to another point, or to ground will not damage controller.

3. Input and output points shall be protected from voltage up to 24 V of any duration so that contact will not damage controller.

4. AIs:

a. AIs shall include monitoring of low-voltage (zero- to 10-V dc), current (4 to 20 mA) and resistance signals from thermistor and RTD sensors.

b. AIs shall be compatible with, and field configurable to, sensor and transmitters installed.




c. Controller AIs shall perform analog-to-digital (A-to-D) conversion with a minimum resolution of 8 bits or better to comply with accuracy requirements indicated.

d. Signal conditioning including transient rejection shall be provided for each AI. e. Capable of being individually calibrated for zero and span. f. Incorporate common-mode noise rejection of at least 50 dB from zero to 100 Hz

for differential inputs, and normal-mode noise rejection of at least 20 dB at 60 Hz from a source impedance of 10000 ohms.

5. AOs:

a. Controller AOs shall perform analog-to-digital (A-to-D) conversion with a minimum resolution of 8 bits or better to comply with accuracy requirements indicated.

b. Output signals shall have a range of 4 to 20 mA dc or zero- to 10-V dc as required to include proper control of output device.

c. Capable of being individually calibrated for zero and span. d. AOs shall not exhibit a drift of greater than 0.4 percent of range per year.

6. BIs:

a. Controller BIs shall accept contact closures and shall ignore transients of less than 5-ms duration.

b. Isolation and protection against an applied steady-state voltage of up to 180-V ac peak.

c. BIs shall include a wetting current of at least 12 mA to be compatible with commonly available control devices and shall be protected against effects of contact bounce and noise.

d. BIs shall sense "dry contact" closure without external power (other than that provided by the controller) being applied.

e. Pulse accumulation input points shall comply with all requirements of BIs and accept up to 10 pulses per second for pulse accumulation. Buffer shall be provided to totalize pulses. Pulse accumulator shall accept rates of at least 20 pulses per second. The totalized value shall be reset to zero on operator's command.

7. BOs:

a. Controller BOs shall include relay contact closures or triac outputs for momentary and maintained operation of output devices.

1) Relay contact closures shall have a minimum duration of 0.1 second. Relays shall include at least 180 V of isolation. Electromagnetic interference suppression shall be provided on all output lines to limit transients to non-damaging levels. Minimum contact rating shall be 1 A at 24-V ac.

2) Triac outputs shall include at least 180 V of isolation. Minimum contact rating shall be 1 A at 24-V ac.

b. BOs shall include for two-state operation or a pulsed low-voltage signal for pulse-width modulation control.

c. BOs shall be selectable for either normally open or normally closed operation.




d. Include tristate outputs (two coordinated BOs) for control of three-point floating-type electronic actuators without feedback.

e. Limit use of three-point floating devices to VAV terminal unit control applications,. Control algorithms shall operate actuator to one end of its stroke once every 24 hours for verification of operator tracking.

2.13 NETWORK CONTROLLERS

A. General Network Controller Requirements:

1. Include adequate number of controllers to achieve performance indicated. 2. System shall consist of one or more independent, standalone, microprocessor-based

network controllers to manage global strategies indicated. 3. Controller shall have enough memory to support its operating system, database, and

programming requirements. 4. Data shall be shared between networked controllers and other network devices. 5. Operating system of controller shall manage input and output communication signals to

allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual object information and allow for central monitoring and alarms.

6. Controllers that perform scheduling shall have a real-time clock. 7. Controller shall continually check status of its processor and memory circuits. If an

abnormal operation is detected, controller shall assume a predetermined failure mode and generate an alarm notification.

8. Controllers shall be fully programmable.

B. Communication:

1. Network controllers shall communicate with other devices on DDC system network. 2. Network controller also shall perform routing if connected to a network of programmable

application and application-specific controllers.

C. Operator Interface:

1. Controller shall be equipped with a service communications port for connection to a portable operator's workstation.

2. Local Keypad and Display:

a. Equip controller with local keypad and digital display for interrogating and editing data.

b. Use of keypad and display shall require security password.

D. Serviceability:

1. Controller shall be equipped with diagnostic LEDs or other form of local visual indication of power, communication, and processor.

2. Wiring and cable connections shall be made to field-removable, modular terminal strips or to a termination card connected by a ribbon cable.

3. Controller shall maintain BIOS and programming information in event of a power loss for at least 72 hours.




2.14 PROGRAMMABLE APPLICATION CONTROLLERS

A. General Programmable Application Controller Requirements:

1. Include adequate number of controllers to achieve performance indicated. 2. Controller shall have enough memory to support its operating system, database, and

programming requirements. 3. Data shall be shared between networked controllers and other network devices. 4. Operating system of controller shall manage input and output communication signals to

allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual object information and allow for central monitoring and alarms.

5. Controllers that perform scheduling shall have a real-time clock. 6. Controller shall continually check status of its processor and memory circuits. If an

abnormal operation is detected, controller shall assume a predetermined failure mode and generate an alarm notification.

7. Controllers shall be fully programmable.

B. Communication:

1. Programmable application controllers shall communicate with other devices on network.

C. Operator Interface:

1. Controller shall be equipped with a service communications port for connection to a portable operator's workstation.

2. Local Keypad and Display:

a. Equip controller with local keypad and digital display for interrogating and editing data.

b. Use of keypad and display shall require security password.

D. Serviceability:



3. Controller shall maintain BIOS and programming information in event of a power loss for at least 72 hours.

2.15 APPLICATION-SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS

A. Description: Microprocessor-based controllers, which through hardware or firmware design are dedicated to control a specific piece of equipment. Controllers are not fully user-programmable but are configurable and customizable for operation of equipment they are designed to control.

1. Capable of standalone operation and shall continue to include control functions without being connected to network.

2. Data shall be shared between networked controllers and other network devices.




B. Communication: Application-specific controllers shall communicate with other application-specific controller and devices on network, and to programmable application and network controllers.

C. Operator Interface: Controller shall be equipped with a service communications port for connection to a portable operator's workstation. Connection shall extend to port on space temperature sensor that is connected to controller.

D. Serviceability:



3. Controller shall use nonvolatile memory and maintain all BIOS and programming information in event of power loss.

2.16 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE

A. General Controller Software Requirements:

1. Software applications shall reside and operate in controllers. Editing of applications shall occur at operator workstations.

2. I/O points shall be identified by up to 30-character point name and up to 16-character point descriptor. Same names shall be used at operator workstations.

3. Control functions shall be executed within controllers using DDC algorithms. 4. Controllers shall be configured to use stored default values to ensure fail-safe operation.

Default values shall be used when there is a failure of a connected input instrument or loss of communication of a global point value.

B. Security:

1. Operator access shall be secured using individual security passwords and user names. 2. Passwords shall restrict operator to points, applications, and system functions as assigned

by system manager. 3. Operator log-on and log-off attempts shall be recorded. 4. System shall protect itself from unauthorized use by automatically logging off after last

keystroke. The delay time shall be operator-definable.

C. Scheduling: Include capability to schedule each point or group of points in system. Each schedule shall consist of the following:

1. Weekly Schedule:

a. Include separate schedules for each day of week. b. Each schedule should include the capability for start, stop, optimal start, optimal

stop, and night economizer. c. Each schedule may consist of up to 10 events. d. When a group of objects are scheduled together, include capability to adjust start

and stop times for each member.




2. Exception Schedules:

a. Include ability for operator to designate any day of the year as an exception schedule.

b. Exception schedules may be defined up to a year in advance. Once an exception schedule is executed, it will be discarded and replaced by regular schedule for that day of week.

3. Holiday Schedules:

a. Include capability for operator to define up to 99 special or holiday schedules. b. Schedules may be placed on scheduling calendar and will be repeated each year. c. Operator shall be able to define length of each holiday period.

D. System Coordination:

1. Include standard application for proper coordination of equipment. 2. Application shall include operator with a method of grouping together equipment based

on function and location. 3. Group may then be used for scheduling and other applications.

E. Binary Alarms:

1. Each binary point shall be set to alarm based on operator-specified state. 2. Include capability to automatically and manually disable alarming.

F. Analog Alarms:

1. Each analog object shall have both high and low alarm limits. 2. Alarming shall be able to be automatically and manually disabled.

G. Alarm Reporting:

1. Operator shall be able to determine action to be taken in event of an alarm. 2. Alarms shall be routed to appropriate operator workstations based on time and other

conditions. 3. Alarm shall be able to start programs, print, be logged in event log, generate custom

messages, and display graphics.

H. Remote Communication:

1. System shall have ability to dial out in the event of an alarm.

I. Electric Power Demand Limiting:

1. Demand-limiting program shall monitor building or other operator-defined electric power consumption from signals connected to electric power meter or from a watt transducer or current transformer.

2. Demand-limiting program shall predict probable power demand such that action can be taken to prevent exceeding demand limit. When demand prediction exceeds demand limit, action will be taken to reduce loads in a predetermined manner. When demand




prediction indicates demand limit will not be exceeded, action will be taken to restore loads in a predetermined manner.

3. Demand reduction shall be accomplished by the following means:

a. Reset air-handling unit supply temperature set points. b. Reset space temperature set points. c. De-energize equipment based on priority.

4. Demand-limiting parameters, frequency of calculations, time intervals, and other relevant variables shall be based on the means by which electric power service provider computes demand charges.

5. Include demand-limiting prediction and control for any individual meter monitored by system or for total of any combination of meters.

6. Include means operator to make the following changes online:

a. Addition and deletion of loads controlled. b. Changes in demand intervals. c. Changes in demand limit for meter(s). d. Maximum shutoff time for equipment. e. Minimum shutoff time for equipment. f. Select rotational or sequential shedding and restoring. g. Shed and restore priority.

7. Include the following information and reports, to be available on an hourly, daily, weekly, monthly and annual basis:

a. Total electric consumption. b. Peak demand. c. Date and time of peak demand. d. Daily peak demand.

J. Maintenance Management: System shall monitor equipment status and generate maintenance messages based on operator-designated run-time, starts, and calendar date limits.

K. Sequencing: Include application software based on sequences of operation indicated to properly sequence chillers, boilers, and other applicable HVAC equipment.

L. Control Loops:

1. Support any of the following control loops, as applicable to control required:

a. Two-position (on/off, open/close, slow/fast) control. b. Proportional control. c. Proportional plus integral (PI) control. d. Proportional plus integral plus derivative (PID) control.

1) Include PID algorithms with direct or reverse action and anti-windup. 2) Algorithm shall calculate a time-varying analog value used to position an

output or stage a series of outputs. 3) Controlled variable, set point, and PID gains shall be operator-selectable.




e. Adaptive (automatic tuning).

M. Staggered Start: Application shall prevent all controlled equipment from simultaneously restarting after a power outage. Order which equipment (or groups of equipment) is started, along with the time delay between starts, shall be operator-selectable.

N. Energy Calculations:

1. Include software to allow instantaneous power or flow rates to be accumulated and converted to energy usage data.

2. Include an algorithm that calculates a sliding-window average (rolling average). Algorithm shall be flexible to allow window intervals to be operator specified (such as 15, 30, or 60 minutes).

3. Include an algorithm that calculates a fixed-window average. A digital input signal shall define start of window period (such as signal from utility meter) to synchronize fixed-window average with that used by utility.

O. Anti-Short Cycling:

1. BO points shall be protected from short cycling. 2. Feature shall allow minimum on-time and off-time to be selected.

P. On and Off Control with Differential:

1. Include an algorithm that allows a BO to be cycled based on a controlled variable and set point.

2. Algorithm shall be direct- or reverse-acting and incorporate an adjustable differential.

Q. Run-Time Totalization:

1. Include software to totalize run-times for all BI and BO points. 2. A high run-time alarm shall be assigned, if required, by operator.

2.17 ENCLOSURES

A. General Enclosure Requirements:

1. House each controller and associated control accessories in a single enclosure. Enclosure shall serve as central tie-in point for control devices such as switches, transmitters, transducers, power supplies and transformers.

2. Do not house more than one controller in a single enclosure. 3. Include enclosure door with key locking mechanism. Key locks alike for all enclosures

and include one pair of keys per enclosure. 4. Equip doors of enclosures housing controllers and components with analog or digital

displays with windows to allow visual observation of displays without opening enclosure door.

5. Include wall-mounted enclosures with brackets suitable for mounting enclosures to wall or freestanding support stand as indicated.




6. Supply each enclosure with a complete set of as-built schematics, tubing, and wiring diagrams and product literature located in a pocket on inside of door. For enclosures with windows, include pocket on bottom of enclosure.

B. Internal Arrangement:

1. Internal layout of enclosure shall group and protect pneumatic, electric, and electronic components associated with a controller, but not an integral part of controller.

2. Arrange layout to group similar products together. 3. Include a barrier between line-voltage and low-voltage electrical and electronic products. 4. Factory or shop install products, tubing, cabling and wiring complying with requirements

and standards indicated. 5. Terminate field cable and wire using heavy-duty terminal blocks. 6. Include spare terminals, equal to not less than 10 percent of used terminals. 7. Include spade lugs for stranded cable and wire. 8. Install a maximum of two wires on each side of a terminal. 9. Include enclosure field power supply with a toggle-type switch located at entrance inside

enclosure to disconnect power. 10. Include enclosure with a line-voltage nominal 20-A GFCI duplex receptacle for service

and testing tools. Wire receptacle on hot side of enclosure disconnect switch and include with a 5-A circuit breaker.

11. Mount products within enclosure on removable internal panel(s). 12. Include products mounted in enclosures with engraved, laminated phenolic nameplates

(black letters on a white background). The nameplates shall have at least 1/4-inch-high lettering.

13. Route tubing cable and wire located inside enclosure within a raceway with a continuous removable cover.

14. Label each end of cable, wire and tubing in enclosure following an approved identification system that extends from field I/O connection and all intermediate connections throughout length to controller connection.

15. Size enclosure internal panel to include at least 25 percent spare area on face of panel.

C. Environmental Requirements:

1. Evaluate temperature and humidity requirements of each product to be installed within each enclosure.

2. Calculate enclosure internal operating temperature considering heat dissipation of all products installed within enclosure and ambient effects (solar, conduction and wind) on enclosure.

3. Where required by application, include temperature-controlled electrical heat to maintain inside of enclosure above minimum operating temperature of product with most stringent requirement.

4. Where required by application, include temperature-controlled ventilation fans with filtered louver(s) to maintain inside of enclosure below maximum operating temperature of product with most stringent requirement.

5. Finish enclosure inside and out with polyester powder coating that is electrostatically applied and then baked to bond to substrate.

6. Hinged door full size of front face of enclosure and supported using:




a. Enclosures sizes less than 36 in. tall: Multiple butt hinges. b. Enclosures sizes 36 in. tall and larger: Continuous piano hinges.

7. Internal panel mounting hardware, grounding hardware and sealing washers. 8. Grounding stud on enclosure body. 9. Thermoplastic pocket on inside of door for record Drawings and Product Data.

2.18 RELAYS

A. General-Purpose Relays: 1. Relays shall be heavy duty and rated for at least 10 A at 250-V ac and 60 Hz. 2. Relays shall be either double pole double throw (DPDT) or three-pole double throw,

depending on the control application. 3. Use a plug-in-style relay with an eight-pin octal plug for DPDT relays and an 11-pin

octal plug for three-pole double-throw relays. 4. Construct the contacts of either silver cadmium oxide or gold. 5. Enclose the relay in a clear transparent polycarbonate dust-tight cover. 6. Relays shall have LED indication and a manual reset and push-to-test button. 7. Performance:

a. Mechanical Life: At least 10 million cycles. b. Electrical Life: At least 100,000 cycles at rated load. c. Pickup Time: 15 ms or less. d. Dropout Time: 10 ms or less. e. Pull-in Voltage: 85 percent of rated voltage. f. Dropout Voltage: 50 percent of nominal rated voltage. g. Power Consumption: 2 VA. h. Ambient Operating Temperatures: Minus 40 to 115 deg F.

8. Equip relays with coil transient suppression to limit transients to non-damaging levels. 9. Plug each relay into an industry-standard, 35-mm DIN rail socket. Plug all relays located

in control panels into sockets that are mounted on a DIN rail. 10. Relay socket shall have screw terminals. Mold into the socket the coincident screw

terminal numbers and associated octal pin numbers.

B. Multifunction Time-Delay Relays: 1. Relays shall be continuous duty and rated for at least 10 A at 240-V ac and 60 Hz. 2. Relays shall be DPDT relay with up to eight programmable functions to provide on/off

delay, interval and recycle timing functions. 3. Use a plug-in-style relay with either an 8- or 11-pin octal plug. 4. Construct the contacts of either silver cadmium oxide or gold. 5. Enclose the relay in a dust-tight cover. 6. Include knob and dial scale for setting delay time. 7. Performance:

a. Mechanical Life: At least 10 million cycles. b. Electrical Life: At least 100,000 cycles at rated load. c. Timing Ranges: Multiple ranges from 0.1 seconds to 100 minutes. d. Repeatability: Within 2 percent. e. Recycle Time: 45 ms.




f. Minimum Pulse Width Control: 50 ms. g. Power Consumption: 5 VA or less at 120-V ac. h. Ambient Operating Temperatures: Minus 40 to 115 deg F.




C. Latching Relays: 1. Relays shall be continuous duty and rated for at least 10 A at 250-V ac and 60 Hz. 2. Relays shall be either DPDT or three-pole double throw, depending on the control

application. 3. Use a plug-in-style relay with a multibladed plug. 4. Construct the contacts of either silver cadmium oxide or gold. 5. Enclose the relay in a clear transparent polycarbonate dust-tight cover. 6. Performance:

a. Mechanical Life: At least 10 million cycles. b. Electrical Life: At least 100,000 cycles at rated load. c. Pickup Time: 15 ms or less. d. Dropout Time: 10 ms or less. e. Pull-in Voltage: 85 percent of rated voltage. f. Dropout Voltage: 50 percent of nominal rated voltage. g. Power Consumption: 2 VA. h. Ambient Operating Temperatures: Minus 40 to 115 deg F.




D. Current Sensing Relay: 1. Monitors ac current. 2. Independent adjustable controls for pickup and dropout current. 3. Energized when supply voltage is present and current is above pickup setting. 4. De-energizes when monitored current is below dropout current. 5. Dropout current is adjustable from 50 to 95 percent of pickup current. 6. Include a current transformer, if required for application. 7. House current sensing relay and current transformer in its own enclosure. Use

NEMA 250, Type 12 enclosure for indoors and NEMA 250, Type 4 for outdoors.

E. Combination On-Off Status Sensor and On-Off Relay: 1. Description:

a. On-off control and status indication in a single device. b. LED status indication of activated relay and current trigger. c. Closed-Open-Auto override switch located on the load side of the relay.




2. Performance:

a. Ambient Temperature: Minus 30 to 140 deg F. b. Voltage Rating: Single-phase loads rated for 300-V ac. Three-phase loads rated for

600-V ac.

3. Status Indication:

a. Current Sensor: Integral sensing for single-phase loads up to 20 A and external solid or split sensing ring for three-phase loads up to 150 A.

b. Current Sensor Range: As required by application. c. Current Set Point: Fixed or adjustable as required by application. d. Current Sensor Output:

1) Solid-state, single-pole double-throw contact rated for 30-V ac and dc and for 0.4 A.

2) Solid-state, single-pole double-throw contact rated for 120-V ac and 1.0 A. 3) Analog, zero- to 5- or 10-V dc. 4) Analog, 4 to 20 mA, loop powered.

4. Relay: Single-pole double-throw, continuous-duty coil; rated for 10-million mechanical cycles.

5. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure.

2.19 ELECTRICAL POWER DEVICES

A. Transformers:

1. Transformer shall be sized for the total connected load, plus an additional 25 percent of connected load.

2. Transformer shall have both primary and secondary fuses.

B. DC Power Supply: 1. Plug-in style suitable for mating with a standard eight-pin octal socket. Include the power

supply with a mating mounting socket. 2. Enclose circuitry in a housing. 3. Include both line and load regulation to ensure a stable output. To protect both the power

supply and the load, power supply shall have an automatic current limiting circuit. 4. Performance:

a. Output voltage nominally 25-V dc within 5 percent. b. Output current up to 100 mA. c. Input voltage nominally 120-V ac, 60 Hz. d. Load regulation within 0.5 percent from zero- to 100-mA load. e. Line regulation within 0.5 percent at a 100-mA load for a 10 percent line change. f. Stability within 0.1 percent of rated volts for 24 hours after a 20-minute warmup.




2.20 CONTROL WIRE AND CABLE

A. LAN and Communication Cable: Comply with DDC system manufacturer requirements for network being installed.

1. Cable shall be plenum rated. 2. Cable shall comply with NFPA 70. 3. Cable shall have a unique color that is different from other cables used on Project.

2.21 RACEWAYS FOR CONTROL WIRING, CABLING, AND TUBING

A. Metal Conduits, Tubing, and Fittings:

1. EMT: Comply with NEMA ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.

2.22 CONTROL POWER WIRING AND RACEWAYS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" electrical power conductors and cables.

B. Comply with requirements in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for electrical power raceways and boxes.

2.23 ACCESSORIES

A. Damper Blade Limit Switches:

1. Sense positive open and/or closed position of the damper blades. 2. NEMA 250, Type 13, oil-tight construction. 3. Arrange for the mounting application. 4. Additional waterproof enclosure when required by its environment. 5. Arrange to prevent "over-center" operation.

2.24 IDENTIFICATION

A. Control Equipment, Instruments, and Control Devices:

1. Engraved tag bearing unique identification.

a. Include instruments with unique identification identified by equipment being controlled or monitored, followed by point identification.

2. Tag shall consist of white lettering on black background. 3. Tag shall be engraved phenolic consisting of three layers of rigid laminate. Top and

bottom layers are color-coded black with contrasting white center exposed by engraving through outer layer.

4. Tag shall be fastened with drive pins.




5. Instruments, control devices and actuators with Project-specific identification tags having unique identification numbers following requirements indicated and provided by original manufacturer do not require an additional tag.

B. Valve Tags:

1. Brass tags and brass chains attached to valve. 2. Tags shall be at least 1.5 inches in diameter. 3. Include tag with unique valve identification indicating control influence such as flow,

level, pressure, or temperature; followed by location of valve, and followed by three-digit sequential number. For example: TV-1.001.

4. Valves with Project-specific identification tags having unique identification numbers following requirements indicated and provided by original manufacturer do not require an additional tag.

C. Raceway and Boxes:

1. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

2.25 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Product(s) and material(s) will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

B. Prepare test and inspection reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates.

B. Examine roughing-in for products to verify actual locations of connections before installation.

1. Examine roughing-in for instruments installed in piping to verify actual locations of connections before installation.

2. Examine roughing-in for instruments installed in duct systems to verify actual locations of connections before installation.

C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and ceilings for suitable conditions where product will be installed.

D. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.




E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 DDC SYSTEM INTERFACE WITH OTHER SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Communication Interface to Equipment with Integral Controls:

1. DDC system shall have communication interface with equipment having integral controls and having a communication interface for remote monitoring or control.

2. Equipment to Be Connected: a. Air-terminals. b. Boilers. c. Chillers. d. Cooling towers. e. Air-handling units. f. Variable-frequency controllers. g. Refrigerant monitoring. h. Chilled water, heating water, and condenser water pumps.

3.3 CONTROL DEVICES FOR INSTALLATION BY INSTALLERS

A. Deliver selected control devices, specified in indicated HVAC instrumentation and control device Sections, to identified equipment and systems manufacturers for factory installation and to identified installers for field installation.

B. Deliver the following to duct fabricator and Installer for installation in ductwork. Include installation instructions to Installer and supervise installation for compliance with requirements.

1. DDC control dampers. 2. Flow sensors and switches. 3. Pressure sensors.

C. Deliver the following to plumbing and HVAC piping installers for installation in piping. Include installation instructions to Installer and supervise installation for compliance with requirements.

1. DDC control valves. 2. Pipe-mounted flow meters. 3. Pipe-mounted sensors, switches and transmitters. 4. Tank-mounted sensors, switches and transmitter .

3.4 CONTROL DEVICES FOR EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER FACTORY INSTALLATION

A. Deliver the following to terminal unit manufacturer for factory installation. Include installation instructions to terminal unit manufacturer.

1. Controllers for VAV boxes and fan-coil units.





A. Install products to satisfy more stringent of all requirements indicated.

B. Install products level, plumb, parallel, and perpendicular with building construction.

C. Support products, tubing, piping wiring and raceways.

D. If codes and referenced standards are more stringent than requirements indicated, comply with requirements in codes and referenced standards.

E. Fabricate openings and install sleeves in ceilings, floors, roof, and walls required by installation of products. Before proceeding with drilling, punching, and cutting, check for concealed work to avoid damage. Patch, flash, grout, seal, and refinish openings to match adjacent condition.

F. Firestop penetrations made in fire-rated assemblies.

G. Seal penetrations made in acoustically rated assemblies.."

H. Fastening Hardware:

1. Stillson wrenches, pliers, and other tools that damage surfaces of rods, nuts, and other parts are prohibited for work of assembling and tightening fasteners.

2. Tighten bolts and nuts firmly and uniformly. Do not overstress threads by excessive force or by oversized wrenches.

3. Lubricate threads of bolts, nuts and screws with graphite and oil before assembly.

I. If product locations are not indicated, install products in locations that are accessible and that will permit service and maintenance from floor, equipment platforms, or catwalks without removal of permanently installed furniture and equipment.

3.6 OPERATOR WORKSTATION INSTALLATION

A. Desktop Operator Workstations Installation:

1. Install operator workstation(s) at location(s) directed by Owner. 2. Install multiple-receptacle power strip with cord for use in connecting multiple

workstation components to a single duplex electrical power receptacle. 3. Install software on workstation(s) and verify software functions properly. 4. Develop Project-specific graphics, trends, reports, logs and historical database. 5. Powerworkstation through a dedicated UPS unit. Locate UPS adjacent to workstation.

B. Color Graphics Application:

1. Use system schematics indicated as starting point to create graphics. 2. Develop Project-specific library of symbols for representing system equipment and

products. 3. Incorporate digital images of Project-completed installation into graphics where

beneficial to enhance effect. 4. Seek Authority input in graphics development once using graphics software.




5. Final editing shall be done on-site with Authority’s review and feedback. 6. Refine graphics as necessary for Authority acceptance. 7. On receiving Authority acceptance, print a hard copy for inclusion in operation and

maintenance manual. Prepare a scanned copy PDF file of each graphic and include with softcopy of DDC system operation and maintenance manual.

3.7 GATEWAY INSTALLATION

A. Install gateways if required for DDC system communication interface requirements indicated.

B. Test gateway to verify that communication interface functions properly.

3.8 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION

A. Install controllers in enclosures to comply with indicated requirements.

B. Connect controllers to field power supply.

C. Install controller with latest version of applicable software and configure to execute requirements indicated.

D. Test and adjust controllers to verify operation of connected I/O to achieve performance indicated requirements while executing sequences of operation.

E. Installation of Network Controllers:

1. Quantity and location of network controllers shall be determined by DDC system manufacturer to satisfy requirements indicated.

2. Install controllers in a protected location that is easily accessible by operators. 3. Top of controller shall be within 72 inches of finished floor.

F. Installation of Programmable Application Controllers:

1. Quantity and location of programmable application controllers shall be determined by DDC system manufacturer to satisfy requirements indicated.

2. Install controllers in a protected location that is easily accessible by operators. 3. Top of controller shall be within 72 inches of finished floor.

G. Application-Specific Controllers:

1. Quantity and location of application-specific controllers shall be determined by DDC system manufacturer to satisfy requirements indicated.

2. For controllers not mounted directly on equipment being controlled, install controllers in a protected location that is easily accessible by operators.

3.9 ENCLOSURES INSTALLATION

A. Install the following items in enclosures, to comply with indicated requirements:




1. Gateways. 2. Routers. 3. Controllers. 4. Electrical power devices. 5. UPS units. 6. Relays. 7. Accessories. 8. Instruments. 9. Actuators 10. .

B. Align adjacent enclosures of like size.

C. Install continuous and fully accessible wireways to connect conduit, wire, and cable to multiple adjacent enclosures. Wireway used for application shall have protection equal to NEMA 250 rating of connected enclosures.

3.10 ELECTRIC POWER CONNECTIONS

A. Connect electrical power to DDC system products requiring electrical power connections.

B. Design of electrical power to products not indicated with electric power is delegated to DDC system provider and installing trade. Work shall comply with NFPA 70 and other requirements indicated.

C. Comply with requirements in Section 262816 "Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers" for electrical power circuit breakers.

D. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" for electrical power conductors and cables.

E. Comply with requirements in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for electrical power raceways and boxes.

3.11 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" for identification products and installation.

B. Install engraved phenolic nameplate with unique identification on face for each of the following:

1. Operator workstation. 2. Printer. 3. Gateway. 4. Router. 5. DDC controller. 6. Enclosure.




7. Electrical power device. 8. UPS unit. 9. Accessory.

C. Install engraved phenolic nameplate with unique instrument identification on face of each instrument connected to a DDC controller.

D. Install engraved phenolic nameplate with identification on face of each control damper and valve actuator connected to a DDC controller.

E. Where product is installed above accessible tile ceiling, also install matching engraved phenolic nameplate with identification on face of ceiling grid located directly below.

F. Where product is installed above an inaccessible ceiling, also install engraved phenolic nameplate with identification on face of access door directly below.

G. Warning Labels:

1. Shall be permanently attached to equipment that can be automatically started by DDC control system.

2. Shall be located in highly visible location near power service entry points.

3.12 NETWORK INSTALLATION

A. Install network cable in continuous raceway unless noted otherwise elsewhere in this section.

1. Where indicated on Drawings, cable trays may be used for copper cable in lieu of conduit.

3.13 NETWORK NAMING AND NUMBERING

A. Coordinate with Owner and provide unique naming and addressing for networks and devices.

B. ASHRAE 135 Networks:

1. MAC Address:

a. Every network device shall have an assigned and documented MAC address unique to its network.

b. Ethernet Networks: Document MAC address assigned at its creation. c. ARCNET or MS/TP networks: Assign from 00 to 64.

2. Network Numbering:

a. Assign unique numbers to each new network. b. Provide ability for changing network number through device switches or operator

interface. c. DDC system, with all possible connected LANs, can contain up to 65,534 unique

networks.




3. Device Object Identifier Property Number:

a. Assign unique device object identifier property numbers or device instances for each device network.

b. Provide for future modification of device instance number by device switches or operator interface.

c. LAN shall support up to 4,194,302 unique devices.

4. Device Object Name Property Text:

a. Device object name property field shall support 32 minimum printable characters. b. Assign unique device "Object Name" property names with plain-English

descriptive names for each device.

1) Example 1: Device object name for device controlling boiler plant at Building 1000 would be "HW System B1000."

2) Example 2: Device object name for a VAV terminal unit controller could be "VAV unit 102".

5. Object Name Property Text for Other Than Device Objects:

a. Object name property field shall support 32 minimum printable characters. b. Assign object name properties with plain-English names descriptive of application.

1) Example 1: "Zone 1 Temperature." 2) Example 2 "Fan Start and Stop."

6. Object Identifier Property Number for Other Than Device Objects:

a. Assign object identifier property numbers according to Drawings indicated. b. If not indicated, object identifier property numbers may be assigned at Installer's

discretion but must be approved by Owner in advance, be documented and be unique for like object types within device.

3.14 CONTROL WIRE, CABLE AND RACEWAYS INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways except in accessible ceiling spaces and in gypsum board partitions where unenclosed plenum-rated wiring method may be used. Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces.

1. Install plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings. 2. Comply with requirements for cable trays specified in Section 260536 "Cable Trays for

Electrical Systems." 3. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Section 260533

"Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems."

C. Wiring Method: Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where possible.




D. Field Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.

E. Conduit Installation: 1. Coordinate conduit routing with other trades to avoid conflicts with ducts, pipes and

equipment and service clearance. 2. Maintain at least 3-inch separation where conduits run axially above or below ducts and

pipes. 3. Limit above-grade conduit runs to 100 feet without pull or junction box. 4. Do not fasten conduits onto the bottom side of a metal deck roof. 5. Flexible conduit is permitted only where flexibility and vibration control is required. 6. Limit flexible conduit to 3 feet long. 7. Conduit shall be continuous from outlet to outlet, from outlet to enclosures, pull and

junction boxes, and shall be secured to boxes in such manner that each system shall be electrically continuous throughout.

8. Secure threaded conduit entering an instrument enclosure, cabinet, box, and trough, with a locknut on outside and inside, such that conduit system is electrically continuous throughout. Provide a metal bushing on inside with insulated throats. Locknuts shall be the type designed to bite into the metal or, on inside of enclosure, shall have a grounding wedge lug under locknut.

9. Conduit box-type connectors for conduit entering enclosures shall have an insulated throat.

10. Connect conduit entering enclosures in wet locations with box-type connectors or with watertight sealing locknuts or other fittings.

11. Offset conduits where entering surface-mounted equipment. 12. Seal conduit runs used by sealing fittings to prevent the circulation of air for the

following:

a. Conduit extending from interior to exterior of building. b. Conduit extending into pressurized duct and equipment. c. Conduit extending into pressurized zones that are automatically controlled to

maintain different pressure set points.

F. Wire and Cable Installation:

1. Cables serving a common system may be grouped in a common raceway. Install control wiring and cable in separate raceway from power wiring. Do not group conductors from different systems or different voltages.

2. Install cables with protective sheathing that is waterproof and capable of withstanding continuous temperatures of 90 deg C with no measurable effect on physical and electrical properties of cable.

a. Provide shielding to prevent interference and distortion from adjacent cables and equipment.

3. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer.




4. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIMM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.

5. UTP Cable Installation: a. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch from the point of termination, to

maintain cable geometry.

6. Identify each wire on each end and at each terminal with a number-coded identification tag. Each wire shall have a unique tag.

7. Provide strain relief. 8. Terminate wiring in a junction box.

a. Clamp cable over jacket in junction box. b. Individual conductors in the stripped section of the cable shall be slack between

the clamping point and terminal block.

9. Terminate field wiring and cable not directly connected to instruments and control devices having integral wiring terminals using terminal blocks.

10. Install signal transmission components according to IEEE C2, REA Form 511a, NFPA 70, and as indicated.

11. Keep runs short. Allow extra length for connecting to terminal boards. Do not bend flexible coaxial cables in a radius less than 10 times the cable OD. Use sleeves or grommets to protect cables from vibration at points where they pass around sharp corners and through penetrations.

12. Ground wire shall be copper and grounding methods shall comply with IEEE C2. Demonstrate ground resistance.

13. Wire and cable shall be continuous from terminal to terminal without splices. 14. Use insulated spade lugs for wire and cable connection to screw terminals. 15. Use shielded cable to transmitters. 16. Use shielded cable to temperature sensors. 17. Perform continuity and meager testing on wire and cable after installation. 18. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded wire and cable. Remove and

discard wire and cable if damaged during installation, and replace it with new cable. 19. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps

shall not be used for heating. 20. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull

tensions. 21. Protection from Electro-Magnetic Interference (EMI): Provide installation free of (EMI).

As a minimum, comply with the following requirements:

a. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA 569-C for separating unshielded cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment.

b. Separation between open cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows:

1) Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches. 2) Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12

inches. 3) Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches.




c. Separation between cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows:

1) Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches. 2) Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches. 3) Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches.

d. Separation between cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows:

1) Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement. 2) Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inches. 3) Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches.

e. Separation between Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or 5 HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches.

f. Separation between Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5 inches.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and installations, including connections.

C. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Testing:

1. Perform preinstallation, in-progress, and final tests, supplemented by additional tests, as necessary.

2. Preinstallation Cable Verification: Verify integrity and serviceability for new cable lengths before installation. This assurance may be provided by using vendor verification documents, testing, or other methods. As a minimum, furnish evidence of verification for cable attenuation and bandwidth parameters.

3. In-Progress Testing: Perform standard tests for correct pair identification and termination during installation to ensure proper installation and cable placement. Perform tests in addition to those specified if there is any reason to question condition of material furnished and installed. Testing accomplished is to be documented by agency conducting tests. Submit test results for Project record.

4. Final Testing: Perform final test of installed system to demonstrate acceptability as installed. Testing shall be performed according to a test plan supplied by DDC system manufacturer. Defective Work or material shall be corrected and retested. As a minimum,




final testing for cable system, including spare cable, shall verify conformance of attenuation, length, and bandwidth parameters with performance indicated.

5. Test Equipment: Use a fiber-optic time domain reflectometer for testing of length and optical connectivity.

6. Test Results: Record test results and submit copy of test results for Project record.

3.16 DDC SYSTEM I/O CHECKOUT PROCEDURES

A. Check installed products before continuity tests, leak tests and calibration.

B. Check instruments for proper location and accessibility.

C. Check instruments for proper installation on direction of flow, elevation, orientation, insertion depth, or other applicable considerations that will impact performance.

D. Check instrument tubing for proper isolation, fittings, slope, dirt legs, drains, material and support.

E. For pneumatic products, verify that air supply for each product is properly installed.

F. Control Damper Checkout:

1. Verify that control dampers are installed correctly for flow direction. 2. Verify that proper blade alignment, either parallel or opposed, has been provided. 3. Verify that damper frame attachment is properly secured and sealed. 4. Verify that damper actuator and linkage attachment is secure. 5. Verify that actuator wiring is complete, enclosed and connected to correct power source. 6. Verify that damper blade travel is unobstructed.

G. Control Valve Checkout: 1. Verify that control valves are installed correctly for flow direction. 2. Verify that valve body attachment is properly secured and sealed. 3. Verify that valve actuator and linkage attachment is secure. 4. Verify that actuator wiring is complete, enclosed and connected to correct power source. 5. Verify that valve ball, disc or plug travel is unobstructed. 6. After piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before insulating and

balancing, inspect each valve for leaks. Adjust or replace packing to stop leaks. Replace the valve if leaks persist.

H. Instrument Checkout:

1. Verify that instrument is correctly installed for location, orientation, direction and operating clearances.

2. Verify that attachment is properly secured and sealed. 3. Verify that conduit connections are properly secured and sealed. 4. Verify that wiring is properly labeled with unique identification, correct type and size and

is securely attached to proper terminals. 5. Inspect instrument tag against approved submittal. 6. For instruments with tubing connections, verify that tubing attachment is secure and

isolation valves have been provided.




7. For flow instruments, verify that recommended upstream and downstream distances have been maintained.

8. For temperature instruments:

a. Verify sensing element type and proper material. b. Verify length and insertion.

3.17 DDC SYSTEM I/O ADJUSTMENT, CALIBRATION AND TESTING:

A. Calibrate each instrument installed that is not factory calibrated and provided with calibration documentation.

B. Provide a written description of proposed field procedures and equipment for calibrating each type of instrument. Submit procedures before calibration and adjustment.

C. For each analog instrument, make a three-point test of calibration for both linearity and accuracy.

D. Equipment and procedures used for calibration shall comply with instrument manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Provide diagnostic and test equipment for calibration and adjustment.

F. Field instruments and equipment used to test and calibrate installed instruments shall have accuracy at least twice the instrument accuracy being calibrated. An installed instrument with an accuracy of 1 percent shall be checked by an instrument with an accuracy of 0.5 percent.

G. Calibrate each instrument according to instrument instruction manual supplied by manufacturer.

H. If after calibration indicated performance cannot be achieved, replace out-of-tolerance instruments.

I. Comply with field testing requirements and procedures indicated by ASHRAE's Guideline 11, "Field Testing of HVAC Control Components," in the absence of specific requirements, and to supplement requirements indicated.

J. Analog Signals:

1. Check analog voltage signals using a precision voltage meter at zero, 50, and 100 percent.

2. Check analog current signals using a precision current meter at zero, 50, and 100 percent. 3. Check resistance signals for temperature sensors at zero, 50, and 100 percent of operating

span using a precision-resistant source.

K. Digital Signals:

1. Check digital signals using a jumper wire. 2. Check digital signals using an ohmmeter to test for contact making or breaking.

L. Control Dampers:




1. Stroke and adjust control dampers following manufacturer's recommended procedure, from 100 percent open to 100 percent closed and back to 100 percent open.

2. Stroke control dampers with pilot positioners. Adjust damper and positioner following manufacturer's recommended procedure, so damper is 100 percent closed, 50 percent closed and 100 percent open at proper air pressure.

3. Check and document open and close cycle times for applications with a cycle time less than 30 seconds.

4. For control dampers equipped with positive position indication, check feedback signal at multiple positions to confirm proper position indication.

M. Control Valves:

1. Stroke and adjust control valves following manufacturer's recommended procedure, from 100 percent open to 100 percent closed and back to 100 percent open.

2. Stroke control valves with pilot positioners. Adjust valve and positioner following manufacturer's recommended procedure, so valve is 100 percent closed, 50 percent closed and 100 percent open at proper air pressures.

3. Check and document open and close cycle times for applications with a cycle time less than 30 seconds.

4. For control valves equipped with positive position indication, check feedback signal at multiple positions to confirm proper position indication.

N. Meters: Check sensors at zero, 50, and 100 percent of Project design values.

O. Sensors: Check sensors at zero, 50, and 100 percent of Project design values.

P. Switches: Calibrate switches to make or break contact at set points indicated.

Q. Transmitters:

1. Check and calibrate transmitters at zero, 50, and 100 percent of Project design values. 2. Calibrate resistance temperature transmitters at zero, 50, and 100 percent of span using a

precision-resistant source.

3.18 DDC SYSTEM CONTROLLER CHECKOUT

A. Verify power supply.

1. Verify voltage, phase and hertz. 2. Verify that protection from power surges is installed and functioning. 3. Verify that ground fault protection is installed. 4. If applicable, verify if connected to UPS unit. 5. If applicable, verify if connected to a backup power source. 6. If applicable, verify that power conditioning units, transient voltage suppression and

high-frequency noise filter units are installed.

B. Verify that wire and cabling is properly secured to terminals and labeled with unique identification.

C. Verify that spare I/O capacity is provided.




3.19 DDC CONTROLLER I/O CONTOL LOOP TESTS

A. Testing:

1. Test every I/O point connected to DDC controller to verify that safety and operating control set points are as indicated and as required to operate controlled system safely and at optimum performance.

2. Test every I/O point throughout its full operating range. 3. Test every control loop to verify operation is stable and accurate. 4. Adjust control loop proportional, integral and derivative settings to achieve optimum

performance while complying with performance requirements indicated. Document testing of each control loop's precision and stability via trend logs.

5. Test and adjust every control loop for proper operation according to sequence of operation.

6. Test software and hardware interlocks for proper operation. Correct deficiencies. 7. Operate each analog point at the following:

a. Upper quarter of range. b. Lower quarter of range. c. At midpoint of range.

8. Exercise each binary point. 9. For every I/O point in DDC system, read and record each value at operator workstation,

at DDC controller and at field instrument simultaneously. Value displayed at operator workstation, at DDC controller and at field instrument shall match.

10. Prepare and submit a report documenting results for each I/O point in DDC system and include in each I/O point a description of corrective measures and adjustments made to achieve desire results.

3.20 DDC SYSTEM VALIDATION TESTS

A. Perform validation tests before requesting final review of system. Before beginning testing, first submit Pretest Checklist and Test Plan.

B. After approval of Test Plan, execute all tests and procedures indicated in plan.

C. After testing is complete, submit completed test checklist.

D. Pretest Checklist: Submit the following list with items checked off once verified:

1. Detailed explanation for any items that are not completed or verified. 2. Required mechanical installation work is successfully completed and HVAC equipment

is working correctly. 3. HVAC equipment motors operate below full-load amperage ratings. 4. Required DDC system components, wiring, and accessories are installed. 5. Installed DDC system architecture matches approved Drawings. 6. Control electric power circuits operate at proper voltage and are free from faults. 7. Required surge protection is installed. 8. DDC system network communications function properly, including uploading and

downloading programming changes.




9. Using BACnet protocol analyzer, verify that communications are error free. 10. Each controller's programming is backed up. 11. Equipment, products, tubing, wiring cable and conduits are properly labeled. 12. All I/O points are programmed into controllers. 13. Testing, adjusting and balancing work affecting controls is complete. 14. Dampers and actuators zero and span adjustments are set properly. 15. Each control damper and actuator goes to failed position on loss of power. 16. Valves and actuators zero and span adjustments are set properly. 17. Each control valve and actuator goes to failed position on loss of power. 18. Meter, sensor and transmitter readings are accurate and calibrated. 19. Control loops are tuned for smooth and stable operation. 20. View trend data where applicable. 21. Each controller works properly in standalone mode. 22. Safety controls and devices function properly. 23. Interfaces with fire-alarm system function properly. 24. Electrical interlocks function properly. 25. Operator workstations and other interfaces are delivered, all system and database

software is installed, and graphic are created. 26. Record Drawings are completed.

E. Test Plan:

1. Prepare and submit a validation test plan including test procedures for performance validation tests.

2. Test plan shall address all specified functions of DDC system and sequences of operation. 3. Explain detailed actions and expected results to demonstrate compliance with

requirements indicated. 4. Explain method for simulating necessary conditions of operation used to demonstrate

performance. 5. Include a test checklist to be used to check and initial that each test has been successfully

completed. 6. Submit test plan documentation 20 business days before start of tests.

F. Validation Test:

1. Verify operating performance of each I/O point in DDC system.

a. Verify analog I/O points at operating value. b. Make adjustments to out-of-tolerance I/O points.

1) Identify I/O points for future reference. 2) Simulate abnormal conditions to demonstrate proper function of safety

devices. 3) Replace instruments and controllers that cannot maintain performance

indicated after adjustments.

2. Simulate conditions to demonstrate proper sequence of control. 3. Readjust settings to design values and observe ability of DDC system to establish desired

conditions. 4. After 24 Hours following Initial Validation Test:




a. Re-check I/O points that required corrections during initial test. b. Identify I/O points that still require additional correction and make corrections

necessary to achieve desired results.

5. After 24 Hours of Second Validation Test:

a. Re-check I/O points that required corrections during second test. b. Continue validation testing until I/O point is normal on two consecutive tests.

6. Completely check out, calibrate, and test all connected hardware and software to ensure that DDC system performs according to requirements indicated.

7. After validation testing is complete, prepare and submit a report indicating all I/O points that required correction and how many validation re-tests it took to pass. Identify adjustments made for each test and indicate instruments that were replaced.

G. DDC System Response Time Test:

1. Simulate HLC.

a. Heavy load shall be an occurrence of 50 percent of total connected binary COV, one-half of which represent an "alarm" condition, and 50 percent of total connected analog COV, one-half of which represent an "alarm" condition, that are initiated simultaneously on a one-time basis.

2. Initiate 10 successive occurrences of HLC and measure response time to typical alarms and status changes.

3. Measure with a timer having at least 0.1-second resolution and 0.01 percent accuracy. 4. Purpose of test is to demonstrate DDC system, as follows:

a. Reaction to COV and alarm conditions during HLC. b. Ability to update DDC system database during HLC.

5. Passing test is contingent on the following:

a. Alarm reporting at printer beginning no more than two seconds after the initiation (time zero) of HLC.

b. All alarms, both binary and analog, are reported and printed; none are lost. c. Compliance with response times specified.

6. Prepare and submit a report documenting HLC tested and results of test including time stamp and print out of all alarms.

H. DDC System Network Bandwidth Test:

1. Test network bandwidth usage on all DDC system networks to demonstrate bandwidth usage under DDC system normal operating conditions and under simulated HLC.

2. To pass, none of DDC system networks shall use more than 70 percent of available bandwidth under normal and HLC operation.




3.21 FINAL REVIEW

A. Submit written request when DDC system is ready for final review. Written request shall state the following:

1. DDC system has been thoroughly inspected for compliance with contract documents and found to be in full compliance.

2. DDC system has been calibrated, adjusted and tested and found to comply with requirements of operational stability, accuracy, speed and other performance requirements indicated.

3. DDC system monitoring and control of HVAC systems results in operation according to sequences of operation indicated.

4. DDC system is complete and ready for final review.

B. Reviewshall be made after receipt of written request. A field report shall be issued to document observations and deficiencies.

C. Take prompt action to remedy deficiencies indicated in field report and submit a second written request when all deficiencies have been corrected. Repeat process until no deficiencies are reported.

D. Should more than two reviews be required, DDC system manufacturer and Installer shall compensate entity performing review for total costs, labor and expenses, associated with third and subsequent reviews. Estimated cost of each review shall be submitted and approved by DDC system manufacturer and Installer before making the review.

E. Prepare and submit closeout submittals when no deficiencies are reported.

F. A part of DDC system final review shall include a demonstration to parties participating in final review.

1. Provide staff familiar with DDC system installed to demonstrate operation of DDC system during final review.

2. Provide testing equipment to demonstrate accuracy and other performance requirements of DDC system that is requested by reviewers during final review.

3. Demonstration shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

a. Accuracy and calibration of 10 I/O points randomly selected. If review finds that some I/O points are not properly calibrated and not satisfying performance requirements indicated, additional I/O points may be selected by reviewers until total I/O points being reviewed that satisfy requirements equals quantity indicated.

b. HVAC equipment and system hardwired and software safeties and life-safety functions are operating according to sequence of operation. Up to 10 I/O points shall be randomly selected. Additional I/O points may be selected by reviewers to discover problems with operation.

c. Correct sequence of operation after electrical power interruption and resumption after electrical power is restored for randomly selected HVAC systems.

d. Operation of randomly selected dampers and valves in normal-on, normal-off and failed positions.




e. Reporting of alarm conditions for randomly selected alarms, including different classes of alarms, to ensure that alarms are properly received by operators and operator workstations.

f. Trends, summaries, logs and reports set-up for Project. g. For up to three HVAC systems randomly selected, use graph trends to show that

sequence of operation is executed in correct manner and that HVAC systems operate properly through complete sequence of operation including different modes of operations indicated. Show that control loops are stable and operating at set points and respond to changes in set point of 20 percent or more.

h. Software's ability to communicate with controllers, operator workstations, uploading and downloading of control programs.

i. Software's ability to edit control programs off-line. j. Data entry to show Project-specific customizing capability including parameter

changes. k. Step through penetration tree, display all graphics, demonstrate dynamic update,

and direct access to graphics. l. Execution of digital and analog commands in graphic mode. m. Spreadsheet and curve plot software and its integration with database. n. Online user guide and help functions. o. Multitasking by showing different operations occurring simultaneously on four

quadrants of split screen. p. System speed of response compared to requirements indicated. q. For Each Network and Programmable Application Controller:

1) Memory: Programmed data, parameters, trend and alarm history collected during normal operation is not lost during power failure.

2) Operator Interface: Ability to connect directly to each type of digital controller with a portable operator workstation and PDA. Show that maintenance personnel interface tools perform as indicated in manufacturer's technical literature.

3) Standalone Ability: Demonstrate that controllers provide stable and reliable standalone operation using default values or other method for values normally read over network.

4) Electric Power: Ability to disconnect any controller safely from its power source.

5) Wiring Labels: Match control drawings. 6) Network Communication: Ability to locate a controller's location on

network and communication architecture matches Shop Drawings. 7) Nameplates and Tags: Accurate and permanently attached to control panel

doors, instrument, actuators and devices.

r. For Each Operator Workstation:

1) I/O points lists agree with naming conventions. 2) Graphics are complete. 3) UPS unit, if applicable, operates.

s. Communications and Interoperability: Demonstrate proper interoperability of data sharing, alarm and event management, trending, scheduling, and device and network management. Requirements must be met even if only one manufacturer's equipment is installed.




1) Data Presentation: On each operator workstation, demonstrate graphic display capabilities.

2) Reading of Any Property: Demonstrate ability to read and display any used readable object property of any device on network.

3) Set Point and Parameter Modifications: Show ability to modify set points and tuning parameters indicated.

4) Peer-to-Peer Data Exchange: Network devices are installed and configured to perform without need for operator intervention to implement Project sequence of operation and to share global data.

5) Alarm and Event Management: Alarms and events are installed and prioritized according to Owner. Demonstrate that time delays and other logic are set up to avoid nuisance tripping. Show that operators with sufficient privileges are permitted.

6) Schedule Lists: Schedules are configured for start and stop, mode change, occupant overrides, and night setback as defined in sequence of operations.

7) Schedule Display and Modification: Ability to display any schedule with start and stop times for calendar year. Show that all calendar entries and schedules are modifiable from any connected operator workstation by an operator with sufficient privilege.

8) Archival Storage of Data: Data archiving is handled by operator workstation and server and local trend archiving and display is accomplished.

9) Modification of Trend Log Object Parameters: Operator with sufficient privilege can change logged data points, sampling rate, and trend duration.

10) Device and Network Management:

a) Display of network device status. b) Display of BACnet Object Information. c) Silencing devices transmitting erroneous data. d) Time synchronization. e) Remote device re-initialization. f) Backup and restore network device programming and master

database(s). g) Configuration management of routers.

3.22 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative with complete knowledge of Project-specific system installed to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain DDC system.

B. Extent of Training:

1. Base extent of training on scope and complexity of DDC system indicated and training requirements indicated. Provide extent of training required to satisfy requirements indicated even if more than minimum training requirements are indicated.

2. Inform Owner of anticipated training requirements if more than minimum training requirements are indicated.

3. Minimum Training Requirements:

a. Provide not less than 2 days of training total.




b. Stagger training over multiple training classes to accommodate Authority’s requirements. All training shall occur before end of warranty period.

C. Training Schedule:

1. Schedule training 20 business days before expected Substantial Completion. 2. Schedule training to provide at least 20 business days of notice in advance of training. 3. Training shall occur within normal business hours at a mutually agreed on time. Unless

otherwise agreed to, training shall occur Monday through Friday, except on U.S. Federal holidays, with two morning sessions and two afternoon sessions. Each morning session and afternoon session shall be split in half with a break between sessions. Training, including breaks and excluding lunch period, shall not exceed eight hours per day.

4. Provide staggered training schedule as requested by Owner.

D. Training Attendee List and Sign-in Sheet:

1. Request from Owner in advance of training a proposed attendee list with name, phone number and e-mail address.

2. Provide a preprinted sign-in sheet for each training session with proposed attendees listed and no fewer than six blank spaces to add additional attendees.

3. Preprinted sign-in sheet shall include training session number, date and time, instructor name, phone number and e-mail address, and brief description of content to be covered during session. List attendees with columns for name, phone number, e-mail address and a column for attendee signature or initials.

4. Circulate sign-in sheet at beginning of each session and solicit attendees to sign or initial in applicable location.

5. At end of each training day, send Owner an e-mail with an attachment of scanned copy (PDF) of circulated sign-in sheet for each session.

E. Training Attendee Headcount:

1. Plan in advance of training for up to five attendees. 2. Headcount may vary depending on training content covered in session. Attendee access

may be restricted to some training content for purposes of maintaining system security.

F. Attendee Training Manuals:

1. Provide each attendee with a color hard copy of all training materials and visual presentations.

2. Hard-copy materials shall be organized in a three-ring binder with table of contents and individual divider tabs marked for each logical grouping of subject matter. Organize material to provide space for attendees to take handwritten notes within training manuals.

3. In addition to hard-copy materials included in training manual, provide each binder with a sleeve or pocket that includes a DVD or flash drive with PDF copy of all hard-copy materials.

G. Instructor Requirements:

1. One or multiple qualified instructors, as required, to provide training.




2. Instructors shall have not less than five years of providing instructional training on not less than five past projects with similar DDC system scope and complexity to DDC system installed.

H. Training Outline:

1. Submit training outline for Owner review at least 10 business day before scheduling training.

2. Outline shall include a detailed agenda for each training day that is broken down into each of four training sessions that day, training objectives for each training session and synopses for each lesson planned.

I. On-Site Training:

1. Owner will provide conditioned classroom or workspace with ample desks or tables, chairs, power and data connectivity for instructor and each attendee.

2. Instructor shall provide training materials, projector and other audiovisual equipment used in training.

3. Provide as much of training located on-site as deemed feasible and practical by Owner. 4. On-site training shall include regular walk-through tours, as required, to observe each

unique product type installed with hands-on review of operation, calibration and service requirements.

5. Operator workstation provided with DDC system shall be used in training. If operator workstation is not indicated, provide a temporary workstation to convey training content.

J. Training Content for Daily Operators:

1. Basic operation of system. 2. Understanding DDC system architecture and configuration. 3. Understanding each unique product type installed including performance and service

requirements for each. 4. Understanding operation of each system and equipment controlled by DDC system

including sequences of operation, each unique control algorithm and each unique optimization routine.

5. Operating operator workstations, printers and other peripherals. 6. Logging on and off system. 7. Accessing graphics, reports and alarms. 8. Adjusting and changing set points and time schedules. 9. Recognizing DDC system malfunctions. 10. Understanding content of operation and maintenance manuals including control

drawings. 11. Understanding physical location and placement of DDC controllers and I/O hardware. 12. Accessing data from DDC controllers. 13. Operating portable operator workstations. 14. Review of DDC testing results to establish basic understanding of DDC system operating

performance and HVAC system limitations as of Substantial Completion. 15. Running each specified report and log. 16. Displaying and demonstrating each data entry to show Project-specific customizing

capability. Demonstrating parameter changes. 17. Stepping through graphics penetration tree, displaying all graphics, demonstrating

dynamic updating, and direct access to graphics.




18. Executing digital and analog commands in graphic mode. 19. Demonstrating control loop precision and stability via trend logs of I/O for not less than

10 percent of I/O installed. 20. Demonstrating DDC system performance through trend logs and command tracing. 21. Demonstrating scan, update, and alarm responsiveness. 22. Demonstrating spreadsheet and curve plot software, and its integration with database. 23. Demonstrating on-line user guide, and help function and mail facility. 24. Demonstrating multitasking by showing dynamic curve plot, and graphic construction

operating simultaneously via split screen. 25. Demonstrating the following for HVAC systems and equipment controlled by DDC

system:

a. Operation of HVAC equipment in normal-off, -on and failed conditions while observing individual equipment, dampers and valves for correct position under each condition.

b. For HVAC equipment with factory-installed software, show that integration into DDC system is able to communicate with DDC controllers or gateways, as applicable.

c. Using graphed trends, show that sequence of operation is executed in correct manner, and HVAC systems operate properly through complete sequence of operation including seasonal change, occupied and unoccupied modes, warm-up and cool-down cycles and other modes of operation indicated.

d. Hardware interlocks and safeties function properly and DDC system performs correct sequence of operation after electrical power interruption and resumption after power is restored.

e. Reporting of alarm conditions for each alarm, and confirm that alarms are received at assigned locations, including operator workstations.

f. Each control loop responds to set point adjustment and stabilizes within time period indicated.

g. Sharing of previously graphed trends of all control loops to demonstrate that each control loop is stable and set points are being maintained.




CONTROL VALVES 230923.11 - 1

SECTION 230923.11 - CONTROL VALVES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes control valves and actuators for DDC systems.



B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 2. Include diagrams for pneumatic signal and main air tubing.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal:

1. Schedule and design calculations for control valves and actuators, including the following:

a. Flow at project design and minimum flow conditions. b. Pressure differential drop across valve at project design flow condition. c. Maximum system pressure differential drop (pump close-off pressure) across valve

at project minimum flow condition. d. Design and minimum control valve coefficient with corresponding valve position. e. Maximum close-off pressure. f. Leakage flow at maximum system pressure differential. g. Torque required at worst case condition for sizing actuator. h. Actuator selection indicating torque provided.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS



B. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label products to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code where required by authorities having jurisdiction.




C. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to size products where indicated as delegated design.

D. Ground Fault: Products shall not fail due to ground fault condition when suitably grounded.

E. Determine control valve sizes and flow coefficients by ISA 75.01.01.

F. Control valve characteristics and rangeability shall comply with ISA 75.11.01.

G. Selection Criteria:

1. Control valves shall be suitable for operation at following conditions:

a. Chilled Water: 125 psig and 150 degrees F. b. Condenser Water: 125 psig and 150 degrees F. c. Heating Hot Water: 125 psig and 250 degrees F.

2. Fail positions unless otherwise indicated:

a. Chilled Water: Open. b. Condenser Water: Open. c. Heating Hot Water: Open.

3. Minimum Cv shall be calculated at 10 percent of design flow, with a coincident pressure differential equal to the system design pump head.

4. In water systems, select modulating control valves at terminal equipment for a design Cv based on a pressure drop of 3 psig at design flow unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 BALL-STYLE CONTROL VALVES

A. Ball Valves with Single Port and Characterized Disk:

1. Pressure Rating for NPS 1 and Smaller: Nominal 600 WOG. 2. Pressure Rating for NPS 1-1/2 through NPS 2: Nominal 400 WOG. 3. Close-off Pressure: 200 psig. 4. Process Temperature Range: Zero to 212 deg F. 5. Body and Tail Piece: Cast bronze ASTM B 61, ASTM B 62, ASTM B 584, or forged

brass with nickel plating. 6. End Connections: Threaded (NPT) ends. 7. Ball: Chrome-plated brass or bronze or 300 series stainless steel. 8. Stem and Stem Extension:

a. Material to match ball. b. Blowout-proof design. c. Sleeve or other approved means to allow valve to be opened and closed without

damaging the insulation or the vapor barrier seal.

9. Ball Seats: Reinforced PTFE. 10. Stem Seal: Reinforced PTFE packing ring with a threaded packing ring follower to retain

the packing ring under design pressure with the linkage removed. Alternative means,




such as EPDM O-rings, are acceptable if an equivalent cycle endurance can be demonstrated by testing.

11. Flow Characteristic: Equal percentage.

B. Ball Valves with Two Ports and Characterized Disk:

1. Pressure Rating for NPS 1 and Smaller: Nominal 600 WOG. 2. Pressure Rating for NPS 1-1/2 through NPS 2: Nominal 400 WOG. 3. Close-off Pressure: 200 psig. 4. Process Temperature Range: Zero to 212 deg F. 5. Body and Tail Piece: Cast bronze ASTM B 61, ASTM B 62, ASTM B 584, or forged

brass with nickel plating. 6. End Connections: Threaded (NPT) ends. 7. Ball: Chrome-plated brass or bronze or 300 series stainless steel. 8. Stem and Stem Extension:

a. Material to match ball. b. Blowout-proof design. c. Sleeve or other approved means to allow valve to be opened and closed without

damaging the insulation or the vapor barrier seal.

9. Ball Seats: Reinforced PTFE. 10. Stem Seal: Reinforced PTFE packing ring with a threaded packing ring follower to retain

the packing ring under design pressure with the linkage removed. Alternative means, such as EPDM O-rings, are acceptable if an equivalent cycle endurance can be demonstrated by testing.

11. Flow Characteristics for A-Port: Equal percentage. 12. Flow Characteristics for B-Port: Modified for constant common port flow.

C. Pressure-Independent Ball Valves NPS 2 and Smaller:

1. Performance:

a. Pressure Rating: 600 psig for NPS 1 and 400 psig for NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2. b. Close-off pressure of 200 psig. c. Process Temperature Range: Between zero to 212 deg F. d. Rangeability: 100 to 1.

2. Integral Pressure Regulator: Located upstream of ball to regulate pressure, to maintain a constant pressure differential while operating within a pressure differential range of 5 to 50 psig.

3. Body: Forged brass, nickel plated, and with threaded ends. 4. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. 5. Stem and Stem Extension: Chrome-plated brass, blowout-proof design. 6. Stem sleeve or other approved means to allow valve to be opened and closed without

damaging field-applied insulation and insulation vapor barrier seal. 7. Ball Seats: Reinforced PTFE. 8. Stem Seal: Reinforced PTFE packing ring stem seal with threaded packing ring follower

to retain the packing ring under design pressure with the linkage removed. Alternative means, such as EPDM O-rings, are acceptable if equivalent cycle endurance can be achieved.




9. Flow Characteristic: Equal percentage.

2.3 BUTTERFLY-STYLE CONTROL VALVES

A. Commercial-Grade, Two-Way Butterfly Valves:

1. Performance:

a. Bi-directional bubble tight shutoff at 250 psig. b. Comply with MSS SP-67 or MSS SP-68. c. Rotation: Zero to 90 degrees. d. Linear or modified equal percentage flow characteristic.

2. Body: Cast iron ASTM A 126, Class B, ductile iron ASTM A 536 or cast steel ASTM A 216/A 216M WCB fully lugged, suitable for mating to ASME B16.5 flanges.

3. Disc: 316 stainless steel. 4. Shaft: 316 or 17-4 PH stainless steel. 5. Seat: Reinforced EPDM or reinforced PTFE with retaining ring. 6. Shaft Bushings: Reinforced PTFE or stainless steel. 7. Replaceable seat, disc, and shaft bushings. 8. Corrosion-resistant nameplate indicating:

a. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number. b. Body size. c. Body and trim materials. d. Flow arrow.

2.4 SOLENOID VALVES

Description:

1. Action: Either normally open or normally closed in the event of electrical power failure as required by the application.

2. Size to close against the system pressure. 3. Manual override capable. 4. Heavy-duty assembly. 5. Body: Brass or stainless steel. 6. Seats and Discs: NBR or PTFE. 7. Solenoid Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4.

2.5 ELECTRIC AND ELECTRONIC CONTROL VALVE ACTUATORS

A. Actuators for Hydronic Control Valves: Capable of closing valve against system pump shutoff head.

B. Position indicator and graduated scale on each actuator.

C. Type: Motor operated, with or without gears, electric and electronic.




D. Deliver torque required for continuous uniform movement of controlled device from limit to limit when operated at rated voltage.

E. Function properly within a range of 85 to 120 percent of nameplate voltage.

F. Construction:

1. For Actuators Less Than 100 W: Fiber or reinforced nylon gears with steel shaft, copper alloy or nylon bearings, and pressed steel enclosures.

2. For Actuators from 100 to 400 W: Gears ground steel, oil immersed, shaft hardened steel running in bronze, copper alloy or ball bearings. Operator and gear trains shall be totally enclosed in dustproof cast-iron, cast-steel or cast-aluminum housing.

3. For Actuators Larger Than 400 W: Totally enclosed reversible induction motors with auxiliary hand crank and permanently lubricated bearings.

G. Field Adjustment:

1. Spring Return Actuators: Easily switchable from fail open to fail closed in the field without replacement.

2. Gear Type Actuators: External manual adjustment mechanism to allow manual positioning when the actuator is not powered.

H. Two-Position Actuators: Single direction, spring return or reversing type.

I. Modulating Actuators:

1. Operation: Capable of stopping at all points across full range, and starting in either direction from any point in range.

2. Control Input Signal:

a. Three Point, Tristate, or Floating Point: Clockwise and counter-clockwise inputs. One input drives actuator to open position and other input drives actuator to close position. No signal of either input remains in last position.

b. Proportional: Actuator drives proportional to input signal and modulates throughout its angle of rotation. Suitable for zero- to 10- or 2- to 10-V dc and 4- to 20-mA signals.

c. Pulse Width Modulation (PWM): Actuator drives to a specified position according to pulse duration (length) of signal from a dry contact closure, triac sink, or source controller.

d. Programmable Multi-Function:

1) Control Input, Position Feedback, and Running Time: Factory or field programmable.

2) Diagnostic: Feedback of hunting or oscillation, mechanical overload, mechanical travel, and mechanical load limit.

3) Service Data: Include, at a minimum, number of hours powered and number of hours in motion.

J. Position Feedback:




1. Equip two-position actuators with limits switches or other positive means of a position indication signal for remote monitoring of position.

2. Equip modulating actuators with a position feedback through current or voltage signal for remote monitoring.

3. Provide a position indicator and graduated scale on each actuator indicating open and closed travel limits.

K. Fail-Safe:

1. Where indicated, provide actuator to fail to an end position. 2. Internal spring return mechanism to drive controlled device to an end position (open or

close) on loss of power. 3. Batteries, capacitors, and other non-mechanical forms of fail-safe operation are

acceptable only where uniquely indicated.

L. Integral Overload Protection:

1. Provide against overload throughout the entire operating range in both directions. 2. Electronic overload, digital rotation sensing circuitry, mechanical end switches, or

magnetic clutches are acceptable methods of protection.

M. Valve Attachment:

1. Unless otherwise required for valve interface, provide an actuator designed to be directly coupled to valve shaft without the need for connecting linkages.

2. Attach actuator to valve drive shaft in a way that ensures maximum transfer of power and torque without slippage.

3. Bolt and set screw method of attachment is acceptable only if provided with at least two points of attachment.

N. Temperature and Humidity:

1. Temperature: Suitable for operating temperature range encountered by application with minimum operating temperature range of minus 20 to plus 120 deg F.

2. Humidity: Suitable for humidity range encountered by application; minimum operating range shall be from 5 to 95 percent relative humidity, non-condensing.

O. Enclosure:

1. Suitable for ambient conditions encountered by application. 2. NEMA 250, Type 2 for indoor and protected applications. 3. NEMA 250, Type 4 or Type 4X for outdoor and unprotected applications. 4. Provide actuator enclosure with heater and control where required by application.

P. Stroke Time:

1. Operate valve from fully closed to fully open within 60seconds. 2. Operate valve from fully open to fully closed within 60 seconds. 3. Move valve to failed position within 30 seconds. 4. Select operating speed to be compatible with equipment and system operation.




Q. Sound:

1. Spring Return: 62 dBA. 2. Non-Spring Return: 45 dBA.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTROL VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Control Valves:

1. Select from valves specified in "Control Valves" Article to achieve performance requirements and characteristics indicated while subjected to full range of system operation encountered.

2. Condenser Water System, Two-Way Applications Controlled by Flow: Butterfly-style valves, commercial-grade, two-way valves.

3. Chilled System, Two-Way Applications Controlled by Pressure: Butterfly-style valves, commercial-grade, two-way valves and globe-style, two-way valves.


A. Furnish and install products required to satisfy most stringent requirements indicated.

B. Install products level, plumb, parallel, and perpendicular with building construction.

C. Properly support instruments, tubing, piping, wiring, and conduits to comply with requirements indicated. Brace all products to prevent lateral movement and sway or a break in attachment when subjected to a force.

D. Provide ceiling, floor, roof, and wall openings and sleeves required by installation. Before proceeding with drilling, punching, or cutting, check location first for concealed products that could potentially be damaged. Patch, flash, grout, seal, and refinish openings to match adjacent condition.

E. Firestop penetrations made in fire-rated assemblies and seal penetrations made in acoustically rated assemblies.

F. Fastening Hardware:

1. Stillson wrenches, pliers, and other tools that will cause injury to or mar surfaces of rods, nuts, and other parts are prohibited for assembling and tightening nuts.


3. Lubricate threads of bolts, nuts, and screws with graphite and oil before assembly.

G. Install products in locations that are accessible and that will permit calibration and maintenance from floor, equipment platforms, or catwalks. Where ladders are required for Owner's access, confirm unrestricted ladder placement is possible under occupied condition.




3.3 ELECTRIC POWER

A. Furnish and install electrical power to products requiring electrical connections.

CONTROL VALVES

B. Install pipe reducers for valves smaller than line size. Position reducers as close to valve as possible but at distance to avoid interference and impact to performance. Install with manufacturer-recommended clearance.

C. Install flanges or unions to allow drop-in and -out valve installation.

D. Install pressure temperature taps in piping upstream and downstream of each control valve larger than NPS 2.

E. Valve Orientation:

1. Where possible, install globe and ball valves installed in horizontal piping with stems upright and not more than 15 degrees off of vertical, not inverted.

2. Install valves in a position to allow full stem movement. 3. Where possible, install butterfly valves that are installed in horizontal piping with stems

in horizontal position and with low point of disc opening with direction of flow.

F. Clearance:

1. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support of valves that cannot be handled by service personnel without hoisting mechanism.

2. Install valves with at least 12 inches of clear space around valve and between valves and adjacent surfaces.

G. Threaded Valves:

1. Note internal length of threads in valve ends, and proximity of valve internal seat or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into valve.

2. Align threads at point of assembly. 3. Apply thread compound to external pipe threads, except where dry seal threading is

specified. 4. Assemble joint, wrench tight. Apply wrench on valve end as pipe is being threaded.

H. Flanged Valves:

1. Align flange surfaces parallel. 2. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and

gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly with a torque wrench.

I. Connect electrical devices and components to electrical grounding system. Comply with requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

J. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Each piece of wire, cable, and tubing shall have the same designation at each end for operators to determine continuity at




points of connection. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

K. Install engraved phenolic nameplate with valve identification on valve and on face of ceiling directly below valves concealed above ceilings.

3.4 CHECKOUT PROCEDURES

A. Control Valve Checkout:

1. Check installed products before continuity tests, leak tests, and calibration. 2. Check valves for proper location and accessibility. 3. Check valves for proper installation for direction of flow, elevation, orientation, insertion

depth, or other applicable considerations that will impact performance. 4. For pneumatic products, verify air supply for each product is properly installed. 5. For pneumatic valves, verify that pressure gauges are provided in each air line to valve

actuator and positioner. 6. Verify that control valves are installed correctly for flow direction. 7. Verify that valve body attachment is properly secured and sealed. 8. Verify that valve actuator and linkage attachment are secure. 9. Verify that actuator wiring is complete, enclosed, and connected to correct power source. 10. Verify that valve ball, disc, and plug travel are unobstructed. 11. After piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before insulating and

balancing, inspect each valve for leaks. Adjust or replace packing to stop leaks. Replace the valve if leaks persist.

3.5 ADJUSTMENT, CALIBRATION, AND TESTING

A. Stroke and adjust control valves following manufacturer's recommended procedure, from 100 percent open to 100 percent closed back to 100 percent open.

B. Stroke control valves with pilot positioners. Adjust valve and positioner following manufacturer's recommended procedure, so valve is 100 percent closed, 50 percent closed, and 100 percent open at proper air pressures.

C. Check and document open and close cycle times for applications with a cycle time of less than 30 seconds.

D. For control valves equipped with positive position indication, check feedback signal at multiple positions to confirm proper position indication.




CONTROL DAMPERS 230923.12 - 1

SECTION 230923.12 - CONTROL DAMPERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes control dampers and actuators for DDC systems.



B. Shop Drawings: Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal:

1. Schedule and design calculations for control dampers and actuators, including the following.

a. Flow at project design and minimum flow conditions. b. Face velocity at project design and minimum airflow conditions. c. Pressure drop across damper at project design and minimum airflow conditions. d. AMCA 500D damper installation arrangement used to calculate and schedule

pressure drop, as applicable to installation. e. Maximum close-off pressure. f. Leakage airflow at maximum system pressure differential (fan close-off pressure). g. Torque required at worst case condition for sizing actuator. h. Actuator selection indicating torque provided.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS



B. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label products to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code where required by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to size products where indicated as delegated design.




D. Ground Fault: Products shall not fail due to ground fault condition when suitably grounded.

E. Selection Criteria:

1. Control dampers shall be suitable for operation between 0 and 150 degrees F and +/- 5” water column.

2. Fail positions unless otherwise indicated:

a. Supply Air: Open. b. Return Air: Open. c. Outdoor Air: Close.

3. Select modulating dampers for a pressure drop of 2 percent of fan total static pressure unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 RECTANGULAR CONTROL DAMPERS


1. Unless otherwise indicated, use parallel blade configuration for two-position control, equipment isolation service, and when mixing two airstreams. For other applications, use opposed blade configuration.

2. Factory assemble multiple damper sections to provide a single damper assembly of size required by the application.

B. Rectangular Dampers with Aluminum Airfoil Blades:

1. Performance:

a. Leakage: AMCA 511, Class 1A. Leakage shall not exceed 3 cfm/sq. ft. against 1-in. wg differential static pressure.

b. Pressure Drop: 0.05-in. wg at 1500 fpm across a 24-by-24-inch damper when tested according to AMCA 500-D, figure 5.3.

c. Velocity: Up to 6000 fpm. d. Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F. e. Pressure Rating: Damper close-off pressure equal to fan shutoff pressure with a

maximum blade deflection of 1/200 of blade length. f. Damper shall have AMCA seal for both air leakage and air performance.

2. Construction:

a. Frame:

1) Material: ASTM B 211, Alloy 6063 T5 extruded-aluminum profiles,0.07 inch thick.

2) Hat-shaped channel with integral flange(s). Mating face shall be a minimum of 1 inch.

3) Width not less than 5 inches.




b. Blades:

1) Hollow, airfoil, extruded aluminum. 2) Parallel or opposed blade configuration as required by application. 3) Material: ASTM B 211, Alloy 6063 T5 aluminum, 0.07 inch thick. 4) Width not to exceed 6 inches. 5) Length as required by close-off pressure, not to exceed 48 inches.

c. Seals:

1) Blades: Replaceable, mechanically attached extruded silicone, vinyl, or plastic composite.

2) Jambs: Stainless steel, compression type.

d. Axles: 0.5-inch-diameter plated steel, mechanically attached to blades. e. Bearings:

1) Molded synthetic or stainless-steel sleeve mounted in frame. 2) Where blade axles are installed in vertical position, provide thrust bearings.

f. Linkage:

1) Concealed in frame. 2) Constructed of aluminum and plated steel. 3) Hardware: Stainless steel.

g. Transition:

1) For round and flat oval duct applications, provide damper assembly with integral transitions to mate to adjoining field connection.

2) Factory mount damper in a sleeve with a close transition to mate to field connection.

3) Damper size and sleeve shall be connection size plus 2 inches. 4) Sleeve length shall be not less than 12 inches for dampers without jackshafts

and shall be not less than 16 inches for dampers with jackshafts. 5) Sleeve material shall match adjacent duct.

h. Additional Corrosion Protection for Corrosive Environments:

1) Provide anodized finish for aluminum surfaces in contact with airstream. Anodized finish shall be a minimum of 0.0007 inch thick.

2) Axles, damper linkage, and hardware shall be constructed of Type 316L stainless steel.

C. Rectangular Dampers with Steel Airfoil Blades:

1. Performance:

a. Leakage: AMCA 511, Class 1A. Leakage shall not exceed 3 cfm/sq. ft. against 1-in. wg differential static pressure.






maximum blade deflection of 1/200 of blade length. f. Damper shall have AMCA seal for both air leakage and air performance.

2. Construction:

a. Frame:

1) Material: ASTM A 653/A 653M galvanized-steel profiles, 0.06 inch thick. 2) Hat-shaped channel with integral flanges. Mating face shall be a minimum

of 1 inch. 3) Width not less than 5 inches.

b. Blades:

1) Hollow, airfoil, galvanized steel. 2) Parallel or opposed blade configuration as required by application. 3) Material: ASTM A 653/A 653M galvanized steel, 0.05 inch thick. 4) Width not to exceed 6 inches. 5) Length as required by close-off pressure, not to exceed 48 inches.

c. Seals:

1) Blades: Replaceable, mechanically attached extruded silicone, vinyl, or plastic composite.



1) Stainless steel mounted in frame. 2) Where blade axles are installed in vertical position, provide thrust bearings.

f. Linkage:

1) Concealed in frame. 2) Constructed of aluminum and plated or stainless steel. 3) Hardware: Stainless steel.

g. Transition:



3) Damper size and sleeve shall be connection size plus 2 inches.




4) Sleeve length shall be not less than 12 inches for dampers without jackshafts and shall be not less than 16 inches for dampers with jackshafts.

5) Sleeve material shall match adjacent duct.


1) Provide epoxy finish for surfaces in contact with airstream. 2) Axles, damper linkage, and hardware shall be constructed of Type 316L

stainless steel.

D. Rectangular Dampers with Aluminum Flat Blades:

1. Performance:

a. Leakage: Leakage shall not exceed 3.2 cfm/sq. ft. against 1-in. wg differential static pressure.



maximum blade deflection of 1/200 of blade length, not to exceed 3-in. wg. f. Damper shall have AMCA seal for both air leakage and air performance.

2. Construction:

a. Frame:

1) Material: ASTM B 211, Alloy 6063 T5 extruded-aluminum profiles,0.12 inch thick.

2) Hat-shaped channel with integral flanges. 3) Width not less than 5 inches.

b. Blades:

1) Flat blades of extruded aluminum. 2) Parallel or opposed blade configuration as required by application. 3) Material: ASTM B 211, Alloy 6063 T5 extruded-aluminum profiles,0.12

inch thick. 4) Width not to exceed 6 inches. 5) Length as required by close-off pressure, not to exceed 48 inches.

c. Seals:

1) Blades: Replaceable, mechanically attached extruded silicone, vinyl or plastic composite.


d. Axles: 0.5-inch-diameter plated or stainless steel, mechanically attached to blades. e. Bearings:




1) Molded-synthetic sleeve, mounted in frame. 2) Where blade axles are installed in vertical position, provide thrust bearings.

f. Linkage:

1) Concealed in frame. 2) Constructed of plated or stainless steel. 3) Hardware: Stainless steel.

g. Transition:



3) Damper size and sleeve shall be connection size plus 2 inches. 4) Sleeve length shall be not less than 12 inches for dampers without jackshafts

and shall be not less than 16 inches for dampers with jackshafts. 5) Sleeve material shall match adjacent duct.


1) Provide anodized finish for aluminum surfaces in contact with airstream. Anodized finish shall be a minimum of 0.0007 inch thick.

2) Axles, damper linkage, and hardware shall be constructed of Type 316L stainless steel.

E. Rectangular Dampers with Steel Flat Blades:

1. Performance:

a. Leakage: Leakage shall not exceed 4.8 cfm/sq. ft. against 1-in. wg differential static pressure.



maximum blade deflection of 1/200 of blade length, not to exceed 4-in. wg. f. Damper shall have AMCA seal for both air leakage and air performance.

2. Construction:

a. Frame:

1) Material: Galvanized steel,0.06 inch thick. 2) Hat-shaped channel with integral flanges. 3) Width not less than 5 inches.

b. Blades:




1) Flat blades with multiple grooves positioned axially for reinforcement. 2) Parallel or opposed blade configuration as required by application. 3) Material: Galvanized steel, 0.06 inch thick. 4) Width not to exceed 6 inches. 5) Length as required by close-off pressure, not to exceed 48 inches.

c. Seals:

1) Blades: Replaceable, mechanically attached, PVC-coated polyester. 2) Jambs: Stainless steel, compression type.


1) Molded-synthetic sleeve, mounted in frame. 2) Where blade axles are installed in vertical position, provide thrust bearings.

f. Linkage:

1) Concealed in frame. 2) Constructed of plated steel. 3) Hardware: Stainless steel.

2.3 GENERAL CONTROL-DAMPER ACTUATORS REQUIREMENTS

A. Actuators shall operate related damper(s) with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action or two-position action and proper speed of response at velocity and pressure conditions to which the damper is subjected.

B. Actuators shall produce sufficient power and torque to close off against the maximum system pressures encountered. Actuators shall be sized to close off against the fan shutoff pressure as a minimum requirement.

C. The total damper area operated by an actuator shall not exceed 80 percent of manufacturer's maximum area rating.

D. Provide one actuator for each damper assembly where possible. Multiple actuators required to drive a single damper assembly shall operate in unison.

E. Avoid the use of excessively oversized actuators which could overdrive and cause linkage failure when the damper blade has reached either its full open or closed position.

F. Use jackshafts and shaft couplings in lieu of blade-to-blade linkages when driving axially aligned damper sections.

G. Provide mounting hardware and linkages for connecting actuator to damper.

H. Select actuators to fail in desired position in the event of a power failure.

I. Actuator Fail Positions:




1. Outdoor Air: Close. 2. Supply Air: Open. 3. Return Air: Open.

2.4 ELECTRIC AND ELECTRONIC ACTUATORS

A. Type: Motor operated, with or without gears, electric and electronic.

B. Construction:

1. Less Than 100 W: Fiber or reinforced nylon gears with steel shaft, copper alloy or nylon bearings, and pressed steel enclosures.

2. 100 up to 400 W: Gears ground steel, oil immersed, shaft-hardened steel running in bronze, copper alloy, or ball bearings. Operator and gear trains shall be totally enclosed in dustproof cast-iron, cast-steel, or cast-aluminum housing.

3. Greater Than 400 W: Totally enclosed reversible induction motors with auxiliary hand crank and permanently lubricated bearings.

C. Field Adjustment:

1. Spring return actuators shall be easily switchable from fail open to fail closed in the field without replacement.

2. Provide gear-type actuators with an external manual adjustment mechanism to allow manual positioning of the damper when the actuator is not powered.

D. Two-Position Actuators: Single direction, spring return or reversing type.

E. Modulating Actuators:

1. Capable of stopping at all points across full range, and starting in either direction from any point in range.

2. Control Input Signal:

a. Three Point, Tristate, or Floating Point: Clockwise and counter-clockwise inputs. One input drives actuator to open position, and other input drives actuator to close position. No signal of either input remains in last position.

b. Proportional: Actuator drives proportional to input signal and modulates throughout its angle of rotation. Suitable for zero- to 10 V dc and 4- to 20-Ma signals.

c. Pulse Width Modulation (PWM): Actuator drives to a specified position according to a pulse duration (length) of signal from a dry-contact closure, triac sink or source controller.

d. Programmable Multi-Function:

1) Control input, position feedback, and running time shall be factory or field programmable.

2) Diagnostic feedback of hunting or oscillation, mechanical overload, mechanical travel, and mechanical load limit.

3) Service data, including at a minimum, number of hours powered and number of hours in motion.




F. Position Feedback:

1. Equip two-position actuators with limits switches or other positive means of a position indication signal for remote monitoring of position.

2. Equip modulating actuators with a position feedback through current or voltage signal for remote monitoring.

3. Provide a position indicator and graduated scale on each actuator indicating open and closed travel limits.

G. Fail-Safe:

1. Where indicated, provide actuator to fail to an end position. 2. Internal spring return mechanism to drive controlled device to an end position (open or

close) on loss of power. 3. Batteries, capacitors, and other non-mechanical forms of fail-safe operation are

acceptable only where uniquely indicated.

H. Integral Overload Protection:

1. Provide against overload throughout the entire operating range in both directions. 2. Electronic overload, digital rotation sensing circuitry, mechanical end switches, or

magnetic clutches are acceptable methods of protection.

I. Damper Attachment:

1. Unless otherwise required for damper interface, provide actuator designed to be directly coupled to damper shaft without need for connecting linkages.

2. Attach actuator to damper drive shaft in a way that ensures maximum transfer of power and torque without slippage.

3. Bolt and set screw method of attachment is acceptable only if provided with at least two points of attachment.

J. Temperature and Humidity:

1. Temperature: Suitable for operating temperature range encountered by application with minimum operating temperature range of minus 20 to plus 120 deg F.

2. Humidity: Suitable for humidity range encountered by application; minimum operating range shall be from 5 to 95 percent relative humidity, non-condensing.

K. Enclosure:

1. Suitable for ambient conditions encountered by application. 2. NEMA 250, Type 2 for indoor and protected applications. 3. NEMA 250, Type 4 or Type 4X for outdoor and unprotected applications. 4. Provide actuator enclosure with a heater and controller where required by application.

L. Stroke Time:

1. Operate damper from fully closed to fully open within 60 seconds. 2. Operate damper from fully open to fully closed within 60 seconds. 3. Move damper to failed position within 30 seconds.




4. Select operating speed to be compatible with equipment and system operation. 5. Actuators operating in smoke control systems comply with governing code and NFPA

requirements.

M. Sound:

1. Spring Return: 62 dBA. 2. Non-Spring Return: 45 dBA.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTROL-DAMPER APPLICATIONS

A. Control Dampers:

B. Select from damper types indicated in "Control Dampers" Article to achieve performance requirements and characteristics indicated while subjected to full range of system operation encountered.

1. Rectangular Exhaust Air Duct Applications with SMACNA Construction Class 2 and Velocities to 1500 FPM: Rectangular dampers with aluminum flat blades.

2. Rectangular Outdoor Air Duct Applications with SMACNA Construction Class 2 and Velocities to 1500 FPM: Rectangular dampers with aluminum airfoil blades

3. Rectangular Return Air Duct Applications with SMACNA Construction Class 2 and Velocities to 1500 FPM: Rectangular dampers with aluminum airfoil blades.

4. Rectangular Supply Air Duct Applications with SMACNA Construction 2 and Velocities to 1500 FPM: Rectangular dampers with aluminum airfoil blades.


A. Furnish and install products required to satisfy most stringent requirements indicated.

B. Properly support dampers and actuators, tubing, wiring, and conduit to comply with requirements indicated. Brace all products to prevent lateral movement and sway or a break in attachment when subjected to a force.

C. Provide ceiling, floor, roof, and wall openings and sleeves required by installation. Before proceeding with drilling, punching, or cutting, check location first for concealed products that could potentially be damaged. Patch, flash, grout, seal, and refinish openings to match adjacent condition.

D. Seal penetrations made in fire-rated and acoustically rated assemblies.

E. Fastening Hardware:

1. Stillson wrenches, pliers, or other tools that will cause injury to or mar surfaces of rods, nuts, and other parts are prohibited for assembling and tightening nuts.





3. Lubricate threads of bolts, nuts, and screws with graphite and oil before assembly.

F. Install products in locations that are accessible and that will permit calibration and maintenance from floor, equipment platforms, or catwalks. Where ladders are required for Owner's access, confirm unrestricted ladder placement is possible under occupied condition.

3.3 ELECTRIC POWER

A. Furnish and install electrical power to products requiring electrical connections.

3.4 CONTROL DAMPERS

A. Install smooth transitions, not exceeding 15 degrees, to dampers smaller than adjacent duct. Install transitions as close to damper as possible but at distance to avoid interference and impact to performance. Consult manufacturer for recommended clearance.

B. Clearance:

1. Locate dampers for easy access and provide separate support of dampers that cannot be handled by service personnel without hoisting mechanism.

2. Install dampers with at least 24 inches of clear space on sides of dampers requiring service access.

C. Service Access:

1. Dampers and actuators shall be accessible for visual inspection and service. 2. Install access door(s) in duct or equipment located upstream of damper to allow service

personnel to hand clean any portion of damper, linkage, and actuator.

D. Install dampers straight and true, level in all planes, and square in all dimensions. Install supplementary structural steel reinforcement for large multiple-section dampers if factory support alone cannot handle loading.

E. Attach actuator(s) to damper drive shaft.

F. For duct-mounted and equipment-mounted dampers installed outside of equipment, install a visible and accessible indication of damper position from outside.

G. Connect electrical devices and components to electrical grounding system.

H. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Each piece of wire, cable, and tubing shall have the same designation at each end for operators to determine continuity at points of connection.

I. Install engraved phenolic nameplate with damper identification on damper and on face of ceiling where damper is concealed above ceiling.




3.5 CHECKOUT PROCEDURES

A. Control-Damper Checkout:

1. Check installed products before continuity tests, leak tests, and calibration. 2. Check dampers for proper location and accessibility. 3. Verify that control dampers are installed correctly for flow direction. 4. Verify that proper blade alignment, either parallel or opposed, has been provided. 5. Verify that damper frame attachment is properly secured and sealed. 6. Verify that damper actuator and linkage attachment are secure. 7. Verify that actuator wiring is complete, enclosed, and connected to correct power source. 8. Verify that damper blade travel is unobstructed.

3.6 ADJUSTMENT, CALIBRATION, AND TESTING:

A. Stroke and adjust control dampers following manufacturer's recommended procedure, from 100 percent open to 100 percent closed back to 100 percent open.

B. Check and document open and close cycle times for applications with a cycle time of less than 30 seconds.

C. For control dampers equipped with positive position indication, check feedback signal at multiple positions to confirm proper position indication.




FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 231123 - 1

SECTION 231123 - FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Pipes, tubes, and fittings. 2. Piping specialties. 3. Piping and tubing joining materials. 4. Valves. 5. Pressure regulators.


A. Minimum Operating-Pressure Ratings:

1. Piping and Valves: 100 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated. 2. Service Regulators: 65 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated.

B. Natural-Gas System Pressure within Buildings: More than 0.5 psig but not more than 2 psig.



1.4 INFORMTIONAL SUBMITTALS






A. Steel Support Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."





C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B.

1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern. 2. Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M for butt welding and socket

welding. 3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint,

and threaded ends. 4. Protective Coating for Underground Piping: Factory-applied, three-layer coating of

epoxy, adhesive, and PE.

a. Joint Cover Kits: Epoxy paint, adhesive, and heat-shrink PE sleeves.

2.2 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Appliance Flexible Connectors:

1. Indoor, Fixed-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.24. 2. Indoor, Movable-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.69. 3. Outdoor, Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.75. 4. Corrugated stainless-steel tubing with polymer coating. 5. Operating-Pressure Rating: 0.5 psig. 6. End Fittings: Zinc-coated steel. 7. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1. 8. Maximum Length: 72 inches

B. Quick-Disconnect Devices: Comply with ANSI Z21.41.

1. Copper-alloy convenience outlet and matching plug connector. 2. Nitrile seals. 3. Hand operated with automatic shutoff when disconnected. 4. For indoor or outdoor applications. 5. Adjustable, retractable restraining cable.

C. Y-Pattern Strainers:

1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection. 2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller. 3. Strainer Screen: 40-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50

percent free area. 4. CWP Rating: 125 psig.




D. Weatherproof Vent Cap: Cast- or malleable-iron increaser fitting with corrosion-resistant wire screen, with free area at least equal to cross-sectional area of connecting pipe and threaded-end connection.

2.3 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas.

B. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

2.4 MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES

A. See "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles for where each valve type is applied in various services.

B. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Comply with ASME B16.33.

1. CWP Rating: 125 psig. 2. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1. 3. Dryseal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.3. 4. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas

Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.

5. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for valves 1 inch and smaller.

6. Service Mark: Valves 1-1/4 inches to NPS 2 shall have initials "WOG" permanently marked on valve body.

C. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110. 1. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 2. Ball: Chrome-plated bronze. 3. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof. 4. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof. 5. Packing: Threaded-body packnut design with adjustable-stem packing. 6. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff

Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 7. CWP Rating: 600 psig. 8. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction. 9. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.

D. Bronze Plug Valves: MSS SP-78. 1. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 2. Plug: Bronze. 3. Ends: Threaded, socket, as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve

Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 4. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated. 5. Pressure Class: 125 psig.




6. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

7. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.

2.5 PRESSURE REGULATORS


1. Single stage and suitable for natural gas. 2. Steel jacket and corrosion-resistant components. 3. Elevation compensator. 4. End Connections: Threaded for regulators NPS 2 and smaller.

B. Line Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80. 1. Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die-cast aluminum. 2. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable. 3. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel. 4. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at the

valve port. 5. Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable. 6. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon. 7. Single-port, self-contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at maximum

pressure inlet, and no pressure sensing piping external to the regulator. 8. Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream, and not exceed

150 percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff. 9. Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regulator. 10. Atmospheric Vent: Factory- or field-installed, stainless-steel screen in opening if not

connected to vent piping. 11. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 2 psig.

C. Appliance Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.18. 1. Body and Diaphragm Case: Die-cast aluminum. 2. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable. 3. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel. 4. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber. 5. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon. 6. Factory-Applied Finish: Minimum three-layer polyester and polyurethane paint finish. 7. Regulator may include vent limiting device, instead of vent connection, if approved by

authorities having jurisdiction. 8. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 2 psig.

2.6 DIELECTRIC UNIONS

A. Dielectric Unions: 1. Description:

a. Standard: ASSE 1079. b. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F. c. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with the International Fuel Gas Code for installation and purging of natural-gas piping.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.

D. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

E. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

F. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

G. Locate valves for easy access.

H. Install natural-gas piping at uniform grade of 2 percent down toward drip and sediment traps.

I. Install piping free of sags and bends.

J. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

K. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

L. Comply with requirements in Sections specifying gas-fired appliances and equipment for roughing-in requirements.

M. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect, including service-meter outlets. Locate where accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate is subject to freezing.

1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped. Use nipple a minimum length of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long and same size as connected pipe. Install with space below bottom of drip to remove plug or cap.

N. Extend relief vent connections for service regulators, line regulators, and overpressure protection devices to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap.

O. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors, and in floor channels unless indicated to be exposed to view.




P. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side down.

Q. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.

R. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each piece of equipment.

S. Do not use natural-gas piping as grounding electrode.

T. Install strainer on inlet of each line-pressure regulator and automatic or electrically operated valve.

U. Install pressure gage downstream from each line regulator. Pressure gages are specified in Section 230519 "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping."

V. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."

W. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."

X. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 230518 "Escutcheons for HVAC Piping."


A. Install manual gas shutoff valve for each gas appliance ahead of corrugated stainless-steel tubing or copper connector.

B. Install regulators and overpressure protection devices with maintenance access space adequate for servicing and testing.

3.3 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

C. Threaded Joints:

1. Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads complying with ASME B1.20.1. 2. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. 3. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter of pipe. 4. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dryseal

threading is specified. 5. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.




3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect to utility's gas main according to utility's procedures and requirements.

B. Install natural-gas piping electrically continuous, and bonded to gas appliance equipment grounding conductor of the circuit powering the appliance according to NFPA 70.

C. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance of appliances.

D. Connect piping to appliances using manual gas shutoff valves and unions. Install valve within 72 inches of each gas-fired appliance and equipment. Install union between valve and appliances or equipment.

E. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as practical to inlet of each appliance.

3.5 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for piping and valve identification.


A. Test, inspect, and purge natural gas according to the International Fuel Gas Code and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Natural-gas piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.7 INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Aboveground, distribution piping shall be the following:

1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints.

3.8 ABOVEGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Valves in branch piping for single appliance shall be the following: 1. Bronze plug valve.




HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 - 1

SECTION 232113 - HYDRONIC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes pipe and fitting materials and joining methods for the following:

1. Hot-water heating piping. 2. Chilled-water piping. 3. Condenser-water piping. 4. Makeup-water piping. 5. Condensate-drain piping. 6. Blowdown-drain piping. 7. Air-vent piping. 8. Safety-valve-inlet and -outlet piping.


A. Product Data: For each type of the following:

1. Pipe and fittings.




A. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure and temperature unless otherwise indicated:

1. Hot-Water Heating Piping: 150 psig at 250 deg F. 2. Chilled-Water Piping: 150 psig at 150 deg F. 3. Condenser-Water Piping: 150 psig at 150 deg F. 4. Makeup-Water Piping: 80 psig at 150 deg F. 5. Condensate-Drain Piping: 150 deg F.




6. Blowdown-Drain Piping: 200 deg F. 7. Air-Vent Piping: 200 deg F.

2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Drawn-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L.

B. Annealed-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type K.

C. DWV Copper Tubing: ASTM B 306, Type DWV.

D. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.

2.3 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel with plain ends; welded and seamless, Grade B, and wall thickness as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article.

B. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Classes 125 and 250 as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article.

C. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300 as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article.

D. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300 as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article.

E. Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Classes 25, 125, and 250; raised ground face, and bolt holes spot faced as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article.

F. Wrought Cast- and Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:

1. Material Group: 1.1. 2. End Connections: Butt welding. 3. Facings: Raised face.

2.4 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents.

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless otherwise indicated.

a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.




B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.

D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for joining copper with copper; or BAg-1, silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.

F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12M/D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

G. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled and working temperatures and pressures.

2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Dielectric Unions: 1. Description:

a. Standard: ASSE 1079. b. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F. c. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

2.6 BYPASS CHEMICAL FEEDER

A. Description: Welded steel construction; 125-psig working pressure; 5-gal. capacity; with fill funnel and inlet, outlet, and drain valves.

1. Chemicals: Specially formulated, based on analysis of makeup water, to prevent accumulation of scale and corrosion in piping and connected equipment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Hot-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller shall be any of the following:

1. Type L drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints. 2. Schedule 40 steel pipe; Class 150, malleable-iron fittings; cast-iron flanges and flange

fittings; and threaded joints.




B. Hot-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, shall be the following:

1. Schedule 40 steel pipe, welded joints.

C. Chilled-water piping, aboveground, NPS 2-1/2 and larger shall be the following:

1. Schedule 40 steel pipe; welded joints.

D. Condenser-water piping, aboveground, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, shall be the following:

1. Schedule 40 steel pipe; welded joints.

E. Makeup-water piping installed aboveground shall be following:

1. Type L drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints.

F. Condensate-Drain Piping: Type DWV, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints.

G. Air-Vent Piping:

1. Inlet: Same as service where installed with metal-to-plastic transition fittings for plastic piping systems according to piping manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Outlet: Type K (Type A), annealed-temper copper tubing with soldered or flared joints.

H. Safety-Valve-Inlet and -Outlet Piping for Hot-Water Piping: Same materials and joining methods as for piping specified for the service in which safety valve is installed with metal-to-plastic transition fittings for plastic piping systems according to piping manufacturer's written instructions.

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATIONS

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

E. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

F. Install piping at indicated slopes.

G. Install piping free of sags and bends.




H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

I. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

K. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves.

L. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 (DN 20) ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 (DN 20) threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage.

M. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow.

N. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.

O. Install branch connections to mains usingt ee fittings in main pipe, with the branch connected to the bottom of the main pipe. For up-feed risers, connect the branch to the top of the main pipe.

P. Install valves according to Section 230523.11 "Globe Valves for HVAC Piping," Section 230523.12 "Ball Valves for HVAC Piping," Section 230523.13 "Butterfly Valves for HVAC Piping," Section 230523.14 "Check Valves for HVAC Piping," and Section 230523.15 "Gate Valves for HVAC Piping."

Q. Install unions in piping, NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

R. Install flanges in piping, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger, at final connections of equipment and elsewhere as indicated.

S. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.

T. Comply with requirements in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for identifying piping.

U. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."

V. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."

W. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 230518 "Escutcheons for HVAC Piping."

3.3 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.




B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flanges.

C. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 5 and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits.

3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

C. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

D. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8/A5.8M.

E. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

3.5 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Sizes for supply and return piping connections shall be the same as or larger than equipment connections.

B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.

C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If parallel control valves are installed, only one bypass is required.

D. Install ports for pressure gages and thermometers at coil inlet and outlet connections.

3.6 CHEMICAL TREATMENT

A. Fill system with fresh water and add liquid alkaline compound with emulsifying agents and detergents to remove grease and petroleum products from piping. Circulate solution for a minimum of 24 hours, drain, clean strainer screens, and refill with fresh water.




B. Add initial chemical treatment and maintain water quality in ranges noted above for the first year of operation.


A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:

1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test. 2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test

pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing. 3. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace

strainer screens. 4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be

capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment.

5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test.

B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping:

1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be used.

2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release air. Use drains installed at low points for complete draining of test liquid.

3. Isolate expansion tanks and determine that hydronic system is full of water. 4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the

system's working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times the "SE" value in Appendix A in ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping."

5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.

6. Radiograph 3 of the first 8 welds of each qualified welders as selected by the Authority and 15% of the remaining welds as randomly selected the Authority. Radiographic examinations shall be performed by an qualified and certified independent inspector. The cost of all radiographic examinations shall be there responsibility of the contractor.

7. Failure of any joints require cutting and re-welding. One additional weld will be selected by the Authority for a radiographic examination at the contractor’s sole expense.

8. Prepare written report of testing.

C. Perform the following before operating the system:

1. Open manual valves fully. 2. Inspect pumps for proper rotation. 3. Set makeup pressure-reducing valves for required system pressure. 4. Inspect air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating

freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type). 5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow.




6. Inspect and set operating temperatures of hydronic equipment, such as boilers, chillers, cooling towers, to specified values.

7. Verify lubrication of motors and bearings.




HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES 232116 - 1

SECTION 232116 - HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes special-duty valves and specialties for the following:

1. Hot-water heating piping. 2. Chilled-water piping. 3. Condenser-water piping. 4. Makeup-water piping. 5. Condensate-drain piping. 6. Blowdown-drain piping. 7. Air-vent piping. 8. Safety-valve-inlet and -outlet piping.


A. Product Data: For each type of the following: 1. Air-control devices. 2. Hydronic specialties.




A. ASME Compliance: Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure and temperature unless otherwise indicated:

1. Hot-Water Heating Piping: 150 psig at 250 deg F. 2. Chilled-Water Piping: 150 psig at 150 deg F. 3. Condenser-Water Piping: 150 psig at 150 deg F. 4. Makeup-Water Piping: 80 psig at 150 deg F.




5. Condensate-Drain Piping: 150 deg F. 6. Blowdown-Drain Piping: 200 deg F. 7. Air-Vent Piping: 200 deg F.

2.2 AIR-CONTROL DEVICES

A. Manual Air Vents: 1. Body: Bronze. 2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous. 3. Operator: Screwdriver or thumbscrew. 4. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2 (DN 15). 5. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8 (DN 6). 6. CWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg F (107 deg C).

B. Expansion Tanks: 1. Tank: Welded steel, rated for 125-psig (860-kPa) working pressure and 375 deg F (191

deg C) maximum operating temperature, with taps in bottom of tank for tank fitting and taps in end of tank for gage glass. Tanks shall be factory tested after taps are fabricated and shall be labeled according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

2. Air-Control Tank Fitting: Cast-iron body, copper-plated tube, brass vent tube plug, and stainless-steel ball check, 100-gal. (379-L) unit only; sized for compression-tank diameter. Provide tank fittings for 125-psig (860-kPa) working pressure and 250 deg F (121 deg C) maximum operating temperature.

3. Tank Drain Fitting: Brass body, nonferrous internal parts; 125-psig (860-kPa) working pressure and 240 deg F (116 deg C) maximum operating temperature; constructed to admit air to compression tank, drain water, and close off system.

4. Gage Glass: Full height with dual manual shutoff valves, 3/4-inch- (20-mm-) diameter gage glass, and slotted-metal glass guard.

C. In-Line Air Separators: 1. Tank: One-piece cast iron with an integral weir constructed to decelerate system flow to

maximize air separation. 2. Maximum Working Pressure: Up to 175 psig (1207 kPa). 3. Maximum Operating Temperature: Up to 300 deg F (149 deg C).

2.3 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Y-Pattern Strainers:

1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection. 2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged ends for

NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger. 3. Strainer Screen: Stainless-steel, 40-mesh strainer, or perforated stainless-steel basket. 4. CWP Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa).

B. Stainless-Steel Bellow, Flexible Connectors:




1. Body: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing protective jacket.

2. End Connections: Threaded or flanged to match equipment connected. 3. Performance: Capable of 3/4-inch (20-mm) misalignment. 4. CWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). 5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F (121 deg C).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Install calibrated-orifice, balancing valves in the return pipe of each heating or cooling terminal.

B. Install check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow direction.

C. Install safety valves at hot-water generators and elsewhere as required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Install drip-pan elbow on safety-valve outlet and pipe without valves to the outdoors; pipe drain to nearest floor drain or as indicated on Drawings. Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1, for installation requirements.

D. Install pressure-reducing valves at makeup-water connection to regulate system fill pressure.

3.2 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION

A. Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting.

B. Install in-line air separators in pump suction. Install drain valve on air separators NPS 2 (DN 50) and larger.

C. Install expansion tanks on the floor. Vent and purge air from hydronic system, and ensure that tank is properly charged with air to suit system Project requirements.




HYDRONIC PUMPS 232123 - 1

SECTION 232123 - HYDRONIC PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Close-coupled, in-line centrifugal pumps. 2. Separately coupled, base-mounted, end-suction centrifugal pumps.


A. Product Data: For each type of pump.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CLOSE-COUPLED, IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, centrifugal, overhung-impeller, close-coupled, in-line pump as defined in HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3; designed for installation with pump and motor shafts mounted horizontally or vertically.


1. Casing: Radially split, cast iron, with threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet, replaceable bronze wear rings, and threaded companion-flange connections.

2. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, keyed to shaft, and secured with a locking cap screw. For constant-speed pumps, trim impeller to match specified performance.

3. Pump Shaft: Steel, with copper-alloy shaft sleeve. 4. Seal: Mechanical seal consisting of carbon rotating ring against a ceramic seat held by a

stainless-steel spring, and Buna-N bellows and gasket. Include water slinger on shaft between motor and seal.

5. Seal: Packing seal consisting of stuffing box with a minimum of four rings of graphite-impregnated braided yarn with bronze lantern ring between center two graphite rings, and bronze packing gland.

6. Pump Bearings: Permanently lubricated ball bearings.

C. Motor: Single speed and rigidly mounted to pump casing.




1. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

a. Enclosure: Open, dripproof. b. Enclosure Materials: Cast iron. c. Motor Bearings: Permanently lubricated ball bearings.

2.2 SEPARATELY COUPLED, BASE-MOUNTED, END-SUCTION CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, centrifugal, overhung-impeller, separately coupled, end-suction pump as defined in HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3; designed for base mounting, with pump and motor shafts horizontal.


1. Casing: Radially split, cast iron, with replaceable bronze wear rings, threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet, drain plug at bottom and air vent at top of volute, and threaded companion-flange connections. Provide integral mount on volute to support the casing, and provide attached piping to allow removal and replacement of impeller without disconnecting piping or requiring the realignment of pump and motor shaft.

2. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, keyed to shaft, and secured with a locking cap screw. For pumps not frequency-drive controlled, trim impeller to match specified performance.

3. Pump Shaft: Steel, with copper-alloy shaft sleeve. 4. Seal: Mechanical seal consisting of carbon rotating ring against a ceramic seat held by a

stainless-steel spring, and Buna-N bellows and gasket. 5. Seal: Packing seal consisting of stuffing box with a minimum of four rings of graphite-

impregnated braided yarn with bronze lantern ring between center two graphite rings, and bronze packing gland.

6. Pump Bearings: Grease-lubricated ball bearings in cast-iron housing with grease fittings.

C. Shaft Coupling: Molded-rubber insert and interlocking spider capable of absorbing vibration. EPDM coupling sleeve for variable-speed applications.

D. Coupling Guard: Dual rated; ANSI B15.1, Section 8; OSHA 1910.219 approved; steel; removable; attached to mounting frame.

E. Mounting Frame: Welded-steel frame and cross members, factory fabricated from ASTM A 36/A 36M channels and angles. Fabricate to mount pump casing, coupling guard, and motor.

F. Motor: Single speed, secured to mounting frame, with adjustable alignment.

1. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.




2. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

a. Enclosure: Open, dripproof. b. Enclosure Materials: Cast iron. c. Motor Bearings: Permanently lubricated ball bearings.

d. Efficiency: Premium efficient.

2.3 PUMP SPECIALTY FITTINGS

A. Suction Diffuser:

1. Angle pattern. 2. 175-psig pressure rating, cast-iron body and end cap, pump-inlet fitting. 3. Bronze startup and bronze or stainless-steel permanent strainers. 4. Bronze or stainless-steel straightening vanes. 5. Drain plug. 6. Factory-fabricated support.

B. Triple-Duty Valve:

1. Angle or straight pattern. 2. 175-psig pressure rating, cast-iron body, pump-discharge fitting. 3. Drain plug and bronze-fitted shutoff, balancing, and check valve features. 4. Brass gage ports with integral check valve and orifice for flow measurement.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PUMP INSTALLATION

A. Comply with HI 1.4.

B. Install pumps to provide access for periodic maintenance including removing motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories.

C. Independently support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps and weight of pumps is not supported by piping.

D. Automatic Condensate Pump Units: Install units for collecting condensate and extend to open drain.

E. Equipment Mounting:

1. Install base-mounted pumps on cast-in-place concrete equipment base(s).

F. Equipment Mounting: Install in-line pumps with continuous-thread hanger rods and spring hangers with vertical-limit stop of size required to support weight of in-line pumps.




1. Comply with requirements for hangers and supports specified in Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

3.2 ALIGNMENT

A. Perform alignment service.

B. Comply with requirements in Hydronics Institute standards for alignment of pump and motor shaft. Add shims to the motor feet and bolt motor to base frame. Do not use grout between motor feet and base frame.

C. Comply with pump and coupling manufacturers' written instructions.

D. After alignment is correct, tighten foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly. Completely fill baseplate with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout while metal blocks and shims or wedges are in place. After grout has cured, fully tighten foundation bolts.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Where installing piping adjacent to pump, allow space for service and maintenance.

C. Connect piping to pumps. Install valves that are same size as piping connected to pumps.

D. Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles.

E. Install check valve and throttling valve with memory stop on discharge side of pumps.

F. Install suction diffuser and shutoff valve on suction side of pumps.

G. Install flexible connectors on suction and discharge sides of base-mounted pumps between pump casing and valves.

H. Install pressure gages on pump suction and discharge or at integral pressure-gage tapping, or install single gage with multiple-input selector valve.

I. Install check valve and gate or ball valve on each condensate pump unit discharge.




HVAC WATER TREATMENT 232500 - 1

SECTION 232500 - HVAC WATER TREATMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes the following HVAC water-treatment systems:

1. Manual and automatic chemical-feed equipment and controls. 2. Chemical treatment test equipment. 3. Chemicals. 4. Water filtration equipment.


A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories for each type of product.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Closed hydronic systems shall have the following water qualities:

1. pH: Maintain a value within 9 to 10.5. 2. "P" Alkalinity: Maintain a value within 100 to 500 ppm. 3. Boron: Maintain a value within 100 to 200 ppm. 4. Chemical Oxygen Demand: Maintain a maximum value of 100 ppm. 5. Soluble Copper: Maintain a maximum value of 0.20 ppm. 6. TSS: Maintain a maximum value of 10 ppm. 7. Ammonia: Maintain a maximum value of 20 ppm. 8. Free Caustic Alkalinity: Maintain a maximum value of 20ppm. 9. Microbiological Limits:

a. Total Aerobic Plate Count: Maintain a maximum value of 1000 organisms/mL. b. Total Anaerobic Plate Count: Maintain a maximum value of 100 organisms/mL.




c. Nitrate Reducers: Maintain a maximum value of 100 organisms/mL. d. Sulfate Reducers: Maintain a maximum value of 0 organisms/mL. e. Iron Bacteria: Maintain a maximum value of 0 organisms/mL.

B. Open hydronic systems, including condenser water, shall have the following water qualities:

1. pH: Maintain a value within 8.0 to 9.1. 2. "P" Alkalinity: Maintain a maximum value of 100 ppm. 3. Chemical Oxygen Demand: Maintain a maximum value of 100 ppm. 4. Soluble Copper: Maintain a maximum value of 0.20 ppm. 5. TSS: Maintain a maximum value of 10 ppm. 6. Ammonia: Maintain a maximum value of 20 ppm. 7. Free "OH" Alkalinity: Maintain a maximum value of zero ppm. 8. Microbiological Limits:

a. Total Aerobic Plate Count: Maintain a maximum value of 1000 organisms/mL. b. Total Anaerobic Plate Count: Maintain a maximum value of 1000 organisms/mL. c. Nitrate Reducers: Maintain a maximum value of 100 organisms/mL. d. Sulfate Reducers: Maintain a maximum value of organisms/mL. 0 e. Iron Bacteria: Maintain a maximum value of 0 organisms/mL.

9. Polymer Testable: Maintain a minimum value within 10 to 40.

C. Passivation for Galvanized Steel: For the first 60 days of operation.

1. pH: Maintain a value within 7 to 8. 2. Calcium Carbonate Hardness: Maintain a value within 100 to 300 ppm. 3. Calcium Carbonate Alkalinity: Maintain a value within 100 to 300 ppm.

2.2 MANUAL CHEMICAL-FEED EQUIPMENT

A. Bypass Feeders: Steel, with corrosion-resistant exterior coating, minimum 3-1/2-inch fill opening in the top, and NPS 3/4 bottom inlet and top side outlet. Quarter turn or threaded fill cap with gasket seal and diaphragm to lock the top on the feeder when exposed to system pressure in the vessel.

1. Capacity: 2 gal. 2. Minimum Working Pressure: 150 psig.

2.3 CHEMICALS

A. Chemicals shall be as recommended by water-treatment system manufacturer that are compatible with piping system components and connected equipment and that can attain water quality specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.

B. Water Softener Chemicals:

1. Mineral: High-capacity, sulfonated-polystyrene ion-exchange resin that is stable over entire pH range with good resistance to bead fracture from attrition or shock. Resin




exchange capacity minimum 30,000 grains/cu. ft. of calcium carbonate of resin when regenerated with 15 lb of salt.

2. Salt for Brine Tanks: High-purity sodium chloride, free of dirt and foreign material. Rock and granulated forms are unacceptable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WATER ANALYSIS

A. Perform an analysis of supply water to determine quality of water available at Project site.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install chemical application equipment on concrete bases level and plumb. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices that require servicing are accessible. Anchor chemical tanks and floor-mounting accessories to substrate.

B. Install seismic restraints for equipment and floor-mounting accessories and anchor to building structure. See Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC" for seismic restraints.

C. Install interconnecting control wiring for chemical treatment controls and sensors.

D. Mount sensors and injectors in piping circuits.

E. Bypass Feeders: Install in closed hydronic systems, including and equipped with the following:

1. Install bypass feeder in a bypass circuit around circulating pumps unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

2. Install water meter in makeup-water supply. 3. Install test-coupon assembly in bypass circuit around circulating pumps unless otherwise

indicated on Drawings. 4. Install a gate or full-port ball isolation valves on inlet, outlet, and drain below feeder

inlet. 5. Install a swing check on inlet after the isolation valve.

F. Install automatic chemical-feed equipment for condenser water and include the following:

1. Install makeup-water softener. 2. Install water meter in makeup-water supply. 3. Install inhibitor injection pumps and solution tanks with injection timer sensing contacts

in water meter.

a. Pumps shall operate for timed interval on contact closure at water meter in makeup-water supply connection.

4. Install TSS controller with sensor and bleed valves.

a. Bleed valves shall cycle to maintain maximum TSS concentration.




5. Install pH sensor and controller with injection pumps and solution tanks.

a. Injector pumps shall operate to maintain required pH.

6. Install biocide feeder alternating timer with two sets of injection pumps and solution tanks.

a. Injection pumps shall operate to feed biocide on an alternating basis.

G. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

H. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance.

I. Make piping connections between HVAC water-treatment equipment and dissimilar-metal piping with dielectric fittings. Dielectric fittings are specified in Section 232113 "Hydronic Piping."

J. Install shutoff valves on HVAC water-treatment equipment inlet and outlet.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:

1. Inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and electrical connections.

2. Inspect piping and equipment to determine that systems and equipment have been cleaned, flushed, and filled with water, and are fully operational before introducing chemicals for water-treatment system.

3. Place HVAC water-treatment system into operation and calibrate controls during the preliminary phase of HVAC system's startup procedures.

4. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is tested and satisfactory test results are achieved.

5. Test for leaks and defects. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

6. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, and replaced water piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or concealed before it has been tested and approved.

7. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow test pressure to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects.

8. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping until no leaks exist.

B. Equipment will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.





3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC water-treatment systems and equipment.




METAL DUCTS 233113 - 1

SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Rectangular ducts and fittings. 2. Round ducts and fittings. 3. Sheet metal materials. 4. Sealants and gaskets. 5. Hangers and supports.


A. Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and performance requirements and design criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article.

B. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.



B. Delegated-Design Submittal:

1. Sheet metal thicknesses. 2. Joint and seam construction and sealing. 3. Reinforcement details and spacing. 4. Materials, fabrication, assembly, and spacing of hangers and supports.


A. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-up."

B. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and Insulation."




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.

B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2.2 ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.

B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Round Duct Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

D. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."




2.3 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60. 2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.

C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

1. Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials.

D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.4 SEALANT AND GASKETS

A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.

B. Two-Part Tape Sealing System:

1. Tape: Woven cotton fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum and modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight seal.

2. Tape Width: 3 inches. 3. Sealant: Modified styrene acrylic. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative. 7. Service: Indoor and outdoor. 8. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless

steel, or aluminum. 10. For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 11. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California


C. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:

1. Application Method: Brush on.




2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent. 3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water). 7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative. 8. Service: Indoor or outdoor. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless

steel, or aluminum sheets.

D. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.

1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric. 2. Type: S. 3. Grade: NS. 4. Class: 25. 5. Use: O. 6. For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 7. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California


E. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.

F. Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals:

1. Seal shall provide maximum 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and shall be rated for10-inch wg static-pressure class, positive or negative.

2. EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot. 3. Double-lipped, EPDM O-ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory-fabricated couplings

and fitting spigots.

2.5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.

B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.

C. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."

D. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603.

E. Steel Cables for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A 492.

F. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.




G. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials.

H. Trapeze and Riser Supports:

1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates. 2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates. 3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc chromate.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings.

B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install round ducts in maximum practical lengths.

D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.

E. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections.

F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines.

G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building.

H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.

I. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures.

J. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.

K. Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers. Comply with requirements in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers.

L. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials.




3.2 DUCT SEALING

A. Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct Schedule" Article according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

B. Seal ducts to the following seal classes according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible":

1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2. Outdoor, Supply-Air Ducts: Seal Class A. 3. Outdoor, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C. 4. Outdoor, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C. 5. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower: Seal

Class B. 6. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg: Seal

Class A. 7. Unconditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C. 8. Unconditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class B. 9. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower: Seal

Class C. 10. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg: Seal

Class B. 11. Conditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class B. 12. Conditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C.


A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports."

B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, mechanical expansion inserts, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection.

D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.

E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16 feet.

F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.




3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.

3.5 DUCT CLEANING

A. Clean new duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Use service openings for entry and inspection.

1. Create new openings and install access panels appropriate for duct static-pressure class if required for cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for insulated or lined duct. Patch insulation and liner as recommended by duct liner manufacturer. Comply with Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for access panels and doors.

2. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection. 3. Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process.

C. Particulate Collection and Odor Control:

1. When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with 99.97 percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron-size (or larger) particles.

2. When venting vacuuming system to outdoors, use filter to collect debris removed from HVAC system, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and other points of entry into building.

D. Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits:

1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers). 2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply

and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies.

3. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains.

4. Coils and related components. 5. Return-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes except in ceiling plenums and

mechanical equipment rooms. 6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes. 7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems.

E. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:

1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building.




2. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under negative pressure.

3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories.

4. Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct liner to get wet. Replace fibrous-glass duct liner that is damaged, deteriorated, or delaminated or that has friable material, mold, or fungus growth.

5. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and straighten fins.

6. Provide drainage and cleanup for wash-down procedures. 7. Antimicrobial Agents and Coatings: Apply EPA-registered antimicrobial agents if fungus

is present. Apply antimicrobial agents according to manufacturer's written instructions after removal of surface deposits and debris.

3.6 START UP

A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC."

3.7 DUCT SCHEDULE

A. Supply Ducts:

1. Ducts Connected to Terminal Units:

a. Pressure Class: Positive 1-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: C. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 24. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12.

2. Ducts Connected to Variable-Air-Volume Air-Handling Units:

a. Pressure Class: Positive 3-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6.

B. Intermediate Reinforcement:

1. Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel or carbon steel coated with zinc-chromate primer.

C. Elbow Configuration:

1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows."




a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower:

1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Mitered Type RE 4 without vanes.

b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm:

1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and two

vanes. 3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher:

1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two

vanes. 3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct


2. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows."

a. Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. b. Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes. c. Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct


3. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "Round Duct Elbows."

a. Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3-1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have proportionately fewer segments.

1) Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and three segments for 90-degree elbow.

2) Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and four segments for 90-degree elbow.

3) Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and five segments for 90-degree elbow.

4) Radius-to Diameter Ratio: 1.5.

b. Round Elbows, 12 Inches and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated. c. Round Elbows, 14 Inches and Larger in Diameter: Standing seam.




D. Branch Configuration:

1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-6, "Branch Connection."

a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry. b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Spin in.

2. Round: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct.

a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 90-degree tap. b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: Conical tap. c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 45-degree lateral.




AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 1

SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Backdraft and pressure relief dampers. 2. Manual volume dampers. 3. Flange connectors. 4. Turning vanes. 5. Duct-mounted access doors. 6. Flexible connectors. 7. Flexible ducts. 8. Duct accessory hardware.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION

A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60. 2. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.




B. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.

C. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.3 BACKDRAFT AND PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPERS

A. Description: Gravity balanced.

B. Maximum Air Velocity: 1000 fpm.

C. Maximum System Pressure: 1-inch wg.

D. Frame: Hat-shaped, 0.05-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel, with welded corners or mechanically attached.

E. Blades: Multiple single-piece blades, end pivoted, maximum 6-inch width, 0.025-inch-thick, roll-formed aluminum with sealed edges.

F. Blade Action: Parallel.

G. Blade Seals: Neoprene, mechanically locked.

H. Blade Axles:

1. Material: Nonferrous metal. 2. Diameter: 0.20 inch.

I. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

J. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.

K. Bearings: Steel ball or synthetic pivot bushings.

L. Accessories:

1. Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure. 2. Counterweights and spring-assist kits for vertical airflow installations. 3. Electric actuators. 4. Chain pulls. 5. Screen Mounting: Front mounted in sleeve.

a. Sleeve Thickness: 20 gage minimum. b. Sleeve Length: 6 inches minimum.

6. Screen Mounting: Rear mounted. 7. Screen Material: Galvanized steel. 8. Screen Type: Bird. 9. 90-degree stops.




2.4 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS

A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers:

1. Standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream. 2. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 3. Frames:

a. Frame: Hat-shaped, 0.094-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel. b. Mitered and welded corners. c. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.

4. Blades:

a. Multiple or single blade. b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design. c. Stiffen damper blades for stability. d. Galvanized-steel, 0.064 inch thick.

5. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. 6. Bearings:

a. Oil-impregnated bronze. b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full

length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.

7. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

B. Jackshaft:

1. Size: 0.5-inch diameter. 2. Material: Galvanized-steel pipe rotating within pipe-bearing assembly mounted on

supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper assemblies. 3. Length and Number of Mountings: As required to connect linkage of each damper in

multiple-damper assembly.

C. Damper Hardware:

1. Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch-thick zinc-plated steel, and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut.

2. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size. 3. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.

2.5 FLANGE CONNECTORS

A. Description: Add-on orroll-formed, factory-fabricated, slide-on transverse flange connectors, gaskets, and components.

B. Material: Galvanized steel.




C. Gage and Shape: Match connecting ductwork.

2.6 TURNING VANES

A. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.

1. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces and fibrous-glass fill.

B. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Nonmetal Ducts: Fabricate curved blades of resin-bonded fiberglass with acrylic polymer coating; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.

C. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

D. Vane Construction: Doublewall.

2.7 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS

A. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 7-2, "Duct Access Doors and Panels," and 7-3, "Access Doors - Round Duct."

1. Door:

a. Double wall, rectangular. b. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct

pressure class. c. Vision panel. d. Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inchbutt or piano hinge and cam latches. e. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.

2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets. 3. Number of Hinges and Locks:

a. Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches Square: No hinges and two sash locks. b. Access Doors up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks.

2.8 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics.

B. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.




C. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide attached to two strips of 2-3/4-inch-wide, 0.028-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch-thick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts.

D. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.

1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd.. 2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.

2.9 FLEXIBLE DUCTS

A. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, aluminum laminate and polyester film with latex adhesive supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene vapor-barrier film.

1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 210 deg F. 4. Insulation R-value: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.

B. Flexible Duct Connectors:

1. Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with a worm-gear action in sizes 3 through 18 inches, to suit duct size.

2.10 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE

A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct-insulation thickness.

B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.

B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.




C. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel.

1. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts. 2. Install aluminum volume dampers in aluminum ducts.

D. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

E. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.

F. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure.

G. Access Door Sizes:

1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches. 2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches. 3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches. 4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches. 5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches. 6. Body plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches.

H. Label access doors according to Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" to indicate the purpose of access door.

I. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.

J. Connect terminal units to supply ducts with maximum 12-inch lengths of flexible duct. Do not use flexible ducts to change directions.

K. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to ducts with maximum 60-inch lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place.

L. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with metal clamps.

M. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.


A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement. 2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be

performed. 3. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation.




CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS 233416 - 1

SECTION 233416 - CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: For each product.

1. Backward-inclined centrifugal fans. 2. Forward-curved centrifugal fans.


A. Product Data:

1. Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each fan. 2. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. 3. Certified fan sound-power ratings. 4. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories. 5. Material thickness and finishes, including color charts. 6. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required


3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 4. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic

restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases. 5. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and

attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails, and base weights.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For centrifugal fans to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BACKWARD-INCLINED CENTRIFUGAL FANS

A. Description:

1. Factory-fabricated, -assembled, -tested, and -finished, belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor, drive assembly, and support structure.

2. Deliver fans as factory-assembled units, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations. 3. Factory-installed and -wired disconnect switch.

B. Housings:

1. Formed panels to make curved-scroll housings with shaped cutoff. 2. Panel Bracing: Steel angle- or channel-iron member supports for mounting and

supporting fan scroll, wheel, motor, and accessories. 3. Horizontally split, bolted-flange housing. 4. Spun inlet cone with flange. 5. Outlet flange.

C. Backward-Inclined Wheels:

1. Single-width-single-inlet and double-width-double-inlet construction with curved inlet flange, backplate, backward-inclined blades, and fastened to shaft with set screws.

2. Welded or riveted to flange and backplate; cast-iron or cast-steel hub riveted to backplate.

D. Shafts:

1. Statically and dynamically balanced and selected for continuous operation at maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower, with adjustable alignment and belt tensioning.

2. Turned, ground, and polished hot-rolled steel with keyway. Ship with protective coating of lubricating oil.

3. Designed to operate at no more than 70 percent of first critical speed at top of fan's speed range.

E. Grease-Lubricated Shaft Bearings:

1. Self-aligning, pillow-block-type, ball or roller bearings with adapter mount and two-piece, cast-iron housing.

F. Belt Drives:

1. Factory mounted, with adjustable alignment and belt tensioning. 2. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor Size: 1.5. 3. Fan Pulleys: Cast iron or cast steel with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at

factory. 4. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 5 hp; fixed pitch for use

with larger motors. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of adjustment range at fan design conditions.




5. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt drives. 6. Belt Guards: Fabricate to comply with OSHA and SMACNA requirements of diamond-

mesh wire screen welded to steel angle frame or equivalent, prime coated. Secure to fan or fan supports without short circuiting vibration isolation. Include provisions for adjustment of belt tension, lubrication, and use of tachometer with guard in place.

7. Motor Mount: Adjustable for belt tensioning.

G. Accessories:

1. Access for Inspection, Cleaning, and Maintenance: Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.

2. Scroll Drain Connection: NPS 1 steel pipe coupling welded to low point of fan scroll. 3. Companion Flanges: Rolled flanges for duct connections of same material as housing. 4. Variable Inlet Vanes: With blades supported at both ends with two permanently

lubricated bearings of same material as housing. Variable mechanism terminating in single control lever with control shaft for double-width fans.

5. Shaft Cooler: Metal disk between bearings and fan wheel, designed to dissipate heat from shaft.

6. Spark-Resistant Construction: AMCA 99. 7. Shaft Seals: Airtight seals installed around shaft on drive side of single-width fans. 8. Weather Cover: Enameled-steel sheet with ventilation slots, bolted to housing.


A. Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install centrifugal fans level and plumb.

B. Disassemble and reassemble units, as required for moving to the final location, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.

D. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."




B. Install ducts adjacent to fans to allow service and maintenance.

C. Install piping from scroll drain connection, with trap with seal equal to 1.5 times specified static pressure, to nearest floor drain with pipe sizes matching the drain connection.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:

1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. 2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to

ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches.

3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete. 4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan

wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards.

5. Adjust belt tension. 6. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. 7. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts. 8. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in

connected ductwork systems are in fully open position. 9. See Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing For HVAC" for testing,

adjusting, and balancing procedures. 10. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

B. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Controls and equipment will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.





HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 233423 - 1

SECTION 233423 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Propeller fans.







B. AMCA Compliance: Fans shall have AMCA-Certified performance ratings and shall bear the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PROPELLER FANS

A. Housing: Galvanized-steel sheet with flanged edges and integral orifice ring with baked-enamel finish coat applied after assembly.

B. Steel Fan Wheels: Formed-steel blades riveted to heavy-gage steel spider bolted to cast-iron hub.

C. Fan Wheel: Replaceable, aluminum, airfoil blades fastened to cast-aluminum hub; factory set pitch angle of blades.

D. Fan Drive: Motor mounted in airstream, factory wired to disconnect switch located on outside of fan housing.

E. Fan Drive:




1. Resiliently mounted to housing. 2. Statically and dynamically balanced. 3. Selected for continuous operation at maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower,

with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation. 4. Extend grease fitting to accessible location outside of unit. 5. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor Size: 1.4. 6. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub. 7. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball bearings.

a. Ball-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 9, L10 of 100,000 hours.

8. Pulleys: Cast iron with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at factory. 9. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 5 hp; fixed pitch for use

with larger motors. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of adjustment range at fan design conditions.

10. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt drives. 11. Belt Guards: Fabricate of steel for motors mounted on outside of fan cabinet.

F. Accessories:

1. Gravity Shutters: Aluminum blades in aluminum frame; interlocked blades with nylon bearings.

2. Motor-Side Back Guard: Galvanized steel, complying with OSHA specifications, removable for maintenance.

3. Wall Sleeve: Galvanized steel to match fan and accessory size. 4. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted inside

fan housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit.


A. Certify sound-power level ratings according to AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

B. Certify fan performance ratings, including flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.




3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."

B. Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance.



1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.


1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. 2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to

ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches.

3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete. 4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan

wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards.

5. Adjust belt tension. 6. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. 7. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts. 8. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in

connected ductwork systems are in fully open position. 9. Disable automatic temperature-control operators, energize motor and adjust fan to

indicated rpm, and measure and record motor voltage and amperage. 10. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators. 11. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

C. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

B. Adjust belt tension.

C. Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.




D. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow.

E. Lubricate bearings.




AIR TERMINAL UNITS 233600 - 1

SECTION 233600 - AIR TERMINAL UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Shutoff, single-duct air terminal units. 2. Casing liner.


A. Product Data: For each type of air terminal unit.


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: lighting, sprinkler head, speakers, fire alarm devices, speakers, and air devices.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION


B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-up."

C. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, "Section 6 - Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning."

2.2 SHUTOFF, SINGLE-DUCT AIR TERMINAL UNITS

A. Configuration: Volume-damper assembly inside unit casing with control components inside a protective metal shroud.




B. Casing: 0.040-inch- thick galvanized steel, single wall.

1. Casing Liner: Comply with requirements in "Casing Liner" Article for fibrous-glass duct liner.

2. Air Inlet: Round stub connection or S-slip and drive connections for duct attachment. 3. Air Outlet: S-slip and drive connections. 4. Access: Removable panels for access to parts requiring service, adjustment, or

maintenance; with airtight gasket. 5. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with

requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.

C. Volume Damper: Galvanized steel with peripheral gasket and self-lubricating bearings.

1. Maximum Damper Leakage: AHRI 880 rated, 2 percent of nominal airflow at 3-inch wg inlet static pressure.

2. Damper Position: Normally open.

D. Control devices shall be compatible with temperature controls system specified in Section 230923 "Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC." 1. Electronic Velocity Controller: Factory calibrated and field adjustable to minimum and

maximum air volumes; shall maintain constant airflow dictated by thermostat within 5 percent of set point while compensating for inlet static-pressure variations up to 4-inch wg; and shall have a multipoint velocity sensor at air inlet.

2. Terminal Unit Controller: Pressure-independent, variable-air-volume (VAV) controller with electronic airflow transducer with multipoint velocity sensor at air inlet, factory calibrated to minimum and maximum air volumes, and having the following features:

a. Occupied and unoccupied operating mode. b. Remote reset of airflow or temperature set points. c. Adjusting and monitoring with portable terminal. d. Communication with temperature-control system specified in Section 230923

"Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC."

3. Room Sensor: Wall mounted with temperature set-point adjustment and access for connection of portable operator terminal.

E. Controls:

1. Suitable for operation with duct pressures between 0.25- and 3.0-inch wg inlet static pressure.

2. System-powered, wall-mounted thermostat.

2.3 CASING LINER

A. Casing Liner: Fibrous-glass duct liner, complying with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 90B; and with NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard."

1. Minimum Thickness: 3/4 inch.

a. Maximum Thermal Conductivity:




1) Type II, Rigid: 0.23 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean temperature.

2. Antimicrobial Erosion-Resistant Coating: Apply to the surface of the liner that will form the interior surface of the duct to act as a moisture repellent and erosion-resistant coating. Antimicrobial compound shall be tested for efficacy by an NRTL and registered by the EPA for use in HVAC systems.

3. Water-Based Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with ASTM C 916.

a. Adhesive VOC Content: 80 g/L or less. b. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California

Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."


A. Factory Tests: Test assembled air terminal units according to AHRI 880.

1. Label each air terminal unit with plan number, nominal airflow, maximum and minimum factory-set airflows, and AHRI certification seal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Ch. 5, "Hangers and Supports" and with Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete. 2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. 3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes and for

slabs more than 4 inches thick. 4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes and

for slabs less than 4 inches thick. 5. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.

C. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.

D. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.




3.2 TERMINAL UNIT INSTALLATION

A. Install air terminal units according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."

B. Install air terminal units level and plumb. Maintain sufficient clearance for normal service and maintenance.

C. Install wall-mounted thermostats.

D. Where installing piping adjacent to air terminal unit, allow space for service and maintenance.

E. Comply with requirements in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts" for connecting ducts to air terminal units.

F. Make connections to air terminal units with flexible connectors complying with requirements in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."

G. Label each air terminal unit with plan number, nominal airflow, and maximum and minimum factory-set airflows. Comply with requirements in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for equipment labels and warning signs and labels.



1. After installing air terminal units and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Leak Test: After installation, fill water coils and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.


B. Air terminal unit will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air terminal units.




DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 233713 - 1

SECTION 233713 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Rectangular and square ceiling diffusers. 2. Perforated return grilles.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include the following:

1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings.

2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.

B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CEILING DIFFUSERS

A. Rectangular and Square Ceiling Diffusers:

1. Devices shall be specifically designed for variable-air-volume flows. 2. Material: Steel. 3. Finish: Baked enamel, white. 4. Face Size: 24 by 24 inches. 5. Face Style: Three cone. 6. Mounting: T-bar. 7. Pattern: Fixed. 8. Dampers: Radial opposed blade .

B. Perforated Return Grille:

1. Material: Steel. 2. Pattern: Perforated with minimum 50% free area. 3. Finish: Baked enamel, white. 4. Face Size: 24 by 24 inches. 5. Face Style: Flush. 6. Mounting: T-bar. 7. Pattern Controller: None.



DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 233713 - 2

8. Dampers: None.


A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb.

B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.

C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing.




GAS VENTS 235123 - 1

SECTION 235123 - GAS VENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Listed double-wall vents.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for product.

B. Shop Drawings: For vents.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required


3. Detail fabrication and assembly of hangers and seismic restraints.



B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports. 2. AWS D9.1/D9.1M, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for shop and field welding of joints

and seams in vents.

B. Certified Sizing Calculations: Manufacturer shall certify venting system sizing calculations.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LISTED SPECIAL GAS VENTS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Heat-Fab, Inc. 2. Industrial Chimney Company. 3. M&G DuraVent, Inc.; a member of the M&G Group. 4. Metal-Fab, Inc. 5. Schebler Co. (The). 6. Security Chimneys International.

B. Description: Double-wall metal vents tested according to UL 1738 and rated for 480 deg F continuously, with positive or negative flue pressure complying with NFPA 211.

C. Construction: Inner shell and outer jacket separated by at least a 1/2-inch airspace.

D. Inner Shell: ASTM A 959, Type 29-4C stainless steel.

E. Outer Jacket: Stainless steel.

F. Accessories: Tees, elbows, increasers, draft-hood connectors, terminations, adjustable roof flashings, storm collars, support assemblies, thimbles, firestop spacers, and fasteners; fabricated from similar materials and designs as vent-pipe straight sections; all listed for same assembly. 1. Termination: See drawings for special vent termination arrangement.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.


3.2 APPLICATION

A. Listed Special Gas Vent: Condensing gas appliances.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF LISTED VENTS

A. Comply with minimum clearances from combustibles and minimum termination heights according to product listing or NFPA 211, whichever is most stringent.











B. Seal between sections of positive-pressure vents according to manufacturer's written installation instructions, using sealants recommended by manufacturer.

C. Support vents at intervals recommended by manufacturer to support weight of vents and all accessories, without exceeding appliance loading.

D. Lap joints in direction of flow.

3.4 CLEANING

A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris, and repair damaged finishes.




CONDENSING BOILERS 235216 - 1

SECTION 235216 - CONDENSING BOILERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes gas-fired condensing boilers, trim, and accessories for generating hot water.



1. Shop Drawings: For boilers, boiler trim, and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting attachment details.

2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Source quality-control reports.


C. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.



1.5 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of boilers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period for Condensing Boilers:

a. Leakage and Materials: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Heat Exchanger Damaged by Thermal Stress and Corrosion: Prorated for five

years from date of Substantial Completion.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS



B. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label boilers to comply with 2010 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

C. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Compliance: Boilers shall have minimum efficiency according to "Gas and Oil Fired Boilers - Minimum Efficiency Requirements."

D. DOE Compliance: Minimum efficiency shall comply with 10 CFR 430, Subpart B, Appendix N.

E. UL Compliance: Test boilers for compliance with UL 795. Boilers shall be listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

F. CSA Compliance: Test boilers for compliance with CSA B51.

G. Mounting Base: For securing boiler to concrete base.

1. Seismic Fabrication Requirements: Fabricate mounting base and attachment to boiler pressure vessel, accessories, and components with reinforcement strong enough to withstand seismic forces defined in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC" when mounting base is anchored to building structure.

2.2 FORCED-DRAFT, FIRE-TUBE CONDENSING BOILERS

A. Description: Factory-fabricated, -assembled, and -tested, fire-tube condensing boiler with heat exchanger sealed pressure tight, built on a steel base, including insulated jacket; flue-gas vent; combustion-air intake connections; water supply, return, and condensate drain connections; and controls. Water-heating service only.

B. Heat Exchanger: Nonferrous, corrosion-resistant combustion chamber.

C. Pressure Vessel: Carbon steel with welded heads and tube connections.

D. Burner: Natural gas, forced draft.

E. Blower: Centrifugal fan to operate during each burner firing sequence and to prepurge and postpurge the combustion chamber.

F. Gas Train: Combination gas valve with manual shutoff and pressure regulator.

G. Ignition: Spark ignition with 100 percent main-valve shutoff with electronic flame supervision.

H. Casing: 1. Control Compartment Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1A.




2. Insulation: Minimum 2-inch-thick insulation surrounding the heat exchanger. 3. Combustion-Air Connections: Inlet and vent duct collars.

2.3 TRIM

A. Include devices sized to comply with ASME B31.1.

B. Aquastat Controllers: Operating, firing rate, and high limit.

C. Safety Relief Valve: ASME rated.

D. Pressure and Temperature Gage: Minimum 3-1/2-inch-diameter, combination water-pressure and -temperature gage. Gages shall have operating-pressure and -temperature ranges, so normal operating range is about 50 percent of full range.

E. Boiler Air Vent: Manual.

F. Drain Valve: Minimum NPS 3/4 hose-end gate valve.

G. Circulation Pump: Nonoverloading, in-line pump with ECM motor having thermal-overload protection and lubricated bearings; designed to operate at specified boiler pressures and temperatures.

2.4 CONTROLS

A. Refer to Section 230923 "Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC" and Section 230993.11 "Sequence of Operations for HVAC DDC."

B. Boiler operating controls shall include the following devices and features:

1. Control transformer. 2. Set-Point Adjust: Set points shall be adjustable. 3. Sequence of Operation: Electric, factory-fabricated and field-installed panel to control

burner firing rate to maintain heating water temperature.

a. Include automatic, alternating-firing sequence for multiple boilers to ensure maximum system efficiency throughout the load range and to provide equal runtime for boilers.

C. Burner Operating Controls: To maintain safe operating conditions, burner safety controls limit burner operation.

1. High Cutoff: Automatic reset stops burner if operating conditions rise above maximum boiler design temperature.

2. Low-Water Cutoff Switch: Electronic probe shall prevent burner operation on low water. Cutoff switch shall be automatic reset type.

3. Blocked Inlet Safety Switch: Manual-reset pressure switch field mounted on boiler combustion-air inlet.

4. Audible Alarm: Factory mounted on control panel with silence switch; shall sound alarm for above conditions.




D. Building Automation System Interface: Factory install hardware and software to enable building automation system to monitor, control, and display boiler status and alarms.

1. Hardwired Points:

a. Monitoring: On/off status, all alarms. b. Control: On/off operation, hot-water-supply temperature set-point adjustment,

cascade operation, domestic hot water production operation.

2. A communication interface with building automation system shall enable building automation system operator to remotely control and monitor the boiler from an operator workstation. Control features available, and monitoring points displayed, locally at boiler control panel shall be available through building automation system.

2.5 ELECTRICAL POWER

A. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Electrical devices and connections are specified in electrical Sections.

B. Single-Point Field Power Connection: Factory-installed and -wired switches, motor controllers, transformers, and other electrical devices necessary shall provide a single-point field power connection to boiler.

2.6 VENTING KITS

A. Kit: Complete system suitable for use in common vented applications, ASTM A 959, Type 29-4C stainless steel, pipe, vent terminal, thimble, indoor plate, vent adapter, condensate trap and dilution tank, and sealant.

B. Combustion-Air Intake: Complete system, stainless steel, pipe, vent terminal with screen, inlet air coupling, and sealant.


A. Burner and Hydrostatic Test: Factory adjust burner to eliminate excess oxygen, carbon dioxide, oxides of nitrogen emissions, and carbon monoxide in flue gas and to achieve combustion efficiency; perform hydrostatic test.

B. Test and inspect factory-assembled boilers, before shipping, according to 2010 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 BOILER INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Mounting:




1. Install boilers on cast-in-place concrete equipment base(s).

B. Install gas-fired boilers according to NFPA 54.

C. Assemble and install boiler trim.

D. Install electrical devices furnished with boiler but not specified to be factory mounted.

E. Install control wiring to field-mounted electrical devices.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to boiler to allow service and maintenance.

C. Install piping from equipment drain connection to nearest floor drain. Piping shall be at least full size of connection. Provide an isolation valve if required.

D. Connect piping to boilers, except safety relief valve connections, with flexible connectors of materials suitable for service. Flexible connectors and their installation are specified in Section 232116 "Hydronic Piping Specialties."

E. Connect gas piping to boiler gas-train inlet with union. Piping shall be at least full size of gas-train connection. Provide a reducer if required.

F. Connect hot-water piping to supply- and return-boiler tappings with shutoff valve and union or flange at each connection.

G. Install piping from safety relief valves to nearest floor drain.

H. Boiler Venting:

1. Install flue venting kit and combustion-air intake. 2. Connect full size to boiler connections.



1. Perform installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Leak Test: Hydrostatic test. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 3. Operational Test: Start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Adjust

air-fuel ratio and combustion. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

a. Check and adjust initial operating set points and high- and low-limit safety set points of fuel supply, water level, and water temperature.




b. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.

B. Boiler will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


D. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain boilers.




HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC 235700 - 1

SECTION 235700 - HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes plate heat exchangers.



1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting seismic restraints and for designing bases.

2. Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: Details and design calculations for seismic restraints for heat exchangers.


A. Coordination Drawings: Equipment room, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Tube-removal space. 2. Structural members to which heat exchangers will be attached.

B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For heat exchanger, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

C. Source quality-control reports.

D. Field quality-control reports.

E. Sample warranty.






1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of domestic-water heat exchangers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Periods: From date of Substantial Completion.

a. Plate, Domestic-Water Heat Exchangers:

1) Plate-and-Frame Type: One year(s).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GASKETED-PLATE HEAT EXCHANGERS

A. Configuration: Freestanding assembly consisting of frame support, top and bottom carrying and guide bars, fixed and movable end plates, tie rods, individually removable plates, and one-piece gaskets.

B. Construction: Fabricate and label heat exchangers to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels," Division 1.

C. Frame:

1. Capacity to accommodate 20 percent additional plates. 2. Painted carbon steel with provisions for anchoring to support.

D. Top and Bottom Carrying and Guide Bars: Painted carbon steel, aluminum, or stainless steel.

1. Fabricate attachment of heat-exchanger carrying and guide bars with reinforcement strong enough to resist heat-exchanger movement during seismic event when heat-exchanger carrying and guide bars are anchored to building structure.

E. End-Plate Material: Painted carbon steel.

F. Tie Rods and Nuts: Steel or stainless steel.

G. Plate Material: 0.024 inch thick before stamping; Type 304 stainless steel.

H. Gasket Materials: Nitrile rubber.

I. Piping Connections:

1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1.




2. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for steel and stainless-steel flanges and according to ASME B16.24 for copper and copper-alloy flanges.

J. Enclose plates in solid aluminum removable shroud.


A. Factory Tests: Test and inspect heat exchangers according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels," Division 1. Affix ASME label.

B. Hydrostatically test heat exchangers to minimum of one and one-half times pressure rating before shipment.

C. Heat exchangers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Mounting:

1. Install heat exchangers on cast-in-place concrete equipment bases.

B. Install gasketed-plate heat exchanger on custom-designed wall supports anchored to structure as indicated on Drawings.

C. Install metal shroud over installed gasketed-plate heat exchanger according to manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Install brazed-plate heat exchanger on custom-designed wall supports anchored to structure as indicated on Drawings.

E. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for tube removal, service, and maintenance.

F. Install piping adjacent to heat exchangers to allow space for service and maintenance of heat exchangers. Arrange piping for easy removal of heat exchangers.

G. Install shutoff valves at heat-exchanger inlet and outlet connections.

H. Install relief valves on heat-exchanger heated-fluid connection and install pipe relief valves, full size of valve connection, to floor drain.

I. Install vacuum breaker at heat-exchanger steam inlet connection.

J. Install hose end valve to drain shell.




K. Install thermometer on heat-exchanger and inlet and outlet piping, and install thermometer on heating-fluid inlet and outlet piping. Comply with requirements for thermometers specified in Section 230519 "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping."

L. Install pressure gages on heat-exchanger and heating-fluid piping. Comply with requirements for pressure gages specified in Section 230519 "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping."



1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.


B. Heat exchanger will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.3 CLEANING

A. After completing system installation, including outlet fitting and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes.




ROTARY-SCREW WATER CHILLERS 236426 - 1

SECTION 236426 - ROTARY-SCREW WATER CHILLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Packaged, water-cooled, multiple-compressor chillers.


A. Condenser-Fluid Temperature Performance:

1. Startup Condenser-Fluid Temperature: Chiller shall be capable of starting with an entering condenser-fluid temperature of 60 deg F and providing stable operation until the system temperature is elevated to the minimum operating entering condenser-fluid temperature.

2. Minimum Operating Condenser-Fluid Temperature: Chiller shall be capable of continuous operation over the entire capacity range indicated with an entering condenser-fluid temperature of 55 deg F.

3. Make factory modifications to standard chiller design if necessary to comply with performance indicated.

B. Site Altitude: Chiller shall be suitable for altitude in which installed without affecting performance indicated. Make adjustments to affected chiller components to account for site altitude.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include refrigerant, rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.



A. Certificates: For certification required in "Quality Assurance" Article.

B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For chillers, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

C. Startup service reports.

D. Warranty.







A. ARI Certification: Certify chiller according to ARI 550 and ARI 590 certification program(s).

B. ARI Rating: Rate chiller performance according to requirements in ARI 506/110.

C. ASHRAE Compliance:

1. ASHRAE 15 for safety code for mechanical refrigeration. 2. ASHRAE 147 for refrigerant leaks, recovery, and handling and storage requirements.

D. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1

E. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label chiller to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1, and include an ASME U-stamp and nameplate certifying compliance.

F. Comply with NFPA 70.

G. Comply with requirements of UL and UL Canada and include label by a qualified testing agency showing compliance.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of chillers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Extended warranties include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Complete chiller including refrigerant and oil charge. b. Complete compressor and drive assembly including refrigerant and oil charge. c. Refrigerant and oil charge. d. Parts only and labor. e. Loss of refrigerant charge for any reason.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PACKAGED, WATER-COOLED, MULTIPLE-COMPRESSOR CHILLERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:





1. Carrier Corporation; a unit of United Technologies Corp. 2. Daikin Applied. 3. Trane.

B. Description: Factory-assembled and run-tested chiller with compressor(s), compressor motors and motor controllers, evaporator, condenser where indicated, electrical power, controls, and indicated accessories.

1. Disassemble chiller into major assemblies as required by the installation after factory testing and before packaging for shipment.

C. Fabricate chiller mounting base with reinforcement strong enough to resist chiller movement during a seismic event when chiller is anchored to field support structure.

D. Compressors:

1. Description: Positive displacement, hermetically sealed. 2. Casing: Cast iron, precision machined for minimum clearance about periphery of rotors. 3. Rotors: Manufacturer's standard one- or two-rotor design.

E. Service: Easily accessible for inspection and service.

1. Compressor's internal components shall be accessible without having to remove compressor-drive assembly from chiller.

2. Provide lifting lugs or eyebolts attached to casing.

F. Capacity Control: On-off compressor cycling and modulating slide-valve assembly or port unloaders combined with hot-gas bypass, if necessary, to achieve performance indicated.

1. Maintain stable operation throughout range of operation. Configure to achieve most energy-efficient operation possible.

2. Operating Range: From 100 to 20 percent of design capacity. 3. Condenser-Fluid Unloading Requirements over Operating Range: Drop-in entering

condenser-fluid temperature of 2.5 deg F drop for each 10 percent in capacity reduction.

G. Oil Lubrication System: Consisting of pump if required, filtration, heater, cooler, factory-wired power connection, and controls.

1. Provide lubrication to bearings, gears, and other rotating surfaces at all operating, startup, shutdown, and standby conditions including power failure.

2. Thermostatically controlled oil heater properly sized to remove refrigerant from oil. 3. Factory-installed and pressure-tested piping with isolation valves and accessories. 4. Oil compatible with refrigerant and chiller components. 5. Positive visual indication of oil level.

H. Vibration Control:

1. Vibration Balance: Balance chiller compressor and drive assembly to provide a precision balance that is free of noticeable vibration over the entire operating range.

a. Overspeed Test: 25 percent above design operating speed.






2. Isolation: Mount individual compressors on vibration isolators.

I. Sound Control: Sound-reduction package shall consist of removable acoustic enclosures around the compressors and drive assemblies that are designed to reduce sound levels without affecting performance.

J. Compressor Motors:

1. Hermetically sealed and cooled by refrigerant suction gas. 2. High-torque, induction type with inherent thermal-overload protection on each phase.

K. Refrigerant Circuits:

1. Refrigerant: Type as indicated on Drawings. 2. Refrigerant Type: R-134a. Classified as Safety Group A1 according to ASHRAE 34. 3. Refrigerant Compatibility: Chiller parts exposed to refrigerants shall be fully compatible

with refrigerants, and pressure components shall be rated for refrigerant pressures. 4. Refrigerant Circuit: Each shall include a thermal- or electronic-expansion valve,

refrigerant charging connections, a hot-gas muffler, compressor, suction and discharge shutoff valves, a liquid-line shutoff valve, a replaceable-core filter-dryer, a sight glass with moisture indicator, a liquid-line solenoid valve, and an insulated suction line.

5. Pressure Relief Device:

a. Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 15 and in applicable portions of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

b. ASME-rated, spring-loaded pressure relief valve; single- or multiple-reseating type.

6. Refrigerant Isolation: Factory install positive shutoff isolation valves in the compressor discharge line to the condenser and the refrigerant liquid-line leaving the condenser to allow for isolation and storage of full refrigerant charge in the chiller condenser shell.

L. Evaporator:

1. Description: Shell-and-tube design.

a. Direct-expansion (DX) type with fluid flowing through the shell, and refrigerant flowing through the tubes within the shell.

b. Flooded type with fluid flowing through tubes and refrigerant flowing around tubes within the shell.

2. Code Compliance: Tested and stamped according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

3. Shell Material: Carbon steel. 4. Shell Heads: Removable carbon-steel heads with multipass baffles, and located at each

end of the tube bundle. 5. Fluid Nozzles: Terminated with mechanical-coupling or flanged end connections for

connection to field piping. 6. Tube Construction: Individually replaceable copper tubes with enhanced fin design,

expanded into tube sheets.




M. Condenser:

1. Shell and tube, or without integral condenser; as indicated. 2. Shell and Tube:

a. Description: Shell-and-tube design with refrigerant flowing through shell, and fluid flowing through tubes within shell.

b. Provides positive subcooling of liquid refrigerant. c. Code Compliance: Tested and stamped according to ASME Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. d. Shell Material: Carbon steel. e. Water Boxes: Removable, of carbon-steel construction, located at each end of the

tube bundle with fluid nozzles terminated with mechanical-coupling end connections for connection to field piping.

f. Tube Construction: Individually replaceable copper tubes with enhanced fin design, expanded into tube sheets.

g. Provide each condenser with a pressure relief device, purge cock, and liquid-line shutoff valve.

3. Provide chiller without an integral condenser and design chiller for field connection to remote condenser. Coordinate requirements with Section 236313 "Air-Cooled Refrigerant Condensers."

N. Electrical Power:

1. Factory-installed and -wired switches, motor controllers, transformers, and other electrical devices necessary shall provide a single-point, field-power connection to chiller.

2. House in a unit-mounted, NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure with hinged access door. 3. Wiring shall be numbered and color-coded to match wiring diagram. 4. Install factory wiring outside of an enclosure in a raceway. 5. Field-power interface shall be to nonfused disconnect switch.

a. Disconnect means shall be interlocked with door operation. b. Minimum withstand rating shall be as required by electrical power distribution

system, but not less than 42,000 A.

6. Provide branch power circuit to each motor and to controls with one of the following disconnecting means:

a. NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, fusible switch with rejection-type fuse clips rated for fuses. Select and size fuses to provide Type 2 protection according to IEC 60947-4-1.

b. NEMA AB 1, motor-circuit protector (circuit breaker) with field-adjustable, short-circuit-trip set point.

7. Provide each motor with overcurrent protection. 8. Overload relay sized according to UL 1995 or an integral component of chiller control

microprocessor. 9. Phase-Failure and Undervoltage Relays: Solid-state sensing with adjustable settings.




10. Control Transformer: Unit-mounted transformer with primary and secondary fuses and sized with enough capacity to operate electrical load plus spare capacity.

11. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable time-delay relays. 12. For chiller electrical power supply, indicate the following:

a. Current and phase to phase for all three phases. b. Voltage, phase to phase, and phase to neutral for all three phases. c. Three-phase real power (kilowatts). d. Three-phase reactive power (kilovolt amperes reactive). e. Power factor. f. Running log of total power versus time (kilowatt-hours). g. Fault log, with time and date of each.

O. Compressor Starter Type:

1. Wye-Delta Closed Transition Starter

P. Controls:

1. Standalone and microprocessor based. 2. Enclosure: Share enclosure with electrical-power devices or provide a separate enclosure

of matching construction. 3. Operator Interface: Multiple-character digital or graphic display with dynamic update of

information and with keypad or touch-sensitive display located on front of control enclosure. In either imperial or metric units, display the following information:

a. Date and time. b. Operating or alarm status. c. Fault history with not less than last 10 faults displayed. d. Set points of controllable parameters. e. Trend data. f. Operating hours. g. Number of chiller starts. h. Outdoor-air temperature or space temperature if required for chilled-water reset. i. Temperature and pressure of operating set points. j. Entering- and leaving-fluid temperatures of evaporator and condenser. k. Difference in fluid temperatures of evaporator and condenser. l. Refrigerant pressures in evaporator and condenser. m. Refrigerant saturation temperature in evaporator and condenser. n. No cooling load condition. o. Elapsed time meter (compressor run status). p. Pump status. q. Antirecycling timer status. r. Percent of maximum motor amperage. s. Current-limit set point. t. Number of compressor starts. u. Compressor refrigerant suction and discharge temperature. v. Oil temperature. w. Oil discharge pressure. x. Phase current. y. Percent of motor rated load amperes.




z. Phase voltage.

4. Control Functions:

a. Manual or automatic startup and shutdown time schedule. b. Entering and leaving chilled-water temperatures, control set points, and motor load

limits. Chilled-water leaving temperature shall be reset based on DDC command. c. Current limit and demand limit. d. Condenser-fluid temperature. e. External chiller emergency stop. f. Antirecycling timer. g. Automatic lead-lag switching. h. Variable evaporator flow. i. Thermal storage.

5. Manually Reset Safety Controls: The following conditions shall shut down chiller and require manual reset:

a. Low evaporator pressure, or high condenser pressure. b. Low chilled-water temperature. c. Refrigerant high pressure. d. High or low oil pressure. e. High oil temperature. f. Loss of chilled-water flow. g. Loss of condenser-fluid flow. h. Control device failure.

6. Trending: Capability to trend analog data of up to five parameters simultaneously over an adjustable period and frequency of polling.

7. Security Access: Provide electronic security access to controls through identification and password with at least three levels of access: view only; view and operate; and view, operate, and service.

8. Control Authority: At least four conditions: Off, local manual control at chiller, local automatic control at chiller, and automatic control through a remote source.

9. Interface with DDC system for HVAC: Factory-installed hardware and software to enable the DDC system for HVAC to monitor, control, and display chiller status and alarms.

Q. Insulation:

1. Material: Closed-cell, flexible elastomeric, thermal insulation complying with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.

2. Thickness: 3/4 inch. 3. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer and applied to 100 percent of

insulation contact surface. Seal seams and joints. 4. Factory-applied insulation over cold surfaces of chiller capable of forming condensation.

Components shall include, but not be limited to, evaporator shell and end tube sheets, evaporator water boxes including nozzles, refrigerant suction pipe from evaporator to compressor, cold surfaces of compressor, refrigerant-cooled motor, and auxiliary piping.




a. Before insulating steel surfaces, prepare surfaces for paint, prime and paint as indicated for other painted components. Do not insulate unpainted steel surfaces.

b. Seal seams and joints to provide a vapor barrier. c. After adhesive has fully cured, paint exposed surfaces of insulation to match other

painted parts.

R. Finish:

1. Paint chiller, using manufacturer's standard procedures, except comply with the following minimum requirements:

a. Provide at least one coat of primer. b. Provide finish coat. c. Paint surfaces that are to be insulated before applying the insulation. d. Paint installed insulation to match adjacent uninsulated surfaces.

S. Accessories:

1. Factory-furnished, chilled- and condenser-water flow switches for field installation. 2. Individual compressor suction and discharge pressure gages with shutoff valves for each

refrigerant circuit. 3. Factory-furnished neoprene or spring isolators for field installation.


A. Perform functional tests of chillers before shipping.

B. Factory run test each air-cooled chiller with water flowing through evaporator.

C. Factory test and inspect evaporator and condenser according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

D. For chillers located indoors, rate sound power level according to ARI 575.

E. For chillers located outdoors, rate sound power level according to ARI 370.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CHILLER INSTALLATION

A. Install chillers on support structure indicated.

B. Equipment Mounting:

1. Install chillers on cast-in-place concrete equipment bases.

C. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance.

D. Charge chiller with refrigerant and fill with oil if not factory installed.




E. Install separate devices furnished by manufacturer and not factory installed.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 232113 "Hydronic Piping," Section 232116 Hydronic Piping Specialties,". Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to chiller to allow service and maintenance.

C. Evaporator Fluid Connections: Connect to evaporator inlet with shutoff valve, strainer, flexible connector, thermometer, and plugged tee with pressure gage. Connect to evaporator outlet with shutoff valve, balancing valve, flexible connector, flow switch, thermometer, plugged tee with shutoff valve and pressure gage, flow meter, and drain connection with valve. Make connections to chiller with a flange or mechanical coupling.

D. Condenser Fluid Connections: Connect to condenser inlet with shutoff valve, strainer, flexible connector, thermometer, and plugged tee with pressure gage. Connect to condenser outlet with shutoff valve, balancing valve, flexible connector, flow switch, thermometer, plugged tee with shutoff valve and pressure gage,flow meter, and drain connection with valve. Make connections to chiller with a flange or mechanical coupling.

E. Refrigerant Pressure Relief Device Connections: For chillers installed indoors, separate vent piping for each chiller to the outdoors without valves or restrictions. Comply with ASHRAE 15. Connect vent to chiller pressure relief device with flexible connector and dirt leg with drain valve.

F. Connect each chiller drain connection with a union and drain pipe, and extend pipe, full size of connection, to floor drain. Provide a shutoff valve at each connection.

3.3 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Verify that refrigerant charge is sufficient and chiller has been leak tested. 3. Verify that pumps are installed and functional. 4. Verify that thermometers and gages are installed. 5. Operate chiller for run-in period. 6. Check bearing lubrication and oil levels. 7. For chillers installed indoors, verify that refrigerant pressure relief device is vented

outdoors. 8. Verify proper motor rotation. 9. Verify static deflection of vibration isolators, including deflection during chiller startup

and shutdown. 10. Verify and record performance of fluid flow and low-temperature interlocks for

evaporator and condenser. 11. Verify and record performance of chiller protection devices.




12. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.

B. Inspect field-assembled components, equipment installation, and piping and electrical connections for proper assembly, installation, and connection.

C. Prepare test and inspection startup reports.




HYDRONIC AIR COILS 238216.11 - 1

SECTION 238216.11 - HYDRONIC AIR COILS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes hydronic heating and cooling air coils.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DESCRIPTION

A. ASHRAE Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."

2.2 COILS

A. Performance Ratings: Tested and rated according to AHRI 410 and ASHRAE 33.

B. Minimum Working-Pressure/Temperature Ratings: 200 psig, 325 deg F.

C. Source Quality Control: Factory tested to 300 psig.

D. Tubes: ASTM B 743 copper, minimum 0.035 inch thick.

E. Fins: Aluminum, minimum 0.008 inch thick.

F. Headers: Seamless copper tube with die formed holes and brazed joints.

G. Frames: 16 gauge 304 stainless steel, flanges to permit stacking and mounting with intermediate tube supports at no greater than 44” intervals.

H. Chilled-Water Coil Characteristics: 1. Tube Diameter: 0.625 inch. 2. Number of Rows: 6. 3. Brass threaded vents and drains.



HYDRONIC AIR COILS 238216.11 - 2

2.3 DRAIN PANS

A. Material: 18 304 gauge stainless steel.

B. Construction: Double slope, 1.25” stainless steel drain connections.

C. Insulation: 1.25” polyurethane foam.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install coils level and plumb.

B. Install coils in metal ducts and casings constructed according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible."

C. Install stainless-steel drain pan under each cooling coil. Provide intermediate drain pans.

1. Construct drain pans with connection for drain; insulated and complying with ASHRAE 62.1.

2. Construct drain pans to extend beyond coil length and width and to connect to condensate trap and drainage.

3. Extend drain pan upstream from coil face. 4. Extend drain pan under coil headers and exposed supply piping.

D. Straighten bent fins on air coils.

E. Clean coils using materials and methods recommended in writing by manufacturers, and clean inside of casings and enclosures to remove dust and debris.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to coils to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect water piping with unions and shutoff valves to allow coils to be disconnected without draining piping.




LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 1

SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less.

2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658.

B. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for Type THHN/THWN-2

Type XHHW-2 and Type USE.

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES

A. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type,

and class for application and service indicated.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by

a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.




B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and

larger, except VFC cable, which shall be extra flexible stranded.

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND

WIRING METHODS

A. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

B. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN/THWN-2,

single conductors in raceway.

C. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors

in raceway.

D. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN/THWN-2, single

conductors in raceway.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.

B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to

Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and

cables.

C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used

must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended

maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips that will

not damage cables or raceway.

E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and

follow surface contours where possible.

F. Support cables according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in

UL 486A-486B.

B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that

possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced

conductors.

1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice, termination, and tap for aluminum conductors.




C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 260553 "Identification for

Electrical Systems."

B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of

conductor, and identify as spare conductor.

3.6 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply

with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and

Cabling."



1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA

Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final

Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in conductors No. 3 AWG and

larger. Remove box and equipment covers so splices are accessible to portable scanner.

Correct deficiencies determined during the scan.

a. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of

each splice 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

b. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to

detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for

device.

c. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies splices

checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies

detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

B. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

1. Procedures used.

2. Results that comply with requirements.

3. Results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve

compliance with requirements.

C. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.




GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 1

SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, or as acceptable to the

Authority, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but

are not limited to, the following:

1. Burndy; Part of Hubbell Electrical Systems.

2. ERICO International Corporation.

3. Galvan Industries, Inc.; Electrical Products Division, LLC.

4. Harger Lightning & Grounding.

5. ILSCO.

6. O-Z/Gedney; an EGS Electrical Group brand; an Emerson Industrial Automation

business.

7. Robbins Lightning, Inc.

8. Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by


B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

2.3 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper or tinned-copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless

otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.




2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.

3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.

4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter.

5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.

6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8

inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.

7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper

ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.

2.4 CONNECTORS

A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in

which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items

connected.

B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy.

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for

materials being joined and installation conditions.

D. Bus-Bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression-type wire

terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for

No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.

B. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.

2. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.

B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those

required by NFPA 70:

1. Feeders and branch circuits.

2. Lighting circuits.

3. Receptacle circuits.

4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.

5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.

6. Flexible raceway runs.




C. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted

electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers,

humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct

and connected metallic piping.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise

indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may

be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:

1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit,

from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service

entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes;

use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange by using one of

the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect

grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or

sleeve to conductor at each end.

2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water

meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.

3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment

shutoff valve.


A. Perform tests and inspections. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of

accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to





HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 1

SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.

2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4 factory-fabricated components for field

assembly.

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, or as acceptable to

the Authority, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work

include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Allied Tube & Conduit.

b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.

c. ERICO International Corporation.

d. Thomas & Betts Corporation, A Member of the ABB Group.

e. Unistrut; an Atkore International company.

2. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-

4.

3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating

applied according to MFMA-4.

4. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-

4.

5. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary

protective covering before shipping.

6. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.

B. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated

fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

C. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M steel plates, shapes,

and bars; black and galvanized.

D. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their

supports to building surfaces include the following:




1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement

concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for

supported loads and building materials where used.

a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, or as

acceptable to the Authority, manufacturers offering products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1) Hilti, Inc.

2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; Illinois Tool Works, Inc.

3) MKT Fastening, LLC.

4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.

2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in

hardened portland cement concrete, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities

appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, or as

acceptable to the Authority, manufacturers offering products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.

2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc.

3) Hilti, Inc.

4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; Illinois Tool Works, Inc.

5) MKT Fastening, LLC.

3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units are similar to MSS

Type 18 units and comply with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58 units are suitable for

attached structural element.

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.

6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.

7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: Welded or bolted structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions

of supported equipment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical

equipment and systems unless requirements in this Section are stricter.

B. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Section 260533 "Raceways and

Boxes for Electrical Systems."




C. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for

EMTs, IMCs, and RMCs as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in

diameter.

D. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted or

other support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without

exceeding specified design load limits.

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single-bolt conduit clamps using

spring friction action for retention in support channel.

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this

article.

B. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength

will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits.

Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported

components plus 200 lb.

C. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten

electrical items and their supports to building structural elements.

D. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid the need for

reinforcing bars.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS

A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation

to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

3.4 PAINTING

A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply

galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.




RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 1

SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings.

2. Nonmetal conduits, tubing, and fittings.

3. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters.

4. Surface raceways.

5. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.


A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, hinged-cover enclosures, and

cabinets.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS

A. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined

in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.

C. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.

D. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel.

E. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.

F. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.

1. Fittings for EMT:

a. Material: Steel.

b. Type: compression.

2. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated

for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding

jumper.




G. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities

having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and

protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.

2.2 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS

A. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1 Type 3R unless

otherwise indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70.

1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a

qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters,

hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for

complete system.

2.3 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS

A. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets

installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.

B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.

C. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb.

Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb shall be listed and

marked for the maximum allowable weight.

D. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, cast

aluminum with gasketed cover.

E. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep.

F. Gangable boxes are allowed.

G. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 3R with continuous-

hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Fiberglass.

3. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated.

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT.




2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT.

3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC. Raceway locations including

Mechanical rooms.

4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.

5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet

locations.

6. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC.

7. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 nonmetallic

in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations.

B. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size.

C. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless

otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

2. EMT: Use compression, fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

3. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with

NEMA FB 2.20.

D. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.

E. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements

on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits.

Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and

number of floors.

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes.

Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems"

for hangers and supports.

D. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.

E. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for

control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of

changes in direction.

F. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.

Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

G. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached.




H. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply

listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound


I. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings

to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

J. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes

or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch trade size and insulated throat metal

bushings on 1-1/2-inch trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated

throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits.

K. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not

less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap

underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use.

L. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with

listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a

blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces.

M. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or

boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all

raceways at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated

spaces.

2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

N. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches of

flexible conduit for ecessed and semirecessed luminaires, equipment subject to vibration, noise

transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.

1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage.

2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.

O. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not

individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to

of box unless otherwise indicated.

P. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same

vertical channel.

Q. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.

R. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing

members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.

S. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by

conduits.




3.3 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply

with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and

Cabling."

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by

manufacturer.

2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating

recommended by manufacturer.




SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND

CABLING

260544 - 1

SECTION 260544 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND

CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Sleeves for raceway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls and floors.

2. Sleeve-seal systems.

3. Sleeve-seal fittings.

4. Silicone sealants.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Wall Sleeves:

1. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated,

plain ends.

2. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure

pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.

B. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Galvanized-steel

sheet; 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint, with

tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board.

C. PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.

D. Molded-PVC Sleeves: With nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

E. Molded-PE or -PP Sleeves: Removable, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with

nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

F. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings:

1. Material: Galvanized sheet steel.

2. Minimum Metal Thickness:




CABLING

260544 - 2

a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and with no side

larger than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch.

b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 50 inches or more and one or more

sides larger than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS


B. Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations.

C. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and Masonry-Unit

Floors and Walls:

1. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors:

a. Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant

appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in

Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

b. Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly

between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth;

protect material while curing.

2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

3. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or

cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed.

4. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are

used. Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush

with both surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting.

5. Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above

finished floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors.

D. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies:

1. Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved

opening.

2. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board

assemblies.

E. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible

boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

F. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and

mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe

and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.




CABLING

260544 - 3

G. Underground, Exterior-Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves

to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing

sleeve-seal system.




IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 1

SECTION 26 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies electrical identification materials and includes requirements for electrical identification including but not limited to the following:

1. Identification labeling for raceways, cables, and conductors. 2. Operational instruction signs. 3. Warning and caution signs. 4. Equipment labels and signs.

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Refer to other Division 26 sections for additional specific electrical identification

associated with specific items.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data for each type of product specified.

B. Schedule of all tags, markers, nameplates, signs, etc.


A. Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code."

B. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

1. American Engraving Co. 2. Seton Name Plate Co. 3. Standard Signs, Inc. 4. W.H. Brady, Co. 5. Almetek Industries 6. Tech Products, Inc. 7. William Frick & Company 8. Thomas & Betts

2.2 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Engraved, Plastic Laminated Labels, Signs, and Instruction Plates: Engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, 1/16-inch minimum thick for signs up to 20 square inches, or 8 inches in length; 1/8-inch thick for larger sizes. Drill holes for mechanical fasteners when mounted indoors.

B. Baked Enamel Warning and Caution Signs for Interior Use: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched

for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size appropriate to the location.

C. Exterior Metal Backed Butyrate Warning and Caution Signs: Weather resistant, nonfading, preprinted cellulose acetate butyrate signs with 20-gage galvanized steel backing, with colors, legend, and size appropriate to the location. Provide 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.

D. Fasteners for Plastic Laminated and Metal Signs: Self tapping stainless steel screws or number

10/32 stainless steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

E. Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking nylon cable ties, 0.18-inch minimum width, 50-lb minimum tensile strength, and suitable for a temperature range from minus 50 deg F to 350 deg F.

F. Cable Markers: Provide "E-Z Tag" as manufactured by Almetek Industries Inc., or "Everlast" tags

as manufactured by Tech Products Inc. Tags shall consist of 1.0 inch high numerals or letters placed in a tag holder. Tags and holder shall be manufactured from U.V. stabilized non-conductive, non-corrosive polyethylene or equal. Tag holder shall be black and numerals and letters shall be black on yellow background. Numerals and letters shall be oriented either horizontally or vertically depending on orientation of cable.

G. Pressure Sensitive Markers for Outdoor Equipment: Provide markers as manufactured by Almetek

Industries or William Frick & Company or equal. Provide minimum 1.0 inch high numerals or letters. On medium voltage equipment provide markers that are black on reflective yellow background. On low voltage equipment provide markers which are black on reflective silver background. Markers shall be resistant to U.V. light.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations with corresponding designations specified or indicated. Install numbers, lettering, and colors as approved in submittals and as required by code.

B. Install identification products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and

requirements of NEC.

C. Sequence of Work: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces that require finish, install identification after completion of finish work.

D. Low Voltage Conductor Color-Coding: Provide color coding for as follows:

208/120 Volts Phase 480/277 Volts Black Red Blue White Green

A B C Neutral Ground

Yellow Brown Orange Gray Green

E. Use low voltage conductors with color factory-applied the entire length of the conductors except as follows:

1. The following color-coding methods may be used in lieu of factory color-coded wire

for sizes No. 4 AWG and Larger.

a. Apply colored, pressure-sensitive plastic tape in half lapped turns for a distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply the last two laps of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding.

F. Provide warning, caution, and instruction signs as follows:

1. Install warning, caution, or instruction signs where required by NEC, where indicated,

or where required for safe operation and maintenance of electrical systems. Install engraved plastic laminated instruction signs where instructions or explanations are needed for system or equipment operation. Install butyrate signs with metal backing for outdoor items. Attach signs to outdoor equipment using two-part epoxy cement.

2. Emergency Operating Signs: Where required provide engraved laminate signs with white legend on red background with minimum 3/8-inch high lettering for emergency instructions.

G. Provide equipment/system, circuit/device identification as follows:

1. Provide engraved plastic laminate identification markers on electrical equipment. For




240V systems and below provide white lettering on black background. For 480/277V systems, use black lettering on yellow background. Text shall match terminology and numbering of the Contract Documents and shop drawings. Apply markers on all of the following:

a. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures. b. . c. . d. Disconnect switches. e. Control equipment. f. Circuit breakers

H. Circuit Schedules: For panelboards provide typed circuit schedules with identification of

items controlled by each breaker.

I. Install labels, tags and markers at locations for best convenience of viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

J. Pad Mounted Equipment: Place 1.0-inch high, black on reflective yellow marker indicating

voltage and circuit number in upper left corner of exterior of door securing feeder compartment. Where two feeders enter a compartment, place marker on exterior of door along top edge opposite respective feeder.

K. Raceway: Identify with pressure sensitive markers purpose of circuit ( i.e., lighting, power, alarm, signal, PA, etc.). Place marker on junction boxes and along raceway on 150-foot centers. Markers shall be black on white background.




WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 1

SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Receptacles and associated device plates. 2. Snap switches.

1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:

1. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.



B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS

A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.




C. Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted under the following conditions:

1. Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire. 2. Devices shall comply with the requirements in this Section.

2.3 STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLES

A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, or as acceptable to

the Authority, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Cooper Wiring Devices, Inc.; Division of Cooper Industries, Inc. b. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. c. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour).

2.4 TOGGLE SWITCHES

A. Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896.

B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:

1. Single Pole: a. Cooper; AH1221. b. Hubbell; HBL1221. c. Leviton; 1221-2. d. Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC1.

2.5 WALL PLATES

A. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic. 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic. 4. Material for Damp Locations: Thermoplastic with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and

labeled for use in wet and damp locations.

B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weather-resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover.

2.6 FINISHES

A. Device Color:

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=3767&mf=04&src=wd





http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456818140&mf=04&src=wd







1. Wiring Devices shall be Ivory unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.

B. Wall Plate Color: For plastic covers, match device color.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Coordination with Other Trades:

1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of boxes.

2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.

3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.

4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

C. Conductors:

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated on devices.

2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.

3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails.

4. Existing Conductors:

a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is large enough.

D. Device Installation:

1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were installed before building finishing operations were complete.

2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors.

3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment.

4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length.




5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal screw.

6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer. 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice

No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold

device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

E. Receptacle Orientation:

1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the right.

F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.

G. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.

H. Adjust locations of service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings.



1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. 2. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital

readout or illuminated digital-display indicators of measurement.

B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:

1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is unacceptable. 3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 4. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 5. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit

breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.

C. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.





ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 1

SECTION 262816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Nonfusible switches.

2. Enclosures.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. NC: Normally closed.

B. NO: Normally open.

C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.


A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component

indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data

on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations, sections,

details, and attachments to other work.

1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition, include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit

breakers.

2. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent

protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective

device.





A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site

testing.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by


C. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment

served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances

for equipment access doors and panels.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Eaton.

2. General Electric Company.

3. Siemens Industry, Inc.

4. Square D; by Schneider Electric.

B. Type GD, General Duty, Single Throw, 600 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1,

horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with

cover in closed position.

C. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1,

horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with

cover in closed position.

D. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground

conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded;

labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Isolated Ground Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and

bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

4. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.




2.2 MOLDED-CASE SWITCHES

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Eaton.

2. General Electric Company.

3. Siemens Industry, Inc.

4. Square D; by Schneider Electric.

B. General Requirements: MCCB with fixed, high-set instantaneous trip only, and short-circuit

withstand rating equal to equivalent breaker frame size interrupting rating.

C. Features and Accessories:

1. Standard frame sizes and number of poles.

2. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material.

3. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage without intentional

time delay.

4. Auxiliary Contacts: Two SPDT switches with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic

switch contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of switch contacts.

5. Electrical Operator: Provide remote control for on, off, and reset operations.

6. Accessory Control Power Voltage: Integrally mounted, self-powered.

2.3 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50,

to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.

1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.

2. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.

3. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:

NEMA 250, Type 12.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance

with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless


B. Comply with NECA 1.




3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide

warning signs.

2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component,

connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA

Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate

compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

3. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and

malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and

inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches

and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies

detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as

recommended by manufacturer.

B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges




VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 262923 - 1

SECTION 262923 - VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes separately enclosed, preassembled, combination VFCs, rated 600 V and less,

for speed control of three-phase, squirrel-cage induction motors.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. CPT: Control power transformer.

B. DDC: Direct digital control.

C. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

D. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device.

E. PID: Control action, proportional plus integral plus derivative.

F. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.

G. VFC: Variable-frequency motor controller.


A. Product Data: For each type and rating of VFC indicated.




A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace VFCs that fail in materials or

workmanship within specified warranty period.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



1. Square D

2. Danfoss

3. ABB

4. General Electric


A. General Requirements for VFCs:

1. VFCs and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing

agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2. Comply with NEMA ICS 7, NEMA ICS 61800-2, and UL 508A.

B. Application: variable torque.

C. VFC Description: Variable-frequency motor controller, consisting of power converter that

employs pulse-width-modulated inverter, factory built and tested in an enclosure, with integral

disconnecting means and overcurrent and overload protection; listed and labeled by an NRTL as

a complete unit; arranged to provide self-protection, protection, and variable-speed control of

one or more three-phase induction motors by adjusting output voltage and frequency.

1. Units suitable for operation of NEMA MG 1 motors.

2. Listed and labeled for integrated short-circuit current (withstand) rating by an NRTL

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Design and Rating: Match load type, such as fans, blowers, and pumps; and type of connection

used between motor and load such as direct or through a power-transmission connection.

E. Output Rating: Three phase; 10 to 60 Hz, with voltage proportional to frequency throughout

voltage range; maximum voltage equals input voltage.

F. Unit Operating Requirements:

1. Input AC Voltage Tolerance: Plus 10 and minus 10 percent of VFC input voltage rating.

2. Input AC Voltage Unbalance: Not exceeding 3 percent.

3. Input Frequency Tolerance: Plus or minus 3 percent of VFC frequency rating.

4. Minimum Efficiency: 96 percent at 60 Hz, full load.

5. Minimum Displacement Primary-Side Power Factor: 98 percent under any load or speed

condition.

6. Minimum Short-Circuit Current (Withstand) Rating: 35 kA.

7. Ambient Temperature Rating: Not less than 32 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F.

8. Humidity Rating: Less than 95 percent (noncondensing).

9. Altitude Rating: Not exceeding 3300 feet.




10. Overload Capability: 1.1 times the base load current for 60 seconds; minimum of 1.8

times the base load current for three seconds.

11. Speed Regulation: Plus or minus 5 percent.

12. Stop Modes: Programmable; includes fast, free-wheel, and dc injection braking.

G. Inverter Logic: Microprocessor based, isolated from all power circuits.

H. Isolated Control Interface: Allows VFCs to follow remote-control signal over a minimum 40:1

speed range.

1. Signal: Electrical.

I. Internal Adjustability Capabilities:

1. Minimum Speed: 5 to 25 percent of maximum rpm.

2. Maximum Speed: 80 to 100 percent of maximum rpm.

3. Acceleration: 0.1 to 999.9 seconds.

4. Deceleration: 0.1 to 999.9 seconds.

5. Current Limit: 30 to minimum of 150 percent of maximum rating.

J. Self-Protection and Reliability Features:

1. Surge Suppression: Factory installed as an integral part of the VFC, complying with

UL 1449 SPD, Type 1 or Type 2.

2. Loss of Input Signal Protection: Selectable response strategy, including speed default to a

percent of the most recent speed, a preset speed, or stop; with alarm.

3. Under- and overvoltage trips.

4. Inverter overcurrent trips.

5. VFC and Motor-Overload/Overtemperature Protection: Microprocessor-based thermal

protection system for monitoring VFCs and motor thermal characteristics, and for

providing VFC overtemperature and motor-overload alarm and trip; settings selectable

via the keypad.

6. Critical frequency rejection, with three selectable, adjustable deadbands.

7. Instantaneous line-to-line and line-to-ground overcurrent trips.

8. Loss-of-phase protection.

9. Reverse-phase protection.

10. Short-circuit protection.

11. Motor-overtemperature fault.

K. Power-Interruption Protection: To prevent motor from re-energizing after a power interruption

until motor has stopped, unless "Bidirectional Autospeed Search" feature is available and

engaged.

L. Bidirectional Autospeed Search: Capable of starting VFC into rotating loads spinning in either

direction and returning motor to set speed in proper direction, without causing damage to drive,

motor, or load.

M. Torque Boost: Automatically varies starting and continuous torque to at least 1.5 times the

minimum torque to ensure high-starting torque and increased torque at slow speeds.




N. Motor Temperature Compensation at Slow Speeds: Adjustable current fall-back based on output

frequency for temperature protection of self-cooled, fan-ventilated motors at slow speeds.

O. Integral Input Disconnecting Means NEMA KS 1, fusible switch with pad-lockable, door-

mounted handle mechanism.

1. Disconnect Rating: Not less than 115 percent of NFPA 70 motor full-load current rating

or VFC input current rating, whichever is larger.

2. Auxiliary Contacts: NO or NC, arranged to activate before switch blades open.

2.3 CONTROLS AND INDICATION

A. Status Lights: Door-mounted LED indicators displaying the following conditions:

1. Power on.

2. Run.

B. Panel-Mounted Operator Station: Manufacturer's standard front-accessible, sealed keypad and

plain-English-language digital display; allows complete programming, program copying,

operating, monitoring, and diagnostic capability.

1. Keypad: In addition to required programming and control keys, include keys for HAND,

OFF, and AUTO modes.

2. Security Access: Provide electronic security access to controls through identification and

password with at least one level of access: View only; view and operate; and view,

operate, and service.

a. Control Authority: Supports at least four conditions: Off, local manual control at

VFC, local automatic control at VFC, and automatic control through a remote

source.

C. Historical Logging Information and Displays:

1. Total run time.

2. Fault log, maintaining last four faults with time and date stamp for each.

D. Indicating Devices: Digital display mounted flush in VFC door and connected to display VFC

parameters including, but not limited to:

1. Output frequency (Hz).

2. Motor speed (rpm).

3. Motor status (running, stop, fault).

4. Motor current (amperes).

5. Motor torque (percent).

6. Fault or alarming status (code).

7. PID feedback signal (percent).

8. DC-link voltage (V dc).

9. Set point frequency (Hz).

10. Motor output voltage (V ac).




2.4 BYPASS SYSTEMS

A. Bypass Operation: Manually transfers motor between power converter output and bypass

circuit. Unit is capable of stable operation (starting, stopping, and running) with motor

completely disconnected from power converter.

B. Bypass Mode: Manual operation only; requires local operator selection at VFC. Transfer

between power converter and bypass contactor, and retransfer shall only be allowed with the

motor at zero speed.

C. Bypass Controller: Two-contactor-style bypass allows motor operation via the power converter

or the bypass controller; with input isolating switch and barrier arranged to isolate the power

converter and permit safe troubleshooting and testing, both energized and de-energized, while

motor is operating in bypass mode.

1. Bypass Contactor: Load-break, IEC-rated contactor.

2. Output Isolating Contactor: Non-load-break, IEC-rated contactor.

3. Isolating Switch: Non-load-break switch arranged to isolate power converter and permit

safe troubleshooting and testing of the power converter, both energized and de-energized,

while motor is operating in bypass mode; pad-lockable, door-mounted handle

mechanism.

D. Bypass Contactor Configuration: Full-voltage (across-the-line) type.

1. NORMAL/BYPASS selector switch.

2. HAND/OFF/AUTO selector switch.

3. NORMAL/TEST Selector Switch: Allows testing and adjusting of VFC while the motor

is running in the bypass mode.

4. Contactor Coils: Pressure-encapsulated type with coil transient suppressors.

a. Operating Voltage: Depending on contactor NEMA size and line-voltage rating,

manufacturer's standard matching control power or line voltage.

b. Power Contacts: Totally enclosed, double break, and silver-cadmium oxide;

assembled to allow inspection and replacement without disturbing line or load

wiring.

5. Control Circuits: 120-V ac; obtained from integral CPT, with primary and secondary

fuses, with CPT control power source of sufficient capacity to operate all integral devices

and remotely located pilot, indicating, and control devices.

a. CPT Spare Capacity: 100 VA.

6. Overload Relays: NEMA ICS 2.

2.5 ENCLOSURES

A. VFC Enclosures: NEMA 250, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.

1. Dry and Clean Indoor Locations: Type 1.




2.6 ACCESSORIES

A. General Requirements for Control-Circuit and Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5; factory installed in

VFC enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated.

1. Push Buttons: Covered.

2. Pilot Lights: Push to test.

3. Selector Switches: Rotary type.

B. Reversible NC/NO bypass contactor auxiliary contact(s).

C. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable solid state time-delay relays.

D. Phase-Failure, Phase-Reversal, and Undervoltage and Overvoltage Relays: Solid-state sensing

circuit with isolated output contacts for hard-wired connections. Provide adjustable

undervoltage, overvoltage, and time-delay settings.

1. Current Transformers: Continuous current rating, basic impulse insulating level (BIL)

rating, burden, and accuracy class suitable for connected circuitry. Comply with

IEEE C57.13.

E. Supplemental Digital Meters:

1. Elapsed-time meter.

2. Kilowatt meter.

3. Kilowatt-hour meter.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Wall-Mounting Controllers: Install with tops at uniform height and with disconnect operating

handles not higher than 79 inches above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated, and by

bolting units to wall or mounting on lightweight structural-steel channels bolted to wall. For

controllers not on walls, provide freestanding racks complying with Section 260529 "Hangers

and Supports for Electrical Systems."

B. Retain "Roof-Mounting Controllers" Paragraph below for equipment supported on roofs.

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and

temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

D. Install fuses in control circuits if not factory installed.

E. Install heaters in thermal-overload relays. Select heaters based on actual nameplate full-load

amperes after motors are installed.

F. Install, connect, and fuse thermal-protector monitoring relays furnished with motor-driven

equipment.




G. Comply with NECA 1.

3.2 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring between VFCs and remote devices and facility's central-control system.

B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify VFCs, components, and control wiring. Comply with requirements for identification

specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide

warning signs.

2. Label each VFC with engraved nameplate.

3. Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device.



B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each VFC element, bus, component, connecting supply,

feeder, and control circuit.


C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Inspect VFC, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. Test and

adjust controllers, components, and equipment.


3. Verify that voltages at VFC locations are within 10 percent of motor nameplate rated

voltages. If outside this range for any motor, notify Construction Manager before starting

the motor(s).

4. Test each motor for proper phase rotation.

5. Perform tests according to the Inspection and Test Procedures for Adjustable Speed

Drives stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test

parameters.

6. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate

compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

7. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and

malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. VFCs will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.




E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies the VFC and

describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and

observations made after remedial action.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Program microprocessors for required operational sequences, status indications, alarms, event

recording, and display features. Clear events memory after final acceptance testing and prior to

Substantial Completion.

B. Set the taps on reduced-voltage autotransformer controllers.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, reprogram, and maintain VFCs.




FLUORESCENT INTERIOR LIGHTING 265116 - 1

SECTION 265116 - FLUORESCENT INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Interior fluorescent luminaires, lamps, and ballasts. 2. Luminaire supports.


A. Product Data: For each type of product, arranged by designation.



1.4 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of luminaires that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS


B. NRTL Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by an NRTL.

C. FM Global Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by FM Global.

D. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 1598.

E. Nominal Operating Voltage: 120 V ac or 277 V ac.




2.2 BALLASTS FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. General Requirements for Electronic Ballasts:

1. Comply with UL 935 and with ANSI C82.11. 2. Designed for type and quantity of lamps served. 3. Ballasts shall be designed for full light output unless another BF, dimmer, or bi-level

control is indicated. 4. Sound Rating: Class A. 5. THD Rating: Less than 20 percent. 6. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or better. 7. Operating Frequency: 42 kHz or higher.

2.3 BALLASTS FOR COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. Description: Electronic-programmed rapid-start type, complying with UL 935 and with ANSI C 82.11, designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated:

1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit. 2. Sound Rating: Class A. 3. THD Rating: Less than 20 percent. 4. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher. 5. BF: 0.95 or higher unless otherwise indicated. 6. Power Factor: 0.95 or higher. 7. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR 18, Ch. 1, Subpart C, for limitations on EMI and RFI

for nonconsumer equipment.

2.4 FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. T8 rapid-start lamps, rated 32-W maximum, nominal length of 48 inches, 2800 initial lumens (minimum), CRI of 75 (minimum), color temperature of 3500 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated.

B. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: Four-pin, CRI of 80 (minimum), color temperature of 3500 K, average rated life of 10,000 hours at three hours of operation per start unless otherwise indicated. 1. 42 W: T4, triple tube, rated 3200 initial lumens (minimum).

2.5 MATERIALS

A. Metal Parts:

1. Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. 2. Sheet metal components shall be steel unless otherwise indicated. 3. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.




B. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.

C. Housings:

1. Extruded-aluminum housing and heat sink. 2. Clear finish.

2.6 METAL FINISHES

A. Variations in finishes are unacceptable in the same piece. Variations in finishes of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and if they can be and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.7 LUMINAIRE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel and angle iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish shall match luminaire.

C. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage.

D. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.

E. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to luminaire, line voltage, and equipment with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install lamps in each luminaire.

D. Supports: Sized and rated for luminaire weight.

E. Wall-Mounted Luminaire Support:

1. Attached to structural members in walls. 2. Do not attach luminaires directly to gypsum board.




F. Suspended Luminaire Support:

1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging. 2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Luminaires: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. Support with

approved outlet box and accessories that hold stem and provide damping of luminaire oscillations. Support outlet box vertically to building structure using approved devices.

3. Do not use ceiling grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods to building structure.

G. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" and Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for wiring connections and wiring methods.

H. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."



1. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation.

2. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery power and retransfer to normal.

B. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass operation tests and inspections.



TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR TASK ORDER 1 JP MORGAN … · 2017-04-25 · technical specifications...

Documents

Transcript of TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR TASK ORDER 1 JP MORGAN … · 2017-04-25 · technical specifications...